units

faculty-pg-med

Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences

Monash University

Monash University Handbook 2015 Postgraduate - Units

This unit entry is for students who completed this unit in 2015 only. For students planning to study the unit, please refer to the unit indexes in the the current edition of the Handbook. If you have any queries contact the managing faculty for your course or area of study.

print version


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Victoria Manning

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction and overview to addiction as a concept and the factors that contribute to addiction. Consideration is given to the biological, developmental, sociocultural and environmental and factors that may contribute to the development of addicted behaviour. It will provide in-depth consideration of theories of addiction and resulting models, and will offer critical discourse around the use of the term. Similarly, measurement issues for addiction and dependence will be reviewed and critically analysed including the policy and media uses of 'addiction' and related terms. The topics addressed will also include aetiological issues and developmental issues around substance use and the onset of problems. The concluding topic will be around the experiential effects of substance use and the model of 'drug, set and setting' with implications for the development of a biopsychosocial model. The assessments are designed to assess the student's ability to summarise and critically review the evidence and underlying conceptual models of addiction and the extension of the term beyond substance use to include process addictions such as gambling. The unit will also examine the issue of stigma and its relationship to language and professional descriptions of addictive behaviours. Students completing the module should be able to summarise the key theoretical models of addiction, issues around the utilisation of the term and related issues of stigma and have developed the necessary critical conceptualisations of addiction theory to undertake further Masters level study in this area.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critique the premises and foundations for the biopsychosocial model of addiction in relation to alternative approaches such as the 'disease model' of addiction.
  2. Evaluate the biological and genetic bases of addictive behaviour for alcohol, illicit drugs and gambling.
  3. Consider and critique the rationale for developmental factors in the aetiology of addiction with reference to the research evidence base.
  4. Demonstrate use of the 'drug, set and setting' model in communicating substance effects on the individual.
  5. Synthesise the implications of the harm minimisation approach for understanding interventions and public policy.
  6. Present an argument based on theoretical and empirical literature regarding whether process addictions such as gambling should be grouped with substance addictions.
  7. Validate the contribution of neurobiology to our understanding of addiction.

Fieldwork

Students undertaking fieldwork activity for this unit will be informed of the need to obtain written permission from organisations/individuals they work with and any related issues of confidentiality and anonymity.

Assessment

Participation in online discussion (Hurdle)
Poster and brief presentation (20 minutes) (30%)
Review of evidence (3,500 words) (30%)
Essay (5,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5001 will be expected to contact the course coordinator regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Together with accessing online resources and listening to podcasts etc. students might expect to spend around 4 hours a week online and an additional 20 hours per week in independent study, including reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Behavioural studies, Psychology, Mental health, Addiction studies


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Naomi Crafti and Ms Shirley Gill

Synopsis

This unit explores trends in the use of particular substances and behavioural addictions, including historical precedents, in Australia and other countries. Addiction will be considered with particular reference to special population groups such as people with co-occurring mental health conditions, indigenous populations, youth, older adults, GLBTI groups and transcultural communities. The aim of the module will be to review social norms and expectations, and consider the bases for stigma and discrimination, and mechanisms for destigmatising drug use in these populations.

This unit will be taught through distance education and include topics such as:

  • History of alcohol, other drug use and behavioural addictions in Australia and Internationally
  • Social, political and economic factors that affect addiction
  • Addiction and views of addiction in relation to special population groups including
  • People with co-occurring mental health conditions (dual diagnosis)
  • Indigenous populations
  • Youth
  • Older Adults
  • GLBTI communities
  • Culturally and linguistically diverse communities

The materials for this unit will be provided by academic staff with specialist knowledge of their special population group(s) and include the most recent literature pertaining to these groups. Where possible, input (for example, case studies or stories) from the 'lived experience' of people representing these special population groups will be provided for students.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the major historical, political, economic and social factors that have impacted on our understanding of addiction in Australia and internationally, with reference to particular substances.
  2. Critically evaluate the empirical and theoretical literature across a range of socio-cultural perspectives of addiction.
  3. Communicate confidently with one another and academic experts in the field around socio-cultural issues in the addiction area.
  4. Conduct a thorough literature search on an approved area of independent study around a specific population and the impact of substance use on them.
  5. Write a systematic review of the literature in an approved area of independent study.
  6. Develop a structured interview schedule for an interview with a senior manager/clinician in a specialist AOD service and conduct the interview.
  7. Write a paper about a specialised AOD service or program, based on the interview material obtained in Learning Objective 6.

Fieldwork

Students enrolled in ASC5002 will be asked to make contact with an agency providing AOD or related services to a particular special population group. They will be asked to report on the activities of the organisation, including the results of a structured interview with at least one member of staff of that service. Students will need to obtain permission from the Director or CEO of that service and adhere to their requirements for confidentiality and/or anonymity.

Assessment

Participation in online discussion (Hurdle)
Critical book review (3,500 words) (30%)
Systematic review (3,500 words) (30%)
Fieldwork assignment (5,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5002 will be expected to contact the course co-ordinator regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Together with accessing online resources and listening to podcasts etc. students might expect to spend around 4 hours a week online and an additional 20 hours per week in independent study, including reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Behavioural studies, Psychology, Mental health, Addiction studies.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Belinda Lloyd and Prof Robin Room

Synopsis

This unit considers the socio-historical precedents of drug policy and the public health responses to drug use. It aims to compare and contrast the differences seen in policy and public health measures employed around the world and the results of these measures. Considered will be the role of supply and demand reduction around illicit drugs, and issues of price and availability for alcohol. It will assess the effectiveness of different forms of intervention at individual, group and population level, including prevention, harm minimisation and treatment, in managing problem use.

The unit will be taught through distance education and include topics such as:

  • Epidemiology and addiction
  • Policy responses to drug use
  • Population level prevention activities
  • The effectiveness of both primary and secondary public health measures in response to tobacco, alcohol, & other licit drugs
  • Illicit drugs
  • Binge eating
  • Gambling (& other process addictions)

The materials for this unit will be provided by academic staff with specialist knowledge of population based research in the addiction field and its translation to public health policy, and will include the most recent research in this area.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe and critically review approaches to epidemiological research in addictions, and public policy research in alcohol, illicit drugs and gambling.
  2. Communicate confidently with one another and academic experts in the field around specific issues in AOD-related epidemiology, public policy and public health.
  3. Critically evaluate epidemiological studies of addiction, including methodological approaches and generalisability of results.
  4. Conduct a thorough policy analysis on an approved area of independent study.
  5. Compare and contrast policy responses to drug use across drug types and across cultures.
  6. Explore the role and contribution of population based prevention activities compared with individual based prevention.
  7. Discuss the effectiveness of primary and secondary public health measures across different aspects of addiction.

Assessment

Participate in online discussion (Hurdle)
Article review: Review of evidence base (3,000 words) (30%)
Essay (3,000 words) (30%)
Policy analysis (4,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5003 will be expected to contact the course co-ordinator regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Together with accessing online resources and listening to podcasts etc. students might expect to spend around 4 hours a week online and an additional 20 hours per week in independent study, including reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Behavioural studies, Psychology, Mental health, Addiction studies


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Victoria Manning and Dr Shalini Arunogiri

Synopsis

This unit explores the range of evidence based treatment approaches to addiction from pharmacotherapy approaches such as withdrawal management to psychosocial interventions like Cognitive Behavioural Therapies, and social solutions such as peer support. Students will be provided with a rationale for alcohol, drug and gambling treatment and an overview of the effectiveness of a range of treatment interventions for alcohol, licit and illicit drugs and for gambling. They will consider the evidence about what works, for whom, in what situations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe and critique the biopsychosocial framework for AOD assessment and demonstrate how this can be applied to specialist populations.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the primary harm reduction strategies applied across the AOD sector and critique the role of such strategies.
  3. Critically evaluate the evidence for mutual aid and peer-based models of aftercare and recovery.
  4. Present a detailed outline of how multiple modes of treatment, including individual, residential and group treatments, can be effectively implemented in a service setting.
  5. Demonstrate a working knowledge of prominent cognitive oriented treatments including CBT, Mindfulness, ACT and MI.
  6. Review the primary pharmacotherapy applications, including withdrawal practises, in accordance with current Australian guidelines.
  7. Provide a critical review of Australian electronic treatment options for addictions.

Assessment

Participation in online discussion (Hurdle)
Literature review (3,000 words) (30%)
Critical essay (3,000 words) (30%)
Case study (5,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5004 will be expected to contact the course co-ordinator regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Together with accessing online resources and listening to podcasts etc. students might expect to spend around 4 hours a week online and an additional 20 hours per week in independent study, including reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Behavioural studies, Psychology, Mental health, Addiction studies.

Prerequisites

ASC5001 (only to apply to students enrolled in course 4519). Students enrolled in course 0099 do not need to complete ASC5001.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)A/Prof David Best

Synopsis

Recovery is a new area of research within the fields of addiction and mental health but one that has gained considerable policy and practice debate in the US, UK and Australia, and that is closely linked to the desistance movement in criminal justice. This unit explores what is known so far, what the key issues are in this area, and arguments around the definition of recovery, and the merits of a recovery approach, with its origins in positive psychology, mutual aid and the patient empowerment movement. The aim of the unit is to introduce the concepts and philosophy of recovery, the evidence base as it stands to date and the challenges it poses to current interpretations of existing models, in particular expert-driven treatment.
Students completing this unit should be able to argue for their own conceptualisation of recovery in light of available evidence, and apply their view of recovery to current policy and practice. They will also be able to critically appraise the risks and benefits of a recovery model and be able to outline its impact for addiction, criminal justice and mental health policy and practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Synthesise and critique the rationale and history of the recovery movement
  2. Synthesise the origins of the recovery movement across key countries (Australia, UK, US) and between addiction and mental health fields in each of these settings
  3. Critically review the definitions of recovery that have been advanced and summarise the strengths and weaknesses of each, from a practice and from a policy perspective
  4. Analyse the role of mutual aid and peer empowerment in the recovery movement and offer a critical analysis of the evidence for mutual aid groups, in particular 12-step groups
  5. Critically review the research methods and evidence models most appropriate within a recovery paradigm
  6. Critically appraise the appeal and risks of the recovery movement to policy makers and its potential role implications for specialist treatment service provision
  7. Summarise and critically appraise the strength of the evidence base for recovery as a viable paradigm and its implications for service delivery, and commissioning recovery-oriented systems of care.
  8. Summarise the innovations from the desistance movement in criminology and review its applicability to the addiction and mental health recovery movements.

Assessment

Participation in online discussion (Hurdle)
A critical appraisal (written) (2,500 words) (20%)
Essay (written) (3,500 words) (30%)
Long essay (written) (6,000 words) (50%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5007 will be expected to contact the unit coordinator(s) regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussions with fellow students and academic staff. Students should expect to spend around 24 hours a week of self-directed learning. This includes accessing online lectures, podcasts and resources as well as participating in forum discussions questions and quizzes via Moodle in addition to conducting offline independent study such as reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Victoria Manning

Synopsis

This unit provides an overview of the key considerations for clinicians, policy makers, researchers and service providers working with individuals who have a co-occurring disorders (i.e. alcohol or drug disorders that exist alongside mental health or physical health disorders). It will present the latest research findings on effective identification, management and treatment of this complex challenging population. Emphasis will be on disorders that commonly co-exist alongside drug and alcohol disorders, including alcohol and anxiety/depression, tobacco/alcohol and cardiovascular disease, acquired brain injury, intravenous drug use and infectious diseases as well as misuse of licit and illicit substances among individuals with severe mental illness, such as cannabis and schizophrenia. Whilst the unit encourages critical appraisal of the major theoretical concepts, it adopts a more applied approach including an introduction to the principles of case-formulation and the development of treatment plans.

Unit topics will include taxonomy and definitions of co-occurring disorders, prevalence and common co-occurring conditions, and will examine the multi-axial needs and unique challenges of working with this population. The module will look at conceptual models in relation to the aetiology of co-occurring disorders, methods of detection, screening and assessment as well as models of treatment and service delivery. The module will also examine the evidence for the effectiveness of population and service responses, as well as the role of motivational interviewing, cognitive behavioural therapy and mutual aid groups, in managing this population, including specifically-tailored psychosocial interventions. Evidence for medical management of this population will be explored, including pharmacological approaches.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically review the various terminologies used to describe individuals with co-occurring disorders
  2. Determine the prevalence of co-occurring disorders, common diagnostic combinations and related life complexities/issues and present an academically-informed argument outlining priority focus areas for treatment providers
  3. Critique the major theoretical models on the aetiology of co-occurring disorders and how these shape effective management and treatment
  4. Summarise and synthesise the unique challenges of working with this client group and evaluate evidence supporting their poorer prognosis relative to patients without co-occurring disorders based on empirical literature
  5. Critically review the evidence base on the application of mainstream/generic treatment approaches used in the addiction and mental health fields as well as psychosocial/pharmacological interventions tailored to the specific needs of this population
  6. Critically review and synthesise the evidence for the systems and treatment models (e.g. integrated care, outreach etc.) for co-occurring disorders and synthesise the evidence on their effectiveness
  7. Design an appropriate screening, assessment, referral and treatment plan for clients with complex multi-axial needs.

Assessment

Participation in online discussions (Hurdle)
Proposal for a co-occurring disorders screening battery (Written) (3,000 words) (25%)
Case study: Formulation and treatment plan (30 minutes oral presentation) (25%)
Essay (6,000 words) (50%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5008 will be expected to contact the unit coordinator(s) regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Students should expect to spend around 24 hours a week of self-directed learning. This includes accessing online lectures, podcasts and resources as well as participating in forum discussions questions and quizzes via Moodle in addition to conducting offline independent study such as reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Shirley Gill and Ms Bonnie Wells

Synopsis

This unit explores the biological, psychological and social developmental processes involved in substance use and other addictive behaviours, and examines the impact of addictions on children, adolescents and families. This unit also examines contemporary government and societal responses to youth substance use, and the evidence for a range of prevention, early intervention and treatment interventions.

The unit reviews child and adolescent biopsychosocial development followed by an overview of the prevalence and patterns of substance use and other addictive behaviours in these populations. This will form the basis for an exploration of substance use through the life course including emerging and older adulthood. It will also form the basis for understanding youth culture and youth subcultural influences on addictive behaviours, and the impact of parents' and young people's drug use on their families. There will an emphasis on youth-focused prevention, early intervention and treatment initiatives. In particular, the evidence for school-based interventions, family focused interventions and youth-focused AOD treatment services will be evaluated and critiqued. Finally, government policies relevant to youth issues including social media will be critically evaluated.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify and contextualise developmental factors that contribute to addictive behaviours in young people
  2. Explain youth substance abuse in terms of family and social contexts such as trauma and youth disadvantage
  3. Synthesise the available information on the impact of addictive behaviours on young people and families in order to demonstrate an understanding of the complexity of this issue
  4. Reflect critically on psychological and sociological theories relevant to key contemporary issues in youth addiction
  5. Evaluate and critique current responses to addiction including school-based interventions
  6. Compare and contrast contemporary models of addiction behaviours among young people through an analysis of national and international research
  7. Critically review the effectiveness of family-based interventions including Family Inclusive Practice and Parents Under Pressure
  8. Critically appraise a range of youth-focused AOD treatment services and key elements of youth-focused service delivery
  9. Critically review policy issues relevant to youth including those pertaining to social media.

Fieldwork

Students enrolled in ASC5009 will be asked to make contact with a school which provides a schools-based early intervention program. Alternatively, they may contact a youth specific agency which provides an early intervention or treatment program for addictive behaviours. Students will be asked to audit the program by interviewing key stakeholders at the school or agency such as the school principal or CEO, teacher or clinician and parents. They will then be asked to provide a written report of the program's activities and make recommendations. Students will need to obtain permission from the CEO or School Principal and adhere to their requirements for confidentiality and/or anonymity.

Assessment

Participation in online discussion (Hurdle)
Assignment: poster presentation with supporting notes (written) (2,000 words) (20%)
Essay: topic of choice in negotiation with the unit co-ordinator (written) (4,000 words) (30%)
Field assignment: audit of a youth specific early intervention or treatment program (written) (6,000 words) (50%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5009 will be expected to contact the unit coordinator(s) regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Students should expect to spend around 24 hours a week of self-directed learning. This includes accessing online lectures, podcasts and resources as well as participating in forum discussions questions and quizzes via Moodle in addition to conducting offline independent study such as reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitEastern Health Clinical School
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Naomi Crafti

Synopsis

This subject will define and present the latest research in the aetiology, maintenance, treatment and recovery from gambling and other process addictions. Process addictions involve dependence to certain mood-altering behaviours, such as gambling, eating disorders, sexual activity, the internet or gaming and shopping/hoarding behaviours. While the main focus of this subject will be on problem gambling, the generalisation of underlying principles to other problem behaviours will be described and discussed. Some of the areas to be covered in this unit include; definitions and features of behavioural addictions, prevention and treatment programs for behavioural addictions and public health issues.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Provide evidence for both the differences and similarities between behavioural or process addictions and substance disorders
  2. Contextualise issues regarding gambling addiction including precipitating and maintaining factors
  3. Provide an evidence based assessment, treatment and recovery program for a person with multiple or complex addiction issues
  4. Compare and contrast the special features associated with a range of behaviourally based addictive disorders
  5. Critically analyse the research, available treatments and subclinical problems associated with one or more behavioural addictions (in addition to gambling)
  6. Present an argument to potential legislators, based on the available evidence, to legislate for changes in the law that can contribute to behaviour change in an area of addiction identified in this unit.

Assessment

Participation in online discussions (Hurdle)
Participation in an online debate (written) (1,500 words) (15%)
Case study (written) (4,500 words) (30%)
Essay (written) (6,500 words) (55%)

Workload requirements

Students enrolling in ASC5010 will be expected to contact the unit coordinator(s) regularly throughout the semester and participate in online discussion with fellow students and academic staff. Students should expect to spend around 24 hours a week of self-directed learning. This includes accessing online lectures, podcasts and resources as well as participating in forum discussions questions and quizzes via Moodle in addition to conducting offline independent study such as reading, research and writing activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Addiction studies, Behavioural studies, Psychology, Mental health.


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project;
  2. Show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience;
  3. Have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project;
  2. Show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience;
  3. Have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences;
  2. Have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and 3. Have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study.

The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences;
  2. Have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and 3. Have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study.

The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Claire Palermo

Synopsis

Public health nutrition addresses the prevention and management of diseases at a population level. This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings of public health, health promotion and health education and focus on strategies that address the major nutrition related diseases and issues affecting the Australian population. The theories of program planning will be used to inform the basis of planning, implementing and evaluating public health nutrition interventions across a continuum of strategies and these strategies critiqued using the literature and policy analysis and evaluative frameworks.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, the student should be able to:

  1. Discuss opportunities for beneficial change to the Australian food supply
  2. Explain how the Australian health system meets the needs of the general population and population sub-groups
  3. Explain how the Australian health system is regulated by state and government agencies and discuss channels for change
  4. Evaluate how public health policy may influence food consumption and nutritional status and review its relevance to chronic disease management in populations
  5. Explain the prevention paradox and its application to chronic disease management at a population level
  6. Discuss the socio-environmental/ecological approach to population nutrition issues
  7. Define and differentiate public health and public health nutrition
  8. Explain the main theoretical bases of health education and health promotion
  9. Apply the social, environmental, economic and political determinants of nutrition status to a priority public health nutrition area
  10. Critique and compare several scientific papers in the field of nutrition and public health findings from evidence based research to dietetic practice
  11. Analyse the major disease-related morbidity and mortality issues in Australia
  12. Indicate the biological and social links between diet and disease
  13. Identify priority public health nutrition issues in Australia and the frameworks that support them
  14. Plan, implement and evaluate a group education program.
  15. Design an evaluation strategy for an intervention to improve population health
  16. Demonstrate media advocacy skills around a nutrition issue.

Assessment

Assignments (60%)
Exam (40%)

Workload requirements

1 week intensive plus 1 x 3 hour classroom sessions for 10 weeks of semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

BND5200 and BND4111


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jill Gray

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the essential clinical practice skills required for adequate performance as a clinician in a community mental health setting. The unit addresses psychiatric assessment, the use of a structured instrument (e.g. HONOS) and specific assessment issues that arise in different clinical scenarios. The unit also covers case management principles and practical issues in mental health delivery with an emphasis on some special focus areas. The unit also addresses the theoretical framework and management of schizophrenia and related disorders, affective disorders, anxiety disorders, substance abuse disorders and personality disorders.

Content includes:

  • General issues in case management
  • Practical case management
  • Specific focus areas for case management
  • Assessment - general issues
  • A structured assessment instrument as a guide to essential skills - the 'Health of the Nation Outcome Scale' (HoNOS)
  • Assessment - specific issues
  • Characterisation, recognition and outcome of schizophrenia and related disorders
  • Responding to the needs of people with schizophrenia and related disorders
  • Personality disorders
  • Affective disorders
  • Anxiety disorders
  • Substance-related and addictive disorders.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Complete an adequate assessment of a patient with a psychiatric syndrome.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the essential skills in using a structured instrument as an assessment tool e.g. HoNOS
  3. Identify and describe the principles and features of case management in mental health.
  4. Utilise the principles in clinical practice as demonstrated by experience.
  5. Have developed sufficient knowledge about various psychiatric syndromes and their management to be utilised in clinical practice.
  6. Critically appraise recent developments relevant to this unit.

Assessment

Hurdle requirement: Participation in a minimum of 5 Moodle discussions
Essay (3,500 words) (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (1,750 words) (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (10%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jill Gray

Synopsis

This unit explores historical, social and political factors influencing the evolution of mental health services in Australia and the major shifts over time in the treatment and care of people with a mental illness. The unit begins with an examination of the theoretical perspectives, influences and trends in mental health care, and moves to a focus on the Australian mental health care system and how it responds to the needs of the Australian community.

Two particular areas of need and experience are considered, those of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people and those of people from culturally and linguistically diverse backgrounds.

The mental health service system in different states and territories is examined and the emerging participation of primary care services in delivering mental health care. The unit concludes with a consideration of the mental health service system's responsibility and response with regard to the human rights of people with mental illness.

Contents include:

  • History of mental illness and its care - an overview.
  • Social power and mental illness.
  • Mental illness - responses from the community.
  • The global perspective.
  • Mental health policy in Australia.
  • Mental Disorder in Australia.
  • The particular needs of indigenous peoples.
  • The particular needs of people from culturally and linguistically diverse backgrounds.
  • Services in the specific states and territories.
  • Mental health service reform - the case of Victoria.
  • A rights-based model of mental health practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify major contextual influences on mental health service delivery in Australia
  2. Demonstrate a knowledge of the major components of the community-based framework of mental health services in Australia
  3. Integrate their knowledge of policy frameworks and epidemiology with the design of service systems in mental health services
  4. Demonstrate a knowledge of the range of perspectives of stakeholders actively engaged in mental health care delivery
  5. Identify the special needs of people from an indigenous and culturally diverse backgrounds
  6. Critically appraise the reform of mental health service delivery in Australia through the case study of Victoria.

Assessment

Hurdle requirement: Participation in a minimum of 5 x Moodle discussions
Essay (3,500 words) (60%)
Applied learning exercise (1,750 words) (30%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (10%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jill Gray

Synopsis

The unit will provide a basic understanding of scientific research in mental health and the methods of evaluation of the practice. There will be topics on medical and biopsychosocial models, psychodynamic principles, cognitive-behavioural models, and role of prevention in mental health. The unit also covers the process involved in multi-disciplinary team functioning, role of other stakeholders, consumers and the function of various disciplines. There will be an emphasis on understanding the mental health care system and various service models and the subject will conclude with an integration of all topics covered in the context of community mental health service. Content includes:

  • Scientific Research in Mental Health.
  • Evaluation in mental health practice.
  • The medical and biopsychosocial models.
  • Psychodynamic thinking.
  • Cognitive behavioural models.
  • Prevention and stress- diathesis models.
  • Function
  • Understanding teams: Multidisciplinary Teamwork.
  • Understanding other participants in the system: perspectives from different stakeholders.
  • Understanding mental health care systems; model services.
  • The perspective of the consumer.
  • Summary and integration.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate a basic understanding of scientific research and evaluation methods in mental health.
  2. Have achieved sufficient knowledge base on medical and biopsychosocial models, psychodynamic models, cognitive-behavioural models and stress-diathesis models.
  3. Have a functional knowledge of multi-disciplinary teamwork and processes and critically appraise the perspective of other stakeholders.
  4. Be able to describe various mental health care systems and models of service.
  5. Be able to integrate all concepts in the mental health practice with the systems and model of service delivery.

Assessment

Essay (3,500 words) (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (1,750 words) (30%)
On-Campus Workshop / Alternative Assessment (10%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jill Gray

Synopsis

This unit considers some of the broad issues that are significant in mental health and wellbeing and community mental health practice. The unit will take us beyond the individual explanations of health and ill health to an examination of some of the broad understandings about the courses of mental ill health and the strategies required to improve mental health. We examine the concept of need in relation to populations and take a practical approach to the process of assessing the mental health needs of populations and groups. Two major community intervention strategies to address mental health needs are examined. The role of consumer participation and collaboration and the notion of citizenship are explored in some detail. The unit concludes with a discussion of the skill base required for community mental health practice.

Contents include:

  • The policy context of community mental health practice;
  • Practice Paradigms;
  • Community as a place for mental health practice;
  • The concept of need;
  • Assessing mental health needs;
  • Particular groups and the iInterpretation of need;
  • Community based intervention models and strategies;
  • Power, participation and collaboration;
  • Consumers and citizenship.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe various practice paradigms and their place in community mental health practice;
  2. Critically analyse the concept of need and competently do a need assessment and develop community intervention models;
  3. Identify and discuss the skills needed for community mental health practice;
  4. Demonstrate a knowledge of the concepts of empowerment, consumer participation and collaborative practices; and
  5. Develop a consumer focused understanding of mental health needs.

Assessment

Hurdle requirement: Participation in a minimum of 5 Moodle discussions
Essay (3,500 words) (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (1,750 words) (30%)
On-Campus Workshop / Alternate Assessment (10%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Chris Plakiotis

Synopsis

This unit encompasses a broad range of topics within the area of aged mental health, including depression, anxiety, dementia, delirium, delusional disorders as well as other conditions. The central elements to psychiatric assessment are covered including presentation and history taking, symptom recognition, cognitive and neuropsychological testing as well as treatment and management principles. Various case scenarios provide examples of key issues that can arise, the course of an illness as well as the application of appropriate therapeutic strategies. This unit also draws attention to aspects of successful ageing, as well as indigenous mental health, service delivery, psychopharmacology and protection issues surrounding the vulnerable elderly person.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate a basic understading of aged mental health;
  2. Demonstrate a knowledge of recent developments in this area;
  3. Identify service delivery, examining treatments and management issues in the mental health of the elderly; and
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of research findings in the literature.

Assessment

Participation in a minimum of 5 x Moodle discussions (Hurdle)
Essay (3,000 words) (45%)
Applied learning exercise (3,000 words) (45%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (10%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on campus workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Shiva Vasi

Synopsis

The effects of cultural background on the definitions of mental illnesses and the implications of cultural and community structures for the delivery of mental health services. Major areas covered include adaptation and acculturation, characteristics of Aboriginal and ethnic communities in Australia, racism and prejudice, the mental health of Aboriginal and immigrant communities in Australia, cultural assumptions of standard methods of assessment and treatment, explanatory models of illness, State mental health policy, psychiatric service utilisation, and gaps in current service provision.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Develop a greater sensitivity to the impact of trauma, migration and settlement on mental health;
  2. Explore definitions of mental illness across cultures and the continuing debate concerning differing conceptions of mental illness;
  3. Gain an understanding of the cultural factors in assessment and treatment approaches;
  4. Gain knowledge of the major national and Victorian policy approaches to providing mental health services to Aboriginal and ethnic communities; and
  5. Develop an understanding of current gaps in service provision to Aboriginal and ethnic communities in preparation for participation in policy development, service delivery and evaluation.

Assessment

Essay (3,000 words) (50%)
Applied Learning Exercises (1,500 words) (25%)
On-campus Workshop / Alternative Assessment (10%)
Moodle participation and contribution (15%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Emma Toone

Synopsis

This unit aims to enable students to have a familiarity with and a knowledge of some of the theories on which the understanding of child development and the practice of child psychotherapy are based. It is designed to give students knowledge of human development from three theoretical perspectives and thereby enable them to have a theoretical basis for their practice of observation, assessment and case management. The theoretical perspectives to be studied in this unit will be those of Sigmund Freud, Anna Freud and John Bowlby.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. display an understanding and knowledge of the theories of Sigmund Freud, Anna Freud and John Bowlby relevant to child development,
  2. demonstrate knowledge of the specific similarities and differences between the three theorists and their theories,
  3. understand the different phases of child development,
  4. demonstrate an ability to integrate the theories and apply them to clinical material,
  5. display an ability to compare and contrast the theories.

Assessment

Written assignment (900 words) (15%)
Written assignment (1,800 words) (30%)
Essay (2,100 words) (35%)
Attendance at On-campus workshop / Alternative Assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jennifer Re

Synopsis

This unit will explore the history, theory and principles of Developmental Observation and its relevance to clinical and consultative work with children and adolescents. There will be a consideration of the nature of the links between observation and the developmental theories. Students will be able to explore these areas both through the context of the course work and prescribed observations of children in their naturalistic settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have an understanding and knowledge of the history, theory and principles of Developmental Observation;
  2. recognise the relevance that observation skills have to the understanding of children and adolescents and therapeutic and consultative work;
  3. understand the nature of links between observation and the developmental theories; and
  4. have an appreciation of how to recognise and understand their own responses to what is observed and the use of these in their work.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (20%)
Written assignment 2 (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marita Lowry

Synopsis

This unit will consider the theories of Donald Winnicott and Melanie Klein and their relevance to understanding the psychological development of children and adolescents in terms of both healthy development and the development of psychopathology. The unit will also examine the relevance of these theories to working therapeutically with children and adolescents.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. display an understanding and knowledge of the theories of Donald Winnicott and Melanie Klein relevant to child development;
  2. to demonstrate the relevance of these theories to the psychological development of children and adolescents in terms of both healthy development and the development of psychopathology;
  3. to understand the historical context in which these theorists sit and their contribution to the field of understanding and working with children and adolescents;
  4. demonstrate knowledge of the specific similarities and differences between these theorists and their theories; and
  5. to examine these theoretical concepts by the use of case examples as illustrations.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%)
Journal 1 (20%)
Journal 2 (20%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

CPS5001 (DCP0001).


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Toni Heron

Synopsis

This unit is designed to present an introduction to the conceptual framework and guidelines for the methodology of the psycho-dynamic assessment of psychological disturbance in children and adolescents. It will introduce students to disturbances in normal psychological development and the clinical concepts of assessment that are based on psychodynamic and developmental principles.
It will consider interviewing and observational methods with children and adolescents that enable psychological data to be collected and understood. It will also demonstrate the complex task of integrating information from several different sources to provide a diagnostic assessment of the individual nature and degree of disturbance presented, and the extent to which that interferes with the child's normal development and functioning.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand theoretical and clinical concepts relevant to psychodynamic and developmental assessment of children and adolescents;
  2. Have an understanding of the possible meaning of the child's/adolescent's behaviour;
  3. Recognise the process occurring between child and worker and the data this provides;
  4. Recognise that assessment is a process that will provide a psychodynamic and developmental diagnostic formulation; and
  5. Explore optimal case management where treatment options and timing are presented in light of the diagnostic formulation, the available professional and clinical resources, and the child/adolescent's context. This will include the indications or contra-indications for child psychotherapy and other treatment options.

Assessment

Report A (10%)
Report B (10%)
Report C (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-campus Workshop / Alternative Assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.

Prerequisites

CPS5001 (DCP0001) and CPS5002 (DCP0002).


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Alexis Aytekin

Synopsis

This unit will outline the principles of Child Psychotherapy from a developmental and psychoanalytic perspective. It will address the context and boundaries of therapy and explore ways the child communicates in therapy. It will also address issues of technique including the therapeutic use of the relationship between the child and the psychotherapist being the central tool in ongoing clinical work; the process of observing, hearing and interpretation in psychotherapy; issues of termination: and the structure, significance and dynamics of this process.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to have an understanding and knowledge of:

  1. the means by which the child communicates in therapy e.g. through play, speech and other behaviours;
  2. the significance and meaning of the way the child relates to the therapist i.e. an understanding of the concepts of transference (the way the child perceives and relates to the therapist) and countertransference (the way therapist reacts to the child) and the possible meanings of these concepts and their importance;
  3. the use of interpretation in therapy - timing content and intention;
  4. the significance and importance of boundaries and structure provided by the therapist;
  5. termination - the process of bringing the therapy to a conclusion; and
  6. the impact of working with the disturbed child including the disturbed child in special situations - understanding this in a way which furthers understanding of the child and the therapeutic process.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (20%)
Written assignment 2 (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ros Webb

Synopsis

This unit will present a psychodynamic framework for adolescent developmental tasks, as well as associated problems and disturbances. It will also look at both general and phase specific principles and issues in psychotherapy with adolescents for the professionals as well as for the adolescents themselves.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Have a knowledge of a psychodynamic theoretical understanding of adolescent development, tasks and issues;
  2. Have some understanding of how various levels of problems and disturbances can arise during adolescence;
  3. understand basic principles in assessment for therapy with adolescents;
  4. examine how adolescents may present in therapy;
  5. understand basic issues which arise in working with adolescents;
  6. explore the impact of working with adolescents on professionals and the importance of the process between professional and adolescent;
  7. explore termination issues in working with adolescents; and
  8. explore specific issues and principles to consider for inpatient work with adolescents.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (20%)
Written assignment 2 (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marell Lynch

Synopsis

This unit is designed to present an introduction to the theoretical principles underlying the practice of short-term psychodynamic psychotherapy and crisis work. Areas covered will include assessment and treatment issues.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have an understanding of the historical development of short-term therapy;
  2. have an understanding of the models and central issues of short-term, brief and crisis therapy;
  3. understand the application of short-term, brief and crisis therapy to the age and developmental stage of the particular child or adolescent;
  4. have an understanding of the use of transference and counter-transference and interpretation in this work through detailed case examples;
  5. understand the importance of the development of skills through training prior to undertaking this work; and
  6. reflect upon the application of psychoanalytic understanding to the variety of needs present in child and adolescent community mental health auspices.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (40%)
Written assignment 2 (40%)
On-campus Workshop / Alternative Assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Nada Lane

Synopsis

This unit will examine an understanding of the role of parents in their child's development and different ways of working with parents from a psychodynamic and developmental perspective. Consideration will be made of the following ways of working with parents and the similarities and difference in the models: parent therapy; parent and child work combined; short-term and crisis work with parents; parent counselling; parent education; marital therapy/counselling; individual therapy/counselling.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand theoretical and clinical concepts of working with parents;
  2. have an understanding of the importance of parents' own development as it may affect their role as parents;
  3. explore possible ways of working with parents as relevant to their particular needs and those of their child/children; and
  4. understand the difficulties that may be experienced by the therapist when working with parents.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (15%)
Written assignment 2 (25%)
Essay (40%)
On-campus workshop / Alternative assessment (20%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Rory Wolfe

Synopsis

Confounding and effect modification, logistic regression, conditional logistic regression for matched case-control studies, linear regression, diagnostics to assess model fit, model estimation methods, Poisson regression for rates, Stata statistical software.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will have:

  1. learnt regression methods as applied to epidemiological data.
  2. gained an understanding of regression methods in terms of the epidemiological concepts of confounding and effect modification.
  3. the skills to apply regression methods to example datasets using statistical software on a laptop computer.
  4. gained an understanding and the skills to interpret regression methods in published articles on epidemiological research studies.

Assessment

Two written assignments (50% each).

Workload requirements

2 x 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Robert Hall

Synopsis

Supervised practical placement in University Departments and Centres, hospitals, affiliated research Institutes, community health services, non-government organisations or the Dept of Human Services. Giving students the opportunity to interact with practising public health professionals. Students are co-supervised by a member of the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences academic staff.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate a thorough understanding of quantative research methods in public health;
  2. design, develop and present an original research protocol;
  3. prepare an application for approval by an Ethics Committee;
  4. design and outline methods for validating a questionnaire suitable for data entry; and
  5. write a paper suitable for publication in a peer reviewed journal.

Assessment

Written report 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPH6001 and DPH6002


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jon-Paul Cacioli

Synopsis

Psychopathology Part I and II are designed to impart students with a working knowledge of mental disorders. The units also aim to equip students with the clinical skills required to assess, formulate and diagnose clients presenting with a variety of clinical conditions.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Conduct a clinical interview with a client, incorporating a mental status examination.
  2. Complete a thorough and accurate written evaluation of a client.
  3. Be familiar with major classes of psychiatric illness.
  4. Feel competent in the formulation and diagnosis of a wide variety of psychiatric problems.
  5. Effectively and appropriately contribute to case discussions regarding formulation and diagnoses and reflect upon and evaluate own and others' assessment/clinical interviewing skills

Assessment

Satisfactory Class Participation 10%
Mental Status Examination 1 (1000 words) 10%
Mental Status Examination 2 (1000 words) 10%
Psychological Report (1500 words) 30%
End of semester test 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rene Stolwyk

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to general principles of psychological assessment across the lifespan, including ethical and cultural issues, reliability and validity, sensitivity and specificity, error types and bias prevention, statistical and clinical significance, and the effect of base rates. They will learn how to apply behavioural assessment techniques. They will be exposed to a range of tests and scales assessing important aspects of cognitive and emotional functioning and they will learn the background theory of these measures, as well as how to administer, score and interpret them. They will learn how to integrate and interpret psychological assessment results and communicate this information in both written and oral form.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. Understand the principles and processes of psychological, behavioural, and personality measurement and their application;
  2. Have become proficient in the administration, scoring, interpretation and integration of assessment results utilising some of the most commonly used psychological tests, including cognitive and personality techniques; and
  3. Have developed skills in behavioural assessment including development, implementation, and evaluation of behavioural assessments.
  4. Show competency in evaluating psychometric instruments for research purposes and in screening referrals for psychometric assessment, selecting appropriate tests, integrating results and providing oral and written communication of results to interested parties.

Assessment

Satisfactory attendance and participation are required to pass the unit.
Psychometric Measure Evaluation (20%)
Behavioural Assessment (30%)
WAIS-IV, WMS-IV & MMP1-2 Administration (Hurdle)
WAIS-IV OSCE Examination (Hurdle)
Psychological report (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Katrina Simpson

Synopsis

This unit will equip students with the necessary skills to undertake research. Nonetheless, the primary motivation for this course concerns future employment. Research design and analysis are critical components of both academic and professional psychology.

Outcomes

This unit equips students with the necessary skills they need to design research and analyse data for their thesis, placements, and employment. After completing this unit successfully, students should be able to undertake a comprehensive program evaluation as well as a single subject design, and complete their thesis, confidently, competently, and independently.

Specifically, students should be able to:

  • Understand and design the main phases of the key research approaches, including program evaluations, single subject designs, experiments, quasi-experiments, and qualitative projects;
  • Accommodate the considerations and complications of these approaches, such as sampling biases, spurious variables, common method variance, suppressors, non-recursive relationships, confounds, consequential validity, asymmetric transfer, mediators, moderators, stakeholder needs, economic evaluation, family wise errors, power, autocorrelation, and nonlinear dynamics;
  • Apply multivariate statistics techniques to address some of these complications, such as ANCOVA, discriminant function analysis, logistic regression analysis, multiple regression analysis, canonical correlation, and factor analysis;
  • Recognize the fundamental principles of more advanced concepts, which can then be explored through additional reading, including HLM, grounded theory, survival analyses, meta-analyses, catastrophe theory, signal detection theory, ARIMA, interim designs, Bayesian theory, and structural equation modelling;
  • Develop creative and insightful methods to maximise the utility of research; and
  • Justify and report the procedures and techniques that were utilised.

Assessment

The assessment will comprise two components: a journal (60%) and a multiple-choice examination (40%).

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Daffern

Synopsis

A range of topics associated with the provision of psychological services, including basic counselling skills, review of relevant legislation and ethical/professional standards, and developing ethically and culturally sensitive psychological practice. This unit comprises a two day workshop, held prior to the commencement of formal course-work and seminars. Material will be presented in various formats including didactic teaching, small group exercises and role plays. The workshop and seminars will be supplemented by readings and handouts.

Outcomes

The primary aim in this unit is to:

  1. Equip students with knowledge of the laws and ethical principles which govern research and professional practice in psychology and understand how to apply their knowledge of relevant legislation and codes of professional conduct to such issues as confidentiality, informed consent, freedom of information, intra and inter professional relationships, responsibilities, and professional conduct.
  2. Have an understanding of the intercultural and ethnic issues that impact on their practice.

Assessment

Self Assessment (Hurdle)
Examination (80%)
Class presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kate Taylor

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to ensure that students are familiar with disorders that occur during childhood and adolescence. Diagnosis and classification, aetiology of the major disorders occurring in childhood and adolescence, as well as the major forms of treatment and management based on recent research will be covered. Various disorders will be examined including autism, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, anxiety disorders, and depression. Students will be expected to develop competence in the application of diagnostic classification systems to children but also will be encouraged to critically evaluate such systems and be aware of their limitations in paediatric populations. A component of this unit will be devoted to formal psychological, especially cognitive, assessment of children and adolescents. Although the major focus of this unit will be on the identification and assessment of disorders and assessment of cognitive abilities in children, the use of various treatment modalities with children, adolescents, and their families will also be discussed with an emphasis on cognitive behavioural approaches. The final sessions of this unit will focus on clinical developmental issues later in life.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand the diagnosis, classification, and aetiology of the major disorders occurring in childhood and adolescence;
  2. Understand the principles of interviewing and assessing children and adolescents;
  3. Be competent in the administration of the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for

Children (WISC-IV);

  1. Be familiar with the major forms of treatment and management based;
  2. Be competent in writing a clinical case formulation for a child presenting with a clinical developmental disorder; and
  3. Understand clinical developmental issues in later life using a biopsychosocial frame-work.

Assessment

WISC-IV assessment. (20%).
a brief report (1000 words) 30%
Examination 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Students will develop an understanding of the role of the Clinical Neuropsychologist and of legal and ethical principles governing research and professional practice in psychology. Students will review relevant legislation and ethical/professional standards and develop ethically and culturally sensitive psychological practices. They will learn how to work with other professionals and develop the skills to conduct a clinical interview, take a case history, and write a report. Students will observe at least one neuropsychological assessment.

Outcomes

The primary aim in this unit is to equip students with the basic skills necessary for their entrance into the profession of Clinical Neuropsychology. When students have completed this unit they will:

  1. Be familiar with the legal and ethical principles which govern research and professional practice in psychology and understand how to apply their knowledge of relevant legislation and codes of professional conduct to such issues as confidentiality, informed consent, freedom of information, intra and inter professional relationships, responsibilities, and professional conduct;
  2. Be able to define the professional role/s of the Clinical Neuropsychologist;
  3. Understand the relationship between the Clinical Neuropsychologist and other health professionals;
  4. Have an understanding of the importance of teamwork and the skills necessary to implement this understanding;
  5. Have acquired the practical skills necessary to conduct a clinical interview, develop an understanding of the history preceding the development of a neuropsychological problem and write a comprehensive case report; and
  6. Have an understanding of the intercultural and ethnic issues that impact on neuropsychological practice.

Assessment

Satisfactory attendance and participation are required to pass the unit.
Assessment tasks include:
A history-taking exercise (Hurdle Requirement);
A case report (Hurdle Requirement);
Examination (80%)
Class presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Russell Conduit and Professor Julie Stout

Synopsis

This subject reviews the neuroanatomy of the human brain and spinal cord at the level of detail required by the practicing clinical neuropsychologist. Emphasis is placed on structure-function relationships, and how different brain regions interact to regulate complex cognitive skills. Students also learn about the clinical neurological examination and neuroimaging, with an emphasis placed on what these methods allow us to infer regarding underlying neuroanatomy and lesions. In addition, students will learn about neurogenetics, and how genetic disorders link to variations in neuroanatomy that underpin behavioural manifestations of these neurogenetic disorders. Students learn:

  1. to identify the major features of the brain and spinal cord, using prosected specimens, models and cross-sectional images
  2. to understand the structural and functional relationships between these features
  3. to be able to apply this knowledge to the clinical situation.

Outcomes

At the completion of the subject, students should

  1. Identify the major components of pathways associated with smell, vision, hearing, touch, balance, taste, movement, memory, emotion, and language.
  2. Be familiar with the external anatomy of the brain, to be able to name and identify each part and describe its contribution to behavioural and cognitive function.
  3. Be able to identify the main subcortical nuclei and their functions.
  4. Be able to identify the fibre tracts in the brain and spinal cord and describe their function.
  5. Be able to identify each major blood vessel in the brain and describe the functional consequences of infarction for each vessel.
  6. Be fluent in the terminology used to navigate the brain and describe brain structures.
  7. Be familiar with neurogenetic disorders and their manifestation in brain anatomy.
  8. Be knowledgeable about the clinical neurological examination and how neurologists denote and interpret their findings.
  9. Be familiar with the most common forms of imaging relevant to clinical neurology and neuropsychology.
  10. Have a view of how cognition and behaviour are implemented in neural tissues from the cellular to systems levels of analysis.

Assessment

Weekly assignments 80% final assessment 20%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jon-Paul Cacioli

Synopsis

Psychopathology Part I and II are designed to impart students with a working knowledge of mental disorders. The units also aim to equip students with the clinical skills required to assess, formulate and diagnose clients presenting with a variety of clinical conditions. In addition, the unit will include an introduction to drug classifications; legal control of drug use; pharmacokinetics; variability in response to drugs;chemical transmission and receptors.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Conduct a psychiatric interview with a client;

incorporating a mental status examination;

  1. Complete a thorough and accurate written evaluation of a client; and
  2. Be familiar with major classes of psychiatric illness.
  3. Understand the basic concepts of psychopharmacology with particular reference to recent advances in the fields of psychiatric medication, cognitive enhancers and neuroprotective agents, and substance abuse; and
  4. Effectively and appropriately contribute to case analyses regarding formulation and diagnoses and reflect upon and evaluate own and others' assessment/clinical interviewing skills

Assessment

Class Participation - Hurdle requirement
Psychiatric History Report (1500 words) - 15%
Clinical Case Report (3000 words) - 25%
Test - 20%
Examination - 20%
Essay (2000 words) - 20%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Each session will include both lecture and experiential components. Experiential components will include group discussion, viewing and discussion of video tapes, skills practice with other group members, feedback/discussion of taped practice sessions, and providing resources for use in providing CBT therapy.

Outcomes

Students completing the initial sessions of this unit should have a basic understanding of a range of different schools of therapy and the historical, scientific and social contexts surrounding their development and practice. Students should be conversant with the specific assumptions, concepts and techniques of the major schools of therapy and have some knowledge of relevant outcome literature. In addition, students should have a thorough understanding of the processes common to all forms of intervention. By the end of the unit, students should have proficiency in the particular skills of behavioural and cognitive-behavioural therapies and their application to a range of clinical problems. Students will be expected to be competent in selecting interventions for individuals and monitoring the progress of their application.

Assessment

Presentation 1 (Hurdle)
Audiotape (Hurdle)
Class Participation (Hurdle)
Quiz (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Julie Stout

Synopsis

Neuropsychological disorders will be considered from perspectives taken in cognitive psychology and cognitive neuropsychology. In particular, there will be an emphasis on establishing frameworks for conceptualising neuropsychological features of neurological and psychiatric conditions, and frameworks for approaching clinical assessment and rehabilitation.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Have knowledge of neural bases of attention, language, visuospatial functions, memory, executive functions, emotion processing, and complex adaptive behaviours, in both in normality and pathology;
  2. Understand the current theoretical models proposed to account for neuropsychological impairments.

Assessment

2 x assignments (10% each)
4 x assignments (15% each)
Visual-graphic assignment (20%)
Oral presentation (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will observe oral case presentations given by experienced clinicians and other students. They will be exposed to a variety of different presentation styles designed to cater for specific audiences and will learn to evaluate case material in an objective and critical manner. They will participate in discussions of clinical issues and recent developments in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology and will be challenged to remain informed about such developments and issues.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with an opportunity to observe and participate in oral presentations of case material and other professional issues at the same time as they commence their first clinical placement.

When students have completed the unit they will:

  1. be familiar with the format of oral presentations suitable for a number of different audiences, ranging from the medico-legal forum and other colleagues to lay persons;
  2. participate confidently in case discussions;
  3. be informed about current issues in the field of clinical neuropsychology;
  4. have developed sufficient rapport with staff members to seek assistance when it is required during later years of the course; and
  5. have developed their ability to read and evaluate journal papers relevant to clinical neuropsychology.

Assessment

Class Contribution 25%
Oral Presentation 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rene Stolwyk

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to the scientist-practitioner model of neuropsychology incorporating the hypothesis testing approach to assessment. Students will be exposed to a number of neuropsychological tests and scales, designed to assess aspects of cognitive, behavioural and emotional functioning. They will learn how to select which tests are most appropriate in specific clinical situations and how to administer, score and interpret each measure. The skills required to document the assessment results will be imparted. Issues in assessing people from other cultural and linguistic backgrounds will also be discussed. On a broader level, students will be taught to be critical consumers of the neuropsychological literature.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is theoretical and practical, being to introduce students to an overarching approach to neuropsychological assessment and case formulation, as well as test selection, administration, scoring and interpretation.

At the conclusion of this unit students will:

  1. Be able to critically evaluate a wide range of neuropsychological tests and scales designed to assess numerous aspects of cognitive, behavioural and emotional functioning.
  2. Be able to plan neuropsychological assessments, including both qualitative and quantitative methods, appropriate to specific clinical contexts and referrals (eg; across the lifespan, cross-cultural assessment etc.).
  3. Be able to interpret and integrate information obtained during neuropsychological assessment to formulate a comprehensive analysis of an individual's neuropsychological function.
  4. To be able to disseminate findings of a neuropsychological assessment across a range of formats (reports, verbal feedback) and audiences (other clinicians, clients, family).

Assessment

Take Home excersise 50%
Oral Presentation 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

In this unit students will become familiar with a number of neuropsychological syndromes. Sessions will feature guest lecturers who are experts in their fields.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with the knowledge required to recognise, describe and assess a number of common neuropsychological syndromes.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. be able to provide a verbal description of the neuropsychological deficits associated with common inherited and acquired neurpsychological disorders;
  2. be able to recognise and differentiate between common syndromes on the basis of the patient's history, presentation and assessment results;
  3. feel confident in planning and executing a formal assessment of a patient presenting with each syndrome; and
  4. be aware of psychosocial and treatment issues associated with each disorder.

Assessment

Weekly take-home assessment (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stefan Luebbers and Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The DPsych program has established a network of placements in a variety of settings within which students can receive appropriate practica training. The practica coordinator and staff at the agency arrange the placements. Student preferences, practica availability and student training needs are taken account of in this process. Which agency and supervisor, number of days for the practica and also the commencement and completion dates are specified. Students are not permitted to negotiate their own practica or change any practica arrangements without first obtaining approval from the University Practica Coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the initial practicum, students will be:

  1. expected to have gained an appreciation of the professional role a psychologist in practice and to have an understanding of the delivery of a service to patients, clients and other interested parties;
  2. to have acquired an understanding of the context of the delivery of the service and the particular function it serves to the individual and the community at large;
  3. to have developed an appreciation of the competing demands on service delivery and the range of issues which impact on service delivery;
  4. expected to become proficient in establishing rapport with patients, administering and scoring the commonly used intellectual, diagnostic and personality tests, integrating the results and providing appropriate oral and written reports;
  5. expected to have developed an understanding of the functioning of a multi-disciplinary team and the role of its various members.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Participation in OSCE (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Students completing the unit will have further developed their skills in therapeutic techniques and delivery of treatment in CBT and other integrative treatments for treatment of a variety of disorders, acquire the knowledge and skills to design focused treatment plans, appropriately implement treatment as required by a placement setting under supervision, report intervention outcomes appropriately, and have an understanding of the underlying theories of such interventions.

Outcomes

Students completing the unit should be conversant with the specific assumpions, concepts and techniques of the major schools of therapy and have some knowledge of relevant outcome literature. In addition, students should have a thorough understanding of the process common to all forms of intervention. By the end of the unit, students should have proficiency in the particular skills of behavioural and cognitive-behavioural therapies and their application to a range of clinical problems. Students will to be competent in selecting interventions for individuals and monitoring the progress of their application.

Assessment

Case Study 1 (20%)
Case Study 2 (25%)
Resource Book (20%)
Psychological Assessment Report (35%)

Workload requirements

3 hour seminar per week

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Antonio Verdejo-Garcia

Synopsis

The unit will cover the following topics.

  1. Introduction to drug classifications; legal control of drug use; pharmacokinetics; variability in response to drugs; chemical transmission and receptors.
  2. Mood disorders: antidepressants and mood stabilizers; anti-anxiety drugs, sedatives and hypnotics, drugs used for OCD, panic, and phobic disorders.
  3. Psychosis and schizophrenia; anti-psychotic drugs. Cognitive enhancers: ADHD, Alzheimer's disease, brain trauma.
  4. Drugs of abuse: affects on brain and cognition.
  5. Delirium; The Mini Mental State Examination.
  6. Mental health in older adults.
  7. Bereavement.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students should:

  1. Understand the basic concepts of psychopharmacology with particular reference to recent advances in the fields of psychiatric medication, cognitive enhancers and neuroprotective agents, and substance abuse;
  2. Have a broad understanding of commonly prescribed psychoactive drugs, legal and illegal drugs and other commonly abused substances.
  3. Be able to comment on the likely physiological and psychological effects in a particular individual of a specific drug (together with possible drug interactions), and to prepare a written report on the topic.
  4. Be exposed to current issues in clinical psychopharmacology and in research concerning treatment approaches.
  5. Gain a broad understanding of the advanced psychopathology topics of delirium, mental health in older adults, and bereavement.

Assessment

Take-Home Examination (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Katherine Lawrence

Synopsis

This unit provides an advanced level introduction to the growing field of health psychology. The major systems of the body that underlie health and illness will be reviewed, including the nervous system, endocrine system, immune system and cardiovascular system. The prevalence of major chronic diseases will be discussed and factors related to prevalence. Behaviour and lifestyle as they relate to health and illness will be reviewed. Health promotion and the prevention of disease will be discussed.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:

  1. Understand the scope of the related fields of health psychology and behavioural medicine, and their history.
  2. Understand the systems of the body that underlie health and disease.
  3. Comprehend the prevalence of different chronic diseases and factors that affect prevalence rates.
  4. Understand how behaviour and lifestyle relates to health.
  5. Understand the main models of health behaviour and behaviour change.
  6. Understand the goals and methods of health promotion and the prevention of disease.
  7. Understand how to develop conceptual models of patient problems, and how to plan and implement interventions based on the model and the relevant empirical literature.
  8. Understand the major chronic diseases that affect morbidity and mortality, that is, cancer and cardiovascular disease, from a behavioural perspective.
  9. Understand how to assess and manage, or contribute to the management, of a number of exemplar disorders/problems namely chronic headache, smoking tobacco, overweight and obesity, cancer and cardiovascular disease.
  10. Understand how to increase patient adherence with advice from health professionals.
  11. Understand models of stress and the stress-moderating variables of coping and social support; how to measure these constructs; and methods of stress management.
  12. Understanding how patients feel when asked by psychologists to complete 'homework assignments' and self-monitoring.

Assessment

Case Report (50%)
Examination (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will observe oral case presentations given by experienced clinicians and other students and will present their own cases. They will be exposed to a variety of different presentation styles designed to cater for specific audiences and will learn to evaluate case material in an objective and critical manner. They will participate in discussions of clinical issues and recent developments in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology and will be challenged to remain informed about such developments and issues.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with an opportunity to practice giving oral presentations of case material. A secondary aim is to provide a forum in which students may discuss other professional issues of interest to them.

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. be proficient in summarising and presenting case material in an oral format suitable for a number of different audiences, ranging from a hospital or rehabilitation setting through to a medico-legal forum, to other colleagues and to lay persons,
  2. participate confidently and productively in case discussions;
  3. be informed about current issues in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology.

Assessment

Class Contribution 25%
Oral Presentation 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stefan Luebbers and Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The DPsych program has established a network of placements in a variety of settings within which students can receive appropriate practica training. The practica coordinator and staff at the agency arrange the placements. Student preferences, practica availability and student training needs are taken account of in this process. Which agency and supervisor, number of days for the practica and also the commencement and completion dates are specified. Students are not permitted to negotiate their own practica or change any practica arrangements without first obtaining approval from the University Practica Coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the intermediate practicum, students should have:

  1. developed skill and confidence in applying their theoretical knowledge to the psychological treatment of individuals with relatively uncomplicated emotional and/or behavioural problems and to the assessment of treatment outcomes;
  2. developed an awareness of the intricacy of the therapeutic relationship and of the contribution of their personal qualities to it. Their contribution to service delivery should reflect the principles of best practice and their role within an agency should be equivalent to that of a junior employee.
  3. the ability to demonstrate an understanding of the complexities of the agency's role in service delivery and to service delivery and to independently contribute to the development of strategies for improved service delivery.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Participate in OSCE (Hurdle)
Clinical Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rene Stolwyk

Synopsis

This unit provides students with information on the roles of the neuropsychologist within the health setting, the assessment techniques commonly used by neuropsychologists, common neuropsychological syndromes, and the process of rehabilitation for those with neuropsychological impairment.

Outcomes

On completion of the course students should:

  1. have an understanding of the anatomy and physiology of the brain and be able to apply this knowledge to understanding brain behaviour relationships;
  2. have acquired expertise using a hypothesis testing approach for basic neuropsychological assessment and diagnosis and be able to apply this knowledge to a variety of populations.
  3. have a understanding of key neuropsychological syndromes that are regularly encountered in clinical practice
  4. have a greater understanding of how to interpret neuropsychological reports and apply recommendations

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle)
Case report Series (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Renee Testa

Synopsis

Students will become familiar with the use of appropriate paediatric neuropsychology assessment tools and will learn the skills required to obtain a comprehensive history from parents, teachers, hospital case notes and other relevant information sources. Assessment and management of the behavioural consequences of neuropsychological deficits will be discussed, together with the provision of parent education and school interventions. The importance of conveying neuropsychological findings and recommendation in a clear and interpretable manner for non-psychology professionals, such as teachers and careers, will also be an area of focus.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Be familiar with the main stages of central nervous system development, and the impact of these stages on normal cognitive functioning;
  2. Be fully aware of the impact that various neurodevelopmental disorders, various neuropsychiatric disorders or several kinds of acquired brain injury might be expected to have on the development of cognitive skills;
  3. Be familiar with theories of recovery function during childhood and adolescence, and appropriate rehabilitation and management strategies;
  4. Be competent in taking a comprehensive case history, in selecting and administering neuropsychological tests suitable for each developmental period, and interpreting the results of these;
  5. Be able to effectively impart their neuropsychological findings and recommendations to non-professionals such as parents and teachers; and
  6. Feel confident working with children, parents, teachers and professional childcare workers.

Assessment

Assessment will be based on three components, each of which will be graded.
Test administration: 35%
Essay/Report: 35%
Written assignment: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will observe oral case presentations given by experienced clinicians and other students and will present their own cases. They will be exposed to a variety of different presentation styles designed to cater for specific audiences and will learn to evaluate case material in an objective and critical manner. They will participate in discussions of clinical issues and recent developments in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology and will be challenged to remain informed about such developments and issues.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with an opportunity to observe and practice giving oral presentations of case material. A secondary aim is to provide a forum in which students can discuss other professional issues of interest to them.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. be proficient in summarising and presenting case material relative to assessment and management in an oral format suitable for a number of different audiences, ranging from hospital to rehabilitative settings, through to the medico-legal forum to other colleagues to lay persons;
  2. participate confidently and productively in case discussions;
  3. be informed about current issues in the field of Clinical neuropsychology;
  4. be familiar with case material drawn from a number of different settings.

Assessment

Class contributions (25%)
Oral presentation (75%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will develop an understanding of strategies used to manage neuropsychologically impaired individuals and will learn how to assess the efficacy of techniques used to rehabilitation and management. Participants will receive information from other allied health professional, rehabilitative approaches used by these professions and discuss how a multidisciplinary approach can be used to provide substantial benefits to the brain-injured individual.

Outcomes

This unit aims to equip students with the conceptual information necessary for them to work effectively in a rehabilitation setting.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. have acquired a good understanding of current theories and models of recovery of brain function after neurological damage;
  2. be familiar with recent research examining plasticity and reorganisation in the primate brain;
  3. be informed about the current World Health Organisation (WHO) framework for conceptualising disability in terms of impairment of function, activity limitation and participation restriction;
  4. know how clinical neuropsychologists and other allied health professionals assess impairment following neurological damage;
  5. be familiar with current rehabilitative interventions for specific neuropsychological disorders, and the methods commonly used to assess the effectiveness of these interventions;
  6. be well informed about strategies used in the management of those with neurological damage.

Assessment

Take-home exercise (20%)
Case report (80%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stefan Luebbers and Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The DPsych program has established a network of placements in a variety of settings within which students can receive appropriate practica training. The practica coordinator and staff at the agency arrange the placements. Student preferences, practica availability and student training needs are taken account of in this process. Which agency and supervisor, number of days for the practica and also the commencement and completion dates are specified. Students are not permitted to negotiate their own practica or change any practica arrangements without first obtaining approval from the University Practica Coordinator.

Outcomes

By the end of the advanced practicum, students' skills should be extended to:

  1. include management of individuals identified with serious and difficult problems;
  2. independently develop and deliver intervention strategies across a range of areas which reflect an understanding of the current psychological principles and how these can be implemented within service delivery systems.
  3. utilise a full understanding of the complexities of provision of services should be apparent with evidence of appreciation of the wider context in which the client operates and in which the service is provided.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Participate in OSCE (Hurdle)
Clinical Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299 and DPSY6199

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kate Taylor

Synopsis

The Specialised Clinical Practicum provides students with opportunity to directly contribute to service delivery by participating in the planning and provision of clinical psychological assessment and treatment to a range of individuals in a variety of settings. At this stage of their training students will be expected to carry a client load with minimal supervisory support. The location of the specialised practicum will be negotiated with individual students, taking into account their preferences and their need for specialised skill acquisition, but options include forensic settings, child and adolescent mental health services, psychiatry units of private and public hospitals, and specialised health services. The aim of the Specialised Clinical Practicum is for students to gain proficiency in their clinical psychology skills or to consolidate skills in specialist areas.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students will be able to develop and deliver assessment and intervention strategies which reflect an understanding of the current knowledge of best practice in clinical psychology.
On completion of the unit students will be able to provide input at the organisational level.
On completion of the unit students will demonstrate a sound understanding of clinical psychological principles and how these are implemented within service delivery systems.
On completion of the unit students will understand fully the role of a clinical psychologist at an organisational level, and the contributions that a clinical psychologist makes to a service delivery system.
On completion of the unit students will be able to recognise when input from a senior member of staff is required and be able to seek out this input in a timely and professional manner.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)
2 Clinical Reports (50% each)

Workload requirements

16 hours per week

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299, DPSY6199, DPSY6299


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The unit will begin with an examination of relevant legislation. Using both seminars and practical sessions, students will then learn how to conduct psychological assessments of children, adolescents and/or families in contested custody and access determinations, and in protective and criminal proceedings. Treatment issues will also be examined.

Assessment

Class Participation (10%)
Report (3000 words) (90%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit covers the application of and development of students' skills in the application of clinical psychology training to mental health and health settings. The field of clinical psychology will be extended to include advanced theoretical frameworks and treatments that include linking psychological and physical aspects of health and illness to specialised areas of clinical psychology, such as serious mental health illness and disorders and in the context of clinical health issues and disorders. The focus will include appropriate assessment skills for various health and mental health contexts.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students will be familiar with the field of clinical psychology as applied to mental health and health settings and have knowledge of the theoretical frameworks relevant to this field. They will have a better understanding of the psychological processes associated with various mental health and related conditions and the way developmental stages affect responses to illness.

Students will be expected to:

  1. have an awareness of clinical psychology related theoretical frameworks;
  2. be familiar with common mental health and health conditions and their impact on recovery;
  3. show awareness of and, be sensitive and responsive to cultural/ethnic differences in response to illness;
  4. become familiar with specialised assessments, such as crisis assessment, and assessments in a consultation-liaison context.

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle)
2 Written Assessments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Nicole Rinehart

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is on clinical assessment and intervention/management in the field of child and adolescent clinical psychology. Commensurate with the advanced training context of this unit, the content will include a sequence of topics which extend the topics included in the Introductory unit which all students complete in Year 1 (see Clinical Developmental Psychology DSY5105). This Unit will include complex child and adolescent case presentations by senior clinicians in the field. Students will also be required to present cases which relate to their clinical training in the Doctorate program. In addition some specific topics such as: trauma, critical incidents, the use of projective assessment techniques, and group therapy, are included in the seminar topics. Students are expected to demonstrate their knowledge of these areas in their clinical case discussions and written assessment tasks.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will have:

  1. Demonstrated and advanced knowledge of clinical assessment and management of children and adolescence.
  2. Increased their theoretical knowledge of a variety of assessment and therapeutic approaches for children, adolescents and families;Developed more advanced management / therapy skills in a child and family context.
  3. An ability to write comprehensive clinical assessment reports in the field of child and adolescent clinical psychology.

Assessment

Group Proposal (80%)
Class Participation (20%)
Infant Observation (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The advanced specialist practicum provides students with opportunity to directly contribute to service delivery by participating in the planning and provision of neuropsychological assessment and treatment to a range of persons with relatively complicated presentations. At this stage of their training students will be expected to carry a client load with minimal supervisory support. The location of the specialised practicum will be negotiated with individual students, taking into account their preferences and their need for specialised skill acquisition, but options will include rehabilitation, developmental neuropsychology, neuropsychiatry, neurogeriatrics and forensic neuropsychology.

Outcomes

By the end of the advanced specialist practicum, students' skills and knowledge in a particular area of clinical neuropsychology should be extensive.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. be able to independently develop and deliver assessment and intervention strategies which reflect an understanding of the current knowledge of best practice;
  2. be able to provide input at the organisational level;
  3. be able to demonstrate a sound understanding of neuropsychological principles and how these can be implemented within service delivery systems;
  4. demonstrate a full understanding of the complexities of provision of services should be apparent with evidence of appreciation of the wider context in which the client operates and in which the service is provided.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299, DPSY6199, DPSY6299

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The unit will commence with an examination of theories of crime and criminal behaviour, with particular attention being given to psychological research on specific groups of offenders (e.g., murderers, shoplifters, arsonists, pathological gamblers, sexual offenders). Through practical sessions and seminars, students will develop some expertise in providing expert evidence in criminal cases, with such issues as fitness to plead intoxication and intent, diminished responsibility, insanity, automatism, infanticide, psychological syndromes, and mitigating factors receiving particular attention. Finally, theories and techniques of intervention with offenders will be examined.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. understand the various theories of crime and criminal behaviour;
  2. be familiar with relevant legal definitions:
  3. be familiar with the specific issues on which the forensic psychologist might be called as an expert in criminal cases;
  4. be familiar with current research on specific groups of offenders;
  5. be familiar with the various sentencing options and their impact;
  6. understand how to amend, where necessary;
  7. be able to apply their skills in clinical assessment and intervention to incarcerated and out-patient offenders

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle Requirement)
Written Assignment (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The subject will commence with an overview of the civil arena and examination of the concept of tort liability for negligence. Seminars will focus on personal injury litigation (including such issues as workers' compensation, "compensation neurosis" and "functional overlay", assessing psychological impairment, post traumatic stress disorder, head injury and its sequelae, chronic pain, occupational stress, compensation and recovery). Students will observe the operation of various tribunals and boards and observe psychologists conducting assessments in civil matters (e.g., personal injury, guardianship and administration, testamentary capacity).

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should:

  1. be aware of the breadth of matters falling within the arena of civil law and the common matters on which psychologists are asked for advice;
  2. be cognisant of the factors which may complicate the assessment and treatment of personal injury claimants;
  3. be cognisant of the particular features of victims of crime and other traumatic conditions

Assessment

2 Reports (Hurdle)
Class Participation (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Julie Simpson

Synopsis

Introduction to a variety of health-related data collection sources, calculation of population fertility, mortality & morbidity rates, health service utilisation measures, disease registration & reporting. Use of direct & indirect age standardisation, life expectancy calculations, valid comparisons & health differentials. Development, design & delivery of health questionnaires. Use of focus groups, standard instruments for health surveys, coding, validity, reliability of measures & models of data collection. Efficient sampling strategies, data interpretation & analysis including stratification, clustering & weighting.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. derive and compare population measures of mortality, illness, fertility and survival, using basic demographic tools such as life tables and age standardisation;
  2. access the main sources of routinely collected health data and choose the appropriate one, taking into account their advantages and disadvantages;
  3. design a valid and reliable health survey to collect primary data, design an efficient sampling strategy to obtain random sample of the target population, and choose the most appropriate mode of delivery;
  4. analyse, interpret and present the results of survey data, taking the sampling strategy into account.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Gary Glonek

Synopsis

Core topics in algebra and analysis, including polynomial and simultaneous equations, graphs, concepts of limits, continuity and series approximations, including Taylor series expansions. Calculus is used to describe techniques of integration and differentiation of vector expressions. Study of probability, concepts of probability laws, random variables, expectation and distributions. Essential topics in matrix algebra relevant to biostatistical methods. Essential numerical methods, including Newton-Raphson method for solution of simultaneous equations and concepts of numerical integration.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate a broad understanding of the mathematics underlying key statistical methods;
  2. demonstrate an understanding of basic algebra and analysis, and the ability to manually differentiate and integrate algebraic expressions, and perform Taylor series expansions;
  3. understand the basic laws of probability, and the calculus basis of expectation and distribution theory;
  4. perform matrix manipulations manually;
  5. understand the numerical methods behind solutions of equations regularly encountered in methods in biostatistics.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr A Kirby

Synopsis

The unit will introduce the core concepts of statistical inference, beginning with estimators, confidence intervals, type I and II errors and p-values. The emphasis will be on the practical interpretation of these concepts in biostatistical contexts, including an emphasis on the difference between statistical and practical significance. Classical estimation theory, bias and efficiency. Likelihood function, likelihood based methodology, maximum likelihood estimation and inference based on likelihood ration, Wald and score test procedures. Bayesian approach to statistical inference vs classical frequentist approach. Nonparametric procedures, exact inference and resampling based methodology.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have a deeper understanding of fundamental concepts in statistical inference and their practical interpretation and importance in biostatistical contexts;
  2. understand the theoretical basis for frequentists and Bayesian approaches to statistical inference;
  3. be able to develop and apply parametric methods of inference, with particular reference to problems of relevance in biostatistical contexts;
  4. have the theoretical basis to understand the justification for more complex statistical procedures introduced in subsequent units;
  5. have an understanding of basic alternatives to standard likelihood-based methods, and be able to identify situations in which these methods are useful.

Assessment

2 x Written assignments (35% each)
Practical exercises (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Andrew Forbes and Associate Professor John Carlin

Synopsis

This unit explores biostatistical applications of linear models with an emphasis on underlying theoretical and computational issues, practical interpretation and communication of results. By a series of case studies, students explore extensions of methods for group comparisons of means (t-tests and analysis of variance) to adjust for confounding and to assess effect modification/interaction, together with the development of associated inference procedures. Multiple regression strategies and model selection issues will be presented together with model checking and diagnostics. Nonparametric regression techniques, and random effects and variance components models will also be outlined.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the major theoretical and computational issues underlying analyses based on linear models;
  2. develop appropriate regression modelling strategies based on unit matter considerations, including choice of models, control for confounding and appropriate parameterisation;
  3. be proficient at using a statistical software package (eg. Strata) to perform multiple regression and analysis of variance;
  4. understand the construction, use and interpretation of regression modelling diagnostics;
  5. express the results of statistical analyses of linear models in language suitable for communication to medical investigators or publication in biomedical or epidemiological journal articles; and
  6. appreciate the role of modern techniques including nonparametric smoothing and variance components models.

Assessment

2 x Written assignments (30% each)
Practical exercises (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Cate D'Este

Synopsis

This unit will describe and demonstrate the complexity of data management and statistical computing methods. It will enable students to communicate effectively about the issues in storing and retrieving information, and in assessing the quality and limitations of data repositories. It uses examples from real data sets to give students practical skills in data management, assessment of data quality and handling and linking of large volumes of data.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to have:

  1. Understanding of different sources and methods of data storage such as unit records, matrix files, longitudinal data, relational databases;
  2. Understanding of relational database concepts and data retrieval methods;
  3. Proficiency in the handling and analysis of large data sets;
  4. Skills in data manipulation and management using the major statistical software packages;
  5. Skills in linking files through unique and non-unique identifiers;
  6. Understanding of data quality control and data entry methods and confidentiality issues, and experience in applying validation checks to data;
  7. Skills in data cleaning, identification of outliers and data trimming using appropriate statistical methods;
  8. Understanding of processes leading to finalisation of data sets prior to analysis;
  9. Ability to communicate with researchers in data-related issues of design, conduct and analysis of studies.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Annette Dobson

Synopsis

Practical applications of statistical methods in clinical settings. Methods for assessment of clinical agreement, statistical properties of diagnostic tests and their interpretation, fundamentals of modelling for clinical prediction. Study of meta analysis methods in the context of randomised trials, diagnostic tests and observational studies, assessing heterogeneity and publication bias. Assessment of the application, analysis and utility of crossover and equivalence trials.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the role of statistical methods in evidence-based health care;
  2. Determine appropriate statistical methods of particular relevance to evidence-based health care in particular clinical applications; and
  3. Correctly employ these statistical methods and have the skills to effectively communicate with clinicians on the application of these methods and interpretation of results.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Amy Salter

Synopsis

This unit will introduce randomised comparisons as a major tool used in medical research and the basis of providing evidence for improving clinical practice. By developing problems based on clinical questions, the need and value of different experimental designs will be introduced and expanded. Within this context, issues with regards to randomisation, ethical issues, clinical study design and analysis interpretation will be developed, as will selection of outcome variables, surrogate endpoints and dealing with missing data. Efficiency issues such as sample size and power will be introduced at appropriate points in the unit.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the benefits and ethical issues involved in randomisation as a mechanism for reduction and balancing bias, and implement a variety of randomisation schemes.
  2. Describe the principles behind the common experimental designs and be able to implement, analyse and interpret data from a variety of randomised designs.
  3. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of the use of surrogate endpoints.
  4. Describe the principles underlying Phase I, II and III and IV studies as well as of the scientific basis underlying issues in clinical studies including intention-to-treat, blinding, interim analyses, missing data subgroup analyses and the reporting thereof.
  5. State the reasons for the importance of sample size in clinical studies, and perform sample size calculations for a variety of trial designs with different outcomes.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Workload requirements

Off campus students:
Twelve hours per week, consisting of (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core
material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or on-line), 2 hours per week for on-line communication with teaching staff or students via WebCT, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation. No residential component is required for this subject.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Andrew Forbes and Associate Professor John Carlin

Synopsis

This unit will develop statistical models for longitudinal and correlated data in medical research. The concept of hierarchical data structures will be developed, together with simple numerical and analytical demonstrations of the inadequacy of standard statistical methods. Normal-theory model and statistical procedures i.e. mixed linear models are explored using SAS or Stata statistical software packages. Extension to non-normal outcomes emphasising clinical research question. Case studies contrast generalised estimating equations and generalised linear mixed models. Limitations of traditional repeated measures analysis of variance and non-exchangeable models.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. recognise the existence of correlated or hierarchical data structures, and describe the limitations of standard methods in these settings;
  2. develop and analytically describe an appropriate model for longitudinal or correlated data based on unit matter considerations;
  3. be proficient at using a statistical software package (e.g. Strata or SAS) to properly model and perform computations for longitudinal data analyses, and to correctly interpret results; and
  4. express the results of statistical analyses of longitudinal data in language suitable for communication to medical investigators or publication in biomedical or epidemiological journal articles.

Assessment

2 x Written assignments (30% each)
Practical exercises (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

EPM5004. This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mark Jones

Synopsis

This unit will explore biostatistical applications of generalised linear models with an emphasis on underlying theoretical issues, and practical interpretation of the results of fitting these models. Relevant methods for 2 x 2 and 2 x k tables extended into logistic regression for a binary outcome as a special case of generalised linear modelling. Measures of association and modelling techniques for ordinal outcomes. Methods for analysing count data. Techniques for dealing with matched data e.g. from case control studies.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the major theoretical aspects of generalised linear models;
  2. appreciate regression modelling strategies for generalised linear models;
  3. including estimation issues, choice of models, prediction and goodness of fit of a selected model;
  4. be proficient in the analysis of binary outcome data, either form a standard study design or from a matched study design;
  5. be capable of analysing ordered and unordered categorical outcomes using simple measures of association and complex regression models;
  6. be capable of analysing count data whether it satisfies standard distributional assumptions or whether it is over dispersed.

Assessment

3 x Written assignments (35%, 35%, 30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gillian Heller

Synopsis

Biostatistical applications of survival analysis with emphasis on underlying theoretical and computational issues, practical interpretation and communication of results. Case studies, students will explore the various methods for handling survival data. Kaplan-Meier curve definition and its extension, survival prospects using logrank test and confidence intervals for relative risks, graphical displays and assessing underlying assumptions. Mantel-Haenszel method's connection to survival analysis. Cox proportional hazards model for handling continuous covariates. Various extensions of this model, including time-dependent covariates, multiple outcomes and censored linear regression model.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the major theoretical and computational issues underlying survival analysis;
  2. develop appropriate survival analysis strategies based on unit matter considerations, including choice of models, control for confounding and appropriate parameterisation;
  3. be proficient at using at least two different statistical software packages (e.g. Strata, Excel) to perform survival analysis;
  4. Understand the construction, use and interpretation of appropriate graphs for showing results and checking statistical assumptions;
  5. express the results of statistical analyses of censored data in language suitable for
    1. communication to medical investigators and
    2. publication in biomedical or epidemiological journals; and
  6. appreciate the role of newer techniques including parametric non-modelling, floating odds ratios and competing risks.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Full year 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Andrew Forbes

Synopsis

Students will be exposed to real-life biostatistical problems in an academic health research environment, industry or government under supervision by an experienced biostatistician with a staff or honorary appointment at Monash University. They will be allocated, or may select, 1 or more research projects, and required to make regular contact with the associated health research personnel together with the supervisor. Under the guidance of the supervisor, the student will assume responsibility for statistical aspects of the relevant research project(s), and perform an analysis of appropriate complexity for the project then present and interpret the results in a written and oral form.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. appreciate the challenges facing a biostatistician in professional practice;
  2. demonstrate strategies for elicitation of pertinent research questions and associated biostatistical issues from a health or medical research project;
  3. collaborate with a medical researcher in devising a strategy for statistical analysis of the research data;
  4. perform data integrity checks and an appropriate statistical analysis;
  5. present the results and their interpretation in a written report suitable for presentation to a clinical research journal.

Assessment

Written report (100%)

Workload requirements

20 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Graham Wood

Synopsis

The unit begins with a brief review of elementary molecular biology: DNA, RNA, the central dogma, meiosis, mitosis and genes. Some fundamental mathematical tools for statistical analysis are also reviewed. The course then covers sequence alignment, database searching, Mendelian genetics and techniques for discovering connections between genes and disease: association, linkage and variance components studies.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the core dogma of molecular biology and the central ideas of population genetics.
  2. Given a problem which requires genome or proteome data for its solution, access appropriate web based sources for data, and download the data in suitable format.
  3. Understand and apply core bioinformatics techniques for the analysis of DNA and protein sequence data, such as global sequence alignment, CLAST, Hidden Markov Models, evolutionary models and phylogenetic tree fitting.
  4. Process large quantities of data (such as the expression profiles of thousands of genes resulting form microarray experiments) using R, and communicate results in language suitable for presentation to both a bioinformatics journal and a lay audience.

Assessment

The assessment for this subject will involve four written assignments, each worth 15% plus a comprehensive final assignment worth 40%. The assignments will each involve the application of theory to problems specific to the various analytical tasks in bioinformatics.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course version {3420, 3421, 3422}.

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lyle Gurrin

Synopsis

This unit provides a thorough introduction to the concepts and methods of modern Bayesian statistical methods with particular emphasis on practical applications in biostatistics. Comparison of Bayesian concepts involving prior distributions with classical approaches to statistical analysis, particularly likelihood based methods. Applications to fitting hierarchical models to complex data structures via simulation from posterior distributions using Markov chain Monte Carlo techniques (MCMC) with the WinBUGS software package.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the logic of Bayesian statistical inference i.e. the use of full probability models to quantify uncertainty in statistical conclusions.
  2. Develop and analytically describe simple one-parameter models with conjugate prior distributions and standard models containing two or more parameters including specifics for the normal location-scale model.
  3. Appreciate the role prior distributions and have a thorough understanding of the connection between Bayesian methods and standard 'classical' approaches to statistics, especially those based on likelihood methods.
  4. Recognise situations where a complex biostatistical data structure can be expressed as a Bayesian hierarchical model, and specify the technical details of such a model.
  5. Explain and use the most common computational techniques for use in Bayesian analysis, especially the use of simulation from posterior distributions based on Markov Chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) methods, with emphasis on the practical implementation of such techniques in the WinBUGS package.
  6. Perform practical Bayesian analysis relating to health research problems, and effectively communicate the results.

Assessment

Written assignments (80%)
Practical exercises (20%).

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course version {3420, 3421, 3422}.

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Rory Wolfe

Synopsis

This unit involves the study of basic probability and calculus-based methods of underpinning probability distributions and parameter estimation.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the meaning and laws of probability;
  2. Recognise common probability distributions and their properties;
  3. Apply calculus-based tools to derive key features of a probability distribution, such as mean and variance;
  4. Manipulate multivariate probability distributions to obtain marginal and conditional distributions;
  5. Obtain mean, variance and the probability distribution of transformations of random variables;
  6. Understand properties of parameter estimators and the usefulness of large sample approximations in statistics;
  7. Appreciate the role of simulation in demonstrating and explaining statistical concepts.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Andrew Forbes

Synopsis

This unit will involve students being exposed to a real-life biostatistical problem arising in an academic health research environment or industry. They will be supervised by an experienced biostatistician with a staff or honorary appointment at Monash University. Students will be allocated, or may select, one research project to be involved in, and will be required to make regular contact with the associated health research personnel together with the supervisor. The student will perform an analysis of appropriate complexity for the project and present and interpret the results in a written form to the health researcher and supervisor.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. appreciate the challenges facing a biostatistician in professional practice;
  2. demonstrate strategies for elicitation of pertinent research questions and associated biostatistical issues from a health or medical research project;
  3. collaborate with a medical researcher in devising a strategy for statistical analysis of the research data;
  4. perform data integrity checks and an appropriate statistical analysis;
  5. present the results and their interpretation in a written report suitable for presentation to a clinical research journal.

Assessment

Written report (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Bebe Loff

Synopsis

This unit examines the colonial history of and contemporary ethical issues that pervade international health. It builds awareness of critical ethical issues in international health and research. A range of topics are considered including the geopolitical purposes served by international health research, the 10/90 disequilibrium, the relationship between research parties including host and sponsor countries, multilateral organisations, pharmaceutical companies, communites and research participants. The rules guiding research and essential components of ethical review process are examined. Issues of justice emerge as critical in this context.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify key contemporary bioethical debates in international health projects and research;
  2. Describe the impact of cultural, economic and political context on the ways is which ethical dilemmas are shaped;
  3. Describe the historical development of medical research in its geopolitical context;
  4. Critically apply current international and national guidelines for medical research; and
  5. Identify and analyse the substantive issues and controversies that arise when medical research sponsored by an industrialised country is conducted in a developing country.

Assessment

Written assignment (4,000 words) (60%) (Hurdle)
Short essay (1,500 words) (30%)
Online participation (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Reading as required and contribution to weekly online discussion forum.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Teresa Flower

Synopsis

This unit aims to equip professionals with a broad-based understanding of basic legal and criminological principles. The unit then builds on this knowledge by examining key areas involving the interaction between mental health and the law, and examining the role of the 'expert witness'.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the role of the law and the criminal justice system in society;
  2. Describe in broad terms the assumptions and limitations of major criminological theories (biological, sociological and psychological);
  3. Summarize the basic processes involved in the operation of the criminal justice system;
  4. Describe the legal and ethical constraints in working at the interface between mental health and the law;
  5. Discuss the legal and ethical constraints in working at the interface between mental health and the law;
  6. Describe the roles and functions of an expert witness.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/alternative assessment (10%)
Applied learning exercise (30%)
Essay (60%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Teresa Flower

Synopsis

Designed to provide students with an understanding of the role of mental health in criminal offending this unit provides an overview of the relevant research (drawn from psychological, psychiatric, criminological and sociological studies), key findings and the practical implications of these findings. Different types of mental disorders (psychotic, mood, personality, substance use) associated with offending are considered and explanatory models which incorporate the role of symptoms, cognitions, biological and sociological factors are discussed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically evaluate the evidence for an association between mental disorder and criminal offending;
  2. Outline various possible explanations for the association between mental disorder and criminal offending;
  3. Explain the concepts of 'psychopathy', 'antisocial personality disorder', 'sever personality disorder', and their relevance to offending and rehabilitation;
  4. Explain the evidence based principles for effective rehabilitation of offenders;
  5. Describe the role of addictions including substance abuse and pathological gambling as risk factors for offending; and
  6. Outline methods for assessment and treatment of addictions.

Assessment

Workshop presentation / Alternative assessment (10%)
Applied learning exercise (30%)
Essay (60%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Teresa Flower

Synopsis

This unit is designed to assist professionals working within both Correctional Services and Mental Health Services to develop a better understanding of the causes of conflict between the two systems, the issues that underpin such conflict and to develop ways of more effectively working at the interface of these two systems. The unit is also designed to equip professionals with a deeper understanding of the role of mental health clinicians and the clinical challenges associated with working within the correctional system.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Discuss various theories relating to the purpose and role of imprisonment;
  2. Identify challenges associated with the assessment and management of mental health issues in correctional settings;
  3. Summarise the specific mental health needs of minority populations in correctional settings;
  4. Describe appropriate systemic and clinical responses to the challenge of self harming behaviours in custody.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/alternative assessment (10%)
Applied learning exercise (30%)
Essay (60%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Flora Gilbert

Synopsis

This unit has been designed to create a developmental context for understanding a range of issues which characterise at risk behaviour in youth. Students will gain a broader understanding of these behaviours, as seen from a range of perspectives: legal, epidemiological, psychological, sociological and psychiatric. The unit will be of interest to those currently working with at risk youth as well as providing insights into the aetiology of a range of maladaptive behaviours in adult life.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit the student will:

  1. Discuss the interface between children and the legal system;
  2. Outline the basic principles of assessment and management of risk in childhood and adolescence;
  3. Describe critically the evidence relating to long term consequence of adverse experiences in childhood and adolescence;
  4. Outline a developmentally appropriate decision making process.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/alternative assessment (10%)
Structured learning task (30%)
Essay (60%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Troy McEwan

Synopsis

The unit covers the aetiology and principles of management of commonly occurring antisocial 'problem behaviours' : violence, stalking, uttering threats, sexual offending, fire-setting, and abnormal complaining. Based on psychological and criminological theory of such behaviours a framework is presented, then applied to each specific behaviour. The role of mental disorder in the genesis of such behaviours is considered, in addition to the multiple psychological and social factors involved. Students will gain a theoretical understanding and develop a pragmatic model for working with a broad range of perpetrators in an ethical and evidence-based fashion.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Apply a structured evidence-based approach to understanding common problematic antisocial behaviours, which incorporates both individually-based and situationally based variables;
  2. Describe the epidemiology, social impacts, common perpetrator characteristics and high-risk situational contexts for the commission of common problem behaviours (stalking, issuing threats, abnormal complaining, fire-setting, sexual offending, violence);
  3. Outline the key principles involved in managing such behaviours, including cognitive, behavioural, psychiatric and legal approaches;
  4. Describe the role of mental disorders in the aetiology of common problem behaviours; and
  5. Explain the broader societal factors involved in the commission of such behaviours and, conversely, the impact of such behaviours on public safety and well-being.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/alternative assessment (10%)
Applied learning exercise (30%)
Essay (60%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Teresa Flower

Synopsis

This unit will explore the social, political, legal, ethical and practice context of care for mentally disordered offenders. Clinical issues in forensic psychiatry and the needs of forensic mental health patients will be discussed. The knowledge and skills required by practitioners to assess and care for mentally disordered offenders will be developed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the factors (including historic, social, legal, medical, ethical) that shape forensic mental health care;
  2. Identify the specialist issues (including knowledge, skills, policy, practice, contextual) in forensic psychiatry;
  3. Demonstrate the knowledge and skills required by forensic mental health practitioners in the assessment and care of mentally disordered offenders.

Assessment

Workshop/alternative assessment (10%)
Case study (1,500 words) (15%)
Assignment (1,500 words) (15%)
Essay (3,500 - 4,000 words) (60%)

All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Ranson

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The law of evidence is a branch of adjectival law. It consists of legal rules, procedural rules and administrative arrangements whereby courts and tribunals within the justice system receive and evaluate evidence. To perform satisfactorily in this field a forensic medical practitioner's communication skills must be of a high order and they need to understand the legal principles that govern the admissibility of their evidence.

This unit will enable students to gain practical skills in the delivery of medical evidence in courts and tribunals, in the preparation of medico legal reports to be used as items of evidence and in the techniques of advocacy that can modify the way in which a medical practitioner's evidence is received by courts.

Tutorials and presentations will be used to lay the foundations for some of the basic academic objectives of the course. Workshops will be used to establish witness skills and oral communication techniques and a moot court will be used to develop practical skills in presenting evidence and developing strategies to deal with the medico legal and advocacy issues that arise during the examination and cross-examination of witnesses including expert witnesses.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. display an understanding of decision making processes in legal practice;
  2. demonstrate knowledge of the general principles of the laws of evidence;
  3. comprehend the special rules regarding opinion evidence;
  4. understand the role of the expert witness;
  5. be conversant with the rules governing the reception of evidence to the courts;
  6. demonstrate competency in preparing medico-legal reports;
  7. have developed the skills required to present evidence in court;
  8. have acquired the techniques necessary for managing examination-in-chief, cross examination and re-examination.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (50%)
Casebook workbook (25%)
Skills evaluation (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Wells

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The unit focuses on the issues surrounding the interpretation of injuries. Areas include the pathophysiology of injuries with particular reference to the anatomical, physiological and pathological principles; injury classification; documentation including forensic photography; injury patterns and circumstances of causation. Students will be expected to participate with clinical and post mortem cases.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. display an understanding of the pathophysiology of injuries;
  2. show familiarity with the factors limiting accurate injury interpretation;
  3. interpret the forces producing injuries;
  4. apply the principles of forensic photography;
  5. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the classification of injuries;
  6. be able to accurately document injuries;
  7. analyse and interpret mechanisms and circumstances by which the injuries were sustained.

Assessment

Case studies (45%)
Case report (20%)
Institute program (20%)
Online case discussions (15%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liz Bishop

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The unit aims to help students become familiar with the tools and vocabulary of ethical discourse in medicine. A framework for this discourse is built, based on the four basic principles of autonomy, beneficence, non-maleficence and justice. The elements which go to make up the Australian Legal System are covered as well as those particular areas of law relating to forensic medical practice, i.e. consent, confidentiality and disclosure, issues at both the beginning and end of life.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. develop the student's awareness and understanding of the ideas and issues in medical ethics so that in practice, the interests of their patients/clients are safeguarded;
  2. develop the student's knowledge and understanding of relevant areas of the law so that in practice their contribution to the justice system is optimal.

Assessment

Assignments/essays (50%)
Presentations (25%)
Casebook workbook (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Katherine 'Anna' Davey

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Practitioners need to be familiar with the scope and limitations of the various branches of forensic science to know when and how they may assist in particular cases. Topics to be covered include the principles of forensic science, forensic biology, forensic botany, crime scene examination, specimen collections, forensic anthropology, forensic odontology and forensic entomology.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. show familiarity with the principles of forensic science generally and its scope;
  2. comprehend the scope and limitations of forensic science generally and its subsections in particular;
  3. understand the tests and analyses used in branches of forensic science to assist in the proper application of their results in particular cases;
  4. know what specimens would be applicable for forensic science analysis in particular cases;
  5. demonstrate competence in the collection storage and security of forensic specimens;
  6. evaluate results of forensic scientific analysis meaningfully.

Assessment

Case report from the literature (1,500 words) (25%)
Case report provided by the Unit Coordinator (1,500 words) (25%)
Case study sourced from VIFM case (1,500 words) (25%)
Assignment (1,500 words) (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Professor Dawn Elder

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Paediatric forensic medicine encompasses the medico-legal issues arising from the provision of a medical service to children. The unit will largely focus on the medical assessment of cases of suspected child sexual abuse. The aim of this unit is to develop student's skills in the evaluation and management of children and adolescents suspected of being sexually abused. Integral to both evaluation and management will be a knowledge of the relevant legislation, policing and protective agencies, injury patterns, specialised investigative techniques and treatment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Display a detailed understanding of the roles of health practitioners in assessing cases of suspected child sexual abuse.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of sexual development and behaviour in children.
  3. Demonstrate an awareness of the ethical and legal issues relevant to cases of suspected child sexual abuse.
  4. Describe normal genital anatomy and physiology, and be able to interpret pathological conditions.
  5. Apply medical and forensic principles to the evaluation of cases of suspected child sexual abuse.
  6. Display a broad comprehension of the consequences, treatment and prevention of child sexual abuse.
  7. Recognise the role of the other disciplines involved in investigations; protective workers, police, lawyers.
  8. Recognise the medical and legal implications of a sexually transmitted infection in a child.

Assessment

Assignment 1 - Workbook questions 2,3,4, and 9 (15%)
Assignment 2 - Case critique (20%)
Assignment 3 - Workbook questions 12, 13, 14 and 15 (20%)
Face to face teaching & case presentation (15%)
Essay (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

A registered medical practitioner who is involved in assessing (or may be required to assess) children/adolescents when child/adolescent sexual abuse is suspected.

Prohibitions

FOR2006.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Marks

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Paediatric forensic medicine encompasses the medico-legal issues arising from the provision of a medical service to children. The unit will largely focus on developing practitioners' skills required for the medical assessment of cases of suspected non-accidental injury in children. Such assessments require knowledge of the relevant legislation, injury patterns, specialised investigative techniques, documentation and interpretation. Teaching will focus on trauma and forensic principles, childhood development, injury patterns (both accidental and non-accidental), medical conditions that may mimic injurious events presentation of findings and opinions to the courts.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the principles of injury assessment;
  2. Develop the skills required for accurate documentation - notes, diagrams and photography;
  3. Have a comprehensive knowledge of common injury patterns at the different stages of a child's development;
  4. Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of non-accidental injury as it applies to bones, intra-abdominal and intra-thoracic trauma;
  5. Discuss features of injuries of childhood both accidental and non-accidental;
  6. Understand the process of assessing children when there are concerns of neglect.

Assessment

Assignment 1: Questions (25%)
Assignment 2: Case critique (25%)
Face to face teaching/case presentation (10%)
Essay (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

A registered medical practitioner who is involved in assessing (or may be required to assess) children where there are concerns of non-accidental injury.

Prohibitions

FOR2006.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Forensic Odontology encompasses the intersection between dentistry and the law. Practitioners in this field require a solid understanding of all aspects of dental practice as it relates to medico-legal investigation. The aim of this unit is to provide students with knowledge and practical skills that will enable them to apply their dental knowledge to questions of legal/coronial import, especially in the field of human identification.
Forensic Odontology practitioners require expert knowledge in areas including; injury interpretation, evidence interpretation, dental anthropology, forensic anthropology, imaging technology, mortuary practice, and medico-legal report writing.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the core elements of Forensic Odontology which underlie Forensic Odontological investigation;
  2. Understand the fundamentals of mortuary practice and protocol, including ethical treatment of the deceased, dental examination and imaging procedures;
  3. Develop a working understanding of human skeletal and dental development and the changes which occur with increasing age, including an introduction to forensic age estimation methods;
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of the structure of the human skeleton, and to develop the ability to distinguish human from non-human skeletal and dental elements;
  5. Show an understanding of Disaster Victim identification, including mass grave exhumation techniques and an awareness of the role of the Forensic Odontologist in war crimes investigations;
  6. Display skills in the application of CT technology and software systems in post-mortem examinations;
  7. Understand the principles of medico-legal report writing as applied to the discipline of forensic odontology.

Assessment

Assignment (25%)
Case report (25%)
Oral presentation (25%)
Case book (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

+ Graduate with the degree of Bachelor of Medicine/Surgery or Bachelor of Dentistry in an Australian University; or
+ Have qualifications which, in the opinion of the Faculty Board, are equivalent to or are a satisfactory substitute for the qualifications described above; and
+ Have at least 3 years experience in clinical or dental practice.
+ Provide proof of Medical or Dental Board registration.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The primary function of Forensic Odontology is to identify unknown deceased individuals who cannot be visually recognized by close family members. Forensic Odontology practitioners require expert knowledge in areas including; post-mortem examination technique, ante-mortem record interpretation and transposition, specialized post-mortem imaging methods, and cranio-facial superimposition techniques. The aim of this unit is to provide students with a thorough understanding of the standard methods involved in post-mortem dental examination techniques leading to the identification of unknown deceased individuals. The unit is designed to provide practicing dentists with the required knowledge and skills so that they will be able to conduct a standard forensic identification case from the beginning to its completion.


Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of relevant mortuary protocol and practice - including OH&S issues.
  2. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of dental post-mortem examination techniques, including standard and advanced imaging modalities.
  3. Discuss the techniques involved in ante-mortem record collection and interpretation methods specifically related to dental issues.
  4. Comprehend the Interpol guidelines and understand the complex issues involved in reconciliation of ante-mortem and post-mortem data using the Interpol standard forms.
  5. Demonstrate familiarity with the terminology used when describing and reporting on injuries to the teeth, cranio-facial skeleton, and soft tissues of the face
  6. Comprehend and articulate an understanding of the role of other mortuary based identification methods, such as molecular biology, fingerprints, the weight given to circumstantial evidence, and cranio-facial superimposition.

Assessment

Assignment (20%)
Case studies (30%)
Oral presentation (20%)
Case book (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide students with a thorough understanding of all aspects of forensic odontology relating to the treatment of living people in a legal setting. The unit is designed for practicing dentists and medical practitioners who wish to gain a greater understanding of how to deal with the examination and reporting of injuries caused by the teeth, and injuries inflicted to the oro-facial complex. The unit will also cover dental age estimation techniques, identification of unknown living individuals and issues surrounding dental malpractice and fraud investigations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of the anatomy of the facial skeleton, the bio-mechanics of bone and of facial trauma.
  2. Practice bite mark interpretation and analysis.
  3. Evaluate dental age estimation methods as applied to living individuals.
  4. Recognise and evaluate the dental manifestations of child abuse.
  5. Illustrate the limitations inherent in identification of individuals from CCTV images.
  6. Discuss the regulations of the Australian Dental Board as they relate to malpractice and fraud investigation.
  7. Construct a dento-legal report and demonstrate knowledge of the ramifications involved in presentation of clinical forensic odontology evidence before the courts.

Assessment

Assignment (20%)
Case studies (30%)
Oral presentation (20%)
Case book (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Forensic Odontology encompasses the intersection between dentistry and the law. Practitioners in this field require a solid understanding of all aspects of dental practice as it relates to medico-legal investigation. The aim of this unit is to provide students with a sound theoretical and practical knowledge of all Phases of the Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process and the role the forensic odontologist plays in each Phase. It will provide the student with the capability of operating in both national and international response teams.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the core elements of Disaster Victim Identification principles and methods which underlie forensic odontology investigations following natural and man-made mass fatality incidents.
  2. Discuss the role the forensic odontologist plays in each Phase of a DVI operation.
  3. Describe and operate the common computer based systems used during a DVI operation.
  4. Appraise the International protocols, standards, charting methods and the Interpol forms that are used during a DVI incident.
  5. Recognise the various cultural, religious and legal frameworks in which international DVI incidents may occur.
  6. Demonstrate the value of CT technology as it is employed in DVI scenarios.
  7. Review the principals involved in medico-legal report writing as applied to DVI incidents.

Assessment

Case study (40%)
Oral presentation (25%)
Short answer assignments (35%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Soren Blau

Synopsis

Forensic anthropology is the field of study concerned with the examination of material believed to be human to answer medico-legal questions including those related to identification. The aim of the Elements of Forensic Anthropology unit is to introduce students to the theory and practice of forensic anthropology and provide them with a thorough understanding of the various contributions this discipline makes to forensic investigations. Although the unit is designed for medical practitioners and practicing dentists, it is likely to be of interest to post-graduate students from a Science and/or Arts background who wish to gain a greater understanding of the types of evidentiary and investigative information that can be obtained when only skeletal remains survive. The unit will cover:

  • Human skeletal and dental anatomy;
  • Preparing and analysing differentially preserved skeletal remains;
  • Forensic anthropology: identification and analysis of differentially preserved human remains;
  • Developing a biological profile: ancestry, sex, age and stature;
  • Introduction to the analysis of skeletal trauma;
  • The use of forensic anthropology in different cases (domestic cases, disaster victim identification (DVI), human rights investigations);
  • Working with other forensic experts: forensic pathologists, forensic odontologists, molecular biologists, etc;
  • Forensic anthropology report writing; and
  • Cultural and religious issues related to dealing with dead bodies and exhumations.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe f the role of forensic archaeology and anthropology in the search, location and recovery of human remains.
  2. Identify individual skeletal elements and begin to formulate an educated opinion on their origin (human or nonhuman).
  3. Describe the preservation and condition of human remains and demonstrate an understanding of how preservation impacts on techniques employed by forensic anthropologists.
  4. Describe the principles related to developing a biological profile (estimation of ancestry, sex, age and stature).
  5. Explain the differences between biological and personal identity.
  6. Describe the role of the forensic anthropology in the analysis and interpretation of skeletal pathology and trauma.
  7. Describe the different contexts where forensic anthropology may make a contribution.

Assessment

Essay (2,000 words) (30%)
4 x Case studies (1,500 words each) (40%)
Oral presentation (15 minutes) (30%)

Workload requirements

It is expected that students will need to undertake approximately 12 hours of study per week over the semester. This will include contact time, private study, assessment tasks (case studies, assignments) and, where possible, involvement in casework. Students are required to attend all workshops offered at the Department of Forensic Medicine during the semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Vanita Parekh

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Sexual assault is addressed in this unit as it pertains to a doctor working in a therapeutic and forensic role with victims. Theoretical and historical perspectives are considered in order to provide a thorough grounding for practical discussions on current legislation and police investigation. The medical role will be examined in detail. Forensic responsibilities are dealt with including specimen collection, laboratory liaison and injury interpretation. The unit will address the medico-legal report and the role of the expert witness in court appearances.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit the student will be expected to:

  1. Provide a comprehensive medical service for a victim of sexual assault.
  2. Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of the forensic responsibilities in sexual assault cases.
  3. Display ability to collect forensic evidence based on theory.
  4. Understand an overview of the laboratory treatment of forensic evidence.
  5. Write a medico-legal report and appear in court under subpoena to assist the court.
  6. Comprehend historical, theorectical and cultural aspects of sexual assault.
  7. Discuss epidemiology and the broad range of circumstances in which sexual assault occurs.

Assessment

Assignments/essays (35%)
Case studies (25%)
Casebook workbook (35%)
Skills evaluation (5%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Morris Odell

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to present the medical issues applicable to road safety. The topics covered include the law and policing practices, driving skills and the impact of alcohol, other drugs and medical conditions on these skills, the effects of ageing on fitness to drive, interpretation of traffic injuries, the principles of traffic engineering and road trauma epidemiology.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. display an understanding of the history of road trauma and the counter measures introduced to combat the road toll;
  2. show familiarity with road safety legislation;
  3. evaluate policing practices impacting on road safety;
  4. demonstrate an understanding of the effects of a range of medical conditions upon driving skills with particular reference to licensing;
  5. evaluate the effects of alcohol and other drugs upon driving skills;
  6. display a comprehension of the procedures and practice of investigating vehicle collisions;
  7. interpret common injury patterns resulting from road trauma;
  8. evaluate blood alcohol and drug levels with regard to the effects on driving skills;
  9. display an understanding of drug toxicology.

Assessment

Assignments / essays (80%)
Presentations (10%)
Casebook workbook (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

This is a postgraduate course restricted to registered medical practitioners.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dimitri Gerostamoulos

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Teaching in this unit aims to develop students' familiarity with the concepts of clinical and post-mortem toxicology. The unit also focuses on the basic pharmacokinetic and pharmacological properties of commonly abused drugs found in forensic medical cases. Emphasis will be on behavioural issues of these drugs and how they relate to forensic practice. Such issues include the effects on cognitive and psychomotor skills in drivers and in the workplace and other adverse reactions attributed to drug misuse.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate a familiarity of the technical terms associated with analytical toxicology;
  2. demonstrate a broad understanding of the range of techniques used in forensic toxicology;
  3. demonstrate an awareness of the type of drugs seen in forensic medical cases;
  4. comprehend the main pharmacological effects of alcohol, amphetamines, cocaine, benzodiazepines, and cannabis with the emphasis on their effects on behaviours, psychomotor control and cognition;
  5. describe and recognise the relevant behavioural effects of common illicit drug combinations and common adverse illicit drug reactions; and
  6. apply this knowledge to forensic cases for the purpose of preparation and presentation to courts.

Assessment

Case study 1 (20%)
Case study 2 (30%)
Presentation (25%)
Workbook (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Luke Streitberg

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to present and discuss the current issues arising from the provision of a medical service in a custodial setting. The topics covered provide insights into the health impacts of penal institutions and the powers and responsibilities of custodians; ethical issues; fitness for interview; fitness for detention; deaths in custody; interpersonal violence and the assessment and management of some frequently presenting medical problems (specifically mental illness and addiction).

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. understand the responsibilities and powers of custodians;
  2. display a knowledge of custodial and penal institutions;
  3. show familiarity with the procedures for investigating complaints by prisoners and the issues surrounding deaths in custody;
  4. comprehend the ethical issues of the doctor/patient relationship in a custodial setting;
  5. conduct an assessment of an individual's fitness to be interviewed or detained in custody;
  6. recognise and manage a range of medical problems presenting in the custodial setting.

Assessment

Assignments / essays (30%)
Case studies (40%)
Presentations (10%)
Casebook workbook (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Vanita Parekh

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Developing and implementing adult sexual assault services must be founded upon evidence based clinical practice and an understanding of a variety of perspectives. Advanced Issues in Sexual Violence will provide insight into a variety of perspectives of adult sexual assault including local, national and international.

The following topics will be taught within this unit:

  • Patient, counselling, policing and legal perspectives of sexual violence.
  • Global aspects of sexual assault.
  • Sexual assault medical service provision; theory, models and practice.
  • Quality assurance in the provision of sexual assault services.
  • Vicarious trauma theory and practice.
  • Sexual violence research, key issues, data and sources.

On successful completion of the unit, students will be expected to have developed a broad knowledge of the published data in relation to local, national and international perspectives of adult sexual assault. They will have acquired the knowledge and skills required to provide input into the delivery of adult sexual assault medical services and teaching programs.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit a student will be expected to have acquired the knowledge and skill sets to:

  1. Establish and maintain an adult sexual assault service.
  2. Identify and debate sexual assault issues from a global perspective.
  3. Describe the key issues of adult sexual assault from the perspectives of a victim, a counsellor, an investigator and a legal practitioner.
  4. Understand and implement strategies to deal with vicarious trauma.
  5. Develop and deliver training in the field of adult sexual services.
  6. Describe and discuss the key literature in the field of sexual violence.
  7. Understand research in the field of sexual assault.

Assessment

Assignment (30%)
Participation in a topic related debate (10%)
Presentation (20%)
Dissertion and oral structured interview (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vanita Parekh and Dr Richard Bassed

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

A registered medical practitioner who is involved in assessing (or may be required to assess) victims of sexual violence. The medical practitioner must be able to show evidence of working or training in the field of sexual assault medicine. Successful completion of FOR5005 with a grade of credit or above.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Online)
Southbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Southbank Full year 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Synopsis

This unit offers students the opportunity to apply and consolidate the knowledge and professional skills they have acquired through the course within the practical context of forensic medicine. It requires independent learning and research by the student while fostering practical knowledge and skills related to the student's field of activity. Students undertake a project with a forensic medicine focus, in the area which they choose.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Project description to be submitted for approval three months prior to the beginning of the semester.
  2. Project description to contain a summary of project rationale and aims, any ethical or privacy issues, data accessibility, methods, supervision details and if required details of statistical methods.
  3. Research ethics permission has been obtained prior to the beginning of the semester.
  4. Literature review submitted for comment at the end of the first month of the semester.
  5. A brief monthly progress report to be submitted to the chief examiner during the semester.
  6. Presentation of the research project at the in-house session at the end of the semester.
  7. Tabling of all research notes and draft scientific papers.

Assessment

Project (6,000 words) (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Richard Bassed and Professor Olaf Drummer

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Forensic medicine - Completion of core units for the Masters of Forensic Medicine - Distinction level.
Forensic odontology - As above plus satisfactory completion of FOR4007 and FOR4009.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jennifer 'Anne' Smith

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For further information please contact the Postgraduate Course Administrator via email postgrad.courses@vifm.org or phone 03 9684 4115.

Synopsis

Advanced issues in non-accidental injury of children aims to provide an opportunity for students to study the epidemiology and frameworks for evaluation of children when serious and/or complex non-accidental injury is suspected. This unit will enable students to study the theories around injury causation with a focus on complex head injury and other life threatening injuries in children. Clinical findings, patho-physiology and investigation results will be studied. Students will explore controversies surrounding the evaluation of complex injury including shaking injury.

Major Content:

  • Abusive head trauma in infants (impact, acceleration-deceleration and shaking injury, asphyxia, hypoxic-ischaemic brain injury, intracranial bleeding, skull fracture)
  • Eye injuries
  • Neck injuries
  • Poisoning / Toxicology
  • Fatal child abuse (homicide and fatal neglect)
  • Fabricated or Induced Illness by Carers (FIIC)

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of inflicted neural and ocular trauma in childhood.
  2. Identify the key procedures and issues of child death investigations.
  3. Discuss factitious illnesses in childhood with particular reference to the medico-legal issues.
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of toxicology as it applies to a paediatric population.
  5. Identify and discuss theories of causation, current controversies and areas of uncertainty in the field of non-accidental injury of childhood.

Assessment

Case study: Critical analysis of forensic principles and procedures using case based discussion (25%)
Case study: Reflection on decision-making in clinical practice (30%)
Essay (3,000 words) (35%)
Oral presentation (15 minute) (10%)
Group discussion (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Richard Bassed and Dr Jennifer 'Anne' Smith

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2015 (Day)
Southbank Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Stephen Cordner

Synopsis

Autopsy techniques will be taught via experiential learning in the mortuary, with experienced practitioners from the VIFM acting as tutors/supervisors. Over the 12 months of training, the student will be required to apply the learned techniques to different types of cases, allocated to ensure as wide a range of experience as possible is gained. Students will also be given practical instruction in techniques to forensic odontology and anthropology that are used to support forensic pathology practice, particularly in identifying unknown remains.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Accurately assess the significance of contextual information contained in medical records and other relevant documentation and apply it to interpretation of autopsy findings.
  2. Show proficiency in standard autopsy techniques, applied to routine coroners cases.
  3. Show familiarity with specialised techniques applied in specialised cases.
  4. Be able to recognize and interpret disease and injury in standard and specialised cases.
  5. Be able to present and discuss autopsy findings with colleagues.
  6. Accurately analyse, interpret and document autopsy findings in autopsy reports for use in the coronial system.
  7. Show familiarity with specialized forensic odontology and anthropology techniques.

Assessment

Performance of autopsies and presentation of findings (25%)
Oral and written examination (50%)
Casebook (25%)

Workload requirements

Students will attend regular pathologists meetings approx 40 hours, 200 hours in mortuary engaged in practical work and observation. Approx 72 hours individual study and case book preparation.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Enrolment by Department of Forensic Medicine permission only.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Ranson

Synopsis

Coronial and other medico-legal death investigation systems

This topic provides a framework and wider context for the practice of forensic pathology and covers:

  • Actual and theoretical models for death investigation systems, using examples from Australia, other jurisdictions and recent reform proposals in the UK including issues of organisation and administration, investigation powers and inquests/formal hearings.
  • Relationships with forensic pathology and science services.
  • Management of bodies and tissues.
  • Interaction with next of kin.

Death Scene Investigation

This topic will provide students with theoretical knowledge and practical skills to observe and analyse evidence at death scenes, enhancing their ability to work effectively with other participants in the process and assist in answering questions about the cause and the circumstances of deaths under investigation. These skills will be applied to a range of special scenes to provide students with as varied and relevant experience as possible:

  • Deaths in custody
  • Hospitals and other health institutions
  • Transport related deaths
  • Mass disaster
  • War crimes death investigation
  • Industrial deaths
  • Fire scenes
  • Explosion scenes
  • Exhumations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate knowledge of different models for death investigation systems.
  2. Understand how issues of organisation and administration of death investigation systems and management of key processes impact on forensic pathology practice.
  3. Understand the principles of death scene investigation and the roles of the relevant participants in the investigation.
  4. Have acquired skills necessary for effectively observing and analyzing death scene evidence.
  5. Be able to apply these skills to different types of death scenes.

Assessment

Assignments (30%)
Case study presentation (40%)
Oral examination (30%)

Workload requirements

60 contact hours (tutorials and attendance at scenes), 50 hours of case and practical work and approximately 46 hours for individual study, assignments and case book preparation.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Enrolment by Department of Forensic Medicine permission only.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Beverley Copnelland Dr Susan Lee (Peninsula)

Synopsis

Research is integral to nursing practice. As leaders in clinical practice, education or management, it is essential that Master's-prepared nurses have the skills to effectively consume, produce and apply research knowledge to ensure that practice is based on appropriate and critiqued evidence. This unit will provide students with the theoretical knowledge required to evaluate research evidence for use in clinical practice, education or management, and will prepare students to undertake their own research project.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Discuss the contributions of research to the nursing knowledge base and to patient outcomes;
  2. Identify relevant and significant nursing problems for investigation;
  3. Critically analyse various approaches to nursing research;
  4. Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of different methodologies and research designs;
  5. Locate, critically appraise and synthesis research evidence relating to nursing problems;
  6. Analyse the principles of ethical research conduct and discuss their application in practice.

Assessment

Written assignment (4,000 words) (40%)
Written assignment (5,000 words) (60%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ingrid Brooks

Synopsis

The unit gives nursing graduates a program which combines a strong theoretical and practical focus to health management and leadership. Topics on management and administration include: power, authority and politics; leadership; people in health service organisations; change and organisational effectiveness; quality improvement; governance and clinical risk management.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse extant theories of leadership and management
  2. Compare and contrast concepts of leadership and management
  3. Critically analyse the impact of the theoretical concepts of leadership and management to quality patient outcomes
  4. Examine the impact of health policy on nursing management
  5. Critique extant theories of power and their application to health care settings
  6. Appraise the characteristics of effective organisations through the use of continuous improvement strategies
  7. Critically analyse theories of change management and their application to health care settings.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (3,500 - 4,000 words) (30%)
Written assignment 2 (5,000 - 6,000 words) (50%)
In class or online presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Mark Hedger

Synopsis

This unit provides students with a theoretical and practical background to reproductive endocrinology. Information about the general organisation and regulation of the reproductive endocrine system will be taught including hormones produced by the pituitary, hypothalamus, ovary and testis and their respective interactions, regulation and mode of action. The role of growth factors will also be considered. Students will also learn about the ethical considerations required in human and animal experimentation, acquire basic laboratory and tissue culture skills and complete a biostatistics series to learn how to interpret and analyse biomedical research data.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. acquire the basic theoretical background and practical knowledge about the components of the reproductive endocrine system;
  2. describe current concepts relating to animal and human ethics, laboratory safety, use of library facilities and critical analysis of scientific journals;
  3. demonstrate proficiency in basic laboratory skills associated with research in reproductive biology;
  4. demonstrate the appropriate use of statistics to analyse data in reproductive science;
  5. demonstrate skills in report writing and the presentation of scientific data.

Assessment

Examination (2.25h) (40%)
Practical report (25%)
Biostatistics assignment (25%)
Peerwise (6%)
General summary (250 words) of a published article (4%)

Workload requirements

This unit is conducted over six weeks in the first semester. For the first five weeks, students are required to attend lectures and practical session. It is expected that all students, including part-time students, attend all the lectures and practical classes from Week 1 to Week 6 inclusive.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Cellular and whole organ events involved in reproductive endocrinology and development, and the interactions between the reproductive organs are covered in this unit. The development and differentiation of the male and female reproductive systems through the examination of oocyte and follicular development; ovarian cycles including oestrous and menstrual cycles; testicular function and cell/cell interactions in the testis and fertilisation are also taught. Students will also undertake a research project to gain experience in planning projects and reporting findings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate a basic theoretical background and knowledge about the cellular and whole organ events involved in reproductive endocrinology, and development, and the interactions between the reproductive organs;
  2. describe and explain current concepts relating to animal and human ethics, laboratory safety, use of library facilities and critical analysis of scientific journals;
  3. develop research laboratory practices in reproductive biology;
  4. develop skills in report writing and the presentation of scientific data.

Assessment

Examination (2.25 hours) (60% )
Critical review of a journal article 1 (20%)
Critical review of a journal article 2 (20%)

Workload requirements

This unit will be held over 3 weeks in first semester. Students are required to attend all lectures, tutorials and journal review sessions. In addition attendance is required from 9 am to 5 pm for a one week practical laboratory project.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Hayley Dickinson and Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

All aspects of human pregnancy from implantation to the puerperium. Unit taught by both basic and clinical scientists, thereby affording the student an appreciation of the close integration between the disciplines. The module will be taught in four sections: implantation and placentation, the foetus, the mother and politics of pregnancy.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe and discuss the pathophysiology of human pregnancy in terms of both the mother and her foetus;
  2. explain the processes regulating implantation and placental development and function, foetal growth and development, neonatal adaptation, maternal adaptation to pregnancy and puerperal changes and the regulation of parturition;
  3. describe common aberrations in normal physiology and development including foetal abnormality and prenatal diagnosis, recurrent miscarriage, pregnancy hypertension, preterm labour, puerperal disorders and neonatal care;
  4. give examples of, and discuss, some of the key unanswered questions in perinatal research and gain an insight into the research strategies capable of providing new developments;
  5. review and explain the theory that underpins the laboratory techniques of dispersed cell culture and immunohistochemistry.

Assessment

Examination (2.25h) (40%)
Literature review for the research project (2,500 words) (50%)
Prepare title and abstract for published article (title and abstract removed) (10%)

Workload requirements

This unit will be held over 3 weeks in first semester. Students are required to attend all lectures, tutorials and journal review sessions. In addition attendance is required from 9 am to 5 pm for a one week practical laboratory project.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Builds on earlier course work concerning the basic mechanisms in reproductive biology. Demonstrating to students how the knowledge of the basic mechanisms can be applied to key problems in reproductive health. Disorders of sexual development and the normal processes involved in puberty and the menopause plus reproductive toxicology are covered. Key elements of sexually transmitted disease and the HIV pandemic discussions will provide the student with the pathological processes involved in these disorders. Reproductive disorders covered include the common reproductive cancers, menstrual disorders, infertility and erectile dysfunction.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe and discuss in detail the disorders of sexual development and the normal processes involved in puberty and the menopause;
  2. identify and explain the key elements in the transfer of sexually transmitted disease and the HIV pandemic;
  3. outline the mechanisms involved in reproductive cancers, menstrual disorders, erectile dysfunction and infertility, the current approaches to the management of these disorders, and the implications of these disorders for the health industry;
  4. communicate confidently and effectively the knowledge gained in this unit.

Assessment

Examination (2.25h) (50%)
Research project oral presentation (25%)
Minor project research plan (1,500 words) (25%)

Workload requirements

This unit will be held over six weeks in the second semester. Students are required to attend all lectures and tutorials. Student are also required to present an oral presentation.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Meachem and Dr Simon Chu

Synopsis

Regulating the size of a population and the rate of population growth is a major problem for many countries. Ensuring infertile couples have the opportunity to form a family is also an important issue. The current trends in population growth and the policies introduced in countries to regulate this growth is explored as well as the extent of infertility and the legislation introduced nationally and internationally to regulate its treatment. The medical, legal and ethical aspects of present and future methods available to control fertility (contraception, contragestion and abortion) and for overcoming infertility (assisted reproductive technology) will be addressed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. explain and discuss the demographic trends and policies relating to world population;
  2. describe and evaluate the methods available to women and men to regulate their fertility and compare the advantages and disadvantages of these methods;
  3. assess and compare the effectiveness of the new methods of contraception under development;
  4. explain and discuss the ethical and legal issues surrounding the regulation of fertility and infertility;
  5. communicate this information and show an ability to critically evaluate it.

Assessment

Examination (2.25 hours) (40%)
Critical review of a journal article 1 (20%)
Critical review of a journal article 2 (20%)
Travel grant application & abstract (20%)

Workload requirements

This unit will be held over six weeks in the second semester. Students are required to attend all lectures and tutorials. Students must also present 3 journal reviews and attend a round table discussion.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

This unit will focus on the reproductive biology and breeding of animals. The lectures and tutorials will build on an understanding of basic reproductive physiology and endocrinology to explore ways in which reproduction can be manipulated to increase the reproductive efficiency and genetic gain in farm animals and animals in danger of becoming extinct. How this information can be applied to the monitoring and regulation of reproduction in pets, zoo animals, Australian native animals and vertebrate pest species will also be explored. The approaches that will be examined include hormonal and immunological manipulation of reproduction, artificial insemination (AI), in vitro fertilization (IVF), intra-cytoplasmic sperm. A facility that is using these approaches will allow students to see first hand how fundamental information can be applied to achieve environmental and/or commercial outcomes.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the importance of reproductive biology and genetics in the management of farm animals, endangered and critically endangered animals, pets, zoo animals, Australian native animals and vertebrate pest species;
  2. recall and discuss the techniques that are available to manipulate reproduction in animals, including the hormonal and immunological manipulation of reproduction, artificial insemination (AI), in vitro fertilisation (IVF), intra-cytoplasmic sperm injection (ICSI), the cryopreservation of semen, and embryo production and transfer;
  3. explain the limitations of the procedures that are applied to manipulate reproduction in animals and discuss the use of various techniques for improving breeding and population genetics in animals;
  4. discuss the commercial, environmental and ethical issues related to the use of reproductive technologies on animals;
  5. evaluate contemporary research papers and appreciate how an understanding of comparative reproduction and artificial breeding techniques can be applied to achieve environmental and/or commercial outcomes.

Assessment

Examination (2 hours) (30%)
Research project report (3,000 words) (50%)
Prepare title and abstract for published article (title and abstract removed) (10%)
Laboratory practical questions derived from sessions (10%)

Workload requirements

This unit will be held over six weeks in second semester. In addition to attendance at lectures and tutorials students are required to attend practical demonstrations and site visits. Attendance from 9 am to 5 pm for a 3 day laboratory project is also required.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

The new reproductive technologies are now widely used for the treatment of human infertility and for prenatal diagnosis of familial genetic disorders. These techniques involve in vitro fertilization (IVF) and therefore require a sound knowledge of reproductive endocrinology, cell biology and specific techniques involved in the handling and maturation of human sperm and ova. Micromanipulation is an important new method required for fertilization (intracytoplasmic sperm injection - ICSI) and chromosome or genetic diagnosis (embryo biopsy for fluorescent in situ hybridisation - FISH, or polymerase chain reaction - PCR amplification of genomic DNA). This unit also involves the new and rapidly changing areas of cell and tissue cryobiology and transplantation. Specific tests are now also evolving for assessment of embryo viability, particularly now that embryos can be grown successfully to late preimplantation stages of development. These new techniques are presented in the context of laboratory quality assurance and the ethical and legal frameworks of local legislation and regulation.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the clinical and laboratory techniques required for successful IVF, the reasons for the methods used, and why quality assurance is a premium for clinical IVF services;
  2. comprehend the limitations of the procedures applied in human infertility and genetic diagnosis;
  3. understand and have experienced micromanipulation, the handling of embryos (animal) and their cryopreservation, and have used the FISH technique to identify chromosomes in single cells;
  4. have learned about ethics and the laws governing IVF, and assessed new articles on IVF;
  5. have worked together to solve a problem and presented their solution as a poster; 6. be familiar with evaluating and communicating a critical review of contemporary scientific research papers.

Assessment

Examination (2.25 hours) (50%)
Laboratory practical questions derived from sessions (20%)
Poster preparation and presentation (25%)
Peerwise (5%)

Workload requirements

This unit is held over 6 weeks in second semester. Students are required to attend all lectures, interactive sessions, practical sessions and a site visit to Monash IVF.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ben Smith

Synopsis

This unit provides opportunities to examine the impact of multiple factors that contribute to the health of populations, known collectively as the social determinants of health, and to develop knowledge and skills in program planning for health promotion. Students will examine the values and principles that guide contemporary health promotion and its capacity to influence the determinants of health. They will develop skills in needs assessment, priority setting, designating targets for change, using evidence and theory to make intervention choices and establishing systems for program management. The roles played by partnerships, capacity building and participation will be explored, and the steps toward improving program sustainability examined. Attention will be given to the opportunities and challenges presented in different organisational settings and social and cultural contexts.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Define health promotion from differing perspectives and explain the principles that underpin contemporary health promotion;
  2. Describe and discuss a range of frameworks for promoting health and how they are used in health promotion programs;
  3. Critically reflect on the link between the social determinants of health and social equity, health inequities and the ethical project of health promotion;
  4. Describe the steps in comprehensive program planning as a basis for action to address health determinants;
  5. Identify the information sources that can be used to identify health needs, assess determinants and select targets for change;
  6. Demonstrate an understanding of priority setting and specification of goals, objectives and strategies based on a logic model;
  7. Demonstrate the use of evidence and theory in all stages of planning, including evaluation.

Assessment

Review of literature (30%)
Case study (20%)
Development of program plan (50%)

Workload requirements

In addition to weekly activities and online discussions, two non-compulsory on-campus/on-site study blocks are offered.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ben Smith

Synopsis

Program evaluation can provide valuable evidence to improve the delivery, reach and impact of public health strategies. This unit will equip students with skills to evaluate disease prevention and health promotion strategies using a range of methodologies. Levels of evaluation will be examined, including formative, process, impact and outcome evaluation, and the range of qualitative and quantitative methods suitable for answering different evaluation questions will be identified. The complementary roles of different methodologies will be highlighted, with consideration given to approaches that will facilitate learning for practice. There will be exploration and discussion of the evaluation challenges posed by the complexities of public health action and the contexts in which it is carried out.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Distinguish between levels of evaluation recognise how these are linked to program plans;
  2. Select qualitative designs that are appropriate for different evaluation questions;
  3. Identify the range of quantitative study designs that can be employed and the strengths and weaknesses of these for different strategies and contexts;
  4. Describe methods to measure indicators at all levels of evaluation;
  5. Develop survey questions and interview guides that demonstrate an understanding of measurement quality;
  6. Develop a comprehensive evaluation plan;
  7. Discuss the steps entailed in evaluation management.

Assessment

Comparison and analysis of evaluation design options (30%)
Development of impact measurement instrument (30%)
Evaluation plan (40%)

Workload requirements

In addition to weekly activities and online discussions, two non-compulsory on-campus/on-site study blocks are offered.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Health literacy is both a public health issue and the agendas of national health policy. One in five Australians do not have adequate literacy skills to participate effectively in everyday life and even fewer have high levels of health literacy, which is fundamental for good health. Health literacy involves a range of skills and knowledge including the sourcing and interpretation of health information, seeking of appropriate care and managing health decisions. At more upstream levels, health services need to become more responsive to health literacy issues and develop approaches to ensure their health communications are accessible to people of all literacies. In this unit students will examine health literacy concepts, measures of literacy, tools for readability and increasing understanding, and practical approaches for services to become health literate organisations.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to demonstrate and communicate a broad, critical conceptual and practical understanding of:

  1. the theoretical approaches to understanding health and other types of literacy
  2. the approaches to measurement of health literacy and their validity
  3. the efficacy of strategies to address health literacy
  4. project development that enables health literacy to be addressed utilizing a settings-based health promotion approach.

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


24 points, SCA Band 2, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Assessment

Major thesis
minor coursework as specified by the enrolling department.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Karen Adams

Synopsis

This unit develops and strengthens practical skills required for implementing Indigenous equity. Delivery of effective, high standard services to Indigenous people is one of the enduring challenges facing a variety organisations and providers. In this unit students will explore and engage in practical skills of: cultural safety; partnership building; organisational development and analysis of the strengths based evidence. Students will be provided opportunity to critically analyse current practices in Indigenous equity, design evidence based advocacy and create a strategic change plan of relevance to their professional work and aspirations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain cultural safety and intercultural communication.
  2. Critically analyse policies and standards shaping Indigenous equity relevant to the student's area of professional expertise.
  3. Critically analyse Indigenous populations and statistics relevant to the student's area of professional expertise.
  4. Critically analyse partnership processes with Indigenous peoples.
  5. Construct a change management plan to incorporate principles of human rights and equity relevant to Indigenous issues.

Assessment

Case study reflection (1,200 words) (20%)
Letter to editor (500 words) (15%)
Peer review change plan (1,200 words) (15%)
Strategic change plan (3,000 words) (50%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: a minimum of 10 hours of personal study per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Enrolment in a postgraduate program.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)mnhs-student-admin@monash.edu

Notes

Please note that the first point of contact for this unit should be your Course Coordinator in the School or Department in which you are enrolled.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to equip health practitioners with the skills to confidently and successfully conduct professional focused research of interest to them. Students will review existing research literature, create a research question, select an appropriate methodology and finalise a research protocol for institutional ethics approval.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Synthesise and refine critical arguments in relation to the scientific literature of relevance to the research question.
  2. Demonstrate a critical awareness of the moral, ethical and legal responsibilities of scientific investigation.
  3. Refine a research question grounded in the critical review of the literature.
  4. Justify an appropriate research methodology.
  5. Create and refine a rigorous and feasible research protocol that includes data collection methods and participant recruitment procedures.
  6. Prepare a submission for ethics committee approval.

Assessment

Literature review (4,000 - 5,000 words) (50%)
Research proposal or methodological chapter (3,000 words) (35%)
Ethical issues critique or a critique of methodological rigour (1,500 words) (15%)
Completion of an ethics application (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

On-campus and Off-campus:
1 hour per fortnight consultation with supervisor either face to face or electronic, 11 hours per week directed research activities which may include on-line tasks (project dependent), 12 hours per week for self-directed study.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Nursing, Health professional education

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a postgraduate program in the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)mnhs-student-admin@monash.edu

Notes

Please note that the first point of contact for this unit should be your Course Coordinator in the School or Department in which you are enrolled.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to allow students to implement the research protocol developed in the context of the prerequisite unit Research in Advanced Health Care Practice. Students will develop skills in gathering data, interrogating it using acceptable analytical processes and developing an informed and defensible conclusion. Through an iterative and collaborative intellectual process with their supervisor, students will create a research report which they will communicate in written format to a wider professional audience.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Complete the collection of data in accordance with the norms of research informed investigation and the boundaries of any ethics approval.
  2. Organise, analyse and interpret data meaningfully and according to research norms.
  3. Synthesise critical arguments in relation to the existing literature about the topic.
  4. Demonstrate writing skills that meet the academic standards associated with a research informed investigation.
  5. Communicate research findings to a wider professional audience.
  6. Effectively manage time and resources to achieve pre-determined goals.

Assessment

Mid enrolment oral presentation (20 minutes) (20%)
Final report (no less than 8,000 - 12,000 words depending on the academic specialism) (80%)
Documented supervisory meetings (Hurdle)
Mid enrolment progress report (Hurdle)
Draft report (Hurdle)

This unit will be awarded a non-examinable grade of NE if the work forms part of the final minor thesis submission in MAP5002.

Workload requirements

On-campus and Off-campus:
1 hour per fortnight consultation with supervisor either face to face or electronic, 11 hours per week directed research activities which may include on-line tasks (project dependent), 12 hours per week for self-directed study.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Nursing, Health professional education

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a postgraduate program in the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)mnhs-student-admin@monash.edu

Notes

Please note that the first point of contact for this unit should be your Course Coordinator in the School or Department in which you are enrolled.

Synopsis

This unit is the final unit in a sequence of three units designed for students who have elected to complete a minor thesis and use the study as evidence of independent research experience in an application for entry into the PhD program. Using the research protocol developed in the context of the prerequisite unit MAP5000 and the project completed for MAP5001 students will develop advanced skills in gathering and interrogating data using acceptable analytical processes and developing an informed and defensible conclusion.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Complete the collection of data in accordance with the moral, ethical and legal responsibilities of scientific investigation, the research paradigm informing the research process and the overarching ethics approval.
  2. Organise, analyse and interpret data meaningfully and according to the accepted practices within the research paradigm informing the research process.
  3. Synthesise critical arguments in relation to the existing literature about the topic.
  4. Generate defensible conclusions in respect to the significance of any research findings.
  5. Demonstrate writing skills that meet the academic standards associated with a thesis.
  6. Communicate research findings to a wider professional audience.
  7. Manage time and resources in a collaborative manner.
  8. Defend an informed position relative to a defined body of knowledge.

Assessment

Minor research thesis (20,000 words)
Public defence of thesis (15 minute oral) (Hurdle)
Documented supervisory meetings (Hurdle)
Mid enrolment progress report (Hurdle)
Minor thesis draft (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

On-campus and Off-campus:
1 hour per fortnight consultation with supervisor either face to face or electronic, 11 hours per week directed research activities which may include on-line tasks (thesis dependent), 12 hours per week for self-directed study.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Nursing, Health professional education

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a postgraduate program in the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Elica Ristevski

Synopsis

This is the foundation unit in the Masters of Advanced Health Care Practice. The Unit is designed for health care professionals who aspire to lead the management, design and delivery of health care services and/or develop health care programs in a clinical context that impact on patient outcomes. This unit focuses on the necessary knowledge, skills and behaviours for advanced health care practice and management. The unit examines key issues in:

  1. fitness to practice for the advanced health care professional, including medico-legal issues and compliance, and professional behaviour;
  2. using research frameworks and clinical practice guidelines as evidence to inform practice;
  3. leadership and management issues, particularly quality, patient safety, patient experiences, benchmarking and communication within digital and practice settings; and
  4. delivering and evaluating patient and consumer centred health care, with a focus empowerment and the advanced practitioner as educator of patients, consumers and peers.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Examine the roles and medico-legal responsibilities of advanced health care practitioners within their professional settings.
  2. Differentiate between ethical, inter-professional and cultural dimensions of professional behaviour.
  3. Describe the key skills required for effective digital and non-digital communication within their practice settings.
  4. Apply risk management principles to the prevention of adverse events.
  5. Identify the relationship of benchmarking and patient experience studies to quality improvement.
  6. Apply principles of leadership and management to their practice setting.
  7. Apply evidence summaries and clinical practice guidelines to the review and implementation of patient centred care in advanced health care practice.
  8. Plan complex health care interventions including evaluation of their effectiveness.
  9. Design learner-centred educational activities appropriate to their practice setting.

Assessment

Critical incident report (10%) (1,000 words)
iSAP- Integrating Science and Practice (2 x 10% = 20%) (2,000 words)
Develop a leadership and change management plan to address an area of interest (35%) (3,500 words)
Develop a learning and teaching program/presentation for either patients or peers which examines/introduces new/innovative intervention/clinical practice (35%) (3,500 words)

Workload requirements

24 hours/week

For this distance education unit, students are expected to undertake their work during private study time. Students will be expected to log onto Moodle on a regular basis for announcements and updates. Students will need to undertake readings (available via Moodle) and view online materials (e.g. PowerPoint/audio/visual material). Students will also be required to undertake regular formative activities. Students will be required to undertake all assessment activities as these are all hurdle requirements to ensure that all learning objectives are covered. The assessments will require preparation ranging from readings, writing and undertaking online activities (quizzes and forum discussions).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith and Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with an overview of the basic embryological knowledge that is essential for working in animal and human IVF laboratories. Theoretical information about hormonal control of reproduction, folliculogenesis, gametogenesis, fertilisation, implantation, early embryo development to gastrulation, germ and somatic cell lineages and also epigenetics from a cellular, genetic and molecular perspective will be presented and discussed in lectures and tutorials. Also an overview on potential stem cell therapies discussing the production and use of human embryonic stem cells, comparing with stem cells from adult and foetal origin will be given.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify and describe in detail the processes of spermatogenesis, hormonal control of reproduction and fertilisation;
  2. describe and discuss the cellular, genetic and molecular aspects of embryonic development and differentiation to a level required by a human IVF program or a research laboratory;
  3. define epigenetics and, using cell differentiation as an example, explain its importance in causing phenotypic and gene expression changes without change in nuclear DNA sequence;
  4. describe in detail the events involved in the transformation of an embryo from the 2-cell stage to hatching of the late blastocyst;
  5. explain how the trophoblast forms and the process of implantation;
  6. identify and clearly explain the process of embryonic development from the inner cell mass to gastrulation and formation of the trilaminar embryo;
  7. discuss other embryonic manipulations and explain the potential effects of epigenetics on the development of an embryo and subsequent offspring;
  8. explain and discuss stem cell therapies, and be aware of the differences between adult, foetal and embryonic stem cells;
  9. demonstrate an ability to critically and constructively analyse research data in various aspects of embryology;
  10. communicate their knowledge clearly and effectively.

Assessment

Written journal review comparison (35%)
Written exam (2 1/2 hours) (60%)
Peerwise (5%)

Workload requirements

16 hours contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith and Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit will provide information about the infertile patient and the assisted reproduction technologies used to treat infertility. Students will identify the procedures performed in an IVF clinic and the roles of those involved. They will study the normal events of oocyte production in vivo and learn how these events are manipulated to increase the success of in vitro technologies. The unit also focuses on the outcomes of assisted reproductive technologies and its impact on the offspring generated. The theoretical basis of techniques such as oocyte collection and handling, oocyte maturation in vitro, preparation of oocytes for IVF, standard insemination, assessment of fertilization, and the handling, assessment, selection and transfer of embryos are presented and discussed in lectures, tutorials, and seminars. On-campus students will demonstrate knowledge of OHSE issues and aseptic techniques, and develop skills in laboratory maintenance, use of equipment, superovulation of mice and collection of embryos, embryo handling (mouse) and semen analysis (human).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. recognise and explain the cause and impact of infertility and infertility treatment on patient couples and offspring
  2. identify and describe the roles of ART clinic staff: clinicians, scientific directors, embryologists, nurse coordinators, day surgery nurses, counsellors
  3. describe, trouble-shoot and audit the clinical processes in human assisted reproduction, including techniques for manipulating follicular growth, retrieving oocytes, analysing and preparing semen for insemination, assessing embryo development and embryo transfer
  4. identify causes of human male infertility and explain the treatment options, using hormonal and IVF based therapies
  5. demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of OHSE regulations
  6. apply basic laboratory skills, such as performing dilutions, calculating the concentration of a solution, determining the molarity of a solution, testing pH and osmolarity, preparing media for in vitro culture and correct use and maintenance of equipment such as incubators, centrifuges and microscopes
  7. show competence in super ovulating and mating mice, harvesting gametes and creating embryos using in vitro fertilization techniques, collecting and culturing embryos and assessing their stage of development and development potential
  8. analyze human semen for parameters such as sperm motility, concentration, morphology and DNA integrity.

Assessment

Written exam (2 1/2 hours) (45%)
Oral journal review presentation (20%)
Statistical exam (three parts) (15%)
Semen analysis written practical assignment (15%)
Peerwise (5%)

Workload requirements

24 hours contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study, practical skills training) (on-campus).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mulyoto Pangestu and Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skills and opportunity to design and optimise embryo culture systems to ensure the best pregnancy outcomes for couples undertaking infertility treatment. This is achieved through a detailed understanding of critical cellular processes, with an aim to maximize normal embryo growth potential while minimizing stress. Students will learn the methods needed to accurately evaluate embryo quality and develop the ability to micro-manage IVF processes. This unit also provides students with a detailed understanding of cryopreservation techniques and the ability to critically discuss and evaluate these techniques and cryo-banking systems for oocytes, sperm, ovarian and testicular tissue and embryos in human IVF programs. The physico-chemical properties of permeant and non permeant cryoprotectants will be discussed in context with the slow cooling and vitrification methods.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. explain how to control and optimise the environment of gametes/embryos in the laboratory.
  2. describe the various quality control tests that are used routinely in an IVF laboratory, such as mouse bioassays, sperm survival tests, etc.
  3. identify and interpret scoring systems for the selection of good from bad quality embryos from the 2-cell stage through to hatching blastocysts.
  4. classify maturation and fertilization status of oocytes and early stage embryos and identify cell numbers in fixed and stained embryos.
  5. analyse and report data from lab books (on-campus) or clinical data (off-campus) in abstract form.
  6. critically assess the techniques of gamete and embryo cryopreservation as used in clinical human in vitro fertilization programs.
  7. identify and explain the physico-chemical changes in cells during cryopreservation.

Assessment

Written examination (2 1/2 hours) (40%)
Literature review (3,000 words) on research project topic (30%)
Oral journal review (15%)
Assignment on importance and composition of culture media (10%)
Peerwise (5%)

Workload requirements

20 hours contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mulyoto Pangestu and Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

The theoretical aspects of IVF, embryo production and cryopreservation will be covered in the previous unit reinforced by extensive practical training The theoretical knowledge gained in slow cooling and vitrification techniques will also enhanced by practical training. Students will freeze, thaw and analyse sperm samples, oocytes and embryos Students will gain a better understanding of media components by making and designing their own media. This unit enables students to develop and enhance their embryo handling skills.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have a broad theoretical knowledge about the components of culture systems competently demonstrate skills in preparing media suites for in vitro culture of embryos
  2. show competence in handling mouse oocytes and embryos and be able to perform mouse IVF using epididymal sperm
  3. develop practical skills in the techniques of oocyte maturation, sperm preparation by gradient and swim up, and insemination and IVF using frozen thawed ejaculated sperm using ovine gametes Be able to demonstrate practical competence in the techniques of vitrification and slow cooling of embryos and gametes and to plan experiments to compare different freezing methods
  4. have the skills to critically analyse research papers in cryopreservation related to human reproduction.

Assessment

Practical exams on:
Embryo handling (20%)
IVF (20%)
Vitrification (30%)
Research plan (20%)
Lab book / Lab etiquette (10%)

Workload requirements

30 hours contact per week (research,tutorials, self-directed study, practical skill training.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit provides students with a detailed understanding of how to establish and equip an IVF laboratory and the quality control and quality assurance practises required to run an effective IVF service. New insights into the quality management framework for an embryology laboratory will allow students to understand and develop techniques for continuous quality improvement in their future workplaces, and to achieve ambitious goals. Knowledge gained in this unit is readily transferable into other areas of laboratory and research activities. Students will have the opportunity to visit IVF laboratories during a designated 'work experience' week and observe how they operate, what techniques are used and which services are offered. A report and an informal presentation (not assessed) on their site visit will enable students to share their experiences and compare the differences in techniques and practices between clinics.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. know and explain the principals of total quality management and apply the concepts in a laboratory setting in order to achieve continuous quality improvement
  2. identify the equipment required to run an effective IVF laboratory and justify equipment needs
  3. simulate the design of an IVF laboratory and its location within an IVF clinic
  4. review national and international guidelines for establishing a quality ART facility
  5. predict, measure and solve problems that may arise in an IVF laboratory.

Assessment

Implementation of a new procedure (30%)
Redesigning standard operating procedures (30%)
Troubleshooting (35%)
Data logging (5%)

Workload requirements

6 hours contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study, mock audits), 2 - 5 days IVF lab visits (on-site).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt, Dr Mulyoto Pangestu, Mrs Penny Chen and Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Students will conduct the practical aspects of their minor research project in this unit. At the completion of the research, the students will compile and analyse their data using appropriate statistical methodology. The students will interpret their results and write up a research report. Students will also present their data in poster form. This unit will also provide students with training in the preparation of sperm for intracytoplasmic sperm injection (ICSI), the identification of spermatids, spermatocytes and other cell types recovered from testicular biopsies, and the assessment of fertilization. They will also be given practical training in ICSI mouse gametes using a variety of micromanipulation tools and instruments
On completion, students will be familiar with research methods including project planning, conducting laboratory-based research, data collection, data analysis, using appropriate statistical methods, and preparation of a research report in the style of a journal article. They will also receive a sound training in ICSI.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. perform a minor research project, apply appropriate statistical analysis, write up the findings, and compare to other findings in current literature
  2. identify applications of, and be skilled in the preparation of, micromanipulation instruments
  3. perform ICSI
  4. identify methods used for the preparation of sperm from ejaculates and testicular biopsies
  5. communicate their knowledge clearly and effectively.

Assessment

Research report (7,000 words) (40%)
Research abstract (10%)
Poster presentation (20%)
ICSI exam (30%)

Workload requirements

20 hours contact per week (research project, practical skills training) (on-campus).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt and Dr David Cram

Synopsis

This unit will provide a detailed understanding of the molecular biology and genetic techniques essential in a clinical human IVF programs. Students will be taught the theoretical basis of current techniques in genetic diagnosis, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), fluorescent in situ hybridisation (FISH) and micro-array analysis. This knowledge is enhanced with practical training in embryo biopsy and analysis of resultant blastomeres by FISH and PCR techniques. On completion, students will possess a sound theoretical knowledge and understanding of the molecular and genetic techniques used in a clinical human genetics laboratory, and also become familiar with the different practical applications of these techniques.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate a sound theoretical knowledge and understanding of the techniques essential to chromosomal and molecular genetic analysis in a clinical human IVF program
  2. describe and explain the technical aspects and applications of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and fluorescent in situ hybridisation (FISH)
  3. explain the applications of micro array technology and karyotyping
  4. perform biopsies on mouse and sheep embryos and prepare isolated blastomeres for FISH analysis
  5. demonstrate the extraction of DNA from cells and the skills required for carrying out PCR and genetic analysis
  6. critically and constructively analyse research papers in molecular biology and reproduction
  7. communicate this knowledge clearly and effectively.

Assessment

Journal review (25%)
Peerwise (5%)
Written examination (70%)

Workload requirements

16 hours contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study, practical skills training) (on-campus).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Giuliana Fuscaldo and Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit examines the current legislation and regulations governing the clinical practice of Assisted Reproductive Technologies (ART) and related research, nationally and internationally. It describes the role of ethical frameworks and principles in health decision-making and analyses regulation in ART with respect to underlying moral and ethical principles. An introduction to ethical problem solving is presented. The major ethical issues raised by assisted reproductive technologies are examined and critically evaluated.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe and discuss the current major legislative and non-legislative schemes for regulating IVF in Australia and have some knowledge of how the Australian situation compares with other countries
  2. identify the relevant regulatory bodies and know their requirements for licensing, accrediting and approving clinical and ART related research
  3. describe and explain the legal and ethical issues surrounding IVF, gamete and embryo donation, embryo experimentation, surrogacy, cloning, stem cell research and genetic selection and manipulation
  4. describe the role of ethics in health care and legal decision-making and be familiar with the main ethical frameworks and principles used in analysing conflicts and solving problems
  5. evaluate critically the ethical concerns raised by current ART practices and the future prospects for this technology in Australia and around the world
  6. explain their social and ethical responsibilities as a health care professional and with regard to patient care.

Assessment

Written examination (3 hours) (70%)
Debate (30%)

Workload requirements

16 hours contact per week (lectures, tutorials, debates, self-directed study).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Les Segal

Synopsis

This course aims to provide a range of skills that will enhance the GP's role in whole person care of patients with musculoskeletal pain. It places considerable emphasis on management techniques and treatment modalities such as physical, chemical and behavioural. It deals with the epidemiology of musculoskeletal disease, diagnostic processes and developing a framework for rational diagnosis. It also covers practical issues of diagnosis and management and addresses problems both holistically and regionally.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Describe the epidemiology and cost of musculoskeletal disease from population and general practice perspectives, as well as appreciating the epidemiology within your own practice.
  2. Appraise the diagnostic processes used to accurately define musculoskeletal syndromes, and a rational plan of management for these syndromes.
  3. Outline the pathophysiological basis of pain and the rational basis for treating a variety of pain syndromes.
  4. Apply knowledge and skills in a variety of therapeutic modalities routinely used in the treatment of musculoskeletal disorders, including physical, pharmacological and behavioural.
  5. Acquire a range of skills used in the physical treatment of musculoskeletal disorders with particular emphasis on the cervical and lumbar spine.
  6. Incorporate the information gained in this unit to review your current management of musculoskeletal disorders with a view of introducing changes to your practice in this area.

Assessment

Clinical audit (50%)
Journal activities (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1014.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Craig Hassed

Synopsis

While the art of medicine is often dominated by physical and technical considerations, doctors will also recognise that there are more subtle issues which make the way in which we use that technology meaningful. This area has to do with ethics, morality and law. In this unit the emphasis will be on the ethical decisions confronting doctors in daily practice. Topics covered include: the role of ethics in medical practice, philosophical ethics and principles in practice, ethical principles, critical perspectives, resource allocation, confidentiality and consent, life and death issues.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Develop a critical understanding of the scope of ethical issues and attitudes.
  2. Explain the language and concepts which form the basis of ethical debate.
  3. Reflect philosophically about the basis of beliefs and attitudes.
  4. Recognise the delineation between what is an ethical and what is a legal argument.
  5. Explain the overlap between what is an ethical and what is a legal argument.
  6. Critique the role that cultural influences have on ethical decisions.
  7. Articulate your awareness as a decision maker and the influences that personal factors can have on decisions.
  8. Evaluate the interactions between the doctor and the health care system.

Assessment

Journal (60%)
Essay (20%)
Case commentary (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MCM5117, MFM1017, MFM4017.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Abi Tenen

Synopsis

Ophthalmology is often poorly understood by general practitioners, yet it forms an important component of the problems which patients present to doctors. The aim of this unit is not to make ophthalmologists out of general practitioners, rather, it aims to educate the GP as coordinator of health care, to know what needs to be referred and its urgency, and yet be able to manage with competence and confidence many of the common conditions which afflict the eye. As well, the unit also aims to enhance the linkage between the GP and allied health professionals like optometrists, and support groups for the visually disabled.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Recognise the prevalence of ocular problems in their own practice and in the community at large, including the burden of illness and suffering they cause.
  2. Recognise and diagnose a range of common ocular problems.
  3. Apply skills in managing most ocular problems, including appropriate referral as a management strategy.
  4. Recognise the importance of referral as a learning process.
  5. Integrate ophthalmological assessment in the management of patients with a range of chronic conditions.
  6. Explain the importance of optometrical problems like refractive errors in the day to day management of ocular problems, and understand the important role played by optometrists.
  7. Recognise recent developments occurring in ophthalmology, such as in photo refractive keratectomy for refractive errors, new laser techniques, and improved surgical techniques in cataract surgery, leading to the development of day-case cataract surgery.
  8. Incorporate optimal care to the visually impaired by evaluating the impact of visual loss and facilitating access to local services available for the visually impaired.

Assessment

Clinical audit (30%)
Journal (70%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1019.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Claire Harrison

Synopsis

Mental illness is a common affliction world-wide and an important problem facing General Practice. Unit MCM5501 will focus on two high prevalence categories of mental ill-health i.e. depressive and anxiety disorders.

Depressive and anxiety disorders are amongst the most common illnesses in the community and primary care. These conditions are mainly diagnosed and managed in this setting. As previous reports in the literature have expressed concern about the level of under-diagnosis and the 'low treated prevalence' of patients with mental disorders (which included depression and anxiety), the aim of this unit is to enable students to increase their skills assessing, identifying and managing patients with mental ill-health - specifically depressive and anxiety disorders.

The acquisition of skills and confidence that students are expected to develop in this unit will then hopefully make a difference to clinical practice and patients, translating into better patient outcomes, both in terms of the quality of care provided and the number of affected patients that are provided with assistance.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Interpret the principal psychiatric classification system currently in use, and apply it, in conjunction with appropriate clinical reasoning skills, to determine whether or not a patient has a depressive or anxiety disorder.
  2. Determine the risk factors and underlying causes of depressive and anxiety disorders and argue how these influence treatment.
  3. Devise and implement a systematic approach to assessing the severity of different types of depressive and anxiety disorders, including their morbidity and mortality.
  4. Devise and implement a systematic approach to the management of depressive and anxiety disorders, which includes a synthesis of the best available evidence, in addition to considering patient wishes and circumstances, community resources and the clinician's experience.
  5. Distinguish between the presentations in general practice of different types of depressive and anxiety disorders.
  6. Devise a plan for future personal practice and professional development in the diagnosis and management of patients with depressive and anxiety disorders.

Assessment

Case study on patient with a depressive disorder (2,500 words) (40%)
Case study on patient with an anxiety disorder (2,500 words) (40%)
Short answer questions (1 hour) (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

CGP1002, CGP1003.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Claire Harrison

Synopsis

This unit introduces the student to broad range of common dermatological problems encountered in the general practice setting, providing them with clinically relevant and up-to-date information on topics such as patterns and diagnosis of skin disease, erythematopapulosquamous diseases, dermal and subcutaneous problems, skin tumours and pigmented lesions, cutaneous manifestations of systematic diseases, skin infections, paediatric dermatology, cosmetic dermatology, Industrial dermatology and regional dermatology, amongst others. Topics are written by content specialists practicing in these areas, and are customised specifically for the general practitioner.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Analyse how the structural components of the skin function in both healthy and diseased states.
  2. Demonstrate a systematic approach to generating and exploring an appropriate list of differential diagnoses, in a patient with a dermatological complaint.
  3. Deduce what further investigations, if any, are required, to aid diagnosis.
  4. Devise and implement a systematic approach to the management of dermatological disorders, which includes a synthesis of the best available evidence, patient wishes and circumstances, community resources and the clinician's experience.
  5. Devise a plan for future personal practice and professional development in the diagnosis and management of patients with dermatological conditions.

Assessment

Pictorial case studies (1.5 hours) (25%)
Pictorial case studies (1.5 hours) (25%)
Case report (2,500 words) (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1004.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Lufiani Mulyadi

Synopsis

Paediatrics is an enormous field covering the whole range of clinical practice in the younger age group. This unit explores areas that are of practical relevance, interest and importance to the work of family practitioners, exploring child health problems as experienced in everyday practice. The aim for this unit is to increase skills and confidence to make treating that age group an even more interesting and satisfying part of general practice.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically appraise important issues in child health.
  2. Identify and strengthen the unique GP role in paediatrics.
  3. Develop a comprehensive approach to child health and management of illness in the paediatric age group.
  4. Update practical skills in important paediatric problems.
  5. Gain confidence in, and exposure to, handling delicate and difficult areas of child health which GP's often tend to avoid.
  6. Develop strategies for handling difficult consultations both with children and their parents.
  7. Assess normal development and deviations from that norm.
  8. Mobilise community resources for children with special needs.
  9. Communicate with and manage appropriately the adolescent patient.
  10. Think preventively in child health consultations.
  11. Effectively handle paediatric emergencies.
  12. Manage many varied and difficult clinical problems in a more effective and comprehensive way than previously.

Assessment

Clinical audit (35%)
Essay (15%)
Journal (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1007.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Danielle Mazza

Synopsis

This unit addresses aspects of women's sexual and reproductive health commonly encountered in the general practice setting. It will consider the particular way that women's sexual and reproductive health issues present in the general practice context, current controversies in women's sexual and reproductive health, current evidence and guidelines pertinent to investigation and management of womens sexual and reproductive health issues and consideration of the women's medical issues in a psychosocial context.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse the psychosocial context of women's lives and apply this analysis to women's sexual and reproductive health
  2. Develop a systematic and evidence based approach to the diagnosis and management of women's sexual and reproductive health issues which commonly present in the general practice setting
  3. Evaluate those factors contributing to the prevalence of unplanned pregnancy and based on best available evidence formulate an appropriate response that addresses these issues in the general practice setting
  4. Develop a systematic and evidence based approach to contraceptive counselling and counselling for unplanned pregnancy and sexual problems
  5. Critically appraise the evidence concerning hormone replacement therapy and screening for cervical, breast and ovarian cancer
  6. Evaluate the health outcomes of violence against women and formulate appropriate responses in the general practice setting based on best available practice evidence.

Assessment

Case study examining the psychosocial context of women's lives and the impact of this on women's sexual and reproductive health (2,000 words) (25%)
Online activities (for example reflections on readings and current practice, development of patient information sheets, quizzes related to the clinical areas covered by the unit (Amounting to a total of 6,000 words) (50%)
Audit of current practice in one of the areas of contraception, screening or menopause (2,000 words) (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Available to postgraduate students only.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Craig Hassed

Synopsis

In this unit students will examines the body of scientific evidence as the basis of mind-body medicine including linking stress with mental and physical illness and with a range of unhealthy lifestyle behaviours. Linking theory with practice, it uses a deep learning methodology by teaching practical skills in the form of mindfulness-based meditation and cognitive techniques which students first learn and practice themselves so that they are better placed to teach them to their patients to carry out in a variety of clinical settings. The unit identifies the circumstances and conditions in which these techniques are most useful. The links between scientific evidence, theory and practice are covered concurrently throughout the unit.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically review the significant body of research linking psychological states like stress with a range of illnesses and lifestyle including disciplines within mind-body medicine such as neuroplasticity, psychoneuroimmunology and psychogenomics.
  2. Critically review research demonstrating the benefits of psychological interventions like stress management and mindfulness.
  3. Practice the mindfulness meditation exercises in their various forms and critique their effectiveness.
  4. Apply the principles of the mindfulness-based cognitive strategies and critique their effectiveness.
  5. Critically reflect on their own experience of stress and ways in which they manage it.
  6. Develop and implement mindfulness-based stress management in practice.
  7. Demonstrate professional skills as a counsellor in mindfulness-based stress management.

Assessment

Scientific stream:
Assignment (1,500 words) (25%)
Essay (1,500 words) (25%)

Practical stream:
Journal - personal (2,000 words) (30%)
Journal - clinical (1,000 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

120 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3002.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr G Wallace

Synopsis

Pain is a common presenting problem in general practice, stimulating shared doctor and patient expectations of diagnosis and effective treatment. This unit attempts to improve the process of pain management by giving students clinically relevant and up to date information on topics including basic definition, anatomy, physiology of pain, psychological aspects of pain, evaluation of the patient with pain, role of the GP in pain management, role of pain clinics, specific disorders; migraine, neck and facial pain, TMJ, thoracic and lumbar pain, musculoskeletal pain including fibromyalgia, cancer pain and pain management in palliative care.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Apply a better understanding of pain physiology and assessment in your practice.
  2. Describe the pain experience and its ramifications, recognising that whole person care is essential.
  3. Use a range of practical pain management strategies and techniques in dealing safely and effectively with patients pain.
  4. Assess the complex issue of spinal pain with a logical diagnostic and management approach.
  5. Recognise the concept of soft tissue rheumatism (localised inflammatory soft tissue disorders).
  6. Recognise the wide range of causes of headache and develop a framework for a diagnostic approach.
  7. Use the fibromyalgia syndrome model in your approach to a number of other painful chronic musculoskeletal diseases and conditions.
  8. Identify the particular needs of patients suffering cancer pain, and use a range of strategies, both pharmacological and non pharmacological, in alleviating the pain.

Assessment

Preliminary audit (15%)
Post course audit (15%)
Assessment tasks (70%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3003.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Chenoweth

Synopsis

In order to prescribe in the most appropriate manner, the prescriber needs a broad perspective. Rational prescribing needs an understanding of the pressures affecting a prescriber which may influence his or her prescribing patterns. As well, the prescriber must be aware of consumer and other factors which impinge upon optimal use of medication, and the subtle and not so subtle influences of manufacturers and government. This unit aims to have such a perspective, covering topics from the practical philosophy of rational prescribing, to the future of clinical pharmacology, to the planning for quality improvement within a primary care health setting.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Discuss the Australian and international use of prescribed medication in terms of research directions, funding, rates of prescribing, the major stakeholders, the influences on prescribing and policy directions such as quality use of medicines initiatives.
  2. Demonstrate the use of a particular model for deciding the most appropriate therapeutic medication for a particular condition.
  3. Demonstrate knowledge, practice and skill in a chosen prescribing situation in general practice, including the therapeutic medications used, and the particular steps necessary for safe prescribing.
  4. Demonstrate critical thinking in reviewing the evidence about a medication via a planned and recorded interview with a pharmaceutical detailer.
  5. Create a plan for improving the quality of prescribing in your own practice or within the clinic, using audit and feedback.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (25%)
Assignment 2 (25%)
Assignment 3 (25%)
Assignment 4 (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students in non award programs (single unit cross institutional enrolment): Applicants must have a medical degree or other health practitioner degree and be currently registered with the Australian Health Practitioner Regulation Agency (AHPRA), or a similar local national registration body. Applicants who do not have a registrable degree with AHPRA or similar will be required to have the appropriate bachelors degree or equivalent. A minimum of 2 years vocational experience in a general practice setting is essential for both Australian and International applicants.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Craig Hassed

Synopsis

Diabetes is a common disease of increasing prevalence in Australia and the rest of the world and is major source of preventable morbidity and mortality. Much of the diagnosis, treatment and monitoring of diabetic patients falls on the shoulders of General Practitioners. This unit will enhance the skills and knowledge of General Practitioners on all aspects of diabetes mellitus diagnosis and management and lifestyle modification and will include utilisation of medical specialists and diabetes support services.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Describe the aetiology, prevalence and pathophysiology of diabetes.
  2. Improve skills in diabetic screening and diagnosis.
  3. Manage both type 1 and type 2 diabetes effectively and with a holistic perspective.
  4. Manage diabetic emergencies.
  5. Develop and implement a care plan including attention to relevant lifestyle factors.
  6. Monitor diabetic patients effectively.
  7. Identify, treat and/or refer diabetic complications early and effectively.
  8. Describe special areas of diabetic management.
  9. Utilise diabetic support services and networks effectively.

Assessment

Case study (40%)
Pre course and post course audit (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3007.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Sanjiva Wijesinha

Synopsis

General practitioners are in the best position to identify individuals who are at risk of heart disease, and so implement primary prevention. This unit focuses on the modern assessment and management of cardiovascular problems encountered by the general practitioner. Topics covered include: hypertension, chest pain, atrial fibrillation, heart failure and syncope.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Appreciate the major issues in cardiovascular health today.
  2. Assess and advise patients from the viewpoint of preventive cardiology.
  3. Manage patients with hypertension, chest pain, atrial fibrillation, heart failure and syncope effectively.
  4. Assess the currently available investigations for diagnosis and management of cardiovascular disease. Evaluate current evidence and research for diagnosis and management of cardiovascular disease.
  5. Be familiar with modern methods of interventional cardiology.
  6. Conduct a clinical audit - either in screening for risk factors or in the management of cardiac failure.
  7. Recognise the potential of audits to improve clinical practice.

Assessment

Journal activities (Pass / Fail)
Essay (25%)
Essay (25%)
Audit part 1 and Audit part 2 (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including an in-depth study of the work of Sigmund Freud and Melanie Klein. The applied seminars continue and include consultation, ethics and research. Clinical Supervision: individual Psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week. Infant Observation Seminar, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are:

  1. To continue an exploration in seminars of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories.
  2. To explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. To acquire knowledge of the application of ethical issues, consultation to, and research in the area.
  4. To observe the ongoing development of a non-clinical infant for one hour per week, from birth until at least six months of age.
  5. To undertake psychotherapy with children, adolescents and parents, to present this work to the clinical supervisors; to be able to demonstrate a beginning competence with the various techniques in the work.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on the infant observation seminars
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001) and MCP5002 (MCP0002).


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including an in-depth study of the work of Sigmund Freud and Melanie Klein. The applied seminars continue and include consultation, ethics, trauma and research. Clinical Supervision: individual psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week. Infant Observation Seminar, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are:

  1. To continue an exploration in seminars of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories.
  2. To explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. To extend knowledge of the application of ethical issues, consulation to and research in the area.
  4. To continue the observation of the ongoing development of a non-clinical infant for one hour per week, from six months of age to until at least twelve months of age.
  5. To submit on completion a written account of this twelve-month infant observation.
  6. To undertake psychotherapy with patients viz. children, adolescents and parents, and to present this work to the clinical supervisors; to be able to demonstrate a developing competence with the various techniques in the work.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
Written account of the year's infant observations to be submitted
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001), MCP5002 (MCP0002) and MCP5003 (MCP0003).


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including the work of Sigmund Freud, Melanie Klein and Wilfred Bion. Clinical and Research seminars continue. Clinical Supervision: individual psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Continue in seminars an exploration of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories.
  2. Explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. Examine the psychodynamic functioning of groups and organisations; To examine research and thesis writing as relevant to the area.
  4. Undertake psychotherapy with patients viz. children, adolescents and parents and to present this work to the clinical supervisors; to be able to demonstrate competence with the various techniques in the work.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated in the students' clinical work

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001), MCP5002 (MCP0002), MCP5003 (MCP0003) and MCP5004 (MCP0004).


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including the work of Sigmund Freud, Melanie Klein and Wilfred Bion. Clinical and Research Seminars continue. Clinical Supervision: individual psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Continue an exploration in seminars of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories of this work.
  2. Explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. Further examine research and thesis writing as relevant to the area.
  4. Undertake psychotherapy with patients viz. children, adolescents and parents and to present this work to the clinical supervisors, to be able to demonstrate clinical competence with the various techniques in the work and to demonstrate the capacity to function independently as a clinical child psychoanalytic psychotherapist.
  5. Participate in regular research workshops and to develop a proposal for a thesis.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001), MCP5002 (MCP0002), MCP5003 (MCP0003), MCP5004 (MCP0004) and MCP5005 (MCP0005).


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedKing's College London First semester 2015 (Day)
Overseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
King's College London Second semester 2015 (Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedKing's College London First semester 2015 (Day)
Overseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
King's College London Second semester 2015 (Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Jennings

Synopsis

The student will currently be taking or about to commence a work-based project. The student will gain their employer's support and prepare a project brief in the form of a learning contract which will then be discussed with the unit coordinator and signed off by both the student and the unit coordinator. An appropriately qualified and experienced industry leader and/or academic will be appointed as co-supervisor with the unit coordinator. The unit will require the student to define the problem/question/task, identify an appropriate theoretical model/methodology, collect the necessary data, undertake the analysis and prepare the report.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically review and analyse the literature on a current issue in community based emergency services.
  2. Design, develop and implement a work-based research project.
  3. Demonstrate skill in accessing information, critical appraisal, reflective practice and independent scholarship.
  4. Demonstrate communication skills in both oral and written presentations to an audience of community based emergency services professionals.
  5. Write up a work-based project that is suitable for publication.
  6. Contribute to enhancing an aspect of community based emergency services.

Assessment

Preparation of project proposal and learning contract (1,000 words) (10%)
Participation in regular meetings with supervisor and contribution to monthly WebCT discussions (15%)
Verbal presentation of final report (20 mins plus 10 mins discussion) (25%)
Written report in format suitable for publication (5,000 - 6,000 words) (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

PAR5010, PAR5011.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill First semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Fiona Kent

Synopsis

This unit will involve participants in the development of their teaching skills, including the theoretical aspects of teaching and learning in a variety of settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Plan teaching and learning for a variety of contexts demonstrating participant-centred principles including preparation of learning objectives, teaching resources, aligned objectives, instructional methods and participant outcomes;
  2. Demonstrate competence as a teacher and the ability to reflect constructively on own skill and that of others;
  3. Compare and contrast individual perspectives on teaching and learning with a range of theoretical models;
  4. Analyse a range of contemporary practices in health professional education with particular reference to the implications of learner diversity, flexible delivery and teaching development;
  5. Compare different educational approaches across a variety of health professions and consider strengths and weaknesses in relation to own teaching practice.

Assessment

Teaching practical and plan (30%)
Teaching sequence plan (2,500 words) (50%)
Teaching philosophy (1,000 words) (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill Term 2 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Judy Lockie

Synopsis

This unit will provide participants with the opportunity to develop their knowledge and skills in the area of clinical teaching. Participants will explore the theories that have been developed to classify, explain and describe different approaches to clinical teaching and learning. In doing so, participants will be expected to draw upon experience from their own teaching, from the approach of their own professional group and also information from other health professions.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe recent and current trends in clinical teaching within health professional education;
  2. Demonstrate effective planning, preparation and delivery of clinically focused teaching activities including effective communication and feedback to students and colleagues;
  3. Identify roles, responsibilities and attributes of the clinical teacher, exploring the notion of the 'good clinical teacher' and the evidence available of what 'good' might signify;
  4. Apply a model of psychomotor skills development and critically appraise its use in health care teaching and learning environments;
  5. Critically evaluate contemporary teaching methods used to bridge the theory to practice gap in clinical education;
  6. Explore the impact that cultural diversity has on clinical teaching and learning experiences in the health professions;
  7. Identify and describe factors that influence 'fitness to practice' and develop strategies to deal with the underperforming student.

Assessment

Teaching practical and plan (30%)
Critical incident (2,000 words) (30%)
Analytical paper (2,500 words) (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Margaret Hay

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide participants with an understanding of contemporary approaches to assessment in the health professions, with a particular emphasis on competency-based assessment. This unit aims to develop participants' understanding of assessment theory and practice aplied to health professions education across undergraduate and postgraduate training. Taking a systems approach, participants will analyse their role in the assessment of their learners and the importance of their role to the learners themselves, their institution, accreditation bodies and the community.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the role of assessment in influencing student learning behaviour and the learning process;
  2. Identify and apply the principles of educational assessment in professional healthcare teaching;
  3. Critique the range of assessment tools that can be used in the effective delivery of health professional education and select appropriately to assess a range of skills, knowledge and attitudinal characteristics in different contexts;
  4. Describe and distinguish between the uses of formative and summative assessment procedures and the importance of feedback to both aspects;
  5. Outline the interface between Continuing Professional Development, assessment and reaccreditation in health professions.

Assessment

Group presentation (10%)
Assessment system mind map (20%)
Assessment tool analysis (2500 words) (40%)
Analytical paper (2000 words) (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Notting Hill Second semester (extended) 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Melanie Farlie

Synopsis

MEU9004 will introduce participants to the concepts, terminology and development processes of curriculum design. The unit will focus upon the basic principles of curriculum development as they apply to the variety of organisational settings represented by the course participants. Participants will also be introduced to change management processes and evaluation skills. The unit is designed to be practical in its focus and will build upon the perspectives introduced in MEU9001 - MEU9003.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the educational theoretical perspectives relevant to their own teaching environment
  2. Apply the principles of constructive alignment to designing curriculum
  3. Differentiate between various models of educational evaluation
  4. Perform basic evaluation skills such as development/adaptation of instruments
  5. Outline effective educational change management processes including the drivers, barriers and catalysts to implementation
  6. Design a change management plan to facilitate a change in educational practice that will address the perceived need.

Assessment

Curriculum development project (45%)
Evaluation and change management plan (45%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus students: Ten (10) hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill First semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deb Colville

Synopsis

The unit focuses on research in contemporary health professional education. It will provide participants with the opportunity to develop foundation research skills and knowledge tailored to their teaching environment and/or interests.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Outline the significance of educational research to the foundations and development of health professional education and practice;
  2. Demonstrate a sound knowledge-base related to the research process including the ability to critique education and practice;
  3. Critically examine and select methods for educational research in the health professions;
  4. Design appropriate qualitative and quantitative research methods to explore and evaluate education in the health professions;
  5. Articulate key theoretical issues relevant to research in health professional education;
  6. Describe key strategies to promote rigour in research in health professional education;
  7. Articulate key principles of ethical practice in health professional education research.

Assessment

Research plan (5,000 words) (45%)
Ethics assessment (2,500 words) (25%)
Portfolio (4,000 words) (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Margaret Bearman

Synopsis

Simulation is now a widely used teaching and learning strategy in health professional education. This unit will provide you with the opportunity to explore the use of simulation as a means of learning professional and clinical skills. You will have the opportunity to examine the theoretical basis, design, planning and implementation features, and evaluation processes related to the implementation of simulation. A full range of simulated methods will be examined including case based learning, professional and clinical skills acquisition using simulated patients, authentic e-learning environments and low, medium to high fidelity clinical simulators. You will explore the characteristics of effective simulation-based educational environments, with a focus on designing simulation programs within your own context.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. discuss the historical and theoretical basis that underpins the use of simulation;
  2. compare and contrast the different types of simulations used in health professional education;
  3. critically evaluate the educational efficacy of the use of simulation;
  4. describe and analyse simulation debriefing methods;
  5. design a simulated learning experience or program in a specific health professional context based on best evidence practice and with links to curricula and outcomes;
  6. construct an evaluation plan of the simulated learning experience or programme.

Assessment

Simulated program design and evaluation plan (50%)
Written assignment (40%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deb Colville

Synopsis

MEU9013 will provide participants with the opportunity to integrate their knowledge of educational theory, assessment and evaluation while developing, with constructive feedback, educational initiatives appropriate to their own educational roles e.g. new ways of bedside teaching, lecture delivery, initiating small group work, redeveloping an examination or assessment package.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. complete a reflective analysis of their educational practice in a specific context;
  2. review their own practice in light of the educational literature in the field;
  3. identify and describe an educational initiative related to their own practice, through critical analysis of course documentation, course evaluation, or through student feedback or assessment data;
  4. design and evaluate a new, or modify an existing course or educational programme based on current educational theory;
  5. create a report based on the initiative to address all elements of the curriculum innovation and its evaluation in relation to the literature.

Assessment

Project proposal (3,000 words) (40%)
Project report (8,000 words) (60%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus students: Ten (10) hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNotting Hill Term 2 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Charlotte Denniston

Synopsis

This unit will provide participants with the theoretical and practical knowledge and skills related to working within a range of simulation environments. It will introduce participants to the practical strategies related to planning, designing and delivering simulation-based learning. The unit includes clinical skills, simulation scenario development and designing simulation activities.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the simulation modalities used in healthcare along with their rationale;
  2. Describe levels of fidelity in a simulation context;
  3. Demonstrate familiarity with a range of simulation tools and technologies
  4. Differentiate between theories and models of psychomotor skills development;
  5. Demonstrate effective planning, preparation and delivery for teaching a procedural skill;
  6. Describe the phases of a simulation scenario and the different impact each phase has on the learning experience;
  7. Design a simulation session according to best practice, inclusive of preparation, delivery and debriefing components.

Assessment

Teaching practical and plan (30%)
A clinical simulation scenario plan (3,000 words) (40%)
Annotated bibliography (1,500 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off campus with compulsory study days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Judy Lockie

Synopsis

This unit is designed to introduce a range of current issues in health professional education practice and research to students in masterclass format. It is specifically intended to cover in-depth key trends in health professional education, drawing from the latest publication and research. Students will complete a series of 6-8 masterclasses, run primarily as one day intensives (up to 6) or equivalent on-line interactions (up to 3). These will build upon previous work introduced within the Graduate Certificate of Health Professional Education. Masterclasses will be conducted in topics such as: inter-professional education, feedback, strategies for working with under-performing students, peer learning, patient perspectives in education, leadership in health professional education, work-based assessment and systematic review in health professional education. Each masterclasses will be supported by readings and activities within the students' own environments.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify topics of intensive research in health professional education
  2. Articulate the rationale for researching these key areas of intensive research
  3. Apply an in-depth understanding of at least one relevant area of the current literature to educational practice
  4. Communicate a coherent summary of issues in a particular topical domain within the health professional education literature
  5. Synthesise the implications of empirical and theoretical literature underpinning health professional education practice
  6. Critique a range of perspectives within a particular topical domain within health professional education literature
  7. Apply theoretical and empirical literature to the development of educational innovations within their own health professional education context.

Assessment

Analytical essay (40%)
Presentation plus documentation (1 topic in-depth, emphasis on application to practice) (40%)
Teaching portfolio (including collection of at least one exercise pertaining to each masterclass) (20%)

Workload requirements

Each student will undertake the equivalent of 6 masterclasses, through up to 6 study days, over the course of the semester, plus up to 3 online masterclasses. Each masterclass will also have associated readings and activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Schattner

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis.

Synopsis

This unit is a compulsory core unit for the Master of Family Medicine and covers the following content: the science and art of medicine, the technology and craft of medicine, health and illness, sickness and disease, aetiology, diagnosis and prognosis, concepts of healing, history and philosophy of general practice, conceptual framework of general practice, roles and tasks of the general practitioner, general practice in the community and community health, future directions of general practice and general practitioners in the university setting.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the nature of the discipline of general practice including its history, philosophy and practice.
  2. Differentiate the roles of science and art in medicine, and general practice in particular.
  3. Compare and contrast general practice with other medical specialities.
  4. Discuss the significance of patient centredness in differentiating general practice from other disciplines.
  5. Explain the role of the general practitioner as the gatekeeper of the health care system.
  6. Review the role of general practice in providing cost effective primary medical care to the community.
  7. Recognise the potential for growth in the academic aspects of general practice in the future, and the contribution that graduates from this course can make to this growth.
  8. Demonstrate the application of the theoretical principles to practical consultations in general practice.

Assessment

Completion of brief written tasks based on the work of each session, week by week (49%)
Three formal assignments, based on broader concepts (1,200 words each) (51%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Michal Schneider-Kolsky

Synopsis

This is a compulsory core unit for the Master of Medical Ultrasound course. Students are expected to explore the following areas; introduction to methodology, scope and nature of research in medical imaging, study designs, qualitative versus quantitative research, descriptive, observational and experimental studies, getting started, including literature surveys, critical appraisal of journal articles, research protocols, descriptive and inferential statistics, data analysis, questionnaire construction and survey techniques and writing papers and giving presentations on research.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students should be able to:

  1. Understand the nature and scope of research in Medical Ultrasound;
  2. Understand and be able to implement the methods using in answering questions that arise out of Medical Ultrasound;
  3. Critically appraise the medical literature;
  4. Develop an enthusiasm for doing individual research;
  5. Gain some practical experience in doing research projects.

Assessment

Qualitative research project assignment (3,000 words) (20%)
Critical appraisal assignment (2,000 words) (15%)
Research protocol assignment (2,000 words) (15%)
Statistics assignment (10%)
Questionnaire survey assignment (4,000 words) (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Completion of the Graduate Diploma in Medical Ultrasound or equivalent.


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Peter Schattner

Synopsis

This unit forms a compulsory core unit for the MFM course and aims to provide students with the following: demonstrate critical appraisal and organisational skills required of academic general practitioners with respect to research in general practice, carry out independent and collaborative research in general practice at a level expected of a Masters graduate, contribute to body of knowledge of general practice through its literature and publications and ultimately supervise research projects of a nature comparable to those required of Masters graduates.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate critical appraisal and organisational skills required of academic general practitioners with respect to research in general practice;
  2. Carry out independent and collaborative research in general practice at a level expected of a Masters graduate;
  3. Contribute to a body of knowledge of general practice through its literature and publications and ultimately supervise research projects of a nature comparable to those required of a Masters graduate.

Assessment

Minor thesis (Pass / Fail)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNotting Hill First semester 2015 (Online)
Notting Hill Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Chenoweth

Synopsis

This unit aims to give students broad understanding of the current and future impacts of chronic disease management on primary care, together with knowledge of models and systems of response, and particular skills to use in their workplace.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe contemporary understandings of Chronic Disease in Primary Care, especially the demographic changes, lifestyle factors and other social determinants of health.
  2. Describe responses to the challenges of Chronic Disease Management as embodied in models such as the Chronic Care Model (Wagner) and the Australian responses to the challenges of this field.
  3. Demonstrate skills of Motivational Interviewing and in applying the SNAP model in addressing lifestyle issues with patients.
  4. Evaluate their current work-place performance in managing chronic disease utilising audits and a systems approach.
  5. Plan change within their current work-place to improve Chronic Disease Management, utilising their previous evaluations, known effective interventions and published guides, templates and financial modelling.

Fieldwork

Students are already working in the field - no extra time is needed for completion of this unit

Assessment

Essay (1,500 words) (25%)
Recording and report (1,500 words) (25%)
Report (1,500 words) (25%)
Report (1,500 words) (25%)

Workload requirements

15-20 hours per week for 6 weeks. There are no requirements of on-campus learning. Private study will involve reading, searching online for associated materials, planning and implementing the assessment tasks where indicated.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Students in non award programs (single unit / cross institutional enrolment): Applicants must have a medical degree or other health practitioner degree and be currently registered with the Australian Health Practitioner Regulation Agency (AHPRA), or a similar local national registration body. Applicants who do not have a registrable degree with AHPRA or similar will be required to have the appropriate bachelors degree or equivalent. A minimum of 2 years vocational experience in a general practice setting is essential for both Australian and International applicants.

Co-requisites

Enrolment in Master of Family Medicine.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedNotting Hill First semester 2015 (Online)
Notting Hill Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Schattner

Synopsis

This unit will help clarify what evidence based practice (EBP) is, especially in the general practice setting. The unit aims to enhance student skills in finding and applying the latest research evidence. This includes searching evidence databases on the internet, and critically appraising the information retrieved. The course has been written on the assumption that participants have not previously studied research methods or clinical epidemiology, although either of these would be helpful.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the role and limitations of research evidence in clinical practice
  2. Formulate a well structured question that arises from clinical practice
  3. Search for evidence based answers to questions, especially via electronic resources
  4. Appraise the relevance and validity of the evidence that was found by the search
  5. Apply the evidence to individual patients taking into account their values and the available resources
  6. Apply evidence based practice skills to improve the quality of clinical practice.

Assessment

Assignment 1: Looking for evidence (1,000 words) (30%)
Assignment 2: Appraising the evidence (1,000 words) (30%)
Assignment 3: Applying the evidence (1,500 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Online course. 10 hours per weekly session. This takes into account the three assignments, which will take approximately 3 hours each.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Schattner

Synopsis

This is a compulsory core unit for the Grad.Dip in Family Medicine and MFM(Clin) courses. Students are expected to explore the following areas; introduction to methodology, history of general practice, scope and nature of general practice research, study designs, qualitative versus quantitative research, the epidemiological basis of general practice research, descriptive, observational and experimental studies, getting started in research, critical appraisal of journal articles, research protocols, descriptive and inferential statistics, data analysis, questionnaire construction and survey techniques, writing papers and giving presentations on research.

The unit is designed to take a logical path from framing a researchable question to developing a plan, implementing it, obtaining and then analysing results, and finally writing the project up. Introductory concepts of statistical analysis will be included, but students will not be expected to have a detailed working knowledge of this difficult subject area.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the nature and scope of research in general practice;
  2. understand and be able to implement the methods used in answering questions that arise out of general practice;
  3. critically appraise the medical literature;
  4. develop an enthusiasm for doing your own research;
  5. gain some practical experience in doing research projects.

Assessment

Students will be expected to complete 4 written assignments plus an MCQ.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Schattner

Synopsis

This unit is a compulsory core unit for the MFM course and is designed to assist students in the development of their research project. It covers such issues as starting a project, measurement, project management, funding a research project, statistical planning, data analysis, collaborative research, and research in general practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Develop a research question and critically analyse it for importance, feasibility and focus. Select a series of articles of relevance to their topic of interest and critically appraise them for scientific validity.
  2. Select a study design which is appropriate to their research topic of interest and demonstrates valid and reliable methods.
  3. Develop a written research protocol which outlines the major steps in a research study, from asking a research question, to describing the methods, and showing how the data will be collected and analysed.
  4. Develop a grant application which describes the cost of a study, justifies the various cost items, and provides an outline of a study that will enable a funding body to judge the merit of the application.
  5. Develop an ethics application which describes the ethical aspects of the study, and includes subject consent forms and explanatory statements.
  6. Design and manage a small pilot study and critically analyse its results. Draw conclusions about the likely directions of general practice research.
  7. Plan their own Masters research project.

Assessment

Literature review (1,500 words) (15%)
Reliability and validity study (1,500 words) (10%)
Funding application (1,500 words) (20%)
Ethics application (1,500 words) (20%)
Pilot study (2,000 words) (35%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Professor Danielle Mazza

Synopsis

In this unit students will gain an overview of the importance of prevention in the primary care setting and the critical role played by general practice and those working within the general practice team in the delivery of such care.

They will gain an appreciation of patient perceptions of prevention in primary care and identify other barriers and facilitators to prevention in a practice population.
Students will learn to utilise important tools and resources in their practice and apply evidence based strategies to overcoming barriers.

Best practice approaches to identification of those at risk and the implementation of screening and early detection will be considered and evaluated.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain why prevention is a priority for general practice and primary care with particular reference to chronic disease and the prevalence of lifestyle risk factors in the student's country of origin
  2. Reflect on the role of GPs and members of the GP and primary care team in delivering preventive care
  3. Appraise the evidence supporting preventive care interventions in general practice and primary care and identify current evidence practice gaps
  4. Critically analyse patient perceptions of prevention and the role of general practitioners in preventive care
  5. Identify the barriers and facilitators to optimal delivery of prevention in general practice and primary care settings
  6. Describe and evaluate strategies to improve delivery and uptake of preventive care in general practice and primary care settings
  7. Locate, retrieve and use current evidence based guidelines, tools, resources and recommendations for prevention in general practice and primary care settings and suggest an implementation plan for their application in practice.

Assessment

Assignment: Literature review (2,000 words) (30%)
Assignment: Practice policy document (2,000 words) (40%)
Case study: Preventive care intervention report (2,000 words) (30%)

Hurdle requirement:
Online activities: 15-20 brief written tasks (reflections and analysis) (2,000 words)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week inclusive of private study time spent reading the unit guide, readings and undertaking assessment tasks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This is the second unit in the formal requirement for the completion of either a project or minor thesis, as part of a Masters degree in the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences. Students will be required to complete an ethics application and to finalise specific issues surrounding their choice of research design, data collection methods and participant recruitment procedures. Students will work closely with a research supervisor to decide upon an appropriate site and source of data and to secure appropriate approvals from any relevant organisation (e.g., multiple ethics applications may be required). Satisfactory progress in relation to the research is a prerequisite for enrolment in the next unit in the research thesis sequence.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate their awareness of ethical and privacy issues as they apply to their research proposal;
  2. Work collaboratively with a research supervisor to achieve research milestones (e.g., submission of ethics proposal);
  3. Write to an appropriate academic standard by incorporating existing research findings and supervisor feedback;
  4. Respond appropriately to the realities of research project issues including identification of a research site (or sites) and recruitment of participants.

Assessment

Students will be required to submit Progress Report 2 (100%)
Complete and submit a Monash SCERH ethical application (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours per week or 156 hours per semester.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, any MRU unit.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Baki Billah

Synopsis

This is the third unit in the formal requirements for completion of the research thesis/project. Students will be required to recruit participants and collect data in accordance with their initial research design and proposed analysis. Students will continue to work closely with their research supervisor to collect data and to begin to analyse preliminary results. Satisfactory progress in relation to the research is a prerequisite for enrolment into the final unit in this research sequence.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate their ability to manage data collection and analysis;
  2. Work collaboratively with a research supervisor to achieve research milestones;
  3. Write to an appropriate academic standard by incorporating existing research findings and supervisor feedback;
  4. Have experienced and responded appropriately to the realities of research project issues (e.g. ethical and practical issues surrounding confidentiality, data management, etc).

Assessment

Students will be required to submit Progress Report 3 (hurdle) (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours per week or 156 hours per semester.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, Any MRU unit.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)mnhs-student-admin@monash.edu

Synopsis

This is the fourth unit in the formal requirements for completion of the research thesis/project. Students will complete and submit their Research Report for evaluation. Supervision will continue until the report is submitted and students will be encouraged to consider both the strengths and limitations of their research as well as to address any directions for future research in their chosen research area.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate the capacity to write in a format and style appropriate to an academic publication;
  2. Analyse and present data in a clear, concise and systematic manner;
  3. Recognise the strengths and limitations of their research design;
  4. Suggest directions for future research in their specialist area;
  5. Be experienced in addressing the practicalities of research project management.

Assessment

Research report (5,000 - 7,000 words)
Post presentations (hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours per week or 156 per semester.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, Any MRU unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Snow

Synopsis

Modules include psychological development, the sociology of childhood and adolescence, and principles of communication, intervention & referral.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit students will have a significant grounding in theoretical perspectives of child and adolescent development; a knowledge of developmental stages and transitions; an understanding of the impact of development on a child's sense of self, relationship with family and others and with educationalists.

Students will:

  1. Gain knowledge about the classification, aetiology, natural history and main treatment approaches to the most serious and prevalent mental disorders in school aged children;
  2. Develop skills in the detection of significant mental disorders;
  3. Have an overall conception of the relationship of infant, child and adolescent in the structure of family, school and community, their place in their predominant culture and their role and responsibilities in relationship to the community at large;
  4. Develop a clear notion of the prevailing conceptions of infancy, childhood and adolescence in the fields of anthropology, sociology and psychoanalysis;
  5. Gain an understanding of the infant, child and adolescent in the structure of the family with particular reference to the formative experiences that take place within that structure;
  6. Gain an understanding of critical examination of the position and needs of the child and adolescent as perceived by educational policies and institutions:
  7. Be able to analyse some typical problems of the child and the adolescent face, vis a vis the family, the school system and the community, including particular problems that arise in a multicultural society such as racial intolerance and racism.

Assessment

Three written assignments (2,000 words each) (30% each)
Participation in threaded discussion groups (10%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Snow

Synopsis

Modules include specific psychiatric & psychological syndromes, interventions in the classroom and school, and a case study discussion of classroom difficulties.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit students will:

  1. have a grounding in and an understanding of practical measures that can be adopted in the school in response to perceived emotional difficulties in the individual child.
  2. be able to differentiate between difficulties that can be managed within the school setting and those that require further referral.
  3. have a working knowledge of procedures that they can adopt to effect such referrals.

They will therefore:

  1. have increased their practical understanding and recognition of mental distress exhibited in the school setting;
  2. be able to differentiate between minor emotional difficulties and more serious mental disturbances;
  3. develop an understanding of measure that they can themselves adopt within the classroom of school to ease the emotional distress of their students;
  4. have an appropriate understanding of how and to whom referrals should be made in more serious cases.

Assessment

Three written assignments (2,000 words each) (90%) (30% each)
Participation in threaded discussion groups (10%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Snow

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students will have acquired a knowledge of practical counselling skills and had some experience in practicing them. They will also learn about the phases of change which individuals go through in the process of first becoming aware of a problem to its resolution. Since the counselling of students raises questions related to development, students will gain some knowledge of personality development and how different personal styles affect counselling.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students should be able:

  1. To increase knowledge about the nature of counselling and its applications in educational settings;
  2. To develop skills in conceptualising presentations;
  3. To improve basic skills in engaging and counselling troubled people in acute and chronic situations;
  4. To develop a plan to evaluate interventions and develop plans for future counselling.

Assessment

Written case presentation, with a case formulation (20%)
Oral case presentation, with recommendations, description of intervention and its evaluation (30%)
Essay on one aspect of counselling, the nature of anxiety, depression, anger; and aggression or a process of counselling such as the counselling relationship, empathy, evaluation of counselling or a topic to be approved by the convenor (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 day on-campus workshop.

Prerequisites

MHT4001 (MHT0001) and MHT4002 (MHT0002).


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Snow

Synopsis

Upon completion of this unit, students will have significant grounding in observation method and the role of participant observer; increased capacity to reflect upon and to manage in their own roles at school; a capacity to understand and analyse group dynamics in the class-room, the school, and the wider educational system; and knowledge of factors that foster a learning environment at school.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. gain skills in observation method in the role of participant observer, and a capacity for self reflection;
  2. gain knowledge and understanding of the parameters of their own roles as teachers, including matters of responsibility, accountability and authority to act, and physical and psychological boundaries related to roles and territories in a school;
  3. develop an understanding of dynamics of relationships between teachers and other members of a school community, from the perspective of psychoanalytic systems and sociological conceptual frameworks;
  4. increase awareness of their own responses and behaviours in small and large groups;
  5. develop a capacity to analyse group dynamics in school systems, including differences in small and large groups, from the perspective of established conceptual frameworks; 6. develop an increased understanding of typical fears within a school community, and a capacity to identify work practices that function to defend against associated anxieties;
  6. gain knowledge of factors that help to create a learning environment in class-rooms and the wider school community;
  7. demonstrate a capacity to observe and to analyse group dynamics in the field, and to communicate findings orally and in a written report.

Assessment

Report (50%)
Presentation and process notes (40%)
Participation in online discussion forum (10%)

Workload requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MHT4001 (MHT0001) and MHT4002 (MHT0002).


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biroand Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

An introduction to normal pregnancy and childbirth and the role of the midwife in providing care for women. This unit will provide the foundational knowledge to enable midwifery students to provide safe and effective midwifery care to healthy mothers and babies across the childbearing continuum, incorporating anatomy and physiology and the evidence basis for maternity care. The focus will be on the role of the midwife as a primary carer and working in partnership with women.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. describe in detail the anatomy & physiology of the human reproductive system, including; pre-conception, pregnancy, fetal development, birth, lactation and the baby;
  2. appreciate the boundaries of care in midwifery including legal, ethical and professional standards and competencies;
  3. appreciate the concepts of with woman, in partnership, and continuity of care;
  4. employ reflective practice and implement evidence based care for women, babies and their families across the childbearing continuum;
  5. articulate a beginning philosophy of midwifery;
  6. demonstrate developing skills necessary to provide women-centred midwifery care;
  7. demonstrate beginning skills in physical assessment of women and their babies across the childbearing continuum;
  8. demonstrate midwifery competency based upon the ANMC National Competency Standards for the Midwife (2006).

Assessment

Written assignment (2,500 words) (30%)
Reflective exercises (2 x 400 words each) (10%)
Guided study activities (online participation) (10%)
Examination (compulsory pass required) (50%)
Assessment of midwifery practice skills (Pass / Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at study blocks held on-campus at Gippsland and Clayton.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biroand Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

An introduction to complex pregnancy and childbirth and the role of the midwife in providing care for women experiencing problems. Students will develop their existing knowledge/skills by working with women and other members of the healthcare team when problems arise during pregnancy, labour & birth, and the first weeks after birth. The students will also acquire foundational knowledge of the care of babies with special needs. Students will have the opportunity to study the circumstances that commonly result in a baby being admitted to a Level Two Nursery. The issues confronting the infant and family during this period will be explored and the role of the midwife in facilitating health and wellbeing of the family. Students will reflect upon and debate the ethico-legal issues involved in care of the baby with special needs. Emphasis is given to the collaborative role of the midwife, consultation and referral, use of medical technology & intervention, and the implications for women, their babies, and midwives themselves.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. utilise knowledge from the biosciences applicable to woman experiencing complex pregnancy and childbirth;
  2. describe and identify common embryological and fetal developments that give rise to abnormalities;
  3. examine specific medical and obstetric conditions that affect childbearing;
  4. evaluate the implications of obstetric interventions for the woman and midwifery practice;
  5. demonstrate skills in the management of emergencies in childbearing;
  6. demonstrate understanding of the circumstances that may necessitate admission of a baby to a Level Two nursery;
  7. evaluate the Level Two Nursery environment and its impact upon the baby and family;
  8. utilise the clinical decision making process to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the care required by the baby and the family;
  9. demonstrate an appreciation of the family's need for privacy, dignity and respect, as well as their right to be informed and to make decision regarding care of their baby;
  10. demonstrate the ability to practice within a multidisciplinary team in an environment of complexity;
  11. facilitate woman's access to appropriate community resources; and
  12. demonstrate midwifery competency based upon the ACMI Competency Standards.

Assessment

Written assignment (2,500 words) (30%)
Guided study activities (20%)
Exam (Compulsory pass required) (50%)
Assessment of midwifery practice skills (Pass / Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at study blocks held on-campus at Gippsland and Clayton.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biroand Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit addresses the need for students to adequately understand what it means to be a professional midwife through exploring issues that impact upon the role of the midwife. These issues include socio-cultural, historical, political, regulatory, legal, ethical and institutional factors that affect midwifery and maternity service delivery at local, national and international levels. Against these factors the role of midwifery as primary health care will be explored in relation to health promotion and education in pregnancy, birth, parenting and lactation, and fertility regulation. This unit works to put into context for the student, the nature and scope of midwifery practice, its interaction and relationships with powerful others in the maternity service milieu, its relationship to consumer activist and advocacy groups, and its role in the community.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the development of the midwifery profession, from historical and current perspectives;
  2. Define the scope of midwifery practice and provide a critique of this scope against the International Definition of a Midwife (ICM WHO);
  3. Develop a critique of maternity service delivery in Australia informed by professional literature, government reports and observation and experience;
  4. Debate legal and ethical considerations for midwifery practice, including the statutes and regulations that govern and regulate midwifery, especially where they limit midwifery from reaching its espoused scope of practice;
  5. Analyse the roles and functions of professional organisations, locally, nationally, and globally, that have an impact on the delivery of midwifery services and the health and well-being of women and babies;
  6. Describe the various models of midwifery care available for the childbearing woman and analyse the factors that limit or facilitate the choices they might make;
  7. Critique the role and ability of research to inform social policy and professional attitudes in relation to the availability of maternity care choices;
  8. Examine and debate micro and macro political, social and cultural and ethico-legal factors that impact on birthing women and midwives;
  9. Debate the ability of midwifery as a profession to advocate for women and to work with women for improvement in maternity services;
  10. Demonstrate theoretical understanding and skills development in education and counselling for health promotion in relation to breastfeeding and fertility regulation, and preparation for childbirth and parenting;
  11. Discuss the role of the midwife as primary health provider; and
  12. Demonstrate midwifery competency based upon the ACMI Competency Standards.

Assessment

Abstract and poster presentation (30%)
Written assignment (40%)
Guided study activities (30%)
Assessment of midwifery practice skills (Pass / Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held on campus at Gippsland (Gippsland only).

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Miles

Synopsis

Consolidation of midwifery practice is required for students to be able to effectively function as registered midwives on completion of their course. This unit provides students with a comprehensive and clinically focused preparation and assessment for transition to practice as competent registered midwives. Students will have the opportunity to apply the theory explored throughout the course to extend and develop confidence in their practice. It is required that students will be employed in midwifery practice for a minimum of 4 days per fortnight in addition to their studies. Individual learning objectives will enable students to undertake a critique of institutional practices, policies, procedures and protocols whilst engaged in remediation, consolidation or extension of midwifery practice skills.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate comprehensive evidence-based knowledge for midwifery practice;
  2. Critique the suitability of application of levels of evidence to particular aspects of maternity care;
  3. Debate the usefulness and suitability of specific evidence based practice and best practice standards in their application in maternity care;
  4. Demonstrate ability to research, collate and present evidence for improvement of midwifery care;
  5. Demonstrate sound clinical decision making skills based on evidence, experience and collaboration and consultation;
  6. Provide individualized, holistic midwifery care that meets psychosocial and physical needs;
  7. Demonstrate individualized socio-cultural sensitivity (women-centred midwifery) in midwifery;
  8. Demonstrate competence in the provision of discerning, discriminating, safe midwifery care in a variety of contexts and complexity of environment;
  9. Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the legal and ethical issues for midwifery practice;
  10. Critique self as an agent of change in maternity care;
  11. Demonstrate a critique of self as an emerging midwife and as a life-long learner;
  12. Function in accordance with the Australian College of Midwives Inc. Competency Standards for Midwives.

Assessment

A written portfolio and presented in an individualised portfolio comprising of research project (60%)
Presentation to peers in a conference format (20%)
Written assignment (155 words) (20%)
Assessment of midwifery practice skills (Pass / Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held oncampus at Gippsland.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biro

Synopsis

Advancing Midwifery Practice is a 12 Credit Point theory and practice unit designed to meet the needs of students wishing to develop advanced midwifery skills and knowledge within particular contexts. Midwifery practice in Australia and overseas is increasingly faced with women requiring technological solutions to complex clinical situations. Obstetrics as a profession is shrinking in numbers, and the impact of a lack of professional indemnity insurance has forced the reordering of maternity services. Government policies and reports advocate for an increased role for midwifery in the provision of maternity services at all levels of risk. In many countries around the world midwifery is at the forefront of a range of complexity of maternity care, but the preparation of midwives for complex practice is ad hoc and poorly realised.

This Unit aims to prepare midwives with the knowledge for skills development in complex clinical situations. The unit is structured to allow flexibility and individualisation of the content to better meet the needs of individual practitioners and their practice settings. Theoretical knowledge will include pathophysiology, technology, evidence and practice issues related to skills clusters. These clusters include: Prenatal, Perinatal, Postnatal and High Risk.

Opportunities will be given for students to gain experience in high-level maternity services in order to complete clinical competencies. Students will understand the requirement and processes necessary for evidence based practice and will gain skills for its implementation in an environment that might be resistant. Students will have the opportunity to critique self and context in relation to evidence in practice. Students will also identify potential for developing collegial and collaborative relationships to other maternity service providers within a practice setting (eg medical practitioners, allied health professionals, nurses and community groups). Portfolio of work, tutorial presentations and participation.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate knowledge and skills for advanced midwifery practice in collaborative and/or autonomous roles;
  2. Demonstrate sound clinical decision making skills based on evidence, experience and collaboration and consultation;
  3. Provide individualised, holistic midwifery care that meets complex psychosocial and physical needs;
  4. Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the legal and ethical issues for midwifery practice;
  5. Demonstrate ability to identify skills and knowledge deficits in self and others within the student's own maternity context;
  6. Demonstrate ability to critique and promote the role of the midwife in contemporary maternity services;
  7. Demonstrate sophisticated interdisciplinary communication and negotiation skills for the advancement of quality in maternity care; and
  8. Demonstrate ability to monitor and improve own practice in accordance with Australian College of Midwives Competency Standards for Midwifery Practice and the Nurses Board of Victoria Code of Practice for Midwives.

Assessment

Written assignment (60%) (Students must achieve a pass in this assessment to pass the unit) (Hurdle)
Tutorial presentation (20%)
Participation in online discussion (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biroand Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the interrelationship of midwifery practice, maternity care and public health. The impact of maternity care on maternal and infant health will be discussed within the context of its social determinants. The role of midwifery and maternity care in improving perinatal outcomes for disadvantaged women and families will be discussed and debated. Against these factors the role of midwifery as primary health care will be explored in relation to health promotion and education in pregnancy, birth, parenting and lactation, and fertility regulation. This unit works to put into context for the student, the nature and scope of midwifery practice and places it as central to securing improved maternal and infant health outcomes.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Examine women's experiences as recipients of health and maternity care, paying particular attention to socio-economic and cultural difference;
  2. Examine the particular health and cultural needs of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander childbearing women and families in historical context;
  3. Develop an understanding of their own values and beliefs, and the challenge presented when working with women who are different from themselves;
  4. Analyze the concept of cultural safety and the implications for midwifery practice;
  5. Discuss the social determinants of health and ill health in relation to childbearing and their impact on perinatal outcomes;
  6. Demonstrate theoretical understanding and skills development in education and counselling for health promotion in relation to breastfeeding and fertility regulation, and preparation for childbirth and parenting;
  7. Critically examine the role of the midwife as primary health care provider for women of diverse cultures and ethnic backgrounds;
  8. Describe the various models of midwifery care available for the childbearing woman and analyse the factors that limit or facilitate the choices they might make;
  9. Critically examine screening in pregnancy in its public health context and the ramifications for maternal and infant health;
  10. Explore the impact of contemporary living and lifestyle factors on maternal and infant health during the childbearing year and beyond;
  11. Discuss maternity care and its impact on long term maternal and infant health;
  12. Critique the role of midwifery in the broader context of public and primary health care provision;
  13. Demonstrate competence in the provision of discerning, discriminating, safe midwifery care in a variety of contexts and complexity of environment based upon the ANMC National Competency Standards for the Midwife (2006).

Assessment

Written assignment (3,000 words) (30%)
Guided questions (2 x 1,000 words) (30%)
Abstract and poster presentation (public health issue) (40%)
Assessment of midwifery practice skills (Pass / Fail)

Workload requirements

24 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at study blocks held on-campus at Gippsland and Clayton.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biroand Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit addresses the need for students to understand what it means to be a midwife by exploring a range of contextual and professional issues. These will include socio-cultural, historical, political, regulatory, legal, ethical and institutional factors that affect midwifery and maternity services at local, national and international levels. This unit also provides students with a consolidation of midwifery clinical practice to support the transition to registered midwife. Individual learning objectives will enable students to undertake a critique of institutional practices, policies, procedures and protocols.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the development of the midwifery profession, from historical and current perspectives;
  2. Discuss historical and contemporary issues in the development of maternity services in Australia and internationally;
  3. Define the scope of midwifery practice in contemporary Australian maternity care and provide a critique of this scope against the International Definition of a Midwife (ICM);
  4. Analyse the roles and functions of professional organisations, locally, nationally, and globally, that have an impact on the delivery of maternity services and the health and wellbeing of women and babies;
  5. Examine the politics of childbirth and develop a critique of maternity service delivery in Australia informed by professional literature, government reports and observation and experience;
  6. Discuss the legal and ethical requirements related to maternity practice;
  7. Debate the ability of midwifery as a profession to advocate for women and to work with women for improvement in maternity services;
  8. Critically examine midwifery practice and identify issues where evidence is required;
  9. Develop the ability to appraise a systematic review of the literature on an aspect of midwifery clinical practice;
  10. Demonstrate comprehensive evidence-based knowledge for midwifery practice;
  11. Demonstrate competence in the provision of discerning, discriminating, safe midwifery care in a variety of contexts and complexity of environment based upon the ANMC National Competency Standards for the Midwife (2006).

Assessment

Essay (2,500 words) (20%)
Clinical practice project (60%)
Presentation to peers (20%)
Assessment of midwifery practice skills (Pass / Fail)
Completion of midwifery portfolio (Pass / Fail)

Workload requirements

Attendance at residential schools held on-campus at Gippsland and block schools oncampus at Clayton.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held on-campus at Gippsland and block schools on-campus at Clayton.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Assessment

Major thesis
minor coursework as specified by the enrolling department.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Catherine Kealley and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is an in-depth understanding of the key facets of radiation physics. Students will be able to define radiation and radioactive decay. Students will be able to describe in detail the interactions of radiation with matter, and explain how radiation is detected and measured. Students will gain an appreciation for the importance of radiation safety, and will be encouraged to critically reflect on the implications of radiation protection in their clinical experiences. Students will also be given an introduction to medical radiations instrumentation and techniques, with emphasis on the fusion of the conceptual theory with the practical applications. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesise relevant information from the literature and their previous experiences of studying physics.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Define and calculate radioactivity, and describe in detail radioactive decay processes;
  2. Explain the scientific concepts involving the production and properties of ionising and non-ionising radiation, and the physical processes involved in the interactions of ionising and non-ionising radiation with matter;
  3. Discuss the principles of, and equipment used for, radiation detection and measurement;
  4. Describe the importance of radiation safety and analyse the techniques and engineering controls used in radiation protection;
  5. Recognise and describe the basic design features, operating principles and the quality assurance checks for medical radiation equipment;
  6. Describe the principles and practice of Radiation Treatment Planning.

Assessment

Two assignments (2,000 words each) (40%)
Mid-semester secure online test (1 hour) (10%)
Written invigilated examination (2 hours) (50%)

Hurdle: To pass this unit, students must:
Achieve a combined mark of 50% or more of the available marks for the assignments and mid-semester test combined,
Achieve 50% or more of the available marks for the written examination and
Achieve a total aggregate mark for this unit of 50% or more.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Catherine Osborne

Synopsis

This unit is the first of three units dealing specifically with the principles and applications of radiation therapy planning and treatment. This unit will cover anatomy, physiology, pathology and oncology of the; integumentary, female reproductive, male reproductive, lower respiratory, lower digestive, urinary and renal systems. In addition students will also analyse and evaluate the principles of radiation therapy planning, ICRU guidelines, metastatic disease and palliative care. Students will appraise and identify cross sectional and 3D anatomy from a range of imaging modalities including CT, MRI and PET. Students will gain in-depth knowledge on the molecular basis of cancer. Students will be able to analyse and describe cancer management strategies, including chemotherapy, surgery and radiation therapy, and synthesis these with individual patient diagnosis and staging. This unit will introduce a series of professional issues; communication, ethics, patient care, cultural awareness and occupational health and safety as they relate to radiation therapy. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesis relevant information from the literature and reflect on their clinical experiences to further develop and build their critical analysis skills.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe in detail the principles related to cancer biology, the molecular basis of cancer, familial cancers, and the metastatic and systemic effects of cancer.
  2. Identify and describe in detail; structural and sectional anatomy, physiology, pathology and oncology related to: male and female reproductive, integumentary, lower digestive, urinary and renal, and lower respiratory systems.
  3. Critically analyse radiation therapy planning, treatment and verification techniques with reference to international standards and the evidence-base for the male and female reproductive, integumentary, lower digestive, urinary and renal, and lower respiratory systems.
  4. Describe with reference to the evidence-base, acute and late radiation therapy side effects, analysing patient care and management strategies related to the above body systems.
  5. Evaluate the role of surgery, chemotherapy, hormone therapy and other management strategies used to treat malignancies.
  6. Appraise the influence of socio-cultural factors on patient attitudes and responses to radiation therapy.
  7. Describe and apply the principles of radiation safety, quality management, occupational health and safety and organisational policy related to radiation therapy practice.
  8. Analyse and synthesis communication principles and techniques related to radiation therapy practice.
  9. Evaluate the principles of multidisciplinary team working and apply these to radiation therapy practice.
  10. Describe the process of reflective practice and demonstrate critical reflection on experience.

Assessment

Examination (3 hours) (50%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Two assignments (3,000 words each) (30%)

Hurdle:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit; and
Successful completion of the Clinical Orientation Workbook.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Brad Cassels and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the action of ionising radiation on living things at the cellular level and the resulting effects on organs, tissues and the whole body. Students will gain an in-depth knowledge on the biological effects of ionising and non-ionising radiation, and the mechanisms of repair to biological damage. Students will be able to describe the systemic and total body responses to early/late effects of radiation. Students will undertake a critical review on how the effects of radiation on biological tissue can be utilised in the practice of radiation therapy. Students will acquire an appreciation of the potential hazards present in different radiation therapy procedures, and focus on the principles of dose reduction, while maximising the information produced from a particular dose of ionising or non-ionising radiation. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesise relevant information from the literature.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the major bio-effects of ionising and non-ionising radiation and explain the severity and risks associated with these bio-effects;
  2. Discuss the known biological effects of ionising and non-ionising radiation on cells and tissues;
  3. Calculate the radiation dose, and appraise the current scientific theories relating to the risk associated with radiation dose;
  4. Explain the rationale used to determine the most appropriate procedure with regard to biological effects;
  5. Describe the modifications to procedural technique, required to maximise the benefit from a particular dose of ionising or non-ionising radiation;
  6. Outline the principles of radiation safety, protection and ALARA, and justify the medical use of ionising and non-ionising radiations.

Assessment

Two assignments (2,000 words each) (40%)
Presentation and critical reflection (10%)
Written invigilated examination (2 hours) (50%)

Hurdle: To pass this unit, students must:
Achieve a combined mark of 50% or more of the available marks for the assignments and presentation/critical review combined,
Achieve 50% or more of the available marks for the written examination and
Achieve a total aggregate mark for this unit of 50% or more.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with knowledge of the Australian health care system, medico-legal, ethical issues, and psychology as related to the practice of radiation therapy. Students will gain in-depth knowledge of health care regulation. Medico-legal and ethical principles relating to the practice of radiation therapy will be studied. Students will gain in-depth knowledge on the psychological theories relating to responses to a cancer diagnosis, coping, the effects of treatment, grief and death and dying. Students will be able to analyse and describe the cause, nature, presentation and course of psychological responses in people with cancer. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesise relevant information from the literature and reflect on their clinical experiences to further develop and build their skills of critical analysis.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Appraise medico-legal principles and reflect on their application to clinical practice, describing the Australian health care system and its regulation;
  2. Explain in detail the laws relating to assault and negligence and relate these to radiation therapy practice;
  3. Analyse and reflect on ethical theories, including principles-based ethics, and how they relate to the practice of radiation therapy;
  4. Discuss the legal and ethical issues related to dealing with patients with special needs;
  5. Describe in detail the cause and nature of psychological/psychiatric responses in cancer patients;
  6. Evaluate coping mechanisms and adjustment disorders in radiation oncology patients in a culturally competent manner.

Assessment

Examination (2 hours) (50%)
Two written word assignments (2,000 words each) (50%)

Hurdle:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Catherine Kealley and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit covers advanced medical radiations physics with a specific focus on image formation and instrumentation. Students will gain an in-depth conceptual understanding of the instrumentation used for each of the diagnostic imaging modalities. Students will undertake a critical review of the physical properties responsible for image formation. Students will acquire an appreciation of the Image Registration process and the importance of combination imaging in radiation therapy. Students will gain an in-depth knowledge in the underlying theory and corresponding advancements in clinical radiation therapy instrumentation. Students will apply this knowledge in a critical review of advanced radiation therapy techniques.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the basic principles of operation and image formation of CT, PET, MRI and Ultrasound modalities;
  2. Outline Image Registration and evaluate the advantages gained from combination imaging;
  3. Describe the scientific concepts and clinical applications of Intensity-Modulated Radiotherapy;
  4. Describe the principles of and instrumentation used for Image-Guided Radiotherapy;
  5. Discuss the advanced techniques of radiation therapy including Stereotactic Radiosurgery and Brachytherapy.

Assessment

Two assignments (2,000 words each) (40%)
Presentation and critical review (10%)
Written invigilated examination (2 hours) (50%)

Hurdle: To pass this unit, students must:
Achieve a combined mark of 50% or more of the available marks for the assignments and presentation/critical review combined,
Achieve 50% or more of the available marks for the written examination and
Achieve a total aggregate mark for this unit of 50% or more.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Catherine Osborne

Synopsis

This unit is the second of three units dealing specifically with the principles and applications of radiation therapy planning and treatment. This unit will cover the: loco-motor, lymphatic, cardio-vascular, and haematological systems. In addition students will also analyse and evaluate the principles of quality assurance and how they relate to the practice of radiation therapy. Students will gain in-depth knowledge on the role applications of image verification in radiation therapy treatment delivery. Students will be able to analyse and evaluate radiation therapy beam modification devices and planning evaluation tools. This unit includes a five week clinical placement that will allow students to develop further clinical and professional skills to intermediate beginner level. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesis relevant information from the literature and reflect on their clinical experiences.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify and describe in detail; structural and sectional anatomy, physiology, pathology and oncology related to: loco-motor, lymphatic, and cardiovascular systems.
  2. Critically analyse radiation therapy planning, treatment and verification techniques with reference to international standards, the evidence-base and personal reflections for: the loco-motor, lymphatic, and cardiovascular systems and demonstrate beginner level planning, treatment and verification procedures for a range of diagnoses.
  3. Describe with reference to the evidence-base, acute and late radiation therapy side effects, analysing patient care and management strategies related to the above body systems, demonstrating the provision of beginner level multi-disciplinary patient care, management, communication and professional skills for a range of patients.
  4. Describe the process of how 3D datasets are generated and evaluate the clinical use of 3D images for planning and verification.
  5. Describe in detail and apply the principles of radiation safety, quality management, occupational health and safety.
  6. Appraise protocols, procedures and legal requirements used for incident reporting.
  7. Appraise the imaging modalities used for treatment verification and demonstrate beginner level image matching.
  8. Analyse and synthesis the principles and clinical applications of plan evaluation tools, demonstrating beginner level use of these.
  9. Evaluate the rationale for use of beam modification accessories.
  10. Describe and discuss effective and respectful working collaborations with the multi-disciplinary team.

Assessment

Examination (3 hours) (50%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (10%)
Two assignments (3,000 words each) (30%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Hurdle:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This clinical placement unit of 10 weeks will allow students to begin developing both their technical and professional skills within the field of Medical Radiation Science. This unit will also provide students with the opportunity to practice infection control, occupational health and safety, radiation safety; communication and administrative skills. Students will demonstrate the characteristics of a beginning reflective practitioner.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse, apply and reflect on theories of human communication, empathy, occupational health and radiation safety of the working environment, within a professional standards and ethics context;
  2. Record and obtain information from individuals employing appropriate observation and interviewing skills, such that the information generated may be integrated with advanced scientific theory and knowledge to provide quality levels of patient care;
  3. Apply the principles of anatomy pathophysiology and radiation oncology in the radiation therapy clinical environment, critically reflecting on these for individual patient cases;
  4. Critically reflect upon multi-disciplinary radiation therapy practice and identify on-going professional development needs with respect to planning, treatment and patient management;
  5. Implement radiation therapy planning, treatment and patient management protocols across a diverse range of patients and evaluate their efficacy at the level of a 'beginner/novice practitioner';
  6. Evaluate the principles of palliative care, reflecting on patient management strategies in the radiation oncology palliative care sector.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 10 weeks.

Assessment

Four case reports (50%)
a. Communication case report (500 words)
b. Empathy case report (500 words)
c. Treatment case report (1,000 words)
d. Planning case report (1,000 words)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)
Written assignment (2,000 words) (40%)

Hurdle:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit; and
Successful completion of Professional Practice Portfolio.

Workload requirements

10 weeks clinical placement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Catherine Osborne and Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

This unit is the third and final unit dealing specifically with the principles and applications of radiation therapy planning and treatment. This unit will cover paediatric radiation therapy along with the central nervous, upper digestive, upper respiratory, endocrine systems, and organs of special sense. Students will analyse 3D imaging datasets, CT, MRI and PET and describe how they relate to individual patient management. Students will gain knowledge on the role and clinical applications of brachytherapy, stereotactic radiosurgery, stereotactic radiotherapy, tomo-therapy and proton therapy. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesis relevant information from the literature and reflect on their clinical experiences.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify and describe in detail; structural and sectional anatomy, physiology, pathology and oncology related to paediatric tumours, upper respiratory, upper digestive, endocrine, central nervous systems, and organs of special sense.
  2. Critically analyse radiation therapy planning, treatment and verification techniques with reference to international standards, the evidence-base and personal reflections for the above tumour groups.
  3. Evaluate with reference to the evidence-base and personal reflections acute and late radiation therapy side effects, analysing patient care and management strategies related to the above body systems.
  4. Appraise the role of CT, MRI, PET and Ultrasound imaging for diagnosis, radiation therapy planning and treatment verification.
  5. Apply knowledge of anatomy and physiology to evaluate images for radiation therapy patients.
  6. Describe in detail brachytherapy principles, protocols, and techniques.
  7. Synthesis the principles and clinical applications of specialist radiation therapy techniques, including radiosurgery, stereotactic radiotherapy, tomo-therapy, and proton therapy.
  8. Demonstrate critical reflection on practice.

Assessment

Examination (3 hours) (50%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Two assignments (3,000 words each) (30%)

Hurdle:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Imalda Devaparanam and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

The unit introduces students to the principles and practice of evidence-based practice and research. Students will gain in-depth knowledge on research methods. Students will be able to analyse and describe quantitative and qualitative research designs, and demonstrate how to apply these to the field of radiation therapy. Different methods of data collection, analysis, interpretation, communication and subsequent critique of the findings will be presented. The unit will allow an in-depth exploration of the evidence-based practice paradigm and students will demonstrate how research findings can influence patient care and management in radiation therapy. Whilst studying these topics, students will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesise relevant information from the literature, reflecting on their experiences from clinical practice to further develop and build their skills of critical analysis.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse the role of research in radiation therapy, reflecting on experiences in clinical practice.
  2. Appraise the scope of research conducted in radiation therapy, radiation oncology and related disciplines.
  3. Evaluate different methods of knowledge acquisition; analysing and synthesising the moral, ethical and legal responsibilities of research.
  4. Describe in detail the key concepts, methods and different approaches used in qualitative and quantitative research design.
  5. Appraise evidence and research findings relevant to radiation therapy.
  6. Define evidence based practice and evaluate its implications for health care delivery in radiation therapy.

Assessment

Research plan (2,000 words) (40%)
Evidence based literature review (4,000 words) (60%)

Hurdle:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is a period of professional clinical experience undertaken in the workplace to enable students to develop competency. Students will practice under the supervision of qualified staff, and a clinical workbook will be provided to enable students to document their professional and technical development.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply their knowledge to the practice of Medical Radiations;
  2. Demonstrate initiative, problem solving and decision making skills;
  3. Act in a responsible, safe and ethical manner and apply these principles to practice;
  4. Complete specified tasks and procedures within appropriate time frames;
  5. Demonstrate effective communication skills with patients, carers and members of the health care team;
  6. Incorporate the evidence based paradigm into their practice;
  7. Recognise the limitations of their knowledge and experience and seek advice when required;
  8. Practice their profession at the level of the competent practitioner.

Fieldwork

47 weeks of continuous clinical placement.

Assessment

Hurdle:
Pass each end-of-semester final clinical skills assessment and portfolio submission
Pass the end of year clinical moderation in planning, treatment and professional reflection.

Workload requirements

47 weeks of continuous clinical placement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


3 points, SCA Band 2, 0.0625 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


8 points, SCA Band 2, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


24 points, SCA Band 2, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Miranda Davies and Professor Flavia Cicuttini

Synopsis

Differences between descriptive & analytical epidemiology, strengths & weaknesses of different epidemiological study design & basic concepts & methods of biostatistics including confidence intervals, p-values & sample size, statistical tests for comparing groups, regression models & survival analysis. Design & evaluation of clinical trials.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. appreciate the strengths and weaknesses of different epidemiological study designs;
  2. demonstrate an understanding of basic concepts and methods of biostatistics;
  3. interpret confidence intervals, p-values and sample size;
  4. use epidemiological and biostatistical principles to critically evaluate epidemiological research.

Assessment

Two assignments (1,500 words each) (50%)
Examination (3 hours) (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dianna Magliano

Synopsis

To be taken concurrently with MPH5041 together they are prerequisites for clinical epidemiology elective units. Contents: rates, sources of data, descriptive & analytical epidemiology, epidemiological study designs, critical appraisal of literature, screening, prevention, exposure assessment, outbreak investigation, confounding & bias.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. explain and contextualise the purposes of descriptive and analytical epidemiology;
  2. explain and contextualise the concepts of study questions, population, sampling, exposure assessment, bias and confounding;
  3. analyse the strengths and weaknesses of different epidemiological study designs;
  4. critically analyse epidemiological papers from the medical research and OHS literature;
  5. evaluate the adequacy of exposure assessment in epidemiological studies;
  6. interpret and communicate the results of epidemiological studies; and
  7. solve complex problems relating to the use of epidemiological concepts and study designs.

Assessment

Assignments (25%)
Examination (75%)

Workload requirements

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 day compulsory on-campus block for off-campus students.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

MPH5041, except for students enrolled in courses 3896 (Perioperative stream), 2312 or 0160.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Baki Billah

Notes

Students do not have provision to borrow SPSS CD from Monash University; they have to lease/buy it from IBM SPSS.

Synopsis

This unit is taken concurrently with MPH5040. Together they are prerequisites for clinical epidemiology elective units. Contents includes: classification of health data; summarizing data using simple statistical methods and graphical presentation; sampling distributions, quantifying uncertainty in results from a sample; statistical distributions; comparing two/more groups/methods using hypothesis tests and confidence intervals; assessing the association between outcome and exposure using chi-squared test; risk comparisons; prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is measured in continuous scale; prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is measured on a binary scale (yes/no); sample size calculations.

Students are required to have access to a calculator equipped with elementary scientific functions (e.g. Casio FX-100) and a statistical package for data analysis e.g. SPSS, PRISM, STATA (help will be available with SPSS only. Note: Students don't have provision to borrow SPSS CD from Monash; they may have to lease/buy it from SPSS.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe, summarise, and graph data appropriately;
  2. Analyse elementary data using a statistical computer package;
  3. Identify different probability distributions and their parameters;
  4. Quantify uncertainty in research results using biostatistical methods;
  5. Apply the appropriate statistical methods to basic research questions;
  6. Perform simple statistical analyses, report their findings and interpret their results;
  7. Critically appraise the statistical aspects of research publications in health care.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (15%)
Assignment 2 (25%)
Assignment 3 (40%)
2 x Online test (20 MCQ each test) (10% each test)

Workload requirements

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 day on-campus block for off-campus students.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

MPH5040, except for students enrolled in courses 3896 (Perioperative stream), or 2312.

Prohibitions

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Professor Joseph Ibrahim

Synopsis

This unit will examine the health impacts of climate change, and the relevance of this to the principles and practices of public health. Informed by an understanding of the fundamental role of climate stability for sustained population health, and of evidence for anthropogenic global warming, the focus of the unit will be on direct and indirect mechanisms through which climate change could impact on health, including extreme weather events, changing patterns of vector-borne disease, water-borne infections, food quality and availability, air quality, and social disruption. There will be an emphasis on evidence for past and predicted health effects, health burden magnitude and distribution, and the complex interplay between population and environmental factors that influence vulnerability. Students will apply this knowledge to critically appraise adaptation and mitigation initiatives from a public health perspective, and will be expected to engage with current climate change issues and communicate their ideas clearly and effectively.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Articulate the fundamental role of climate stability as a prerequisite for sustained population health.
  2. Distinguish between concepts of climate, climate variability and long-term climate change.
  3. Critically appraise evidence for anthropogenic global warming and climate change, and demonstrate an understanding of predicted climate scenarios.
  4. Outline the basic principles and tools of public health practice, and discuss their application to minimise the health impacts of climate change.
  5. Identify the potential mechanisms through which climate change could impact directly and indirectly on health, and of the complex interactions between these and other population and environmental factors.
  6. Discuss the magnitude and distribution of the health burden of climate change.
  7. Outline factors that influence the vulnerability of populations to the health impact of climate change, and apply this knowledge to critically appraise public health preparedness and response initiatives.
  8. Discuss adaptation and mitigation initiatives to minimise the health impact of climate change, using a public health prevention framework.
  9. Clearly and effectively communicate fundamental concepts of climate change science, climate change health impacts, and public health responses.

Assessment

Letter to the editor (500 words) (20%)
Reflective essay (2,000 words) (30%)
Online class participation (50%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week, broken down into (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or online), 2 hours per week for online communication via Moodle discussions, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 hours over 2 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Rory Wolfe

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis.

Synopsis

Confounding and effect modification, logistic regression, conditional logistic regression for matched case-control studies, linear regression, diagnostics to assess model fit, model estimation methods, Poisson regression for rates, Stata statistical software.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. learn regression methods as applied to epidemiological data.
  2. gain an understanding of regression methods in terms of the epidemiological concepts of confounding and effect modification.
  3. apply regression methods to example datasets using statistical software on a laptop computer.
  4. gain an understanding and the skills to interpret regression methods in published articles on epidemiological research studies.

Assessment

Four written assignments (10%, 35%, 35%, 20% each)

Workload requirements

2 x 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sylvia Pomeroy and Professor Michael Abramson

Synopsis

The unit will cover applications of epidemiological techniques to clinical research including discussions of evidence, therapy, causation, variation and agreement, the normal range, diagnostic test selection, validation and interpretation, natural history and prognosis, bias, generalisability, systematic reviews and clinical guidelines.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:
1. critically appraise evidence relating to the causation, diagnosis, natural history, treatment and prognosis of disease.

Assessment

Written / online weekly assessment tasks (50%)
Final assignment (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ewan MacFarlane

Synopsis

Environmental influences on health including physical, chemical and biological hazards as well as principles of assessment, management and control of environmental health risks.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify important chemical, physical and biological hazards in the environment and analyse related risks to health from environmental factors in Australia;
  2. communicate fluently using appropriate terminology to describe chemical, physical and biological hazards encountered in a variety of contexts;
  3. critically appraise the epidemiological literature which informs the evidence base for environmental health risk control strategies;
  4. identify common hazards, appropriate techniques for exposure measurement and risk assessment methodologies in environmental media such as water air and food;
  5. apply theoretical models of risk communication to appropriately communicate the principles of effective management of environmental health risks; and
  6. develop evidence based interventions to control simple environmental risks and prevent harm, including strategies for standard setting and systematic management of key personal, social and economic factors, to inhibit, control or reduce potential for harm.

Assessment

Written assignments (1 x 2,000 words; 1 x 2,500 words) (80%)
Online tasks (20%)

Hurdle: Full attendance at unit block days.

Workload requirements

OCL plus 3 day block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Robert Hall

Synopsis

Epidemiology and control of chronic diseases. Overview of important chronic diseases in Australia in 2011, and strategies for their prevention and control. Measurement of disease and burden of disease; concept of risk factors and risk factors for important chronic diseases; the effect of social and economic factors on the epidemiology of chronic diseases; impact of chronic diseases on society and the economy; smoking, nutrition and physical activity as risk factors for important chronic diseases; cardiovascular diseases and their prevention; oral diseases and their prevention; injuries and their prevention; respiratory diseases and their prevention; cancers and their prevention; screening as a public health tool; health promotion as a public health tool; use of evidence in public health programmes to prevent chronic diseases.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the epidemiology and burden of chronic diseases in Australia
  2. understand the causal pathways leading to important chronic diseases
  3. describe strategies for the public health control of chronic diseases
  4. understand the role of public health evidence in the control of chronic diseases.

Assessment

Online class tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anita Wluka

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the research methods used in observational studies and is designed to help the student develop the practical skills required in the design and assessment of a research project. It covers issues in protocol design, including study type selection, introduction to questionnaire design, sampling methods, and ethics approval. This introduces the student to planning data management and statistical analysis and developing a study budget. An introduction to the role of qualitative research is also covered.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. pose a research question answerable by observational study methods used to examine public health;
  2. design and present a research protocol to answer the stated question using observational study designs;
  3. describe and demonstrate how information may be collected from people and transformed into usable data for scientific study;
  4. identify, evaluate and communicate when qualitative methodologies may be useful; and
  5. demonstrate the ability to participate and communicate effectively within a group.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (up to 1,500 words, including references) (10%)
Assignment 2 (up to 3,500 words, excluding references) (30%)
Examination (2 hours) (45%)
Quiz (15 minutes) (5%)
Participation (30 minutes each week - online or face to face) (10%)

Workload requirements

The total workload requirement for this unit is 12 hours of work per week. This incorporates the following:
For option 1 (On campus learning): 2 hours per week;
For option 2 (Off campus learning): 15 contact hours over 2 days + OCL (discussion online)

Note: These options are not interchangeable midway through semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Karin Leder and Dr Robert Hall

Synopsis

Importance of transmission source, host and organism factors in infectious disease epidemiology. Outbreak investigation, surveillance of infectious diseases, prevention/control strategies, mathematical modelling of infectious diseases and of impact of immunity. Includes discussion of infection control, vaccines, exotic and emerging diseases.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the unique aspects of infectious disease epidemiology and understand relevant terminology;
  2. Recall and apply strategies used in the prediction, detection and control of infectious disease outbreaks;
  3. Understand the epidemiologic principles underlying surveillance programs and evaluate surveillance systems;
  4. Understand the epidemiologic principles underlying disease control and prevention strategies;
  5. Recognise the potential role of mathematical modelling in relation to infectious diseases.

Assessment

Web-based tasks and block day participation (60%)
Class presentation (40%)

Workload requirements

3 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Geza Benke

Synopsis

How to recognise, evaluate and control hazards in workplaces arising from substances, sound, radiation and micro-organisms. Principles and practice of occupational hygiene including the use of simple instruments, ventilation, personal protective equipment and workplace substances laws. Hygienic standards and their various forms and notations. The difficulties of assessing prior exposures for medico-legal and epidemiological purposes

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify and analyse significant patterns of hazards and risks to health from work in Australia;
  2. communicate fluently using appropriate terminology to describe chemical, physical and microbiological hazards;
  3. identify common hazards and apply appropriate techniques for exposure measurement;
  4. using evidence based information, effectively communicate strategies for the identification of occupational hazards and risks and the development of appropriate controls;
  5. implement and evaluate common interventions used to control simple workplace risks; and
  6. identify when further expertise is required to measures and/or control workplace hazards.

Assessment

Multiple choice tests (2 x 10% & 1 x 30%)
Web-based tasks (10%)
Workbook (5%)
Written assignment (Outline 5% & Essay 30%)

Hurdle: Full attendance at unit block days.

Workload requirements

20 hours contact over 3 days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Belinda Gabbe

Synopsis

This unit is designed to allow students to identify a research project in the field of population health or clinical research, confirm an appropriate supervisor, develop the research question and methodology, and commence the project, including obtaining ethics approval if relevant.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the theoretical basis behind their topic and research design
  2. Synthesise critical arguments in relation to the existing literature about the topic
  3. Develop appropriate research questions, aims and hypotheses
  4. Demonstrate a collaborative and critical approach to research
  5. Identify the ethical and methodological issues related to the conduct of the proposed research
  6. Successfully complete and receive the necessary ethical and governance approvals for the conduct of their research (if required)
  7. Effectively manage time and resources to achieve pre-determined goals.

Assessment

Confirmation of supervisor (Hurdle)
Project proposal including literature review (Hurdle)
Ethics approval (project dependent) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Regular contact and consultation with supervisor either face to face or electronic.
6 hours per week for self-directed study and research related activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Distinction (70-79%) or High Distinction (80% or higher) in MPH5040 and Distinction (70-79%) or High Distinction (80% or higher) in MPH5041.

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Belinda Gabbe

Synopsis

This is the final unit of two units designed to allow students to complete the conduct and write-up of a research project in the field of population health or clinical research. In this unit, students will complete the research project described in the research proposal developed in MPH5231. Students will interrogate data using acceptable analytical processes, and write-up the research project in a format and style suitable for publication in an academic setting.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate their ability to manage data collection and/or analysis
  2. Work collaboratively with a research supervisor to achieve research milestones
  3. Write to an appropriate academic standard by incorporating existing research findings and supervisor feedback
  4. Analyse and present data in a clear, concise and systematic manner
  5. Recognise the strengths and limitations of their research design
  6. Understand, and experience, the practicalities of research project management
  7. Suggest directions for future research in their specialist area
  8. Demonstrate the capacity to write in a format and style appropriate for an academic audience of academic publication.

Assessment

Completion and submission of project report (7,000 - 8,000 words) (100%)

Workload requirements

Regular contact and consultation with supervisor either face to face or electronic.
6 hours per week for self-directed study and research related activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

MPH5231, Distinction (70-79%) or High Distinction (80% or higher) in MPH5040 and Distinction (70-79%) or High Distinction (80% or higher) in MPH5041.

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alice Owen

Synopsis

This unit will equip students with the skills for the design, implementation and analysis of randomised controlled clinical trials. It will enable student to formulate research question, select and recruit study subjects, compare groups, conduct randomisation, interpret findings, manage outcomes and consider issues of ethics, budget and quality assurance.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. design a protocol for a randomised controlled clinical trial;
  2. appraise a protocol of a randomised controlled clinical trial;
  3. describe the ethical and regulatory process required for the conduct of a clinical trial.

Assessment

Written assignments (80%)
Online assessment (20%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alistair Nichol and Dr Helen Ackland

Synopsis

Aimed at students with clinical experience, this unit presents an overview of clinical outcome measurement in research, with a focus on quantitative measurement. The areas covered include selecting, reducing and scaling items, questionnaire design, assessing reliability and validity, responsiveness of measures to clinically important change, quality of life measures and statistical concepts in the testing and reporting of clinical measurement tools.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Appreciate the process of the development of outcome measurement tools in clinical and epidemiological research.
  2. Select appropriate tools for the measurement of patients outcomes in clinical and epidemiological research.
  3. Apply measurement theory to the critical assessment of clinical measurement tools used in published literature.

Assessment

Presentation and participation during block days (15%)
Participation in online discussions (35%)
Written assignment (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days for block days, and 3-4 hours of reading and online work each week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Rachelle Buchbinder

Synopsis

Critical appraisal of literature reviews; problem formulation and protocol development; intra-rater agreement for assessment of relevance; validity assessments; data collection forms; variation between study findings, combining the findings of independent studies, inferences based upon overviews; statistics of meta analysis, Cochrane Collaboration.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. critically appraise literature reviews;
  2. perform a systematic review of randomized controlled trials.

Assessment

Group presentation of a systematic review (70%)
Individual critical appraisal of a published literature review (20%)
Online participation (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rwth Stuckey

Synopsis

The effects and human cost of occupational disease and injury, occupational health and safety law, worker's compensation, negligence, occupational rehabilitation, historical achievements and challenges, international and national organisations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. discuss and analyse the human and economic cost and causes of workplace injury and death in Australia;
  2. identify contemporary OHS data sources and explain their merits and limitations;
  3. describe and evaluate various injury models;
  4. analyse the legal framework for OHS and occupational injury management, including the roles of:

a. Robens type legislation and other historical drivers;

b. contemporary developments - Harmonised OHS legislation;

c. OHS worker representation and other stakeholders;

d. worker's compensation;

e. other related legislation and regulation;

  1. describe and discuss the application of occupational rehabilitation programs and service management;
  2. analyse and contextualise the OHS impacts of contemporary work patterns; and
  3. identify contemporary OHS achievements and emerging challenges and contextualise their impact within OHSMS.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (15%)
Assignments (45%)
Examination (40%)

Hurdle: Full attendance at unit block days.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a Postgraduate course.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tessa Keegel

Synopsis

Psychosocial effects of work on individuals is explained from a preventive viewpoint. Mental illness & its effect on employment, alcohol and drug use, disability discrimination, equal employment opportunity legislation, workplace health promotion & shift work are examined.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify and evaluate varied situations where workers find it hard to cope;
  2. identify and analyse the causes of absenteeism and develop and implement appropriate management control strategies;
  3. communicate the underpinning principles of disability discrimination and equal employment legislation and practically apply them in workplace settings;
  4. develop, implement, and evaluate a health promotion program;
  5. implement evidence-based occupational drug and alcohol management;
  6. analyse the health effects of shift work and implement appropriate rosters and other strategies to minimise hazardous factors;
  7. reflect critically on theoretical models and concepts underpinning organisational psychology; and
  8. develop insightful and persuasive recommendations to improve workplace culture.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (25%)
Assignment: outline (5%)
Assignment: presentation (15%)
Essay (2,000 - 2,500 words) (35%)
2 x Short answer tests (10% each)

Hurdle: Full attendance at unit block days.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deborah Glass

Synopsis

Prevention of human disease resulting from workplace exposures to chemical and biological hazards. Covering toxicological principles, health effects of the major groups of chemical substances, as well as biological hazards from blood and bodily secretions, water, food, animals and travelling abroad.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. list groups of commonly encountered substances, giving examples of each;
  2. relate the principles of toxicokinetics and the metabolism of foreign substances by the human body;
  3. describe the common and well-known adverse effects from substances and biological agents;
  4. describe the common and important infections spread by water, food, air, blood and animal secretions;
  5. implement methods to control the spread of such infections;
  6. describe what is meant by immunity, allergy and vaccination;
  7. research, reflect on, interpret and critically analyse information about the health effects of substances and biological agents; and
  8. effectively and sensitively communicate or transmit synthesized information about risks due to substances and biological agents to specialist and non-specialist audiences.

Assessment

Multiple choice tests (10%)
Short answer tests (10%)
Web-based tests (including online discussion) (15%)
Written assignment: outline and bibliography (10%)
Essay (2,500 - 3,000 words) (35%)
Group presentation and write-up (20%)

Hurdle: Full attendance at block days.

Workload requirements

27 contact over 4 days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rwth Stuckey

Synopsis

Introduction to principles & practice of ergonomics. Occupational hygiene as applied to physical hazards: noise, radiation, thermal environments & pressure effects.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify and analyse the properties and effects of common occupational physical hazards;
  2. identify common occupational physical hazards and related risks and tools for risk quantification;
  3. identify when further expertise is required and refer appropriately to expert assistance;
  4. apply the principles of the 'hierarchy of controls' to the control of physical hazards, including communicating effectively to workers about the risks;
  5. conduct a simple ergonomic assessment using a systems approach to consider risks to workers from equipment, tools, environment and work design factors; and
  6. interpret the assessment results and develop and effectively communicate appropriate recommendations for risk controls.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (10%)
Written assignments (45%)
Examination (30%)
Multiple choice tests (15%)

Hurdle: Full attendance at unit block days.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Reeve and Dr Chris Morgan

Synopsis

This subject will provide an overview of the history, principles and practice of primary health care in developing countries, as well as the interaction between primary healthcare and current trends in global health and international development.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the principles and elements of primary health care;
  2. Explain how primary health care has evolved and the issues that have shaped its development;
  3. Outline important cross-cutting issues in PHC and the role of primary healthcare in health systems strengthening;
  4. Describe the importance, variety and roles of community health workers and peripheral service delivery in primary health care;
  5. Describe the strategies taken to maximise the likelihood of PHC succeeding as a health care system at community, district and country levels;
  6. Explain the role of global agencies; aid programs and other international health interventions in primary health care services;
  7. Outline the role of community knowledge, attitudes and practices and health care seeking behaviours in primary health care;
  8. Summarise important issues in the financing of primary health care;
  9. Demonstrate how PHC principles and practices may apply to current global health issues including control of communicable diseases (including HIV infection), urbanisation, ageing and chronic diseases.

Assessment

Essay (3,500-4,000 words) (70%)
Group presentation (10%)
Individual reflection on group work (1,000 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

5 day intensive block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Matthew Reeve and Dr Chris Morgan

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency.

Prohibitions

Students who complete the cross-institutional University of Melbourne subject POPH90137 'Primary Health Care in Jamkhed, India' cannot also claim academic credit from undertaking MPH5248 'Primary Health Care in Global Health', and vice versa.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ben Coghlan and Dr Tony Stewart

Synopsis

Rapid appraisal of community health needs; public health surveillance; population surveys; survey sampling methods; measuring mortality; measurement of the burden of disease; program monitoring; quality assurance in primary healthcare; using health data for decision making; participatory evaluation of health programs; and applied health research.
This unit aims to develop students' competence in the basic quantitative and qualitative tools used to manage community-based primary health care programs, including needs assessments, planning and evaluation, health information collection, and operations research in a developing country setting.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:
1. Develop competence in the basic qualitative tools used to manage community-based primary health care programs, including assessments, planning and evaluation, health information collection, and operations research in a developing country setting.

Assessment

Written assignments: 1 x (40%)
1 x (60%)

Workload requirements

5 day intensive block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ben Coghlan and Dr Tony Stewart

Prerequisites

Either MPH5040 and MPH5041 or MPH5020.

Prohibitions

Students completing MPH5249 cannot undertake MPH5213.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Elissa Kennedy

Synopsis

This unit provides an overview of women's and children's health in resource-limited settings. Using a life-cycle approach, this unit explores the major causes and underlying determinants of poor reproductive, maternal, newborn, child and adolescent health and examines global policy and key public health strategies to improve health outcomes.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the major causes of morbidity and mortality affecting women of reproductive age and children in resource-limited settings
  2. Analyse the underlying determinants of women's and children's health using a life-cycle approach
  3. Explain the links between gender and women's and children's health, and critically assess public health policy and programs from a gender perspective
  4. Identify effective public health interventions to improve the health of women and children in resource-limited settings and critique the evidence for these interventions
  5. Demonstrate an understanding of the challenges impacting on access, quality and delivery of services and public health programs in resource-limited settings and describe effective approaches to overcome these challenges.

Assessment

Essay (3,500 - 4,000 words) (60%)
Abstract outlining essay topic (400 words) (5%)
Group presentation (15 minutes) (20%)
Policy brief (1,000 words) (15%)

Workload requirements

6 day intensive block (weekdays only).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency.

Prohibitions

Students who complete the University of Melbourne unit POPH90086 'International Child Health' cannot also claim academic credit from undertaking MPH5250 'Women's and children's health: a global perspective'.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Suman Majumdar and Mr Geoff Chan

Synopsis

This unit aims to equip global health practitioners with a practical understanding of the impact of infectious diseases on global health equity. The unit will explore:

  • key existing and emerging diseases of global health importance
  • the historical context, determinants and epidemiology of key infectious diseases
  • the existing and needed global policies, public health responses and effective health care delivery models in resource-limited settings for key infectious diseases

The unit will be taught by instructors with field experience and will draw on case studies and practical examples from resource-limited settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to identify the key infectious diseases of global public health importance and demonstrate an understanding of:

  1. their historical context, determinants, epidemiology and impact on health equity
  2. the global policies, public health responses and effective practices for prevention, treatment and care at both an individual, community and population level
  3. the principles, approaches and challenges for effective health care delivery models in resource-limited settings.

Assessment

Problem-based learning group presentation (15%)
Policy brief on group topic (25%)
Concept note (500 words) (5%)
Written assignment: Infectious disease program design (3,500 words) (55%)

Workload requirements

40 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Suman Majumdar and Mr Geoff Chan

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mike Toole and Dr Ben Coghlan

Synopsis

Public health consequences of complex humanitarian emergencies involving armed conflict, population displacement, food scarcity and an outline of the critical public health interventions in these settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. analyse the casual factors of public health emergencies related to conflict and population displacement;
  2. identify the major public health and nutrition priorities in humanitarian crises;
  3. develop relevant public health assessment and response skills in emergency settings;
  4. recognise the need for a multisectoral approach to reducing the health impact of emergencies.

Assessment

Short answer examination (50%)
Written assignment (50%)

Workload requirements

7 day intensive block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Either MPH5040 and MPH5041 or MPH5020.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mike Toole

Synopsis

Food security & nutritional issues in developing countries, emphasising causal factors, field programs addressing famine & under nutrition.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify and classify the major nutrients required for good human health and well-being;
  2. analyse the major global and local determinants of adequate human nutrition;
  3. assess the nutritional status of individuals and populations;
  4. diagnose and manage acute malnutrition in children and adults;
  5. identify the causative factors in the evolution of population nutrition emergencies;
  6. plan programs to rehabilitate malnourished communities and to maintain and strengthen household food security;
  7. understanding the determinants and different elements of household and community food security.

Assessment

Short answer examination (50%)
Written assignment (50%)

Workload requirements

6 day block mode.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liz Bishop

Synopsis

This unit examines the interrelationship between public health and human rights. It begins be providing a overview of the development, content and application of human rights. Human rights aspects of contemporary local and international health concerns are then considered.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Appreciate the strengths and weaknesses of human rights;
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of how a human rights framework might be applied in analysing health concerns;
  3. Critically evaluate the worth of this framework to contributing to the improvement of human well being.

Assessment

On campus students
Written assignments mid-semester (30%)
Written assignments end-semester (70%)

Off campus students
Written assignments (60%)
Contribution to online discussion forum (40%)

Workload requirements

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Weekly reading as required and contribution to online discussion forum.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Belinda Gabbe

Synopsis

This unit will cover the principles of injury epidemiology, prevention and control. The unit will provide an introduction to the injury epidemiology and prevention field with a particular focus on issues facing injury surveillance, countermeasure development, injury policy and injury burden estimates.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. analyse and contextualise the concept of injury as a preventable health condition;
  2. identify and describe the context and consequence of burden of injury;
  3. synthesise the principles of injury prevention and control and related models;
  4. identify requirements for and conduct injury surveillance;
  5. analyse and evaluate the strengths and limitations of a variety of research methods used to define the nature and extent of injury;
  6. develop, implement and evaluate injury prevention programs and frameworks for countermeasure development;
  7. theorise and analyse approaches to injury policy and legislation; and
  8. analyse and evaluate issues in the measurement of injury severity, definition, burden and outcome.

Assessment

Written assignments
Oral presentation

Workload requirements

5 day intensive block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Lisa Renkin

Synopsis

The unit is designed to enhance participants' understanding of HIV, the impact of HIV epidemics throughout the developing world, and the evidence underpinning appropriate programmatic responses to HIV. The unit presents analysis of the risk and vulnerability of individuals and communities to HIV infection, explores the latest evidence and policy developments relevant to prevention, care/support and treatment approaches, and aims to expand participants' skills in developing appropriate evidence-based responses to HIV. Recent shifts in global policy are presented along with a number of case studies drawn from 'real-world' programs to facilitate students' learning

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. enhance their knowledge and understanding about HIV virology, epidemiology and the global evidence base;
  2. enhance their understanding of the impact HIV has upon individuals and communities;
  3. understand the relationship between HIV and development, including global influences on policy and implementation of programs, and the link with health systems strengthening;
  4. identify essential elements of effective strategies for preventing HIV transmission and providing treatment, care and support for people infected and affected by HIV, including the integral role of people living with HIV in these strategies.

Assessment

Short-answer examination (40%)
Essay (4,000 words) (60%)

Workload requirements

7 day intensive block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Brian Oldenburg and Dr Fahad Hanna

Synopsis

This unit will examine policy and systemic approaches to disease prevention and health promotion at the level of individuals and populations in a global world. The major global causes of disease burden, their risk factors and more upstream influences will be examined with respect to policy and system-level approaches. Students will reflect on the complex interplay among evidence, policy and practice in relation to prevention. Case studies from both developed and resource poor countries will be considered. This unit is one of a group of policy units that also include MPH2069 and MPH2072.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of policy development, disease prevention and health promotion and the importance of population-based approached;
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the different policy approaches to disease prevention and health promotion;
  3. Demonstrate an understanding of the complex interplay between evidence, policy and practice;
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of investment in relation to prevention and the need for sustainable resource allocation;
  5. Describe and evaluate different approaches to prevention and how these impact differentially on populations and their health outcomes; and on populations and their health outcomes; and
  6. Demonstrate an understanding of the different global forces and other dynamics that are both threats and opportunities for disease prevention and health promotion.

Assessment

Written assignments (70%)
Online participation (30%)

Workload requirements

2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Elizabeth Kennedy

Synopsis

Review of legal management principles related to health care by examining common law principles and statutes. Examination of the Australian legal system, including the Coroner's court, with an emphasis on Victorian and Commonwealth cases and statutes. Focus on key areas of medical and health law such as negligence consent, privacy of health information, clinical research, abortion, euthanasia, mental health, infectious diseases, health complaints and law for health facilities such as hospitals.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the sources of law and of the legal systems of Victoria and the Commonwealth;
  2. Describe the breadth of law impacting upon the delivery of health services;
  3. Demonstrate an understanding of some key areas of medical law, such as negligence, informed consent, confidentiality, clinical research, abortion, euthanasia, health service law, mental health law, infectious diseases law, health complaints law and coronial law;
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of other areas of law and legal policy as they apply to the health care system including trade practices, contract law, professional registration and malpractice, drugs and poisons law and therapeutic goods law;
  5. Examine the current means of resolving consumer dissatisfaction and debate the merits of alternative methods;
  6. Describe current risk management processes and their implementation;
  7. Demonstrate basic skills in legal argument; and
  8. Demonstrate basic skills in working in a team for the advancement of a legal argument.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Just Stoelwinder

Quota applies

Enrolment for this unit is quota restricted.

Synopsis

Reviews key management, organisation theory & its application to healthcare settings. The role of the manager, leadership skills, staffing issues including performance management, managing change, structuring organisations for patient care, developing strategy, and designing business plans.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key management and organisational theories and an understanding of the interface between theory and practice in the management of clinical health care systems;
  2. describe the components of human resource management;
  3. describe sources of power and influence;
  4. describe techniques for managing organisational change and for building effective and adaptive clinical health care systems;
  5. describe the elements of strategic planning;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the difference between management and leadership;
  7. demonstrate skills in leadership, team building and conflict management;
  8. describe the development and management of networks and strategic alliances;
  9. describe the industrial, technological, political, social and economic factors which impact on the organisation of work in clinical health systems.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sue Evans

Synopsis

Historical, political & social factors impacting on quality measurement in health care. Relationship of industrial & health care quality monitoring. Epidemiological & statistical quality measurement principles. Strength & limitations of current monitoring techniques & different sources of health care quality data. Principles of clinical indicator programs, adverse event monitoring, satisfaction surveys & benchmarking. Relationship between evidence based medicine, clinical practice guidelines & quality improvement. Design, implementation & evaluation of quality improvement programs in clinical settings. The content aligns well with other management units in the program such as MPH5266 and Biostatistics and Epidemiology. It is a core unit of the Graduate Diploma and Master of Health Services Management.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the factors that have led to a greater emphasis on quality measurement and improvement in health care.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the tools that are used in quality measurement and improvement, including:
    • Clinical indicator programs
    • Adverse event monitoring
    • Satisfaction surveys
    • Benchmarking
    • Evidence based medicine
    • Clinical guidelines
    • Quality improvement programs
    • Accreditation programs
    • Risk management
  3. Apply a knowledge of international quality improvement programs.
  4. Contribute to the debate on quality improvement issues - such as public disclosure of quality measures.
  5. Design and implement quality improvement programs in the clinical setting.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Kelly Makarounas-Kirchmann and Mr Robert Cornick

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis.

Synopsis

An introduction to basic accounting principles for non-accountants. Financial issues confronting clinical managers including the understanding and interpretation of common accounting reports, budgeting and financial analysis. An introduction to basic economic theory relevant to clinicians and clinical managers, including funding health care services and economics evaluations that guide health care policy and decision making.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

Part 1

  1. Recognise key accounting terms and language.
  2. Illustrate how transactions that affect the economic position of a health care organisation are recorded.
  3. Explain the construction of basic financial statements including balance sheets, income statements, and statements of cash flows.
  4. Analyse and interpret the information contained in basic financial statements.

Part 2

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of different models for financing health services and the cost containment incentives and disincentives associated with each type of payment method.
  2. Relate the principles of management control systems to financial issues in health care.
  3. Demonstrate skills in building, analysing and using a budget.
  4. Explain how to best optimise resource use, and appreciate the role of cost containment strategies.
  5. Evaluate and appreciate the use of health economics as a tool for rational decision-making.
  6. Critically appraise an economic analysis.
  7. Identify the robustness of a pharmacoeconomic evaluation as viewed by Australian decision makers.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (25%)
Multiple-choice examination (25%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Just Stoelwinder

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis.

Synopsis

Delivery of health services is underpinned by a framework of health policies and other health system elements. Health professional leaders and managers, and those who aspire to these roles, need to know about these policies and about the process of policy making so that they can understand why a policy is what it is, and how to engage in the policy making process.

This unit involves a structured review of policy making processes, via WebCT based modules, readings and online tasks, supplemented by workshops with senior health policy practitioners. It considers key challenges and major issues confronting governments and health systems around the world, and how policy can help address these. The unit presents foundation concepts in health policy, which can be extended with further study of health care delivery policies (MPH5272) and/or global health and primary prevention policies (MPH5260).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand the policy process
  2. Identify and analyse stakeholder interests
  3. Recognise key current issues on the Australian and global health policy agendas
  4. Locate sources of information guiding health policy content and process.
  5. Critically analyse policies
  6. Evaluate the implications of the political context of policy development
  7. Draw out the policy implications of research evidence and other forms of evidence
  8. Present well-informed, clear, and well-reasoned arguments on policy-relevant questions
  9. Critically reflect on their learning about health systems policy and its application and/or future development.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (40%)
Written assignments (60%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Rory Wolfe

Synopsis

Statistical methods for clinical trials data, including design considerations, sequential analysis, bioequivalence and analysis of repeated measures data. Methods for measuring agreement between raters or instruments including kappa statistics and intraclass correlation coefficients. Analysis of survival time data with Cox proportional hazards regression models. Methods for process control. Combination of lectures and data analysis sessions on laptop computers using Stata statistical software.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. learn statistical analysis methods for the analysis of clinical research data.
  2. gain the skills to apply statistical methods to example datasets using statistical software on a laptop computer.
  3. gain an understanding of the implications of statistical considerations for the design of clinical research studies.
  4. gain an understanding of and the ability to interpret statistical methods in published articles on clinical research studies.

Assessment

Three written assignments (40%, 30%, 30% each)

Workload requirements

3 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Credit grades in MPH5040 and MPH5041; familiarity with Stata statistical software; MPH5200 is recommended.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Ajay Mahal

Synopsis

This unit will examine reform and development in health services from an international, national and local perspective. The focus of the unit will explore the implementation of health policy reform and the multitude of issues, drivers, demands, complexities and consequent impacts related to reform. Areas of concentration include international and national governing entities, the Australian health care system, developed and developing country health systems, roles of institutions (hospitals), an various applications of reform movements/models in care delivery.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of some of the drivers of reform at the 'system', 'institution' and 'care delivery' levels;
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of some of the mechanisms or approaches used in health service reform at the 'system', 'institution' and 'care delivery' levels;
  3. Describe some of the international and national agencies and entities that influence health service reform;
  4. Apply a knowledge of the structure, function and management of the Australian health care system;
  5. Compare and contrast the reform agenda in a sample of developed countries and contrast those with the Australian agenda;
  6. Apply an understanding of the role of hospitals in health service reform;
  7. Reflect on the complexities and challenges involved in implementing reform;
  8. Think critically about the application of various reform movements/models at the 'care delivery' level.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Workload requirements

15 contact hours over 2 block days.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Full year 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Full year 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Just Stoelwinder and Professor Flavia Cicuttini

Synopsis

The unit is designed to consolidate the theoretical and practical skills acquired in the Master of Health Services Management or the Masters of Public Health by exploring in detail a complex problem within their workplace or within a health care setting. Alternatively, subject to the approval of the course coordinator, students may seek a limited placement in a health service to explore a particular issue for their case-study. This may include an overseas placement. The case-study is not intended to be original research. In some instances, this case study might be suitable for submission as the case-study for the Royal Australasian College of Medical Administrators (RACMA) Fellowship.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify an issue or a problem of health service management importance;
  2. critically review and evaluate the literature related to an important health service management issue in their workplace;
  3. integrate theory, knowledge and practice in their examination and appraisal of an important health service management issue in their workplace;
  4. demonstrate an ability to reflect on issues and alternative management actions;
  5. describe and justify appropriate health services management action;
  6. demonstrate skills in writing up an assessment of an important health service management issue in a professional report.

Assessment

Written report (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Neville Betts

Synopsis

Concepts & practice of occupational health and safety management systems within work environments, including the conduct of an audit are examined. Includes accident/incident causation theories and models, investigative techniques, reporting & statistics, safety systems, fire prevention & control. Incident causation and accident types, including slips, trips and falls are also examined.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify and evaluate the theoretical underpinnings and models of best practice for risk management in the workplace;
  2. demonstrate knowledge of the various approaches to providing for the application of 'Safety Management Systems' and a 'Safety Management Plan' in the workplace;
  3. demonstrate knowledge of the essential elements required of any 'Safety Management System' for providing safety in the workplace and how each element may be affected by relevant legislation and the role adopted by regulators; and
  4. advise a company or other organisation on its obligations regarding the selection and introduction of a 'Safety Management System'.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (25%)
Assignment 1 (2,500 words) (25%)
Assignment 2 (2,500 words) (25%)
Block study participation (25%)

Hurdle: Full attendance at unit block days.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 day block.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Chris Reid and Ms Louise Shiel

Synopsis

This unit is aimed at research professionals who manage clinical trial data or researchers who wish to develop skills in this area. Students will be given guidance to enable them to develop standards of best practice, be able to assess new technologies to ensure data quality and efficient data processing. Students will be given guidance on accepted practices for clinical data management and for data capture system design and development. Practical skills will be developed through the completion of weekly data management tasks for a hypothetical study, with a database developed using Microsoft Access. Note: Students will require access to Microsoft Access to complete most weekly tasks.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. understand good practices in data collection and form design;
  2. be skilled in the practical creation and use databases and statistical packages;
  3. understand techniques in ensuring quality control of data;
  4. understand data storage, backup and archiving procedures;
  5. understand concepts of data confidentiality, access and security.

Assessment

Participation and discussion questions, including both online and block days (10%)
Written assignments (60%)
Take-home examination (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Trimester 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Lisa Davidson

Synopsis

Overview of communications and training skills needed for community health work in developing countries. Training strategies for community health work including adult learning principles, theory and application, design and program establishment options, facilitation skills and Participatory methods. Communication strategies for health promotion. Communication skills for effective health management, report writing and cross-cultural communication. Practical approach to design and implementation of training programs and health promotion strategies.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Training strategies for community health work:
    1. gain knowledge of the principles, theory and application of adult learning in relation to participatory training of health workers in developing countries, competency based training, distance learning, training of trainer methods;
    2. develop skills in the design and establishment of training programs; and
    3. increase knowledge and gain skills in a range of participatory training methods and facilitation methods.

  1. Communication strategies for health promotion:
    1. gain knowledge of principles, theory and application of communication strategies for health promotion;
    2. develop skills in the design and establishment of communication strategies for health promotion; and
    3. increase knowledge and gain skills in a range of participatory methods for development and delivery of communication strategies for health promotion.

  1. Communication skills for effective health program management;
    1. further develop skills in report writing and presenting; and
    2. further develop skills in cross-cultural communication.

Assessment

Assignment (75%)
Group presentation (25%)

Workload requirements

6 day intensive block.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency.

Prohibitions

MPH5216.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liz Bishop

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with the practical knowledge required to plan and undertake a clinical research project with close attention to the highest standards of ethics and Good Research Practice. Students will also gain detailed knowledge in planning, and organizing their knowledge using methods of clinical research in a written and oral format.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Design clinical research projects in a manner that takes account of common ethical issues and proposes satisfactory solutions to overcome them.
  2. Develop an application for approval by an ethics committee and understand the process and requirements of ethical approval.
  3. Develop an understanding of the modus operandi of major funding bodies and the manner by which applications for funding are made.
  4. Develop an in-depth understanding of the proper management of a clinical research project and the steps needed to ensure maintenance of the highest levels of good clinical research practice.
  5. Develop knowledge and appreciation of the main areas of risk involving clinical research and the steps that should be taken to reduce these risks.
  6. Develop skills in the presentation of data in oral and written format and appropriate methods for promoting research funding.

Assessment

Written assignments (60%)
Module A - Block day (10%)
Modules B-C - Online posting (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

8 hours over 1 day block.

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Professor Joseph Ibrahim and Dr Stuart Marshall

Synopsis

This unit provides students with skills and knowledge in the new and exciting field of ''human factors'' and, in particular, how this relates to health and what opportunities exist for patient safety efforts.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to have:

  1. In-depth understanding of common human factors issues impacting in healthcare settings, what their effect on human performance are hand how other domains can provide lessons for health;
  2. An understanding of human error theories and an appreciation of barriers and safeguards to error and the factors that degrade these in healthcare;
  3. An awareness of the concept of resilience and how people offer a layer of protection, in spite of the high cognitive and physical workload demands that healthcare places on its workers;
  4. An in depth understanding of risk perception and safety culture and their impact on frontline behaviours in healthcare settings;
  5. A knowledge and appreciation of the risks involved in poorly planned technology innovation in high-risk domains like healthcare and the role of design and risk assessment;
  6. An appreciation of the current systems of accountability (or lack thereof) that exist in healthcare and their impact on both incident investigation and organisational learning.

Assessment

Critical appraisal (2,000 words) (20%)
Reflective essay (2,000 words) (30%)
Online class participation (50%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus students:
12 hours per week, broken down into (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or online), 2 hours per week for online communication via MUSO discussions, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 hours over 2 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a Postgraduate course.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Joseph Ibrahim

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skills and knowledge to apply tools, techniques, programs or strategies to improve the quality of care and patient safety.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to have:

  1. An in-depth knowledge and ability to compare the key approaches to measuring, monitoring and managing health care for improving quality of care and patient safety;
  2. An in-depth knowledge of the tools, techniques, programs and strategies currently used for improving quality of care and patient safety;
  3. Demonstrate the skills to objectively critique the strengths and limitations of the different tool, technique, programs or strategy for improving quality of care and patient safety;
  4. Demonstrate the ability to select an appropriate tool, technique, program or strategy for a:
    1. particular dimension of quality (i.e. safety, efficacy, timelines, patient-centre-ed)
    2. clinical setting
    3. patient population
    4. is logistically feasible
  5. Demonstrate the skills to modify, implement and evaluate a tool, technique, program or strategy for improving quality of care and patient safety in the workplace;
  6. Understand and manage the factors that impact on the selection, acceptance and sustainability of initiative for improving quality of care and patient safety. These factors include clinician behaviour, organisational and health system structures.

Assessment

Letter to the editor (500 words) (20%)
Reflective essay (2,000 words) (30%)
Online class participation (50%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week, broken down into (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or online), 2 hours per week for online communication via Moodle discussions, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 hours over 2 block days.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a Postgraduate course.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Higgs and Mr Chad Hughes

Synopsis

This unit is designed as a contemporary analysis of drug use in modern societies and will enhance participants' knowledge about the risk and vulnerability of individuals and communities to licit and illicit drug use.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Outline the sources, characteristics, routes of administration and effects of key drugs;
  2. Analyse patterns of drug use in Australia, across the Asia-Pacific region, and worldwide;
  3. Understand the specific health outcomes associated with the use of the most important licit and illicit drugs, including implications for the development of community-based responses;
  4. Explain how use of licit and illicit drugs is linked to poverty, criminality and other social problems;
  5. Critique the policies and practical responses to drug use implemented in differed countries;
  6. Explain the interactions between illicit drug use and blood-borne viruses (BBV);
  7. Examine the social and policy contexts of harm reduction practice employed in Australia and Asia;
  8. Critique the various responses to HIV and other BBV's among drug users concurrently in operation;
  9. Reflective on practice and communicate effectively.

Assessment

Formative feedback on small group work and reflective practice and presentation skills
Letter to editor or critique of a peer reviewed article (30%)
Abstract (400 words) (10%)
Written essay (3,600 words) (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Higgs and Mr Chad Hughes

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Just Stoelwinder

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide health service managers and public health practitioners with a comprehensive understanding of the major components of national health systems and how health policy is created to adapt and reform these systems.

Over 6 weekly modules students will explore relevant policy theories, stakeholders and policy actors and processes that address major health policy challenges. Each module includes an overview of the relevant concepts and resources, guided readings and online, instructor moderated, discussions of applied issues with student peers.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Outline the key structural components of national health systems.
  2. Analyse the structure of their own health system.
  3. Apply policy theories to contemporary health policy issues.
  4. Analyse formal and informal sources of information guiding health system and policy development.
  5. Analyse policy stakeholders and their policy interests.
  6. Evaluate the role of the policy making process.
  7. Critically appraise existing health policies.
  8. Compose arguments on health systems and policy development.

Assessment

Contribution to weekly online tasks (45%)
Not less than 2 written assignments totaling 3,000 words (55%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 4528 or 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Baki Billah

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to biostatistics as applied to public health and management studies. Biostatistics is the science of describing, summarising and analysing health-related data. It is essential to understand biostatistics in order to design, conduct and interpret health-related research. The basic principles and methods used in biostatistics are covered in this unit. This includes the technical qualifications necessary for analysing and interpreting data on a descriptive and bivariate level.

Topics include: classification of health data; summarizing data using simple statistical methods and graphical presentation; sampling distributions, quantifying uncertainty in results from a sample; statistical distributions; comparing two/more groups/methods using confidence intervals and hypothesis tests (p-values); assessing the association between an outcome and an exposure using the chi-squared test; risk comparisons (RR & OR); prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is measured on a continuous scale or a binary scale (yes/no); sample size calculations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the importance of biostatistics in public health studies;
  2. Classify data into appropriate measurement types;
  3. Explain sampling concepts and the role of sampling errors;
  4. Present data using relevant tables, graphical displays and summary statistics;
  5. Formulate research hypotheses into a statistical context in public health studies;
  6. Estimate quantities of interest and evaluate hypothesis with appropriate statistical methods;
  7. Accurately interpret statistical methods and results reported in health publications;
  8. Analyse data using a specific software package.

Assessment

Structured written report (1,000 words excludes tables and data analysis output) (15%)
Structured written report (1,500 words excludes tables and data analysis output) (25%)
Structured written report (2,400 words excludes tables and data analysis output) (40%)
MCQ online test (1 hour) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 4528 or 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Karin Leder

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to Infectious Disease Epidemiology. Topics include the dynamic nature of infections, the principles of infectious diseases, identification and management of outbreaks and principles of surveillance. The importance of understanding host, environmental, pathogen and transmission factors will be highlighted. Practical examples will be given to highlight major concepts. Online activities, suggested readings and discussion forums aim to enhance students' understanding of the teaching material.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Assess the importance and dynamic nature of infectious diseases;
  2. Identify the unique aspects of infectious disease epidemiology and their practical relevance;
  3. Apply evidence based strategies in the prediction, detection and control of infectious disease outbreaks;
  4. Critically valuate the epidemiologic principles underlying disease surveillance programs;
  5. Critically evaluate the epidemiologic principles underlying disease control and prevention strategies;
  6. Apply and evaluate the potential role of mathematical modelling in relation to infectious diseases.

Assessment

Contribution to weekly web-based tasks / discussions (45%)
Assignment (2,400 words) and/or online presentation (40%)
Online quiz / exercise (15%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 1 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Professor Just Stoelwinder

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide health service managers and public health practitioners with the knowledge and skills to manage health care organisational units.

Over 6 weekly modules students will explore key management theories, leadership skills, managing health professionals, designing and coordinating health professional work processes, managing change and projects.

Each module includes an overview of the relevant concepts and resources, guided readings and online, instructor moderated, discussions of applied issues with student peers.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply general theories of organisation and management to health care organisational settings
  2. Design organisational roles and structures to manage clinical and support services
  3. Apply coordinating mechanisms in clinical and public health organisations
  4. Implement staff recruitment processes
  5. Design and manage staff performance systems
  6. Apply principles of change management to improve organisational performance
  7. Develop strategic plans
  8. Implement effective project management.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (45%)
Written assignment (1,500 words) (25%)
Written assignment (2,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 4528 or 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 2 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Dianna Magliano and Professor Flavia Cicuttini

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with an introduction to key concepts and applications in epidemiology. Key concepts of epidemiology will be delivered throughout the unit, including; rates, sources of data, descriptive and analytical epidemiology, epidemiological study designs, critical appraisal of literature, screening, prevention, exposure assessment, outbreak investigation, confounding and bias.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain and contextualise the purposes of descriptive and analytical epidemiology
  2. Explain and contextualise the concepts of study questions, population, sampling, exposure assessment, bias and confounding
  3. Analyse the strengths and weaknesses of different epidemiological study designs
  4. Critically analyse epidemiological papers from the medical research and OHS literature
  5. Evaluate the adequacy of exposure assessment in epidemiological studies
  6. Interpret and communicate the results of epidemiological studies
  7. Solve complex problems relating to the use of epidemiological concepts and study designs.

Assessment

Responses to 4 weekly forum discussion topics (45%)
Quiz (Multiple choice questions) (30 minutes) (10%)
Written essay (2,700 words) (45%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Dianna Magliano and Professor Flavia Cicuttini

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 4528 or 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 4 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Dragan Ilic

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to quantitative and qualitative research methods used in public health and the evaluation of disease prevention and health promotion strategies. Levels of evaluation will be examined, with the range of qualitative and quantitative methods suitable for answering different evaluation questions explored. An emphasis will be placed on the evaluation challenges posed by the complexities of public health action and the contexts in which it is carried out, with case studies used to foster an understanding of these issues.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify and comprehend the relationship between program plans and evaluation plans
  2. Differentiate between appropriate quantitative and qualitative approaches to public health evaluation
  3. Critically appraise strengths and limitations of quantitative and qualitative research designs in public health evaluation
  4. Develop survey questions and interview guides that demonstrate an understanding of measurement quality
  5. Develop a public health evaluation plan.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (45%)
Written essay (3,000 words) (45%)
Quiz (Multiple choice) (30 minutes) (10%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 5 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Bebe Loff and Mrs Elizabeth Kennedy

Synopsis

Review of legal principles related to health care; including common law principles and statutes. The focus is on key areas of medical and health law such as negligence, consent, privacy of health information, clinical research, abortion, euthanasia, mental health, infectious diseases, health complaints, ethics and human rights and law for health systems.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the sources of law
  2. Describe aspects of law impacting upon the delivery of health services
  3. Apply key areas of medical law to health management; such as negligence, informed consent, confidentiality, clinical research, abortion, euthanasia, health service law, mental health law, infectious diseases law, health complaints law and coronial law
  4. Comprehend other areas of law and legal policy as they apply to the health care system including restrictive trade practices, contract law, professional registration and malpractice, drugs and poisons law and therapeutic goods law
  5. Examine the means of resolving consumer dissatisfaction.

Assessment

Response to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (45%)
Written essay (1,500 words) (25%)
Written essay (2,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Bebe Loff and Mrs Elizabeth Kennedy

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 4528 or 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Ajay Mahal

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop skills to describe and analyse health systems and assess health sector reforms (or health system reforms) in both developed and developing countries, including Australia. The unit introduces participants to alternative conceptual frameworks for describing and analysing health systems, and focuses in particular on one - "the control knobs framework" - which describes the key levers of a health system and how these levers work to influence outcomes of interest such as equity, cost, financial risk protection and quality of care. The control knobs framework is used to describe and analyse health system outcomes in developed and developing countries (including Australia); diagnose existing policy reform challenges; shed light on ongoing health policy debates; and assess a recent case of reform in the health sector.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Define a health system using the control knobs framework
  2. Describe the financing structure, payment systems, regulatory frameworks and the organizational structure in the health sectors of a number of developed and developing countries
  3. Explain how key policy levers - financing, regulation, organization of healthcare delivery and financing, payment mechanisms - are linked to each other and to health policy goals
  4. Carry out a diagnostic analysis of a health policy concern leading to proposals for reform/change in levers, using the control knobs framework
  5. Compare the reform agenda in a sample of developed and developing countries and contrast those with the Australian agenda using a control knobs framework
  6. Explain the role of evidence in undertaking successful health reform
  7. Reflect on the complexities and challenges involved in implementing reform.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (40%)
Written essay (2,000 words) (30%)
Written essay (2,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 4528 or 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Malcolm Sim

Synopsis

This unit will cover the impacts and human cost of occupational disease and injury, occupational health and safety law, frameworks for primary prevention, workers' compensation systems, occupational rehabilitation, case studies highlighting historical achievements and challenges, international and national occupational health and safety (OHS) organizations.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Discuss and analyse the human cost and causes of workplace injury, disease and death
  2. Identify contemporary occupational health and safety (OHS) data sources and explain their merits and limitations
  3. Describe and evaluate various injury and disease prevention models
  4. Describe the legal framework for OHS and occupational injury management
  5. Describe and discuss the application of occupational rehabilitation programs and OHS service management
  6. Identify contemporary OHS achievements and emerging challenges and contextualise their impact within OHS management systems.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (45%)
Quiz (Multiple choice) (30 minutes) (10%)
Written assignment (3,000 words) (45%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 3 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ewan MacFarlane

Synopsis

This unit will cover the environmental influences on health. The unit will examine the impact of physical, chemical and biological hazards in the environment. It will integrate that knowledge with the principles of assessment, management and control of environmental health risks. Theoretical models of risk communication will be developed, with learners applying this knowledge in developing evidence based interventions to control and prevent simple environmental risks.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify important chemical, physical and biological hazards in the environment and analyse related risks to health from environmental factors in Australia.
  2. Communicate fluently in a written format using appropriate terminology to describe chemical, physical and biological hazards encountered in a variety of contexts.
  3. Critically appraise the epidemiological literature which informs the evidence base for environmental health risk control strategies.
  4. Identify common hazards, appropriate techniques for exposure measurement and risk assessment methodologies in environmental media such as water air and food.
  5. Apply theoretical models of risk communication to appropriately communicate the principles of effective management of environmental health risks.
  6. Develop evidence based interventions to control simple environmental risks and prevent harm, including strategies for standard setting and systematic management of key personal, social and economic factors, to inhibit, control or reduce potential for harm.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (30%)
Quiz/evaluation (1,500 words) (25%)
Written essay (2,700 words) (45%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 4 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Professor Joseph Ibrahim

Synopsis

This unit will explore the historical, political and social factors impacting on quality measurement in health care. It will examine the relationship of industrial and health care quality monitoring, through use of epidemiological and statistical quality measurement principles. Strengths and limitations of current monitoring techniques and different sources of health care quality data will be examined. During the unit, the principles of clinical indicator programs, adverse event monitoring, satisfaction surveys and benchmarking will be utilised including the design, implementation and evaluation of quality improvement programs in clinical settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the factors that have led to a greater emphasis on quality measurement and improvement in health care.
  2. Discuss the tools that are used in quality measurement and improvement.
  3. Apply a knowledge of international quality improvement programs.
  4. Contribute to the debate on quality improvement issues - such as public disclosure of quality measures.
  5. Design a quality improvement program that may be implemented in the clinical setting.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (40%)
Written assignment (1,800 words) (30%)
Written assignment (1,800 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4528.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Joseph Ibrahim

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skills and knowledge to apply tools, techniques, programs or strategies to improve the quality of care and patient safety. Students completing this unit will be exposed to current best practice techniques aimed at developing and implementing system improvements to reduce the occurrence of adverse patient outcomes and continually improve the safety and quality of patient care. This unit will cover key approaches used to measuring, monitoring and managing health care for improving quality of care and patient safety. Within the unit students will have the opportunity to develop novel interventions, whilst also evaluating existing interventions aimed at maintaining and improving patient quality and safety.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an integrated understanding of key approaches used to measure, monitor and manage health care for improving quality of care and patient safety.
  2. Distinguish the strengths and limitations of the tools, techniques, programs and strategies currently used for improving quality of care and patient safety.
  3. Critically analyse the strengths and limitations of different tools, techniques, programs or strategies for improving quality of care and patient safety.
  4. Utilise an appropriate tool, technique, program or strategy for a particular dimension of quality, clinical setting, patient population in a logically feasible manner.
  5. Implement and critically evaluate a tool, technique, program or strategy for improving quality of care and patient safety in the workplace.
  6. Formulate and examine factors that impact on the selection, acceptance and sustainability of initiative for improving quality of care and patient safety.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (40%)
Written assignment (1,800 words) (30%)
Reflective essay (1,800 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4528.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 6 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Helen Kelsall

Synopsis

This unit will examine foundation aspects of public health with a focus on contemporary challenges. Students will apply this knowledge to critically appraise initiatives to address complex health issues from a public health perspective, and will be expected to engage with current public health issues and communicate their ideas clearly and effectively.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the basic principles and tools of public health practice.
  2. Examine the interdisciplinary and intersectoral relationships that contribute to public health.
  3. Discuss a range of behavioural, social and cultural, environmental and political determinants of health.
  4. Identify and appraise methods and application of disease prevention and control at a population level.
  5. Define the principles of evidence based practice and assess their implementation across public health initiatives.

Assessment

Quiz (10%)
Written essay (2,700 words) (45%)
Responses to 6 weekly forum discussion topics (45%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4529.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Robert Hall

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to epidemiology and control of chronic diseases. Included in this unit is an overview of important chronic diseases currently impacting Australia, and strategies for their prevention and control. Measurement of disease and burden of disease; concept of risk factors and risk factors for important chronic diseases will be examined. Additionally, students will examine the effect of social and economic factors on the epidemiology of chronic diseases and the impact of chronic diseases on society and the economy. The impact of screening and health promotion as public health tools will be discussed, along with use of evidence in public health programmes to prevent chronic diseases.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the epidemiology and burden of chronic diseases in Australia.
  2. Assess the causal pathways leading to important chronic diseases.
  3. Analyse strategies for the public health control of chronic diseases.
  4. Evaluate the role of public health evidence in the control of chronic diseases.
  5. Examine the influence of social and economic factors on chronic diseases.

Assessment

Responses to 6 weekly forum discussions topics (450 words each) (45%)
Written essay (1,500 words) (25%)
Written essay (2,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 20 hours per week for 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4529.


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dianna Magliano and Professor Flavia Cicuttini

Synopsis

To be taken concurrently with MPH6041 together they are prerequisites for clinical epidemiology elective units. Contents: rates, sources of data, descriptive & analytical epidemiology, epidemiological study designs, critical appraisal of literature, screening, prevention, exposure assessment, outbreak investigation, confounding & bias.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. explain and contextualise the purposes of descriptive and analytical epidemiology;
  2. explain and contextualise the concepts of study questions, population, sampling, exposure assessment, bias and confounding;
  3. analyse the strengths and weaknesses of different epidemiological study designs;
  4. critically analyse epidemiological papers from the medical research and OHS literature;
  5. evaluate the adequacy of exposure assessment in epidemiological studies;
  6. interpret and communicate the results of epidemiological studies; and
  7. solve complex problems relating to the use of epidemiological concepts and study designs.

Assessment

Assignments (25%)
Examination (75%)

Workload requirements

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 day compulsory on-campus block for off-campus students.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

MPH6041, except for students enrolled in courses 3896 (Perioperative stream), 2312 or 0160.


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Baki Billah

Synopsis

This unit is taken concurrently with MPH6040. Together they are prerequisites for clinical epidemiology elective units. Contents includes: classification of health data; summarizing data using simple statistical methods and graphical presentation; sampling distributions, quantifying uncertainty in results from a sample; statistical distributions; comparing two/more groups/methods using hypothesis tests and confidence intervals; assessing the association between outcome and exposure using chi-squared test; risk comparisons; prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is measured in continuous scale; prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is measured on a binary scale (yes/no); sample size calculations.

Students are required to have access to a calculator equipped with elementary scientific functions (e.g. Casio FX-100) and a statistical package for data analysis e.g. SPSS, PRISM, STATA (help will be available with SPSS only. Note: Students don't have provision to borrow SPSS CD from Monash; they may have to lease/buy it from SPSS.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe, summarise, and graph data appropriately;
  2. Analyse elementary data using a statistical computer package;
  3. Identify different probability distributions and their parameters;
  4. Quantify uncertainty in research results using biostatistical methods;
  5. Apply the appropriate statistical methods to basic research questions;
  6. Perform simple statistical analyses, report their findings and interpret their results;
  7. Critically appraise the statistical aspects of research publications in health care.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (15%)
Assignment 2 (25%)
Assignment 3 (40%)
2 x Online test (20 MCQ each test) (10% each test)

Workload requirements

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

MPH6040, except for students enrolled in courses 3896 (Perioperative stream), or 2312.

Prohibitions


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Sandra Radovini

Synopsis

A developmental perspective on the evolution of human behaviour through the lifecycle. Developmental issues such as continuities and discontinuities between childhood and adulthood in health and psychopathology; the extent to which normality merges with pathology; facilitating and inhibiting factors influencing transitions between developmental phases; age-appropriate, accelerated and delayed development; the effect of individual differences on developmental processes; and the clinical applications of these principles to psychiatric conditions in childhood, adolescence and adulthood.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe key developmental life stages through childhood and adolescence;
  2. to describe key developmental psychological, social and biological factors involved in normal and abnormal development through childhood and adolescence;
  3. to describe key developmental psychological, social and biological factors involved in the onset, progression, natural history and treatment options in specific common child and adolescent psychiatric disorders;
  4. to describe key continuities and discontinuities between adult and child and adolescent psychiatric practice;
  5. to outline and discuss the developmental context within which the bio-psycho-social approach is used for the assessment and treatment of child and adolescent psychiatry disorders;
  6. to describe the influences of chronic illness, impairment, disability and handicap on development at an individual, interpersonal, family and social level.

Assessment

Oral presentation (50%)
Essay (2,000 words) (50%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor David Clarke

Synopsis

This unit aims to explore the relationship between physical and psychological health and illness. The key components of this relationship will be explored from both a theoretical and clinical perspective. These concepts include how psychological factors affect physical health, how physical illness can lead to psychological disturbance and the nature of somatisation. Common medical conditions with psychological associations will also be reviewed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. examine the relationship between physical health and psychological states;
  2. describe how psychological factors may affect physical health and illness;
  3. describe common organic psychiatric disorders;
  4. describe the major psychiatric disorders in which physical symptoms are a major component;
  5. appraise the roles of psychiatry within the general hospital setting; and
  6. examine how C-L interventions may affect physical and psychological outcomes.

Assessment

Written examination (1.5 hours) (100%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr T Chong

Synopsis

This core unit will provide an introduction into the adolescence through to the adult phase of life, concepts of mental illness and the impact of one on the other. Topics will include adolescent psychiatry, parenthood and mental illness, mid-life and late life issues. Phenomenology will be covered in detail with several sessions devoted to disorders of thought and perception. The practice of adult psychiatry in special settings such as primary and community care, hospital in-patient and forensic institutions will also be examined.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should:

  1. have a clear understanding of the signs and symptoms of many adult psychiatric disorders;
  2. be able to manage these disorders;
  3. better understand the issues of adulthood as a life phase cycle.

Specific objectives of the unit are:

  1. Knowledge - this unit aims to combine theoretical perspectives on some of the main physiological functions of life with teaching about clinical disease states, when some functions are impaired. In this way, the student will be expected to acquire knowledge about common psychiatric disorders of adulthood and their theoretical underpinnings.
  2. Skills - the course will provide skills in the assessment, diagnosis and management of several common psychiatric illnesses in adults. Successful candidates should also be able to develop skills in integrating theoretical knowledge with the recognition and treatment of clinical disorders.
  3. Attitude - the course will attempt to influence the attitudes of those enrolled with regard to the problems of adulthood and the social contexts in which common mental illnesses arise.

Assessment

Examination paper (short answer) (100%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Approximately 3.5 hours per week attending lectures.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor D Ames

Synopsis

The unit is a continuation of Adult Psychiatry

  1. The initial 4 sessions will be devoted to topics outlined in the curriculum for Adult Psychiatry
  2. The remaining 8 sessions will focus on psychiatry of old age. Session 1 will examine the interaction of ageing and mental health. Epidemiological and demographical aspects of ageing in Australia and worldwide will be discussed. Included are the social construction of ageing, individual experiences of ageing and death and dying. The remaining sessions will focus on common cognitive and functional disorders in the elderly, physical health, pharmacology and ageing and service provisions to the elderly with mental illness. The sessions on cognitive disorders will examine the types and classification of cognitive disorders including the dementias, the underlying pathophysiological basis of these disorders, epidemiology, assessment of patients and management-pharmacological and non-pharmacological. A similar approach will be adopted for the sessions on affective, anxiety and psychotic disorders in the elderly. The session on physical health, pharmacology and ageing will deal with the interface between old age psychiatry, geriatric medicine and primary care. Some of the commoner physical disorders that affect the elderly will be considered as well as their impact on psychological health and well-being i.e. stroke, fractured neck of femur. The last session on Services and Training in Old Age Psychiatry will address various service models in Victoria and other Australian states, as well as the private versus public health dichotomy. Issues needing considerations in the setting up of services in a developing country or a developed country with a newly ageing population will be discussed. Lastly, currently RANZCP guidelines for advanced training in old age psychiatry will be sent out.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. to describe the common psychiatric syndromes which affect older people, their presentation, differential diagnosis, assessment, basic management and outcomes;
  2. to demonstrate the skills to interview older persons effectively and to assess their mental state with particular reference to cognitive function;
  3. to demonstrate the skills necessary to manage the common psychiatric disorders affecting older persons with psychiatric disorders;
  4. to discuss the range of services available to assist older people with mental health problems in Australia and the way these services are likely to develop in the future;
  5. to describe the experience of ageing as lived in Australia together with the social, societal and personal implications of the ageing process; and
  6. to utilise appropriate referral to other specialists and services (both medical and social) for older people.

Assessment

Case presentation (50%)
Essay (2,000 words) (50%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Attendance of approximately 3.5 hours per week at lectures/tutorials.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

MPM5006 (MPM1202).


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor David Kissane

Synopsis

This unit will introduce foundational clinical skills such as psychiatric history taking, mental state examination, biopsychosocial formulation, risk and cognitive assessment, critical appraisal of research, legal and ethical issues, and basic sciences including the neurosciences and psychological sciences that underpin brain function. The unit will cover the epidemiology, aetiology, assessment, management and important issues of the major diagnostic disorders in psychiatry. The focus will integrate the clinical with neuroscience aspects of these disorders in adults, as disorders that affect children, the aged and the medically unwell are covered in other core subjects.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the nature of psychiatric illness as classified by the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual-V (DSM-V) and International Classification of Diseases (ICD-10), the internationally-recognised classifications of the range of psychiatric disorders, with initial emphasis on the major disorders met early in clinical training;
  2. Explain the basic neuroscience research that underpins the development and assessment for these disorders;
  3. Demonstrate the comprehensive psychiatric formulation of a patient that combines psychodynamic, biological, cultural and social components into a detailed view of what has predisposed, precipitated, perpetuated and protected against illness development;
  4. Explain legal and ethical principles in psychiatry;
  5. Communicate effectively with peers, patients and the community about psychiatric disorders and their management;
  6. Employ high level problem solving skills in assessing goals of care, creating management plans, and assessing safety and well-being for both the patient and the community.

Fieldwork

Five clinical interviews of patients at a satisfactory standard, as assessed by workplace supervisors, of 1.5 hours duration inclusive of feedback time (7.5 hours in total). This maps particularly to the formulation and patient assessment objectives of the College of Psychiatrists training program.

Assessment

Assignment (2,000 words) (30%)
Written exam (3 hours) (60%)
Fieldwork - clinical interviews (10%)

Hurdle: 80% attendance.

Workload requirements

24 hours per week - 8 hours of individual study, 12.5 hours during regular work hours and 3.5 hours on-campus lecture attendance.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor David Kissane

Synopsis

This unit will introduce theoretical constructs underpinning psychological and biological treatments. These will be addressed using an integrative biopsychosocial approach. Psychodynamic therapy principles, cognitive-behavioural therapy, interpersonal, couple, group and family therapies, mindfulness-based and dialectical behavioural therapy will be covered. The unit will build on relevant psychiatric disorders not covered in Core Psychiatry I, but important to understand treatment principles, including anxiety, eating, somatoform and personality disorders. The focus will be on developmental aspects of these disorders and their treatment in adults, as disorders that affect children, the aged and the medically unwell are covered in other core units.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the scope, indications for, therapeutic methodology employed and evidence for effectiveness of psychological and biological treatments in psychiatry;
  2. Demonstrate critical appraisal skills in assessing clinical trials and appraising psychotherapeutic research;
  3. Explain key disorders suitable for psychotherapeutic treatments, including but not restricted to anxiety, depressive, eating, somatoform, personality, substance, sexual and sleep disorders;
  4. Communicate clearly with peers, patients and the community about psychiatric disorders and their management;
  5. Demonstrate how science and art relate to clinical knowledge and psychiatric practice;
  6. Explain community perceptions of psychiatric care, resultant barriers and challenges;
  7. Employ high level problem solving skills in assessing goals of care, realistic outcomes, the safety and limits of therapy.

Fieldwork

Five clinical interviews of patients at a satisfactory standard, as assessed by workplace supervisors, of 1.5 hours duration inclusive of feedback time (7.5 hours in total). This maps particularly to the formulation and patient assessment objectives of the College of Psychiatrists training program.

Assessment

Assignment (2,000 words) (30%)
Written exam (3 hours) (60%)
Fieldwork - clinical interviews (10%)

Hurdle: 80% attendance.

Workload requirements

24 hours per week - 8 hours of individual study, 12.5 hours during regular work hours and 3.5 hours on-campus lecture attendance.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Barton and Dr Scott Blair-West

Synopsis

This unit is intended to give a brief introduction into the theoretical underpinnings of the main forms of Cognitive Behaviour Therapy (CBT) and provide a solid background in the practical applications of CBT in relation to common psychiatric disorders for which CBT is an appropriate treatment.

The introductory two seminars will cover the historical background of how CBT evolved, starting with the early work on classical and operant conditioning to the more sophisticated cognitive models and the integration of behavioural and cognitive approaches. The basic theories of personality and psychopathology as outlined in Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy e.g. Albert Ellis, Behaviour Therapy e.g. Skinner, and Cognitive Therapy e.g. Beck will be discussed. General principles of CBT assessment and formulation will be covered.

Subsequent seminars will focus on the use of commonly used CBT techniques such as:

  1. behavioural interventions e.g. graded exposure in phobias and obsessive disorders, token economy in the chronically mentally ill, skills training
  2. cognitive interventions e.g. automatic thoughts in depression, in psychiatric disorders.

The seminars will be run in a workshop format to allow active involvement of students who will be expected to present and formulate cases according to CBT principles. These last four seminars will focus on applications of CBT in the management of four common psychiatric disorders - obsessive compulsive disorder, panic disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder and depression.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the empirical foundations of CBT approaches, the theories of personality and psycopathology according to the major CBT approaches.
  2. Have the skills to be confident in the assessment, formulation and management of common psychiatric disorders according to CBT principles.
  3. To recognise which common psychiatric disorders for which CBT is an appropriate management strategy.
  4. To recognise the limitations of CBT.
  5. To compare CBT with other forms of psychotherapy and choose the most appropriate form of therapy for patients.

Assessment

Clinical case presentation or role play exercise (40%)
Case study and management plan (1,500 words) (60%)

Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Workload is 3.5 hours attendance at seminars.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Carol Harvey and Associate Professor Sean Jespersen

Synopsis

This selective will examine the theory and practice of the provision of mental health services to the population in primary care and community settings. Seminar 1 and 2 will address issues related to the primary care setting. The first seminar will address the scope of mental health issues and service delivery in primary care. The topics will include:

  1. primary care in the international and Australian context - with the opportunities and challenges presented by the Australian Primary Health Care system
  2. classification and diagnostic issues in primary mental health care
  3. epidemiology of common disorders treated in general practice settings
  4. models of service delivery by public and private psychiatrists and other mental health professionals in primary care.

The 2nd seminar will focus on biological, psychological and social treatments for common psychiatric disorders in a primary care with particular emphasis on psychosocial treatment interventions. Illustrative examples will include the management of recurrent and relapsing depression and somatisation in general practice. Specific details about psychosocial treatment strategies relevant to primary care will be provided. Consideration will be given to the evidence base about the delivery of high quality mental health care in general practice.

The remaining seminars will focus on the mental health issues and service delivery in community settings. Seminar 3 will address the historical, socio-economic, cultural and political issues of relevance to the provision of community mental health care. Topics will include:

  1. deinstitutionalisation
  2. public health issues including community attitudes and responses to mental illness and the impact of stigma
  3. the scope of community mental health (both internationally and in Australia) giving examples of service models in community psychiatry.

Seminar 4 will cover rehabilitation and recovery in serious mental illness. Topics will include: the importance of functioning and definitions of disability; the traditional rehabilitation approach and current functioning and definitions of disability; the traditional rehabilitation approach and current understandings of the recovery process; consumer and carer perspectives with respect to rehabilitation and recovery; rehabilitation outcomes such as employment and social relationships as well as subjective experiences such as self-esteem and quality of life. The final two seminars in community mental health will review selected psychosocial treatment strategies, with an emphasis on enhancing students' skills. Strategies will include: ways to optimise the treatment alliance; goal setting; relapse management and identification of early warning signs; CBT for delusions and hallucinations; working with 'chronicity'; and family intervention techniques for lowering expressed emotion and improving problem solving.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. To describe the incidence, prevalence, distinct and common presentations of psychiatric disorders in primary care and in general practice.
  2. To describe the factors which affect treatment outcome and the influences of lifestyle, social, cultural and environmental factors in promoting health and preventing disease.
  3. To apply the various biological, psychological, social and cultural models to the understanding and treatment of psychiatric disorders in primary care and the community. This will include acknowledgement and respect of the role and contribution of significant others (relatives, general practitioners, other professionals) to the assessment, treatment and recovery of people with mental illness in the community. Students should be able to develop and implement a clear plan of care that integrates biological, psychological and social interventions according to the needs of each individual patient and takes account of the context in which the person is treated.
  4. To describe and apply the principles and practice of providing effective mental health treatments including modern rehabilitation techniques in diverse settings ranging from primary care and the community, hospital and outpatient clinics to long-term care, rehabilitation and recovery for those people with well-established psychiatric disorders living in the community.
  5. To appraise the various ethical, cultural, socio-economic, practical and political factors which influence the health care and social welfare systems when providing services for the individual. This includes sensitivity to the impact of illness on patients, families or carers and the wider community, and to strive to balance the needs of the patients with those of the family or carers and the community.
  6. To demonstrate the confidence to interpret and disseminate relevant scientific information in relation to public debate on psychosocial and public health issues relevant to mental health and mental illness.

Assessment

Presentation (40%)
Written review (1,500 words) (60%)

Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Workload is 3.5 hours per week attending seminars x 6 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Enrico Cementon

Synopsis

This unit covers substance abuse definitions, classification systems, epidemiology, prevalence & risk factors, major substances of abuse i.e. alcohol, other central nervous system depressants, stimulants & hallucinogens. Features of substance abuse disorder (SAD), assessment, long term effects/complications, family issues, medical/ psychosocial management, the interface between substance abuse disorder & mental health - "Dual Diagnosis", (where serious mental illness & SAD occur in one person) are examined as is the impact of substance abuse in the community, prevention & health promotion, public education, the media, political, economic & social issues related to availability of substances.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the epidemiology, aetiology, psychopathology, clinical features, complications and natural history of substance abuse disorders and the issues specific to "Dual Diagnosis" field.
  2. Describe the organisations involved in the delivery of drug treatment services.
  3. Demonstrate the clinical skills and knowledge needed to assess and develop treatment interventions for patients with substance abuse disorders.
  4. Demonstrate the skills required to communicate clearly with colleagues especially in relation to the implications of psychiatric issues with colleagues, patients and carers including the specific interpersonal skills required in the management of patients with substance use disorders and to effectively liaise with medical and non-medical colleagues in non-psychiatric settings.

Assessment

Case history (1,500 words) (40%)
Presentation (30%)
Log book (30%)

Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance.

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Sid Bloch

Synopsis

Themes and topics will extend over a wide terrain but cover ethical aspects of the psychiatrist - patient relationship, diagnosis, confidentiality, treatment in psychiatry, resource allocation and justice, child and adolescent psychiatry, women's mental health, psychogeriatrics, forensic psychiatry. Moral theory and its applications will also be a central feature.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. To discuss the history of moral philosophy as it pertains to the discipline of psychiatry, including the salient concepts in moral philosophy which constitute a basis for ethical reasoning and are relevant to clinical practice.
  2. To discuss the many complex ethical problems that can be analysed in a systematic and disciplined manner and to demonstrate an understanding of the essence of ethical reasoning and analysis.
  3. To demonstrate the ability to learn to deal with ethical decision-making by logic and argument and to reach balanced ethical judgements through critical appraisal of competing theories.
  4. To demonstrate the ability to promote one's moral imagination, moral sensitivity and self-awareness in clinical practice and to become sensitised to ethical aspects of issues that might otherwise be regarded as purely scientific or technical.
  5. To demonstrate the confidence to face and cope with anxiety regarding difficult-to-resolve ethical dilemmas in clinical psychiatry and to become sensitive to the myriad intricate ethical problems facing psychiatrists. This selective intends the student to be guided by a sound understanding of psychiatric ethics and a sense of moral obligation, and to bring rigorous thinking to bear when faced with an ethical quandary.
  6. To demonstrate an appreciation of the value (and limitations) of codes of ethics, codes of practice and clinical guidelines.

Assessment

Essay (1,500 words) (100%)

Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Workload is 3.5 hours attendance at seminars.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Colin Reiss

Synopsis

This unit covers family based approaches in mental health management and treatment. Understanding theory; development of practice skills and exploring practical applications of systems; and narrative based work with families are emphasized. Seminars cover development and application of family work in mental health systems, the central and fundamental issue of engagement of families in management and therapy, conceptual framework of the various family therapy approaches, post structural approaches, narrative therapy and solution focus.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. To recognise the complex role that the family and other carers play in the life of individuals with a mental illness develop and apply family sensitive practice principles in the context of mental health services and management.
  2. To describe the history of 'family-based' approaches in psychiatric management and psychotherapy, the principles of general systems theory, the major structural practice models and theories in family therapy, 'post structural' theory and the derivation of narrative and solution focus practice models in family therapy, the legislation concerning confidentiality and its impact on family and carer involvement and outcome research regarding family involvement in mental health treatment approaches and family therapy.
  3. To recognise the influence of therapist's personal, ethnic, gender, professional and work contexts in the shaping of any therapeutic encounter with individuals and families including their own personal values and belief systems as they arose from their own families of origin.
  4. To describe and apply the principles of conducting conjoint family sessions in regard to joining engagement, assessment, interventions and recognise the factors which affect engagement and treatment outcome.
  5. To demonstrate the ability to work to assimilate and integrate the various modalities of family based work covered in this series with the rest of their psychiatric training and knowledge and be able to use the skills necessary using approaches based on systematic and post structural principals in family therapy to implement family based interventions as a part of total patient management and treatment.

Assessment

Critical literature review (1,500 words) (60%)
Linked oral presentation (40%)

Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Seminars and practice clinical sessions.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Jenny Torr

Synopsis

Historical, philosophical, ethical, humanitarian and legal issues in the lives and care of people with intellectual/developmental disabilities; epidemiology of intellectual/developmental disabilities; intellectual/developmental disability within the family life cycle, in society and across the lifespan are covered. Psychiatric disorder in intellectual/developmental disability is also examined in detail.

Outcomes

At the conclusion of this selective candidates will be able to:

  1. Understand, define and differentiate the terms Intellectual Disability and Developmental Disability.
  2. Appreciate ethical, humanitarian and legal issues regarding people with intellectual/development disabilities and incorporate this understanding into psychiatric practice.
  3. Identify biopsychosocial risk factors for psychiatric disorders in people with intellectual/developmental disabilities.
  4. Understand and minimise the barriers to diagnosis of psychiatric disorder in people with developmental disabilities.
  5. Appreciate the importance of identifying the cause of a developmental disability and recognise common syndromes and behavioural phenotypes.
  6. Understand and describe how psychiatric disorders present in people with intellectual/developmental disabilities.
  7. Differentiate and assess the causes of challenging behaviour.
  8. Conduct a modified psychiatric assessment and formulate a diagnostic hypothesis and management plan.
  9. Give an appraisal of various service models for delivering psychiatric services to people with intellectual/developmental disabilities.

Assessment

Satisfactory participation in either face to face or online tutorials:
a) Participation in group discussion
b) Completion of learning activities
Written assignment (1,500 words)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

The unit presented as a series of interactive seminars based upon learning modules.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor T Norman

Synopsis

A revision of basic pharmacological principles of pharmacokinetics & pharmacodynamics covering the relevance of age, gender, ethnicity, common drug interactions, environmental influences, and route of administration. The unit covers major drug types commonly used in psychiatric practice including the underlying neurochemical basis for use in specific disorders and specified primary target syndromes & symptoms. Students are taught identification and measurement of psychotropic-induced common side effects, use of specific antidotes for common conditions, and use of instruments used to rate side effects. Prescribing patterns in Australia and prescribing guidelines/pitfalls are also discussed.

Outcomes

During this selective, students will:

  1. Develop knowledge of the basic pharmacological principles and their relevance to clinical prescribing.
  2. Gain a deeper understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of the common psychiatric disorders such as depression and psychoses, and the underlying basis for the use of specific psychotropic medications.
  3. Learn to critically analyse the literature on drug trials.
  4. Learn a rational and practical approach to prescribing psychotropics including the management of side effects, the drug-resistant patient, use in the medically unwell and elderly patient.

Assessment

Essay divided into 4 tasks that will be assessed during the term (1,500 words) (100%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

3 hour lecture weekly and 3 hours studying prepared course material.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor T Trauer

Synopsis

Students will develop research skills in the area of study design, methodology and analysis.
Week 1. 'Foundations of statistical inference' will cover the techniques used to make statistical inferences, The nature of 'statistical significance' will be the focus. Threats to the validity of inference will be discussed.
Week 2. 'Qualitative research methods' will explore the methods for the analysis of narrative data and case studies. Verstehen and hermeneutics will be explained. Grounded theory will be introduced. Practical steps involved in the conduct of qualitative studies will be presented.
Week 3 'Epidemiological methods' will examine the methods for the assessment of the presence of disorders at the population level and the detection and measurement of risk factors. Prevalence and incidence will be defined. Methods of case ascertainment classification systems and diagnostic tools will be explored. Research designs and methods for the assessment of risk factors for disease will be surveyed. Sources of bias in epidemiological studies will be discussed.
Week 4. 'Intervention Trials' will focus on the design and analysis of studies that examine the efficacy of drug and psychotherapeutic treatments for psychiatric disorders. Topics will include randomised clinical trial (RCT), choice and definition of intervention and control groups, designs, administration and maintenance of intervention, choice of outcome measures and assessment procedures, dropouts and the intention to treat model.
Week 5. 'Meta-analysis' will be an introduction to the various methods for the combination of the outcome of individual studies. Topics to be covered include the discovery and selection of studies, the 'file draw' problem, effect sizes and statistical methods for analysis. Advanced hypothesis formulation and analysis of meta-analytic data will be introduced. Problems and limitations associated with this technique will be discussed. The Cochrane Collaboration will be presented.
Week 6 'Longitudinal methods' will examine the relative strengths and weaknesses of studies that compare the different classes of individuals at one time (cross-sectional studies) and studies that observe the same individual over time (longitudinal studies). Topics will include the design of longitudinal studies, statistical methods, the determination of causality, attrition and other problems.

Outcomes

  1. The course is designed to equip students with the skills necessary to evaluate empirical studies as published in the psychiatric literature. The course also aims to provide students with an introduction to the information necessary to design and initiate their own research.
  2. Students will gain statistical and methodological knowledge. It must be realised that given the time constraints much of the knowledge imparted will be at a basic or introductory level. However the course has been designed to cover a broad range of relevant topics. The course will also give students information about 'next steps' that is, approaches and sources of information that will allow them to bring their skills up to a mature level in specific areas when they have a need for this.
  3. The overarching attitude to be developed is one of 'constructive critical doubt'. This transcends the ability to be able to simply enumerate flaws and limitations in a piece of research. It is the aim of this course that students will develop an appreciation of the factors that are critical in either engendering confidence in the research or invalidating it.

Assessment

Essay (2,000 words) (100%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

3 hours attending lectures and 3 hours studying prepared course materials per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Prem Chopra

Synopsis

Transcultural psychiatry is concerned with the nature of mental illness, causes and distribution of mental illness in different populations, culture and clinical practice, including the clinician-patient relationship; and the design of mental health services in multicultural societies. The role of culture in the development and treatment of mental illness is examined, and an introduction to the education of mental health professionals and construction/operations of health systems are provided. Students will develop knowledge and skills in cultural assessment, cross-cultural diagnosis and treatment.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the cultural diversity of Australian Society, and the mental health implications of this diversity.
  2. Differentiate new ways of thinking about concepts of culture, and concept of psychiatric illness across different cultures, and to apply these concepts in day-to-day clinical work.
  3. Describe the differing patterns of mental health service utilisation by different ethnic communities in Victoria, and the factors that may be responsible for these different patterns of service use such as the epidemiology of mental illness across cultures.
  4. Discuss the frameworks for thinking about public mental health policy, and service design and evaluation, in relation to people from different cultural backgrounds.
  5. Demonstrate skills in cross-cultural assessment and treatment of mental illness and cross-cultural diagnosis.

Assessment

Oral presentation (40%)
Case report (1,500 words) (60%)

Hurdle: 75% attendance.

Workload requirements

Workload is 3.5 hours per week seminars, 3 hours seminar preparation and reading.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr A Carroll

Synopsis

The initial two sessions will focus on the nature and extent of the relationship between violent and offending behaviours and mental disorder. This will draw heavily on Australian research but will also make use of studies overseas which examine this interaction. Following this there will be two sessions on current thinking in the area of the assessment and management of the risk of violence in those with mental disorder. Further sessions will consider specific types of criminal behaviour which have a particular importance to those managing the mentally disordered. These will include stalking, sexual offending, making threats and homicide.

Outcomes

Each seminar in the selective will be designed to provide the knowledge necessary for general mental health professionals approaching issues of a forensic psychiatric nature.

Assessment

Attendance (75%) (Hurdle)
Essay (1,500 words) (25%)

Workload requirements

3 hours attendance of lectures per week, 3 hours study.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Mark Hedger

Synopsis

Topics include physiology of human and animal; role of growth factors; statistics used to analyse data in reproductive endocrinology; hormones produced by the pituitary, hypothalamus, ovary and testis and their interactions, regulation and mode of action.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are to provide students with an understanding of the science of reproduction with particular emphasis on the molecular and cellular endocrinology of reproduction. Much research in the reproductive sciences requires an understanding of hormonal function and growth factors. This series of lectures thus provides students with the theoretical background for a more intensive study of various areas of reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
Practical reports (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Topics include physiology of human and animal reproduction; development and differentiation of the male and female reproductive systems; oocyte and follicular development; ovarian cycles; testicular function and cell/cell interactions in the testis.

Outcomes

The objective of this unit is to provide students with an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of female reproductive anatomy and physiology and the fertilisation process. This series of lectures provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
Oral presentation (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Jansen and Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Topics include implantation and placentation, the foetus, the mother, and the politics of pregnancy; neonates - foetal and neonatal monitoring and neonatal intensive care.

Outcomes

The objective of this unit is to provide students with an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of male reproductive anatomy and the human sexuality. This series of lectures provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
Literature review (3,000 words) (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Jansen and Associate Professor Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Topics include disorders of sexual development; sexually transmitted disease and the HIV pandemic; reproductive toxicology; reproductive cancers, menstrual disorders, infertility and erectile dysfunction.

Outcomes

The objective of this unit is to provide students with an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of infertility management, pregnancy, parturition, neonatal monitoring and reproductive toxicology. This series of lectures thus provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
Literature review (5,000 words) (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Meachem and Dr Kristy Brown

Synopsis

Topics include current trends in population growth and the policies introduced in some countries to regulate this growth; fertilisation and its manipulation; regulation of fertility; legal and ethical aspects of controlling fertility and overcoming infertility.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of male reproductive anatomy and the human sexuality. This series of lectures thus provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Anaesthesiology is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the administration of drugs and other substances to achieve lack of sensation with or without loss of consciousness. This detailed field may include administering anaesthetics, principles and practices of anaesthesiology, regional analgesia, and remedial action to counter adverse reactions and complications. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Biochemistry and Cell Biology is the study of the chemistry of living organisms and the structure and function of cells. Examples include biosynthesis, cellular regulation, cytology, molecular biology, and metabolism. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Community Health is the study of health practices in the community which support and assist the management of disabilities and illness. This detailed field may include current issues in Australian community health, and disabilities and illnesses as community issues. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Environmental health is the study of the health impact of the interaction between humans and the environment. This detailed field may include the effect of environmental pollution on health. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Epidemiology is the study of the incidence, distribution and possible control of infectious and chronic diseases as they affect groups of people. This detailed field may include disease and injury evaluation and surveillance, and infectious and chronic diseases and their prevention. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Forensic Science is the study of the use of scientific techniques to solve criminal cases. This detailed field may include ballistics, blood splash pattern analysis, crime scene investigation, trace evidence, and fingerprint enhancement and identification. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBendigo Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

General Practice is the study of providing primary and continuing medical care to patients in a community setting. It is particularly concerned with providing family and community oriented health care. This detailed field may include carrying out simple surgical procedures and dealing with medical emergencies, early diagnosing, prescribing and administering medication, and primary, personal and continuing medical care. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis examined by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Genetics is the study of heredity and of the units of biological inheritance. This detailed field may include cytogenetics, genotypes, higher eukaryotes, microbial genetics, molecular genetics, monohybrids, and phenotypes. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis examined by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Health Promotion is the study of promoting a healthy lifestyle and influencing behaviour to improve health. This detailed field may include contribution of lifestyle to morbidity and mortality, health program planning, and health promotion principles, goals and concepts. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis examined by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Human Biology is the study of human physiology and anatomy. This detailed field may include biological anthropology, human anatomy and histology, human evolution and variation, primatology, and human growth, development and reproduction. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Indigenous Health is the study of the health of the Indigenous population within the broader context of socio-economic development of aboriginal communities. This detailed field may include approaches to Indigenous health care delivery and management, Indigenous caring and healing practices, Indigenous child health, Indigenous community health, and Indigenous primary health care. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Medical Science is the study of physics, biology and chemistry as applied to medicine. This detailed field may include biomedical sciences, clinical and medical biochemistry, medical biotechnology, medical microbiology, medical physics, and biology and chemistry associated with medicine. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

General medicine is the study of the clinical presentation and treatment of diseases. This detailed field may include clinical diagnosis, and diseases affecting humans. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Microbiology is the study of microscopic forms of life such as bacteria, viruses, and protozoa. This detailed field may include food microbiology, industrial microbiology, microbial cell structure and function, microbial physiology, microbial growth, microbial taxonomy, micro-organisms, and virology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBerwick Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Berwick Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Berwick Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Berwick Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Nursing is the study of the principles and practices of providing preventative, curative and rehabilitative care to individuals and groups. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Obstetrics and Gynaecology is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the care of women during pregnancy, labour and after childbirth and the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of diseases of the female reproductive system. This detailed field may include monitoring foetal development, and treating gynaecological and obstetric conditions. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Occupational Health and Safety is the study of recognising, evaluating and controlling environmental factors associated with the interaction of individuals and the workplace. This detailed field may include health and safety in the workplace, national occupational health and safety standards, and principles of establishing and maintaining safe premises. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Paediatrics is the medical specialisation concerned with normal physical and emotional growth and development from birth through to late adolescence. It involves preventing, diagnosing and treating diseases and uncommon disorders in children and adolescents. This detail field may include child growth and development, child and adolescent diseases, and neonatology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This detailed field includes all biological sciences not elsewhere classified, including immunology. Examples include biogeography, bioinformatics, biophysics, mycology, neuroscience, and parasitology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Pharmacology is the study of the development, uses and effects of drugs. Examples include clinical drug trials, drug analysis, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, and toxicology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Psychological Medicine and Psychiatry are the study of the medical specialisation concerned with diagnosing, preventing and treating diseases and disorders of the mind. This detailed field may include assessing patients' psychiatric states, child psychiatry, developmental psychiatry, and psychotherapy. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBox Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Psychology is the study of the science of human nature and of mental states and processes. It includes the study of human and animal behaviour. This detailed field may include abnormal psychology, behaviourism, clinical psychology, cognitive processes, developmental psychology, neuropsychology, personality theory and assessment, physiological psychology, and social psychology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Radiography and medical imaging is the study of technologies which use ionising and non-ionising (e.g. ultrasound) radiation to diagnose, treat and follow the course of disease and its response to treatment. This detailed field may include interpreting and evaluating medical images, ultrasound and x-ray equipment, nuclear medicine, and preparing radioactive materials. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Surgery is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the principles and practices for treating diseases, injuries, defects and deformities by manual operation and manipulation, and by using instruments and appliances. This detailed field may include monitoring post operative progress of patients, surgical diagnosis, and surgical procedures and techniques. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Rural Health is the study of health care and services, and their impact on people in rural and remote communities. This detailed field may include rural health workforce issues, models of health services in rural and remote areas, rural medical health education and support, rural community development and capacity building, and rural health policy and program evaluation. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Public and health care administration is the study of planning and directing the functions and operations of organisations whose primary objective is the provision of services for the public good. This detailed field may include identifying and evaluating the role of public organisations and institutions in society, relating organisational and behavioural theory to public and private institutions/organisations, and analysing government policy and planning, and developing strategies for its implementation and administration. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Human reproductive biology is the study of reproductive biology and medicine as it applies to the human body. This detailed field may include physiology of human reproduction, fertilisation and its manipulation, embryology, regulation of fertility, infertility diagnosis and treatment, sexually transmitted diseases, pregnancy and parturition, assisted reproductive technologies, and reproductive toxicology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Animal reproductive biology is the study of reproductive biology and medicine as it applies to animals. This detailed field may include physiology of animal reproduction, fertilisation and its manipulation, embryology, regulation of fertility, pregnancy and parturition, and reproductive toxicology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Public health is the study of public health practice. This detailed field may include advanced epidemiology, statistical methods for public health, health leadership and management, and quantitative methods of population-based health sciences and their problem-solving application for primary care provision. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Health services research is the study of the provision of health services and tools used to measure and assess these services. This detailed field may include health informatics, health technology assessment, clinical effectiveness, implementation research, systematic reviews, sociological perspectives on health, and gender and the clinical workforce. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Pathology is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the causes and effects of diseases, including the structural and functional changes of body organs, tissues and fluids, and the systematic methods of detecting these changes. This detailed field may include examining specimens to determine the origin, nature and course of any disease present, histopathology, interpreting and evaluating pathology tests, and post-mortem examination. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Epidemiology is the study of the incidence, distribution and possible control of infectious and chronic diseases as they affect groups of people. This detailed field may include disease and injury evaluation and surveillance, and infectious and chronic diseases and their prevention. This high-cost unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBendigo Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 1 2015 (Off-campus)
Bendigo Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2015 (Off-campus)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2015 (Off-campus)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2015 (Off-campus)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Social work is the study of social justice and redressing the social and economic disadvantage in the community. This detailed field may include community services, child abuse and protection, corrections and interventions, policy development, and casework with individuals, families, groups and communities. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Ambulance and paramedic studies investigate emergency medical services, pre-hospital medical care and paramedic education. This detailed field may include aeromedical retrieval, emergency preparedness and disaster medicine, and mobile intensive care ambulance paramedic studies.This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Physiotherapy is the study of therapeutic uses of physical means to relieve pain, regain range of movement, restore muscle strength and return patients to normal activities of daily living. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Occupational Therapy is the study of treating physical, cognitive and psychiatric conditions through activities in order to optimise functioning and independence in daily life. Examples include patient's independence level assessment; tailoring treatment programmes; occupational rehabilitation; and occupational role development. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedMalaysia Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Medicine and health sciences is the study of medical and health-related fields, conducted on the Malaysia Campus. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Radiography and medical imaging is the study of technologies which use ionising and non-ionising (e.g. ultrasound) radiation to diagnose, treat and follow the course of disease and its response to treatment. This detailed field may include interpreting and evaluating medical images, ultrasound and x-ray equipment, nuclear medicine, and preparing radioactive materials. This high-cost unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedMalaysia Full year 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Md. Ezharul Hoque Chowdhury

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedMalaysia Full year 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Md. Ezharul Hoque Chowdhury

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedMalaysia Full year 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Md. Ezharul Hoque Chowdhury

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedMalaysia Full year 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Md. Ezharul Hoque Chowdhury

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Melita Speirs

Synopsis

This unit builds upon NUR5111 Contemporary Nursing Practice 1. It is a clinically-focussed unit that introduces students to acute medical-surgical nursing practice. Students will explore pathophysiology, clinical diagnosis, pharmacology, associated microbiology and nursing care associated with a range of conditions. The clinical practice component will provide students with opportunities to incorporate theoretical learning into care provision.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the pathophysiology associated with commonly encountered conditions, and their application to nursing care of clients in medical/surgical settings;
  2. demonstrate safe evidence based, person centred clinical practice in an acute care setting based on the integration of theoretical principles and practical skills;
  3. describe the nursing application of diagnostic, therapeutic and preventative techniques associated with caring for a person with a body system health breakdown;
  4. conduct and document comprehensive client assessments;
  5. reflect upon, and evaluate self-performance in terms of the delivery of quality nursing care;
  6. practice in accordance with ANMAC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 240 hours.

Assessment

Preparation and consolidation activities (20%)
Drug calculation exam (1 hour) (10%) (Hurdle)
Completion of clinical practice assessments (20%) (Hurdle)
End of semester exam (2 hours) (50%)
Laboratory attendance (Hurdle) (100% attendance, unless a medical certificate is provided)

Workload requirements

8 hours a week: online and face-to-face learning activities 6 hours, laboratories 2 hours/week over a 14 week semester. In addition, students will be required to undertake 240 hours of clinical placement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Olasoji

Synopsis

This unit builds upon NUR5002 Contemporary Nursing Practice 2. It is a clinically-based unit that introduces students to the areas of mental health and aged care nursing as well as preparing them for graduate nursing roles. The unit will provide opportunities for students to develop fundamental knowledge, skills and attitudes relevant to the restoration and maintenance of optimal mental health and recovery from mental illness. Students are expected to learn to assess mental health problems and to identify the coping abilities of individuals and families, and to care for people with selected mental disorders. Emphasis is placed upon empowerment of the individual and caregiver using the stress/vulnerability model and family based management. The unit also encompasses risk assessment, mental health service systems, roles and functions of the multidisciplinary mental health team, and the Victorian Mental Health Act.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. analyse the concepts of mental health and mental illness with reference to historical and contemporary classification systems;
  2. discuss the Victorian Mental Health Act (1986) as amended and implications for nursing practice;
  3. accurately conduct a mental status assessment and a risk assessment;
  4. describe the roles and functions of the members of the multidisciplinary mental health team;
  5. describe the aetiological factors, epidemiology, clinical manifestations and nursing care in a range of mental disorders including anxiety disorders, personality disorders, sexual disorders, mood disorders and schizophrenia; psychotic disorders, dissociative disorders, somatoform disorders, eating disorders, delirium and dementia, and substance-related disorders;
  6. describe a range of psychotherapeutic interventions and therapeutic modalities used in mental health treatment and care;
  7. analyse ethical issues which pertain to psychiatric and mental health nursing;
  8. communicate effectively with people who are experiencing disturbances of thoughts, feelings and behaviour;
  9. employ selected cognitive and behavioural techniques in the care and management of people with mental health problems and mental disorders;
  10. analyse physical, psychological and social aspects of ageing in the context of health and illness in older people in our community;
  11. analyse the impact of ageing and chronic illness on clients, families and carers;
  12. analyse the legal and ethical issues that arise from changes to cognition, chronic and life limiting illness such as challenges to autonomy, protection of patients, quality of life and euthanasia;
  13. differentiate the roles of nurses working in multidisciplinary teams, who care for people with chronic and/ or life limiting illness in different health care environments;
  14. utilise holistic health assessment skills to assess the complex health needs of older adults, people with chronic and life limiting illness in relation to physical, psychosocial and spiritual needs;
  15. analyse a range of evidenced based interventions that support the person experiencing complex care needs;
  16. identify the resources for people with issues related to ageing, chronic and life limiting illness in the community;
  17. utilise health promotion, supportive and palliative approaches to care for people with chronic and life limiting illness in a range of health care settings; and
  18. practice with increasing autonomy in accordance with ANMAC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 200 hours.

Assessment

Mid semester exam (1 hour) (20%)
Written assignment (Clinical case study) (3,000 - 4,000 words) (30%)
End of semester exam (2 hours) (50%)
Clinical practice assessment (Pass / Fail)

Hurdle requirements: Students must pass the end of semester examination to achieve a pass for this unit. Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%). Attendance at clinical is mandatory.

Workload requirements

8 hours a week: lectures 6 hours, tutorials 2 hours over eight weeks. In addition, students will be required to undertake 200 hours of clinical placement.

Note: Students who complete this unit in the summer semester will be on campus for 5.5 weeks intensive.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Jennifer Newton

Synopsis

This unit provides final preparation of the student for practice as a registered nurse. Adult learning principles are applied to encourage the student to identify specific learning needs and pursue opportunities to achieve tailored educational objectives. The approach to clinical learning featured in this unit enables students to explore an area of specific interest in nursing. A five week clinical consolidation placement is also included in this unit that will assist students in preparation for professional practice. The increasing importance of professional portfolios for the purpose of maintaining and demonstrating competency will be emphasized in this unit. A focus on principles of clinical leadership, therapeutic and professional communication, multidisciplinary team work, and clinical decision making will enable consolidation and application of prior learning in this course facilitating the transition from student to professional nurse.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. develop the ability to perform advanced skills in the areas of cardiac and respiratory patient management;
  2. reflect on and identify specific learning needs in preparation for registration as a professional nurse;
  3. utilise adult learning theories, concepts and principles to identify specific learning needs and strategies by which these can be met;
  4. demonstrate critical application of skills in communication, organisation and clinical leadership;
  5. employ clinical and critical decision making skills to identify, analyse and resolve problems in the practice environment;
  6. develop and implement patient centered care interventions that encompass patients' cultural, ethical and developmental needs;
  7. reflect critically on their personal and professional development in preparation for practice as a registered nurse;
  8. practice with increasing independence in accordance with the Australian Nursing and Midwifery Council (ANMAC) National Competencies for the Registered Nurse, Code of Ethics and Code of Professional Conduct for Nurses; and
  9. demonstrate evidence of competency through the development of a professional portfolio.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 200 hours.

Assessment

Learning contract (20%)
Clinical portfolio (30%)
Conference presentation and supporting documentation (2,500 words) (30%)
Reflective essay (1,500 words) (20%)
Clinical placement assessment (Pass / Fail)

Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%) Attendance at clinical placement is mandatory.

Workload requirements

8 hours a week: 4 hours lectures, 4 hours tutorials over 8 weeks. In addition, students will be required to undertake 200 hours of clinical placement.

Please note: Students who undertake this unit in the summer semester will be on campus for 5.5 weeks intensive mode.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Charanjit Singh

Synopsis

In this unit students will study cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT) and its techniques used in interaction and counselling of clients with psychological and or mental health disorders. The unit will include analysis of the theoretical underpinnings and major concepts of CBT and its techniques in clinical application. Students will develop a greater self awareness through the development of their own unique approaches to psychotherapeutic interaction using CBT with their clients, within their own clinical and cultural environment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate acquisition an application of skills and knowledge required for effective psychotherapeutic interaction using cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT);
  2. Plan interventions and establish goals to meet the needs of the client within a CBT framework;
  3. Critically analyse a variety of approaches to CBT;
  4. Develop a greater awareness of self and the ways in which personal attributes affect interaction with clients and others;
  5. Practice the relevant skills of CBT in a variety of clinical settings;
  6. Discuss a range of contemporary issues in CBT and its techniques;
  7. Critically appraise the evidence available regarding the efficacy of CBT in a variety of setting and with a variety of different client groups;
  8. Optimise the opportunity as health professionals to enhance their clinical skills when working with consumers and carers;
  9. Develop an understanding of cultural psychosocial aspects which may influence the use of CBT within the health professionals role.

Assessment

Online discussion (40%)
Written assignment (30%)
Case study (30%)
Four one day workshops (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Gulzar Malik

Synopsis

This unit is the first of three units that examines nursing practice from a socio-political framework. In providing an understanding of fundamental concepts of nursing as a discipline, this unit introduces students to the disparate locations of nursing practice globally and allows for in-depth exploration of health care settings in the Australian health care milieu. Students will study health care through a social model of health and will situate nursing care within this model. A history of nursing and the various opportunities and barriers that have influenced the development of nursing as a profession will be explored and debated. The Australian legal system as its relationship to the health care environment will be examined and students will be required to explore the complex legal relationships that nurses have with patients, families and other health care professionals. In addition, professional and ethical codes will be introduced, explored and posited as a basis for professional nursing practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. outline the evolution of contemporary nursing practice from both an international and Australian perspective;
  2. describe the multi-faceted health care system in Australia and how nurses practice in these settings;
  3. debate the socio-political influences on the development of nursing as a profession;
  4. identify and appraise ethical dilemmas that arise in health care and strategies for resolving these;
  5. describe the pertinent legal concepts and mechanisms that underpin the practice of nursing;
  6. utilize and incorporate legal and professional standards in the various practice environments.

Assessment

Essay (3,500 - 4,000 words) (40%)
Simulation learning (10%)
Exam (3 hours) (40%)
Online activity (Discussion) (10%)

Workload requirements

7 hours a week: lectures 4 hours, tutorials 1 hour, online learning activities 2 hours over a 14 week semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Louisa Lam

Synopsis

This unit has a strong focus on the theory and practice underpinning working with organizations, individuals, families, groups and communities. Through discursive lectures, tutorials and interactive online sessions, students will be able to examine the skills in communication for the purpose of enhancing therapeutic relationships across the lifespan and ultimately ensuring quality health care are developed through studies in this unit. The concepts of caring and helping in nursing within a therapeutic relationship, are explored. Students engage in in-depth analysis of the various human growth and development theories. These theoretical concepts provide a foundation for students to explore aspects of the social model of health, with a particular emphasis on the provision of health care to vulnerable populations and nursing in a culturally diverse community. Within this context the concepts of cultural competence and cultural safety are explored. The development of therapeutic engagement with vulnerable groups using these concepts will be central to the learning milieu of this unit.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the concepts of helping and caring in nursing practice across the lifespan
  2. Discuss the theory and practice of an effective therapeutic nurse-patient relationship
  3. Discuss the impact of cultural diversity on health and illness behaviour
  4. Identify the meaning of effective therapeutic communication in nursing including working with people from diverse cultural backgrounds and age groups
  5. Explore the issues of cultural safety and cultural competence within nursing practice
  6. Plan for the promotion and maintenance of the health of individuals, families, groups and communities, with particular emphasis on the needs of vulnerable populations.

Assessment

Essay (4,000 words) (45%)
Group presentation (20 mins) with written synopsis (2,000 words) (35%)
Active learning tasks (2,000 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

6 hours a week: lectures 2 hours, tutorials 2 hours + 2 hours of online learning activities over a 14 week semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Cheryle Moss

Synopsis

This unit examines foundations of knowledge for nursing and education for clinical practice. Knowledge generation through research, and the application and dissemination of that knowledge, are central themes of this unit. The development of a research culture as the cornerstone of professional nursing is emphasized. Research processes from various traditions are examined and their specific relevance to nursing in diverse practice settings is explored. The significance of evidence-based nursing in the context of the contemporary health care environment is highlighted. As a key feature of this unit, knowledge transfer and translation is examined in primary, acute and rehabilitative settings. Strategies for peer teaching and health promotion through teaching are developed through exploration of theoretical concepts and practical application in the classroom setting.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. discuss the concept of knowledge generation in professional nursing;
  2. describe philosophical underpinnings, methodologies and principles of research relevant to nursing practice;
  3. understand the generation of knowledge in nursing through the critique of research;
  4. discuss the ethical principles underpinning the research process;
  5. recommend strategies for the dissemination of knowledge to facilitate improved health outcomes;
  6. identify strategies for the translation of research evidence to nursing practice;
  7. describe and critique theories of learning;
  8. develop and implement plans for health teaching and promotion.

Assessment

Online research quizzes x 2 (10%)
Literature review integrating critical appraisal of evidence (3,500 words) (30%)
Teaching plan & essay (2,000 words) (20%)
Teaching session (group presentation) (15%)
Exam (25%)

Workload requirements

10 hours a week: lectures 6 hours, tutorials 4 hours over 8 weeks. Please note: Students who undertake this unit in the summer semester will be on campus for 5.5 weeks intensive mode.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


36 points, SCA Band 1, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedPeninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project;
  2. show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience;
  3. have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


18 points, SCA Band 1, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project;
  2. show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience;
  3. have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Susan Irvine

Synopsis

This unit is the first of four practice units in the graduate entry Master of Nursing Practice. The unit provides students with foundation knowledge and skills for nursing practice with an emphasis on physical health assessment. Knowledge and nursing practice skills are introduced around case scenarios. Each case will use an individualised client centred approach. Content to be covered within each scenario will include physiology, introductory pharmacology, application of the legal and ethical dimensions of care and nursing skills development. Clinical practice experience is an integral component of this unit and concentrates on the attainment of fundamental client care.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the physical health assessment process;
  2. conduct and document a comprehensive health history;
  3. conduct a comprehensive physical health assessment in a clinical environment;
  4. describe the impact that health problems may have on the individual from the physical, psychological and social perspectives;
  5. describe the steps involved in the process of developing appropriate plans for nursing care intervention and the evaluation of that care using standard decision making frameworks;
  6. discuss the basic principles of pharmacology, therapeutic drug administration and monitoring as they relate to oral medication administration;
  7. describe the legal and professional nursing requirements associated with quality use of medications including safe drug administration, storage and handling;
  8. analyse problems associated with drug administration, including drug interactions and the use of drugs across the life-span;
  9. implement appropriate evidenced based nursing interventions when caring for peri-operative clients, clients with compromised wound integrity, pain management and the dying client;
  10. analyse ethical issues relevant to the nursing care of clients with an alteration in health status;
  11. demonstrate safe evidence based clinical practice in an acute care setting with regard to the use of universal precautions for infection control purposes and asepsis;
  12. provide person-centred care according to relevant nursing care principles, to clients under the supervision of registered nursing staff and the clinical teacher;
  13. reflect upon, and evaluate self-performance in terms of the delivery of quality nursing care, and
  14. practice in accordance with ANMAC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards at a beginning level.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 160 hours.

Assessment

Weekly participation in preparation and consolidation activities (20%)
Written assignment - Clinical case study (3,000 - 4,000 words) (30%)
End of semester exam (2 hours) (50%)
Clinical practice assessment (Pass / Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%)
Attendance at clinical placement is mandatory
Calculations hurdle (100% mastery)
Laboratory attendance (Hurdle) (100% attendance, unless a medical certificate is provided)

Workload requirements

8 hours a week: lectures 5 hours, tutorials 1 hour, laboratories 2 hours over a 14 week semester. In addition, students will be required to undertake 160 hours of clinical placement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit is offered concurrently with NUR5113 Nursing in the Australian Context for registered nurses with International nursing qualifications. A focus on principles of clinical leadership, therapeutic and professional communication, multidisciplinary team work, and clinical decision making will facilitate transition to the Australian nursing context. The unit is learner cantered engaging the student in critical reflection, appraisal and application of evidence for practice in relationship to the role of the nurse in a variety of clinical nursing settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply a clinical reasoning process in the resolution of a number of example clinical nursing problems within the parameters of the registered nurses scope of practice
  2. Describe the personal attributes and professional skill required of nurses in effective clinical leadership roles, including an appraisal of how these assets contribute to efficient change management outcomes
  3. Apply the theoretical principles for achieving evidence informed nursing practice in the critique of nursing practice examples from a range of practice settings
  4. Evaluate the clinical application of evidence-based research and ethical principles in the management of a range of complex nursing examples
  5. Reflect critically on professional development in preparation for practice in the Australian health care context
  6. Demonstrate evidence of continuing competence to practice as a registered nurse through the development of a professional portfolio
  7. Practice in accordance with the Australian Nursing and Midwifery Council (ANMAC) National Competencies for the Registered Nurse, Code of Ethics and Code of Professional Conduct for Nurses.

Fieldwork

6 weeks clinical practicum.

Assessment

Portfolio (8,000 words) (60%)
Essay (2,500 words) (40%)
6 week clinical practicum (Pass / Fail)

Workload requirements

Six weeks clinical practicum: 240 hours, Self-directed learning: 72 hours.
Total: 312 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit is offered concurrently with NUR5112 Nursing Practice in the Australian Health Care Context for registered nurses with International nursing qualifications. This unit is learner cantered engaging the student in critical reflection, appraisal and application of evidence for practice. The Australian legal system and its applications to the health care environment will be examined in detail. Students will be required to explore the complex legal relationships that nurses have with patients, families and other health care professionals. In addition, professional and ethical codes will be introduced, explored and posited as a basis for professional nursing practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Compare the multi-faceted health care system in Australia and how nurses practice in these settings in line with global trends
  2. Critically appraise the role and scope of practice of the nurse in a range of Australian health care settings, making comparisons with other western countries in similar settings
  3. Critically appraise the application of evidence based quality improvement processes to an area of nursing practice for the purpose of enhancing patient safety
  4. Apply ethical decision making principles to clinical cases involving ethical dilemmas in practice and appraise a range of strategies to be considered in the resolution of the situation
  5. Apply pertinent legal concepts and mechanisms that underpin the scope of practice for nurses to a range of case studies drawn from real clinical situations
  6. Describe the relationship between the conduct of clinical research and changes to nursing knowledge and its application to practice through a structured critique of research findings using an approved journal article
  7. Practice in accordance with ANMAC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards.

Assessment

Summative online quiz (30 minutes) (10%)
Essay (3,000 words) (30%)
Exam (3 hours) (60%)
One week on-campus seminar (Pass / Fail)

Workload requirements

On-campus (5 day seminar): 35 hours, Online learning modules (40 hours per five modules): 200 hours, Self-directed learning: 77 hours.
Total: 312 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences;
  2. have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and 3. have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences;
  2. have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and 3. have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bob Ribbons

Synopsis

Relationships between computers, information technologies and the provision of nursing care. Contemporary issues in nursing informatics. Skills in the use of information technologies in health care settings enabling participants to act as a conduits, facilitating and enhancing communication between and among clinicians, technicians, information systems personnel, health care executives and systems vendors. Issues of privacy, ethics, confidentiality and network security.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an in-depth understanding of how specific software application (e.g. word processing, spreadsheet, database, presentation and statistics) may be applied to nursing practice, education, administration and research;
  2. Describe the role of database, communication and network technology in the development, implementation and utilisation of information systems;
  3. Evaluate current trends in communication and network technology and their impact on Health Information Systems;
  4. Analyse and evaluate a number of information sources such as CD-ROM databases and websites related to nursing knowledge in general and specifically to Nursing Informatics;
  5. Demonstrate an ability to competently utilise communication applications such as email, newsgroups, intranet and Internet audio/video technology and evaluate their benefits to health care;
  6. Outline the role of various computer architectures in the provision of Information Systems;
  7. Analyse a number of networking structures and topographies;
  8. Understand issues related to informatics ethics, privacy and confidentiality;
  9. Evaluate the role of network security in maintaining information system integrity;
  10. Analyse a number of information technology implementation strategies and outline their impact on Nursing Informatics;
  11. Discuss the role of data standards and case mix in health informatics;
  12. Demonstrate an understanding of current trends in health care and how they influence the development, implementation and utilisation of information systems;
  13. Analyse a number of Clinical Information Systems and determine their role in improving nursing care.

Assessment

Seminar presentation (30%)
Issues paper (40%)
Tutorial participation (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Lee

Synopsis

The unit prepares student for the role of a specialist in palliative care. Topics of content include the philosophical and developmental trends of the hospice and palliative care movement, interdisciplinary team roles and the family, cultural and spiritual aspects of death and dying. Medical, nursing and complementary therapies utilised in the care of patients with terminal illnesses are discussed. Assessment and symptom management strategies in mental status, pain control and other common physical symptoms are explored. Activities in the unit include fieldwork, literature review, and computer conferencing for the study of current research in symptom management and palliative care.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. analyse the difficulties faced by persons when they encounter death, dying and bereavement;
  2. critique the philosophies which govern palliative care and the hospice movement as the means for improving care;
  3. develop a personal construct of spirituality and contrast this with the spiritual constructs of others;
  4. analyse the collaborative interdisciplinary team approach to palliative care;
  5. apply the principles of crisis intervention to prevent, identify and alleviate care giver stress and burnout;
  6. critique appropriate patient assessment tools for holistic assessment in palliative care;
  7. discuss the role of the multi disciplinary team in the provision of effective symptom control and prevention;
  8. analyse a range of innovative approaches to palliative care that enhance the quality of life of palliative care clients; and
  9. identify resources for all aspects of palliative care in a range of health care settings.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork involves a regional community palliative care service investigation and written report.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%)
Fieldwork report (20%)
Literature review (30%)
Contribution to computer conferencing activities (10%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Meredith McIntyre

Synopsis

This unit examines contemporary issues impacting on education for health care practitioners, within a context of continuous change. Students explore a range of theoretical underpinnings that impact upon the educational process in health care practice with emphasis placed on educational theorists. Students will apply theoretical learning to teaching practice through participation in practicum; or through their role as a teacher within their own clinical practices. This will include both classroom (small and large group) and clinical teaching experiences in a variety of settings. It will equip students with the knowledge and mastery of skills necessary to critique, understand and respond to the learning preferences and needs of those whose education they have responsibility for. It will prepare students with the skills and knowledge to critically evaluate and assess the outcomes of an educational intervention. It will offer students a theoretical underpinning for current modelling of professionalism, clinical competence and lifelong learning.

This unit is a compulsory core unit for the Master of Family Medicine (MFM) a core unit in the Education Stream for the Master of Nursing (MN) and an elective unit in the Master of Clinical Midwifery (MCM).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critique and reflect on the most appropriate and evidence based method(s) of assessment for a given learning experience, be able to justify their choice, and offer detailed explanations of the complexity of its implementation within a multicultural setting.
  2. Design and critique an appropriate evaluation strategy for a given learning experience, including an assessment of the outcome(s).
  3. Investigate and critically analyse recent ethical trends within their profession with particular reference to the teaching and assessment of clinical professionalism and competence.
  4. Demonstrate competence as a clinical teacher (including a self and peer critical evaluation of the teaching) and the competence to reflect on and constructively respond to the results of such evaluation.
  5. Design, critique and reflect on an appropriate tutor preparation to enable effective delivery of a given learning experience: teaching others to teach.
  6. Critically assess and evaluate recent trends within their profession with particular reference to inter professional education.

Assessment

Written assignment (critique) (2,500 words) (30%)
Practicum & practicum reflective report (60 minutes) (1,000 words) (20%)
Portfolio (4,000 words) (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Robyn Fairhall

Synopsis

This unit is directed at extending student's knowledge of pharmacology and explores principles covering medication management within advanced nursing practice. The first module seeks to extend students knowledge of fundamental pharmacological principles of medication management which can be adopted and utilized in the advanced practice setting. Students will use the foundational knowledge of pharmokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and therapeutics, in order to critically analyse how medications affect physiological, biochemical and pathophysiological processes. With a greater appreciation of the action of drugs on body processes, students will be able to determine which medications should be administered to particular patients in order to ensure therapeutic effects are optimized and adverse effects are minimized. Students will articulate the key pharmacological characteristics of drug classes, as well as derive an understanding of specific features of individual drugs.

The second module extends students' knowledge of social, political and ethical principles of medication management, and allows the student to explore how these principles are applied in the advanced practice setting. The concepts of pain management, adverse drug reactions and medication use across the lifespan will be considered. Students will individualise the use of the clinical decision making process as the framework for gathering and organizing medication information, planning, prescribing, administering, documenting and evaluation to suit their own practice needs. Students will extend their knowledge of the learning and teaching strategies for patient education and the government policies that are relevant to nurse prescribing. Commonwealth and State laws affecting the control of medication will also be applied to the advanced practice setting. Students will address the socio-cultural and ethical issues that affect the relationship between the nurse practitioner and patient, and will examine the style and required particulars for written prescriptions. Equipped with this knowledge, students will be expected to critically review the application of clinical pharmacology to their specific area of advanced practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe fundamental principles of pharmacology;
  2. Describe the processes involved in pharmacokinetics along with factors that influence these processes;
  3. Explain indications, actions, adverse reactions and contraindications for commonly prescribed medication;
  4. Demonstrate clinical decision making ability relating to pharmacology within own specific practice area;
  5. Provide appropriate education for clients based upon individual medication regimes;
  6. Describe medication regimes for discipline-specific clinical conditions in their area of practice;
  7. Critically analyse the implications of medication use across the lifespan;
  8. Describe legal, ethical and professional responsibilities associated with prescription and administration of medications in their jurisdiction;
  9. Critically analyse social and political factors that influence use of medications in their jurisdiction.

Assessment

Mid-semester on-line examination (10%)
Participation in online discussions (5%)
End of semester written examination (55%) (must pass exam to achieve a pass in the unit)
Portfolio activities (30%)

Workload requirements

3 hour tutorial per week (optional).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 1250, 3565 or 4513, cross-institutional or single subject enrolment.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Meredith McIntyre

Synopsis

Health professionals are employed in a wide variety of workplaces where they are often required to deliver education programs to a wide range of professional and client groups. In many of these workplaces, there is an expectation that health professionals will be able to develop education and training programs that are responsive to local needs. The aim of this unit is to assist the learner to develop skills in the area of education program development. This flexible unit will allow the learner to work through the process of program development. To achieve this the learner will identify a workplace learning need to be addressed, then develop goals and objectives and formulate an education program to address the identified need.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. discuss the theoretical underpinnings related to developing an education program;
  2. undertake a training needs analysis in their workplace;
  3. analyse the results and identify the learning need required;
  4. explain the principles of planning cost effective education programs;
  5. develop goals and objectives that will relate to identified learning needs;
  6. explore principles used in designing program content;
  7. design an education program related to the identified learning need; and
  8. develop a program evaluation tool using educationally sound principles.

Assessment

Education needs assessment (40%)
Essay (30%)
Portfolio of program (30%)

Workload requirements

24 hours per week, comprising guided readings, online and other activities and/or tutorials, including self directed learning. (Total 312 hours).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Virginia Plummer

Synopsis

This unit introduces nurses to the role they play in emergency preparedness and disaster management in local and international settings. Areas of focus include the role in planning, partnerships, disaster response, and delivery of services.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the essential elements of leadership and management for nursing in health services in emergency preparedness and disaster recovery;
  2. Identify resources and strategies to enhance the resilience of the nursing workforce in disaster and emergency settings;
  3. Identify strategies for developing the role/s of nurses from a range of clinical and nonclinical backgrounds, in these settings;
  4. Identify and contribute to directions for education in disaster and emergency nursing;
  5. Identify and contribute to directions for research in disaster and emergency nursing.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%)
Presentation (30%)
Online discussion (30%)

Workload requirements

24 hours per week including contact time (2 hour lecture, 2 hour tutorial/small group classes or team activities), site visits and/or fieldwork, and self-directed learning (reading, worksheets, assignments, database and web-based research, analysis of published articles and case studies, informal study groups and reflective activities); averaged over the 13 week semester - a total of 312 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Charanjit Singh

Synopsis

In this unit students will study a variety of psychological interventions and counselling. This will include analysis of the theoretical underpinnings and major concepts of each approach. The students will develop a greater self awareness. Students will be assisted in the development of their own unique approaches to psychological intervention with their clients.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse a variety of approaches to psychological interventions;
  2. Develop a greater awareness of self and the ways in which personal attributes affect interaction with clients and others;
  3. Demonstrate acquisition of communication skills required for effective psychotherapeutic interaction;
  4. Plan interventions and establish goals to meet the needs of the client;
  5. Practice the relevant skills for effective counselling in a variety of clinical settings;
  6. Discuss a range of contemporary issues in psychological interventions;
  7. Critically appraise the evidence available regarding the efficacy of the approaches to psychological interventions;
  8. Develop an understanding of cultural psychosocial aspects which influence the development of a therapeutic relationship and counselling role.

Assessment

Computer conferences (40%)
Written assignment (60%)
Clinical assessment (Hurdle) (Pass / Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Karen Harder

Synopsis

The nature of mental illness; the nursing process in mental health nursing; roles and functions of mental health nurses; context of care; mental health problems and disorders; therapeutic interventions in mental health care; ethical and legal issues; specialisation in mental health nursing.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Conduct comprehensive mental health nursing assessment including a risk assessment;
  2. Describe the commonly used diagnostic classification systems in psychiatry and mental health nursing;
  3. Promote consumer participation in all aspects of mental health care;
  4. Demonstrate advanced mental health nursing skills in planning, implementing and evaluating mental health nursing care for people with mental disorders;
  5. Describe the principles underlying contemporary therapeutic interventions for people with mental health disorders;
  6. Demonstrate skills and knowledge in the use of a range of contemporary physical therapies including psychopharmalogical preparations, electroconvulsive therapy, and milieu therapies (e.g. high dependency, seclusion, Snoezelen);
  7. Describe relevant legislation and policy impacting upon the professional practice of mental health nursing;
  8. Critically analyse ethical issues in nursing people with mental health disorders;
  9. Critically appraise research evidence applicable to mental health nursing practice;
  10. Ensure that mental health nursing practice is culturally appropriate.

Assessment

Written assignment (3,500 words) (40%)
Reflective postings (2 x 10% each) (20%)
Examination (3 hours) (40%)
Clinical skills assessment (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Beverley Copnell

Synopsis

The paediatric nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to assess and manage patients in a variety of settings. The unit enables the student to develop proficiency in the holistic management of sick children, beyond the beginning specialist level, and prepares students for leadership roles in their practice area.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to be able to:

  1. describe the aetiology, clinical manifestations and pathophysiology of a range of diseases/conditions observed in children;
  2. plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of paediatric patients;
  3. plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of children with complex health needs;
  4. critically analyse the clinical issues supporting and complicating advanced practice in paediatric nursing;
  5. analyse the collaborative interdisciplinary team approach to management of paediatric patients.

Assessment

Take home examination (30%)
Written assignment 1 (3,000 words) (30%)
Written assignment 2 (5,000 words) (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Thompson

Synopsis

This unit extends students' clinical assessment, diagnostic and pharmacologic knowledge and skills to enable them to plan and implement evidence-informed interventions. It includes prescribing of medications and referral to other health professionals. Use of technology in students' specific area of practice is emphasised. The unit promotes a holistic model of care that includes recognition of and respect for cultural identity and lifestyle choices. It also provides an examination of contemporary issues that impact on Nurse Practitioner practice and inform the scope of the NP role in specific practice areas.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate extended skills in diagnostic reasoning
  2. Synthesise and interpret findings from clinical assessment and diagnostic tests to plan and implement appropriate, evidence-based preventive and/or therapeutic interventions
  3. Analyse the specific health care needs of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples and incorporate their cultural beliefs and practices into all interactions and care planning
  4. Critically analyse the concept of cultural safety in relation to Nurse Practitioner practice
  5. Critically analyse the scope of Nurse Practitioner practice in a specific practice area
  6. Demonstrate understanding of the professional, legal and ethical responsibilities of advanced nursing practice
  7. Critically analyse clinical issues that support or complicate Nurse Practitioner practice
  8. Critically analyse the impact of social and cultural factors on the health of individuals and communities, and the implications for Nurse Practitioner practice.

Fieldwork

Students must be employed for at least 2 days per week in an appropriate clinical environment cognisant with course objectives and have support to undertake extended clinical practice.

Assessment

Clinical portfolio (including Semester 4 Summative Assessment) (Pass / Fail) (Hurdle)
Online discussion (20%)
Evidence based case study (3,000 words) (30%)
Written assignment (3,000 words) (30%)
Clinical decision making case study - oral presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Residential school 2 - 3 days during the semester, 25 hours per week online activities and self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4513.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Thompson

Synopsis

This unit integrates knowledge and skills acquired throughout the course to prepare students for transition to practice as a Nurse Practitioner. The unit promotes capability in the management of stable, unpredictable and complex patient conditions that is evidence-informed and carried out within a holistic model of care. Students will expand their knowledge of the use of technology in Nurse Practitioner practice, including information technology and information management. The unit focuses on the high level communication and leadership skills required in NP practice, with emphasis on national and global influences on the NP role.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate independent skills in diagnostic reasoning and planning, implementation and evaluation of evidence-informed integrated care
  2. Demonstrate a patient-centred approach to the planning, delivery and evaluation of health care
  3. Analyse the role of technology in supporting health care in a specific area of practice
  4. Critically analyse local, national and global issues that impact on Nurse Practitioner practice
  5. Critically analyse and implement communication strategies that promote positive multidisciplinary clinical partnerships
  6. Appraise measures to evaluate the quality of health care
  7. Critically appraise the impact of the theoretical concepts of leadership on quality patient outcomes
  8. Critically reflect on their personal and professional development in preparation for practice as a Nurse Practitioner.

Fieldwork

Students are required to be employed for at least 2 days per week in an appropriate clinical environment cognisant with course objectives and have support to undertake extended clinical practice.

Assessment

Clinical portfolio (Hurdle)
Objective structured clinical assessment (Oral) (3,000 words) (Hurdle)
Written assignment (4,000 - 5,000 words) (50%)
Presentation (2,000 words) (30%)
Reflective essay (1,500 words) (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Residential school 1 week, 22 hrs per week online activities and self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4513.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Munro

Synopsis

This unit focuses on key concepts such as models of mental health service delivery, consumer and carer participation and perspectives, and professional issues in mental health nursing. It provides an in-depth analysis of each major component of an integrated mental health service and also covers special populations and transcultural mental health issues.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the characteristics of an efficient and cost effective comprehensive mental health service;
  2. Critically analyse contemporary approaches to mental health service delivery;
  3. Discuss the importance of consumer and carer perspectives and participation in mental health service delivery;
  4. Describe the mental health nurse's scope of practice in a range of health care contexts;
  5. Demonstrate understanding of the needs of special populations including people from non-English speaking backgrounds, refugees, homeless people;
  6. Discuss the influence of culture, gender and coexisting conditions on the care of people with mental health problems and disorders;
  7. Act as an effective leader, health educator, resource person and catalyst for change to individuals, families, health professionals and the community.

Assessment

Written assignment (3,000 words) (40%)
Written assignment (3,000 words) (40%)
Online exercises (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Sue Aberdeen

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to prepare nurses to critique and improve their own, and their team's, support and care for older persons. It will equip the student to promote healthy ageing and to lead their team in responding to the needs of aged persons in whatever adult care context the nurse may choose to work. The impact of historical and current socio-political factors that influence the way in which we age and how we provide care will be analysed. The body of gerontic and geriatric knowledge will be studied in order to provide an evidence-based foundation for person-centred assessments, care provision and evaluations of care outcomes for older persons with multiple comorbidities.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the components of a comprehensive health assessment for the older person;
  2. Demonstrate a sound understanding of the effects of age-related changes on the structure and function of selected body systems and the implications for health assessment;
  3. Evaluate different biological and psychosocial perspectives on ageing;
  4. Analyse recent and current models of care for acute, rehabilitation, aged care and palliative care nursing that enhance the quality of life and quality of care of older clients;
  5. Discuss the palliative care needs and services for the older people in the context of their family, caregivers and home environment;
  6. Discuss the social construction of ageing, sexuality, spirituality, environments for living and the quality of life of older people and health care;
  7. Critically discuss the impact of sociocultural attitudes, demographic factors, political pressures and economic constraints on the older person and nursing practice, in local and international contexts;
  8. Explore the achievements in health and aged care policy and the social and economic progress that has influenced nurse practice and service delivery in aged care; and
  9. Critically reflect on current and future gerontological nursing practice and the role of the nurse in contemporary health care service delivery.

Assessment

Exam (40%)
2 x Written assignments (30% each)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Lee

Synopsis

This unit is designed to prepare students to practice at an advanced level within a broad range of clinical practice environments. This unit is offered in recognition that an experienced graduate registered nurse will be able to take a leadership role in promoting improvements to clinical, educational and administrative areas of nursing practice. This is a largely, self-directed unit that enables the student to identify learning needs and to meet those needs in a creative and imaginative way. The unit lends itself to the application of theory and research to specific interventions encompassed in the spectrum of models of care that support nursing practice. It enables the student to apply topics presented separately in the previous course units and to integrate previous knowledge and skills to support problem identification, specialty knowledge and skill development in areas such as but not confined to, decision-making and problem solving, in the context of advanced practice.

Outcomes

The overall objectives for this unit are broad because each student is expected to negotiate and set their own goals in consultation with their lecturer. In general, it is expected that on completion of this unit students will have gained clinical practice experience in:

  1. Formulating a principles-based nursing practice project in the area of clinical speciality;
  2. Using initiative and independent problem-solving learning skills;
  3. Utilizing interpersonal skills and available resources to implement a nursing practice project;
  4. Consideration of the unique cultural aspects of the context of practice;
  5. Producing a scholarly report on the project.

Assessment

Project proposal (25%)
Progress report (25%)
Final project report (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Postgraduate specialty study or foundation unit.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Beverley Copnell

Synopsis

This unit explores concepts intrinsic to the growing child and family within a framework of family centred care. The specific focus is on perspectives of physical, cognitive and social growth and development of the child set within the context of the evolving family unit. Family life, role relationships, parenting and other family issues are examined in relation to their influence on the development and health of the child and family members. Aspects of health crisis and the impact that this has on the growing child and family are considered.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Locate and critically evaluate appropriate data to support evidence-based family and child-centered nursing care;
  2. Discuss the various theories relating to the physical, psychological, emotional and social development of children from birth to adolescence;
  3. Critically analyse the implications of illness and hospitalisation for children at each stage of development;
  4. Synthesise information in order to identify and deliver nursing interventions to foster normal development (including referral to other members of the healthcare team as appropriate);
  5. Critically appraise family dynamics as they influence the health and well being of a child;
  6. Critically analyse the impact that a health crisis has on the child and family;
  7. Synthesis information in order to identify and deliver appropriate nursing interventions that support the child and family with a health crisis;
  8. Critically reflect on the practice of family-centered care.

Assessment

Formative:
At least 3 contributions to the Moodle discussion site during the semester (Hurdle)
Submission of plan for written assignment 1 (Hurdle)

Summative:
Written assignment 1 (4,000 words) (40%)
Written assignment 2 (4,000 words) (40%)
Reflective essay (2,000 words) (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Thompson

Synopsis

This unit will enable students to develop the assessment and diagnostic knowledge and skills required for practice as a Nurse Practitioner. The content focuses on the acquisition and synthesis of information from a variety of sources, including patients' histories, physical examination and diagnostic tests, to differentiate between normal and abnormal findings and identify differential diagnoses. Factors which impact on health assessment will be explored. Skill development will be supported through the provision of adequate and appropriate clinical practice in the context of the workplace setting and students will be expected to work closely with their clinical mentors to achieve this.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Perform advanced, comprehensive and holistic health assessment in an area of specialist practice
  2. Analyse the contribution of physical, emotional, psychological, social, and cultural factors to health assessment
  3. Analyse clinical assessment findings to make decisions about investigative options
  4. Interpret and analyse results from diagnostic tests in the context of the patient physical assessment
  5. Synthesise findings from assessment and diagnostic tests to formulate clinical impressions and identify differential diagnoses
  6. Analyse the role of technology in supporting diagnostic reasoning in the specific clinical context.

Fieldwork

Students must be employed in an advanced practice role and supported in extended clinical practice activities.

Assessment

Written assignment (3,000 words) (30%)
Clinical health assessment x 2 (each equivalent to 2,000 words) (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)

Workload requirements

Residential school 6 days during semester, 22 hrs per week online activities and self-directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4513. Master of Nursing students may enrol upon course coordinator approval.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Peninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Md. Nadim Rahman

Synopsis

The student will develop proficiency in health through the development of skills related to: assessment interviewing; physical appraisal; assessment data analysis; incorporating changes in health assessment related to the age of the client and cultural and ethnic variations; comprehensive, periodic and focused health assessments. All students are required to have clinical support for the duration of the course.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the differences between normal physiological aspects and pathological processes of common disease conditions in Australia.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the sequence of cellular events preceding cell death and cellular alterations.
  3. Accurately describe and interpret the aetiology, clinical manifestations and pathophysiology of a range of diseases/conditions observed in specialty practice in respiratory, cardiac, renal system and shock.
  4. Demonstrate cognitive, technical and creative skills to investigate, analyse and synthesise complex principles used to assess a patient, in all age groups, within a clinical setting.
  5. Accurately record an in-depth patient health history and assessment findings appropriate to the student's discipline.
  6. Incorporate, and reflect critically, age related differences, cultural, and ethnic variations relevant to the patient's health history.
  7. Demonstrate, evaluate, implement and analyse the prioritised nursing assessment of a complex patient and apply established theories to different bodies of knowledge or practice.

Assessment

Multiple choice, EMQ and short answer examination (2 hours) (60%)
Health Assessment Clinical Examination; Complex Health Assessment (3,000 words) (Pass / Fail)
Case study (2,000 words) (40%)

Students must achieve a pass grade on both the multiple choice / short answer examination and the Health Assessment Clinical Examination to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held oncampus.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Peninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Md. Nadim Rahman

Synopsis

The student will develop proficiency in health through the development of skills related to: assessment interviewing; physical appraisal; assessment data analysis; incorporating changes in health assessment related to the age of the client and cultural and ethnic variations; comprehensive, periodic and focused health assessments. This unit will enable the student to develop competency in neurology, GIT, paediatric, haematology, immunology and musculoskeletal system knowledge and physical assessment. All students are required to have clinical support for the duration of course.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the pathophysiological process behind clinical conditions in gastrointestinal, neurological, paediatric, haematology, immunology and musculoskeletal body systems and explain the rationale for the physical assessment findings;
  2. Perform and document a systematic physical health assessment utilising health assessment tools and techniques;
  3. Identify appropriate age specific, socio-culturally relevant, nursing interventions for emergency patients;
  4. Formulate clinical impressions based on an accurate analysis of health assessment data;
  5. Accurately record an in-depth patient health history and assessment findings appropriate to the student's discipline;
  6. Competently evaluate clinical problems and perform comprehensive health assessments in a selected area of health care;
  7. Demonstrate a holistic approach to nursing assessment in relation to the specific clinical presentations and history.

Fieldwork

Students must be working a minimum of 3 days/week in a clinical environment.

Assessment

Multiple choice, EMQ and short answer examination (2 hours) (60%)
Health Assessment Clinical Examination; Complex Health Assessment (Pass / Fail)
Case study (40%)

Students must achieve a pass grade on both the multiple choice/short answer examination and the Health Assessment Clinical Examination to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Suzanne Willey

Synopsis

This unit has been developed in partnership with The Victorian Foundation for Survivors of Torture and the State Wide Refugee Nurse Facilitator and sponsored by the Victorian Government. The unit will assist nurses to work with refugees within a social model of health to identify gaps in health services and advocate for refugees in the context of their community through an analysis of the socio-political aspects of the refugee context and an indepth understanding of the effects of torture and trauma on the health and health care of refugees. The unit includes skill development in refugee health assessment and responding to issues of health literacy, organization and community capacity building and evaluation in refugee health and wellbeing.

Outcomes

This unit will provide opportunities for students to:

  1. Discuss the global and socio-political aspects of refugee and asylum seeker journeys and settlement
  2. Examine primary health care and service co-ordination practices within the refugee context
  3. Analyse and understand the impact of torture and trauma on refugee populations and the Australian health care system
  4. Analyse approaches to cultural responsiveness, health literacy and consumer participation within the refugee context
  5. Identify nursing skills required for refugee health assessment and care within the individual and family context
  6. Recognise and develop professional boundaries and skills to assist the nurse/midwife when working with refugees.

Assessment

Essay (3,000 - 4,000 words) (30%)
Case study presentation (this will be an online presentation for offcampus students and a face to face discussion for oncampus students during the second workshop) (30 minutes) (20%)
Fieldwork project (3,000 - 4,000 words) (50%)

Workload requirements

2 x full day workshops and 6 hours per week online activities.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Suzanne Willey

Synopsis

This unit identifies the World Health Organisations role in advocating and supporting the global health agenda of health for all. Primary health care as a philosophy and a model of health service provision are described. Health education and promotion as strategies for achieving health for all are examined. Nurses, midwives and doctors are encouraged to develop health education and health promotion skills that can be utilised in our contexts of practice to promote population wellbeing.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Expand on concepts from previous studies of health and nursing to be able to undertake leadership roles in population health, health promotion and education;
  2. Identify, analyse and evaluate national and international frameworks for primary health care and health promotion initiatives with special references to the work of the World Health Organisation (WHO);
  3. Identify major community health needs and issues of clinical relevance, with particular focus on vulnerable communities;
  4. Analyse various methods of population-based approaches to data collection;
  5. Utilise national and international collaborative health practice models in designing population-based approaches to primary health care;
  6. Apply primary health care frameworks and health promotion principles such as equity, community engagement and partnerships to undertake a health needs assessment.

Assessment

Assignment (70%)
Seminar presentation or alternative written work (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 0099, 1250, M6001.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Simon Edgecombe

Synopsis

The critical care nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage patients in the critical care environment. This unit focuses on enabling the student to develop proficiency in the management of critically ill patients with respiratory, cardiac and renal conditions and shock. Mechanical ventilation and advanced haemodynamic monitoring will be evaluated. The student will develop theoretical and clinical proficiency in the therapeutic interventions essential to care for these patients within the critical care environment, as well as their family and significant others.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Plan, implement and evaluate the appropriate, age specific, culturally relevant, evidence based, therapeutic interventions related to the management of critically ill patients with cardiac, respiratory, renal disease and shock
  2. Demonstrate and evaluate the effectiveness of individual and team approaches to the management of the rapidly deteriorating client/patient in the critical care environment
  3. Discuss and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic interventions related to the management of clients/patients requiring mechanical ventilation and invasive haemodynamic monitoring
  4. Critically examine the nursing research and literature related to the care of patients with cardiac, respiratory and renal illness and shock
  5. Demonstrate and critically discuss the socio-cultural, legal and ethical issues related to the nursing management of the critically ill patient
  6. Identify the needs of the patient's family and significant others in the critical care area and plan appropriate nursing interventions to address these needs.

Fieldwork

Students must be working a minimum of 3 days/week in a critical care unit.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%)
Examination (60%) (Hurdle)
Clinical hurdles (Pass / Fail)
Clinical Performance Appraisal (Pass / Fail)

Students must achieve a pass in the final examination, Clinical Performance Appraisal and Clinical Hurdles to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Nursing, Nursing and midwifery

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Simon Edgecombe

Synopsis

The advanced critical care nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess manage and evaluate patient care in the critical care environment. This advanced critical care unit focuses on enabling the student to develop proficiency in the management of critically ill patients with neurological, endocrine and hepatic illness, surgical and interventional procedures, trauma and special population groups. Advanced mechanical ventilation and advanced cardiac care will be also evaluated. The student will develop skills to provide an advanced level of care to critical care patients and their significant others and family members across age, socio-cultural and economic groups.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Plan, implement and evaluate the appropriate, age specific, culturally relevant, evidence based, therapeutic interventions related to the management of critically ill patients with neurological, endocrine and hepatic illness, surgical and interventional procedures, trauma and special population groups
  2. Demonstrate the competent implementation of related advanced, technologically based, critical care nursing skills
  3. Discuss and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic interventions related to the management of clients/patients requiring advanced and complex interventions in the critical care environment
  4. Critically evaluate the socio-cultural, legal and ethical issues related to the nursing management of the critically ill patient
  5. Critically examine the nursing research and literature related to the care of patients with neurological, endocrine and hepatic illness, surgical and interventional procedures, trauma and special population groups
  6. Demonstrate and discuss the application of effective interpersonal skills in the management of patients, families, and significant others who are experiencing grief, loss, or what they perceive to be a crisis situation.

Fieldwork

Students must be working a minimum of 3 days/week in a critical care unit.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%)
Exam (Hurdle) (60%)
Clinical hurdles (Pass / Fail)
Clinical performance appraisal (Pass / Fail)

Students must achieve a pass in the final examination, Clinical performance appraisal and Clinical hurdles to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including self-directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Nursing, Nursing and midwifery

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Kelli Innes

Synopsis

The emergency nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage patients in the emergency department. This unit will enable the student to develop proficiency in the emergency management of respiratory, cardiac, renal and mental health emergencies, and shock. The principles of ventilation will be examined. The unit also encompasses the development of skills which will enable the student to provide support for patient's families and significant others in the emergency department.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe, implement and evaluate assessment of the emergency patient through the primary and secondary survey approach.
  2. Plan and implement appropriate, age specific, culturally relevant, therapeutic interventions for clients/patients experiencing cardiovascular and respiratory health emergency.
  3. Demonstrate effective interpersonal skills in caring for the emergency patient, their families and members of the multi-disciplinary team.
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of the principles used to manage a medical emergency crisis in all age groups within an emergency department.
  5. Identify the needs of the patient's family and significant others in the emergency department and plan appropriate nursing interventions to address these needs.
  6. Explore and evaluate the clinical application of nursing research and theoretical literature to selected problems related to the above groups in emergency care.
  7. Demonstrate an understanding of Australasian Triage Scale.

Fieldwork

Students must be working in an emergency department a minimum of 3 days/week.

Assessment

Clinical performance appraisal (Pass / Fail)
Examination (60%) (Hurdle)
Assignment (40%)
Clinical hurdles (Pass / Fail)

Students must achieve a pass in the final examination, Clinical performance appraisal and Clinical hurdles to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Julia Morphet

Synopsis

The emergency nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage patients in the emergency department. This advanced emergency nursing unit will enable the student to develop proficiency in the emergency management of abdominal, neurological and obstetric emergencies, trauma and burns. The unit will prepare the student to provide an advanced level of care to emergency patients across age groups, and from all socio/ cultural and economic groups.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the disease process behind a medical crisis and explain the rationale for the nursing care provided
  2. Discuss and demonstrate planning and management of the trauma patient based on primary and secondary survey assessment for a range of traumatic injuries
  3. Demonstrate and evaluate independent triage practice based on the Australasian Triage Scale
  4. Identify and evaluate appropriate age specific, socio-culturally relevant, nursing interventions for patients in the above groups
  5. Identify and discuss the application of interpersonal skills in the management of patients, families and significant others who are experiencing grief, loss or what they perceive to be a crisis
  6. Critically evaluate and apply nursing research to selected emergency patient care
  7. Critically evaluate the socio-cultural, legal and ethical issues related to the nursing management of the critically ill client/patient.

Fieldwork

Students must be working in an emergency department a minimum of 3 days/week.

Assessment

Clinical performance appraisal (Pass / Fail)
Examination (60%) (Hurdle)
Assignment (40%)
Clinical hurdles (Pass / Fail)

Students must achieve a pass in the final examination, Clinical performance appraisal and Clinical hurdles to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including self-directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Nursing, Nursing and midwifery

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Marie-Claire Seeley

Synopsis

The advance practice general nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage clients/patients in a hospital environment. This unit will enable students to develop proficiency in the holistic management of patients with cardiac, respiratory and renal dysfunction, and shock. The unit also encompasses the development of skills which will enable the student to provide support for patients' families and significant others in the hospital environment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Locate and critically appraise data to support advanced medical/surgical nursing practice.
  2. Synthesise information in order to plan and implement appropriate, evidence-based, person-centred therapeutic interventions for medical and surgical patients experiencing cardiovascular, respiratory and renal dysfunction, and shock.
  3. Synthesise information in order to plan and implement appropriate, evidence-based, person-centred therapeutic interventions for medical and surgical patients who experience psychological and behavioural management dysfunction.
  4. Plan and implement therapeutic interventions which are age specific and culturally relevant.
  5. Demonstrate effective interpersonal skills in caring for patients and their families and working with members of the multi-disciplinary team.
  6. Identify the needs of the patient's family and significant others and plan appropriate nursing interventions to address these needs.

Fieldwork

Students must be employed in an approved medical or surgical unit for a minimum of 3 days per week.

Assessment

Clinical assessment tool (Pass / Fail)
Examination (40%) (Hurdle)
Case presentation - complex patient discharge management (3,000 words) (30%)
Written assignment (3,000 words) (30%)

Students must achieve a pass in the final examination and Clinical assessment to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including self-directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Marie-Claire Seeley

Synopsis

The advance practice general nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage clients/patients in a hospital environment. This unit will enable students to develop proficiency in the holistic management of patients with gastrointestinal, neurological, endocrine and musculoskeletal dysfunction, and trauma. The unit will prepare the student to provide an advanced level of care to medical and surgical patients across age groups, and from all socio-cultural and economic groups.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Locate and critically appraise data to support advanced medical/surgical nursing practice.
  2. Synthesise information in order to plan and implement appropriate, evidence-based, person-centred therapeutic interventions for medical and surgical patients experiencing gastrointestinal, neurological, endocrine and musculoskeletal dysfunction, and trauma.
  3. Critically evaluate the socio-cultural, legal and ethical issues related to the nursing management of medical and surgical patients.
  4. Analyse the application of interpersonal skills in the management of patients, families and significant others who are experiencing grief, loss or what they perceive to be a crisis.
  5. Critically analyse the clinical, situational and professional issues supporting and complicating advanced practice in medical and surgical nursing.
  6. Critically evaluate approaches to patient safety and clinical risk management.

Fieldwork

Students must be employed in an approved medical or surgical unit for a minimum of 3 days per week

Assessment

Clinical assessment (Pass / Fail)
Examination (40%) (Hurdle)
Written assignment (3,000 words) (30%)
Case presentation on complex patient safety issue/clinical risk (3,000 words) (30%)

Students must achieve a pass in the final examination and Clinical Assessment to achieve a pass in the unit.

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including self-directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Amanda Anderson

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the profession of dietetics, commencing their pathway to becoming experts in food (knowledge and application) and culturally competent, self-aware healthcare professionals. This unit is tailored for the non cognate path for Masters of Dietetics (96CP) under the course architecture project. Students coming through the cognate path will receive credit for this subject and be eligible to proceed into the 72 CP Masters program.

The unit initially focuses on health behaviours, assessment of nutritional status, growth and development, physical activity and nutritional requirements for groups across the lifespan from infancy to old age. The unit will incorporate elements of professional development, cultural competency about food and eating patterns, and content around the Australian food supply system including food regulation and law.

Concepts of health education and promotion will enhance students' knowledge and ability to communicate nutrition messages effectively to groups and individuals as well as teamwork and reflection. Students will be introduced to reflective practice, commencing a professional portfolio and will be engaged via adult learning teaching and learning principles as they begin to develop their professional identity.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Investigate foods, food ingredients and varied cultural eating patterns found in Australia.
  2. Evaluate varying nutritional needs, growth and development and human behaviour across the lifespan consistent with best available evidence.
  3. Discuss physical activity guidelines, evidence and recommendations across the lifespan.
  4. Explore psychological, cultural, personal, economic, environmental and social factors and their influence on health and eating behaviours.
  5. Relate the theoretical basis of health education and health promotion to planning, implementing and evaluating a creative group education session designed to support behaviour change.
  6. Evaluate different methods for the collection of dietary intake data from individuals and populations.
  7. Integrate and apply the knowledge and technical skills required to assess nutritional status.
  8. Critically evaluate regulations relating to food labelling, food composition and food-related claims in Australia.
  9. Describe the process of HACCP (Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points) in food production and supply and design a HACCP plan.
  10. Extend communication skills relevant to the professional context in a range of written and oral approaches.
  11. Practice professional attitudes, skills and behaviours including critical reflection and team work required for healthcare practice.
  12. Evaluate practice of self and peers.

Assessment

1. Professional portfolio (50%)
Dietary intake assignment (1,500 words)
Older adult interview and reflection (1,000 words)
Food culture report and reflection (1,500 words)
Nutritional assessment task (1,000 words)
Food law task (1,000 words)

2. Group education assignment (20%)
Education plan (Formative)
Group oral presentation (40 minutes)
Peer review

3. Final exam (30%) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

On Campus: This unit will run over one semester with an average of 24 hours per week allocated to both contact and private study with the majority of time dedicated to contact hours. For example:

  • 8 hours of lectures and tutorials
  • 4-8 hours of private reading/self-study
  • 4-8 hours preparation for and contribution to tutorials.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Prohibitions


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Evelyn Volders

Synopsis

This unit uses chronic disease as the foundations and basis for dietetic students to develop their core dietetic practice assessment, counselling and management skills. There is an emphasis on person centred care and simulation provides a key platform for learning in this unit. A formative Objective Structured Clinical Examination (OSCE) sits within this unit to assist students' readiness for placement. Students are introduced to the healthcare system and a range of health care settings via an introductory clinical placement. This aims to commence the application of the nutrition care process, the use of food as a therapeutic tool, clinical reasoning, reflection and advanced communication and interpersonal skills required for dietetic practice. Attendance at this placement is compulsory. This unit supports students' progression towards entry level competencies in individual case management in the healthcare setting. Placement may take place outside of regular semester times. Students must have valid police check, WWC check and immunisation certificates in order to participate in clinical placements

The key themes explored in this unit are Theme 1: Personal Development and Professional Practice, Theme 3: Fundamentals of Health and Disease, Theme 4: Food from Science to Systems coupled with partial integration of content and application from Theme 2: Determinants and Influences on Population Health and Nutrition.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply and integrate knowledge of chronic disease into nutrition assessment and management plans using case based learning, simulation and placement experience in the healthcare environment.
  2. Employ core dietetic practice skills - including interpretation of data, collection and analysis of dietary data, nutrition assessment, communication and intervention strategies to formulate and evaluate the elements of effective client centred nutrition care planning and delivery.
  3. Apply knowledge and experience in a healthcare setting to begin practicing safely and professionally both autonomously and as part of the health care team.
  4. Integrate a comprehensive knowledge of food diversity and food composition into dietetic practice.
  5. Incorporate nutrition counselling theory and a range of communication strategies in developing practical, relevant and targeted nutrition interventions for various audiences.
  6. Utilise reflection, professional and personal communication and teamwork skills to assist in critical thinking and problem solving skills.

Fieldwork

Placement: 10 days.

Assessment

Exam (3 hours) (30%) (Hurdle)
OSCE (25%) (Hurdle with guided reflection)
Self-developed clinical resource (2,000 words) (15%)
2 x Case reports (750 words each) (20%)
Reflections: critical incident (1,000 words) (10%)
Placement including professional behaviour appraisal form (Pass / Fail) (Ungraded)

Hurdle: At least 80% attendance at all learning and teaching sessions.

Workload requirements

3 days (x 6 hours per day ) over 10 weeks - a combination of lectures, workshops, practical activities and simulated learning experiences. Students will also be expected to undertake self-directed study related to the unit content and complete assessment tasks as defined.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

NUT5002. Must be enrolled in course M6002.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Claire Palermo

Synopsis

This unit is predominantly a fieldwork experience that will challenge students to integrate their academic training and to synthesise knowledge into a practical public health nutrition project based in the community setting. The unit requires students to manage a project that addresses a public health nutrition issue. Students will participate in program planning within a work environment and provide tangible benefit to their participating organisation. Students will be responsible for designing a project, collection and analysis of data and synthesis of findings into a report. Principles of information evaluation, workload management, communication, teamwork and responsibility for project management will also be developed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply the social, environmental, economic and political determinants of nutrition status to a priority public health nutrition area.
  2. Plan, implement and evaluate systems based, population health approaches and solutions to priority nutrition issues.
  3. Apply the research process using appropriate methods of collection and analysis for both qualitative and quantitative data.
  4. Contribute to an evidence-based, population approach to improve population nutrition health in a community setting.
  5. Advocate for policy change to benefit health and nutrition outcomes for populations.
  6. Employ critical and scientific writing and communication skills to document and report findings of project in professional and scientific fora.
  7. Practice professional leadership to promote the role of nutrition.
  8. Establish effective working partnerships, networks, collaborations with a range of team members and stakeholders.
  9. Adopt a questioning and critical approach in all aspects of practice and evaluate practice on an on-going basis.

Fieldwork

30-38 hours per week for 7 weeks plus an additional 2 days site/project orientation.

Assessment

Project proposal (Group) (4,000 words) (20%)
Project report (Group) (6,000 - 10,000 words) (40%)
Project oral presentation (Group) (10 minutes) (10%)
Standardised oral exam (15 minutes) (30%) (Hurdle)
Peer learning and review (Ungraded) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

300 hours practical placement 7 weeks equivalent.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6002.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Evelyn Volders

Synopsis

This unit uses a range of clinical conditions and diseases as the foundation and basis for dietetic students to further develop their core dietetic practice skills and develop skills in dietetic education and case management in the academic setting in preparation for placement. There is an emphasis and focus on person centred care and using simulation and case based learning to provide a key platform for learning in this unit. Preparing students for individual case management and clinical placement is a key focus of this unit. Broader issues regarding healthcare systems and healthcare provision, management, ethics in healthcare and quality improvement are covered in this unit. Students' professional competencies are further developed and this unit supports fulfilment of prescribed competencies as outlined by the Dietitians Association of Australia.

The key themes explored in this unit are; Theme 1: Personal Development and Professional Practice and Theme 3: Fundamentals of Health and Disease, coupled with partial integration of content and application from Theme 4: Food from Science to Systems.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Evaluate the role of diet in the aetiology, prevention, and management of a range of clinical conditions and diseases in preparation for clinical case management
  2. Integrate knowledge of science and disease into nutrition assessment and management of clinical cases including consideration of broader issues regarding healthcare systems and provision, management, ethics and quality improvement
  3. Demonstrate core skills in the clinical dietetic process to formulate effective case management plans including prioritising care and discharge planning
  4. Integrate personal, social, clinical, cultural, physiological, ethical, environmental and economic factors into clinical reasoning and decision making in case management
  5. Apply an evidence based approach to clinical case management
  6. Identify and critically review evidence in clinical dietetics communicating practice applications
  7. Incorporate theories of behaviour change and learning theory in counselling and education skills to support effective dietetic case management
  8. Communicate appropriately and broadly both written and orally
  9. Critically reflect on practice extending self-awareness, insight and cultural competency linking to professionalism.

Assessment

MCQ/EMQ Mid semester exam (1 hour) and final exam (3 hours) (50%)
Case based workbook (Individual) (6,000 words) (30%)
Evidence based education resource (2 x double sided A4 equivalents) (10%)
Self-developed placement handbook (10%)
Professional behaviour appraisal form (Ungraded) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

This unit will run predominantly over Weeks 1-8 of semester with an average of 24 hours per week allocated including contact and private study hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6002.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Evelyn Volders

Synopsis

This unit is focussed on extending students' food composition, food therapeutic and food systems knowledge to support dietetic practice with integration and application in the practical and placement setting. There is extension of students' research and problem solving skills in managing placement based food service challenges. Students' personal and professional competencies are further developed. This unit supports fulfilment of prescribed competencies as outlined by the Dietitians Association of Australia. The teaching and learning strategies will encompass lectures, group teaching, tutorials, practical sessions, self-directed learning and a placement based project. Placement may take place outside of regular semester times. Students must have valid police check, WWC check and immunisation certificates in order to participate in clinical placements

The key themes explored in this unit are Theme 4: Food from Science to Systems and Theme 3: Fundamentals of Health and Disease, coupled with partial integration of content and application from Theme 1: Personal Development and Professional Practice and Theme 2: Determinants and Influences on Population Health and Nutrition.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Integrate food composition and practical food knowledge to a range of therapeutic applications to support dietetic practice.
  2. Compare, contrast and evaluate food service systems across healthcare settings including key regulatory and accreditation systems relevant to food service management.
  3. Demonstrate technical skills in analysis and evaluation of a food service system.
  4. Formulate and communicate strategies to provide safe and nutritious food in food service settings.
  5. Implement, evaluate and disseminate results of activities that support delivery of quality nutrition and food standards within a food service.
  6. Apply research practice skills and innovative problem solving to food service management challenges.
  7. Apply the principles of management in food service including organisational management, human resource management and production management.
  8. Utilise reflection, professional and personal communication and teamwork skills.

Fieldwork

Students will be allocated placement sites to conduct a food service project for 20 days. This placement will be arranged by the University however students will be responsible for travel and accommodation costs if required.

Assessment

Project report (Group) (3,000 words) (30%)
Oral presentation (Group) (20 minutes) (10%)
Food therapeutic manual (2,000 words) (20%)
Oral presentation (15 minutes) (10%)
Menu analysis executive report (2,000 words) (20%)
Placement portfolio including guided reflection (1,500 words) (10%)
Professional behaviour appraisal form (Ungraded) (Hurdle)
Competency assessment (Ungraded) (Pass / Fail)

Workload requirements

There is an average of 12 hours per week allocated including contact and private study hours during the theory component. The placement is 20 days at 8 hours per day, thus averaged over a semester contributes an additional 12 hours per week. There is no exam for this unit. The placement in a food service setting may need to be outside of regular university semester times.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

NUT5003. Must be enrolled in course M6002.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Evelyn Volders

Synopsis

This unit is predominantly a placement based unit to support students' progression and fulfilment of entry level competencies in individual case management in a healthcare setting. Placement may take place outside of regular semester times. Students must have a valid police check, WWC check and immunisation certificates in order to participate in clinical placements

The key themes explored in this unit are Theme 3: Fundamentals of Health and Disease, Theme 1: Personal Development and Professional Practice and Theme 4: Food from Science to Systems as students' progress and integrate their dietetic practice skills and competencies working in the healthcare environment. There is partial integration of content and application from Theme 2: Determinants and Influences on Population Health and Nutrition.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply specialised knowledge of science, nutrition, diet and disease into assessment, education, and management of clinical cases in a healthcare environment.
  2. Integrate personal, social, clinical, cultural, dietary, economic, environmental, ethical, medical and physiological factors into clinical reasoning and decision making in client centred case management in the healthcare environment.
  3. Achieve entry-level competencies to support individual case management across a range of clients.
  4. Apply an evidence based approach to support clinical case management.
  5. Integrate knowledge of food service systems and processes into case management.
  6. Exhibit excellent oral and written communication skills in all professional interactions with peers, colleagues, clients and other stakeholders in the healthcare and academic environment.
  7. Work effectively as a member of the dietetic and broader healthcare team to demonstrate mastery of dietetic practice.
  8. Practice safely, effectively and professionally.
  9. Reflect critically on practice extending self-awareness, insight and cultural competency.

Fieldwork

Each student will be allocated to a healthcare site of a placement partner of Monash University and the Department of Nutrition and Dietetics for a total of 36 placement days. University staff are involved in final placement assessment and signing off of entry level competency for the profession for the relevant units.

Assessment

Placement portfolio (Pass / Fail)
Case study (Pass / Fail)
Evidence of interprofessional learning (Ungraded)
Critical incident reflection and action plan (Ungraded)
Attendance (Ungraded) (Hurdle)
Professional behaviour appraisal form (Ungraded) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Students will spend the majority of time for this unit allocated to a healthcare setting (8 Weeks of either 4 or 5 days per week - a total of 36 days). Students will also be expected to attend tutorials and presentations in the academic setting (scheduled around placement commitments) with the remaining time allocated for private study. Students are expected to attend placement for the equivalent of full time hours during their scheduled placement weeks. It is also expected that students undertake private study outside of placement hours. Placements may extend into non standard university semester time.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6002.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Evelyn Volders

Synopsis

This unit fosters student's problem solving skills. It aims to extend students' research and dietetics knowledge and skills across a range of practice contexts to solve strategic and priority dietetics practice problems and scenarios in preparation to enter the workforce. This unit prepares students to enter the profession through consolidating professional practice skills and integrating learning across typical work contexts of practice of a dietitian.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically review nutrition and dietetic practice, identifying gaps in knowledge and apply valid and relevant conclusions and recommendations for practice improvement.
  2. Utilise research, leadership, communication (including negotiation, advocacy and conflict resolution) and management principles and skills in approaching solutions to practice problems.
  3. Work effectively as a member of a team creating innovative solutions to nutrition and dietetics practice problems.
  4. Apply the principles of human resource management, budgeting and risk management to project management and research.
  5. Synthesise and analyse information/data collected from practice and communicate scientifically.
  6. Plan and evaluate own personal and professional development in preparation for entry into the profession.
  7. Synthesise key learning from the degree as an entry level Dietitian and articulate areas of strength and areas for development post-graduation.

Assessment

Scientific paper (Individual) (Quantitative research project: 4, 000 words) (Qualitative research project: 5,000 words) (40%) (Hurdle)
Peer review (1,000 words) (10%)
Small grant proposal (2,000 words) (20%)
Teamwork assignment: Oral presentation (20 minutes) (5%) and report (2,500 words) (25%)
Attendance and participation (At least 85%) (Hurdle)
Professional behaviour appraisal form (Ungraded) (Hurdle)
Final competencies sign off (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

This 12 credit point unit requires an equivalent of 24 hours per week of study including contact and private study hours. This unit will be front loaded at the beginning of the semester and towards the end of semester Week 10-12 with an intensive teaching block). The remaining time during semester is allocated for self directed learning and private study to progress learning in the unit during the clinical placement. A significant amount of learning is self directed and autonomous in this unit.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6002.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 3 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the profession of occupational therapy and key knowledge, skills and attitudes that are essential for professional practice. Theoretical foundations of occupational therapy will include: theoretical concepts and models underpinning health and occupational therapy practice; principles and mechanisms underlying the relationship between the person, their environment and occupations, and how this relates to human health and wellbeing, and the occupational therapist within the interdisciplinary team. Legal, cultural and ethical issues relevant to professional practice will be explored. Students will learn beginning communication and interviewing skills together with other pre-clinical skills, such as safe practice. Students will develop beginning skills in occupational therapy problem solving and clinical reasoning processes. Case scenarios will be used throughout. Students will undertake simulated and practice based learning throughout the semester 2 days per week.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the historical origins of occupation as therapy;
  2. Explain the role of an occupational therapist and how it is similar and different from other health professionals within an interdisciplinary teams;
  3. Describe underpinning principles of occupational therapy practice including what it means to be client-centred and clinical reasoning;
  4. Describe key features of occupational therapy models of practice based on relationships between person, environment and occupation;
  5. Apply skills of self critique and self reflection to group learning tasks;
  6. Understand concepts related to disability and describe challenges and barriers likely to confront a person with a disability and how these affect participation in the community;
  7. Define, compare and contrast biomedical and ecological models of health, including the World Health Organisation International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF) framework, and describe the value of these models in the health care settings;
  8. Identify the behavioural, socio-cultural, environmental, economic and political determinants of health and describe how these may affect care provision in health care settings;
  9. Identify the characteristics that distinguish ideal professional behaviours;
  10. Describe ethical and legal issues pertinent to a practicing occupational therapist;
  11. Examine safety issues in the workplace and outline standard emergency and infection control procedures;
  12. Describe different methods of recording and reporting medical information and the role of professional records for communication;
  13. Demonstrate effective communication and interview skills for practice and professional behaviours;
  14. Describe and apply the clinical reasoning process to the occupational therapy process in a simulated and practice situation;
  15. Identify how key theoretical models of human occupation relate to client-centred occupational therapy practice;
  16. Develop a beginning competency in client handling skills and basic skills in assistive technology equipment prescription and use;
  17. Locate, retrieve and use resources that inform understanding about health and occupational issues.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork placement: 2 days per week.

Assessment

2 x class presentations (10 minutes each) (5%)
Fieldwork reflective journal (1,000 words) (5%)
Comparison of two models (2,000 words) (20%)
Peer reviewer of comparison of two models (500 words) (5%)
Written examination (2 hours) (30%)
Triple jump (1.5 hours) (25%)
Completion of a disability experience
i) Record of barriers and
ii) Reflective journal summary (1,000 words using template provided) (10%)

Hurdle:
Attendance at least 80% of the scenario-based tutorials, practical skills sessions and seminars.
Successful completion of simulated and other practice sessions including (i) timesheet and (ii) reflective journal including values exchange exercises.

Workload requirements

10 hours on-campus per week, 2 days fieldwork per week, and 6 hours online lecture material.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4515.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the relationship between occupation health and well-being that supports occupational therapy practice from a lifespan perspective, and will explore experiences of engaging in occupation from psychological and occupational processes inherent in development. It will examine the progressive cognitive, behavioural, emotional, psychosocial and occupational changes occurring with age and when people's occupations are disrupted through disability, illness or occupational deprivation. Students will engage in experiential activities, self-reflection and interactive teaching and experiential learning and teaching to develop skills in occupational analysis, critical appraisal of literature and research, teamwork, client centered practice and culturally sensitive intentional communication. Case scenarios will be used throughout and students will undertake practice- based learning throughout the semester.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe and explain classifications of human occupation and human use of time;
  2. Describe further how the interaction of person-environment-occupation relates to peoples' health and wellbeing;
  3. Apply skills of self critique and self reflection to group learning tasks;
  4. Articulate and contrast contemporary developmental lifespan concepts, theories and research;
  5. Identify and discuss the physical, cognitive, emotional, behavioural, social and occupational aspects inherent in development across the lifespan, as well as some of the key inherent and external influences on development;
  6. Explain challenges common to adolescence and other lifespan transition points that may impact on occupational functioning and psychosocial wellbeing;
  7. Identify and discuss the cognitive and emotional changes that can occur in early and middle adulthood and consider how these impact on occupational functioning and psychosocial wellbeing;
  8. Identify and discuss the effects of physiological change and life experience on older adults' cognitive, emotional and occupational functioning and psychosocial wellbeing;
  9. Describe and critique literature related to the physical, social, cultural, economic, political and institutional environments of individuals and groups and comment on the validity of this information for occupation-based practices;
  10. Observe, describe and analyse typical childhood occupations in relationship to developmental theories;
  11. Demonstrate effective (verbal, non-verbal and written) communication and interview skills for practice and professional behaviours;
  12. Describe and apply the clinical reasoning process to the occupational therapy process in a practice situation;
  13. Identify how key theoretical models of human occupation relate to client-centred occupational therapy practice;
  14. Identify data collection methods, collect and analyse data on the occupational performance of self and others;
  15. Locate, retrieve, analyse and critique resources that inform understanding about health and key occupational issues and concepts for practice;
  16. Identify and describe types of research frameworks and approaches to data analysis applied in contemporary developmental lifespan research.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork placement: up to 14 hours per week.

Assessment

In class presentations (3 x 10 minutes) (5%)
Essay on the relationship between development, and functioning at specific life stages (1,500 words) (15%)
Report from observation of a child (1,000 words) (10%)
Report on a data set that examines the relationship between age and psychosocial functioning and wellbeing (1,500 words) (15%)
Written examination (2 hours) (30%)
Triple Jump Part 1 (written exam) and Part 2 (oral exam) (1.5 hours) (20%)
Oral peer examiner (10 minutes) (5%)

Hurdle:
Attendance at least 100% of the scenario-based tutorials, practical skills sessions and seminars including class data collection exercises, unless a medical certificate is provided.
Self evaluation and reflective group participation in scenario-based tutorials including class data collection exercise.
Successful completion of fieldwork including attendance at fieldwork briefing; submission of (i) a completed and signed Student Placement Evaluation Form - Revised (SPEF-R) (ii) signed timesheet and (iii) Student Review of Placement form; and (iv) reflective journal. Students who fail the fieldwork component of the unit will be required to repeat the unit. A maximum of one repeat placement will be provided.

Workload requirements

9 weeks of academic/fieldwork (accelerated program). PBL tutorials (5 hours per week on campus), lectures (4-6 hours per week on-line), practicals (4-6 hours per week on campus), fieldwork placement weeks 1-9 (up to 14 hours per week).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4515.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 1 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

This unit introduces the mechanisms and consequences of problems related to mental, sensory, cardiovascular, respiratory, neurological and biomechanical capacities that underpin occupational engagement and occupational performance. Students integrate this knowledge into OT and related theories/models of practice. They develop clinical questions, and acquire knowledge and skills from the process of describing and evaluating occupational performance, and critiquing assessment tools for evaluating occupational engagement/performance. Students will explore different practice contexts in which participation in occupation takes place. Case scenarios will be used throughout and students will undertake practice-based learning for 2 days per week throughout the term (135 hours).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate and apply skills in self reflection, critical appraisal, critical reasoning and critical thinking skills to case-based learning and to fieldwork practice, and behave in a manner appropriate for professional practice in both the academic and clinical environment, including interacting respectfully with different members of the health care team, consumers and carers.
  2. Recognize the challenges and rights of consumers and carers, and integrate their lived experience of health methods into service planning and delivery by acknowledging their expertise.
  3. Describe the importance of multicultural diversity and cultural relationships to professional practice.
  4. Explain the mechanisms and consequences of problems related to mental/psychosocial, physical and social capacities of humans, across the lifespan and apply knowledge of body functions, body structures and related clinical conditions to occupational performance challenges for clients of occupational therapy.
  5. Describe and apply key theoretical models of human occupation to client-centred occupational therapy assessment, goal setting, intervention, and follow-up evaluation.
  6. Describe and apply the principles of occupational analysis and grading and adaptation of occupations to a therapy situation.
  7. Describe and apply the clinical reasoning process to the occupational therapy process and formulate appropriate occupational therapy goals and objectives for specific clients.
  8. Select, administer and critique assessment methods used in occupational therapy practice including initial assessment interview using this information to evaluate occupational performance and occupational engagement.
  9. Accurately record and document professional information.
  10. Locate, retrieve and use resources to inform decision making about health and occupational issues.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork (Placement weeks 1-9) - up to 12 hours per week. Fieldwork will require students to travel to fieldwork locations. These may be near or away from the campus.

Assessment

Review of 2 clinical assessment tools (1,500 words) (10%)
Exam (1.5 hours) (10%)
Exam (2 hours) (25%)
Clinical workbook (3,000 words) (20%)
Case-based occupational analysis (1,000 words) (10%)
Written/oral exam (1.5 hours) (15%)
Practice skill test (10 minutes) (5%)
Presentation of two case scenarios for peer and tutor feedback (10 minutes each) (5%)

Hurdle requirement:
Successful completion of fieldwork including attendance at fieldwork briefing; submission of (i) a completed and signed Student Placement Evaluation Form - Revised (SPEF-R) (ii) signed timesheet and (iii) Student Review of Placement form; and (iv) reflective journal
One 1,000 word reflective journal
Two self evaluations of group participation
Attendance at 100% of scenario based tutorials, practical skills sessions and seminars, unless a medical certificate is provided.

Workload requirements

This unit will run for 9 weeks of academic/fieldwork followed by one week Swot Vac, one week of exams and one week vacation. As this is an accelerated program, the workload demands are more than would be expected of an undergraduate 12 CP unit as it is run over 9 rather than 12 weeks.
PBL Tutorials - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Lectures - 4 hours per week (online)
Practicals - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Fieldwork (Placement weeks 1-9) - up to 12 hours per week
Private study - 12 hours per week

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 2 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

In this unit students will begin to describe, apply and critique the principles of assessment and intervention for clients with problems related to capacities to engage in activities, occupations, and participation in community life. Case-based scenarios will relate to people across the lifespan. Intervention principles will also incorporate environmental supports and barriers (advocacy, organisational change, environmental adaptation), and evidence-based practice. This unit also provides knowledge and skills necessary to understand different research methodologies, critique and evaluate the usefulness and quality of research evidence that supports evidence-based practice. Students will be guided through the process of how to ask clinically relevant questions, search for evidence, and critically appraise published research. Students will undertake practice-based learning for 2 days per week throughout the term (135 hours). The focus of fieldwork is on the development of core occupational therapy skills and students are required to demonstrate skills in data gathering, intervention/program planning, implementation and evaluation, recording and reporting and practice these skills in a sensitive, ethical and professional manner.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate skills in self-assessment and the provision of constructive feedback to others.
  2. Describe typical occupational therapy theories, intervention strategies, methods and modalities used with clients of occupational therapy presenting with physical, mental/psychosocial, cognitive, social and other related occupational performance challenges.
  3. Apply principles of client-centred practice, activity and occupational analysis, grading and adapting equipment, tasks, activities and environments, and energy conservation to enhance occupational participation and performance with clients.
  4. Describe common musculoskeletal, medical, surgical, neurological, mental/psychosocial disease processes relevant to clients of occupational therapy and their occupational sequelae.
  5. Evaluate a home/office for home/workplace modifications, use technical drawing techniques and write recommendations for home/workplace modification professionals and describe the role of external agencies (e.g. Archicentre, TADVIC and the SWEP) and use of Australian Standards in home modification.
  6. Demonstrate the use and principles of orthotic fabrication using low temperature thermoplastic materials and justify design, manufacture and application of a specific orthosis.
  7. Select, measure, prescribe and use appropriate assistive equipment to enable client occupational participation and performance (e.g. mobility equipment, lifting devices/hoists, pressure care equipment and communication devices).
  8. Describe different quantitative and quantitative research methods and methodologies, and critique research strategies relevant to occupational therapy practice.
  9. Describe ethical research issues and practices.
  10. Describe and demonstrate how to apply the principles of evidence-based practice using best evidence available for practice.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork (Placement weeks 1-9) - up to 12 hours per week. Fieldwork will require students to travel to fieldwork locations. These may be near or away from the campus.

Assessment

Critically evaluate splint (1,000 words) (10%)
Home modifications and SWEP application (1,000 words) (10%)
Office/workplace assessment (1,500 words) (10%)
Short answer examination (2 x 1 hour) (15%)
Written exam (1 hour) and oral exam (30 minutes) including discussant of two peers (25%)
Critically appraised paper: quantitative or qualitative research (1,200 words) (10%)
Written exam (multiple choice and short answer; 1.5 hours) (20%)

Hurdle requirement:
Successful completion of fieldwork including attendance at fieldwork briefing; submission of (i) a completed and signed Student Placement Evaluation Form - Revised (SPEF-R) (ii) signed timesheet and (iii) Student Review of Placement form; and (iv) reflective journal.
Attendance at 100% of scenario based tutorials, practical skills sessions and seminars, unless a medical certificate is provided.
Completion of weekly online quizzes.

Workload requirements

This unit will run for 9 weeks of academic/fieldwork followed by one week Swot Vac, one week of exams and one week vacation. As this is an accelerated program, the workload demands are more than would be expected of an undergraduate 12 CP unit as it is run over 9 rather than 12 weeks.
PBL Tutorials - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Lectures - 4 hours per week (online)
Practicals - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Fieldwork (Placement weeks 1-9) - up to 12 hours per week
Private study - 12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 3 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

In this second intervention unit, student will further describe, apply and critique the principles of assessment and intervention for individual and groups of clients who are restricted in their ability to engage in activities, occupations, and participate in community life. Intervention principles will also incorporate environmental supports and barriers (advocacy, organisational change, environmental adaptation) and evidence-based practice. The common characteristics of primary care will form the framework including issues of expanded access, multi-professional service teams, optimal service coordination, and a focus on patient empowerment and the application of technology to health promotion. Prevention and health promotion systems relevant to primary care will be examined, and the evidence and theoretical base for preventive (behavioural) counselling, brief interventions, health education practice, methods of tailoring strategies to client needs, motivational interviewing techniques, motivating change and preventing relapse will be explored. Approaches to adopting health promotion strategies and building capacity for health promotion in others will be explored.

This unit also gives students an advanced overview of the skills necessary to critique and evaluate research evidence. Students will be introduced to methodologies related to evaluating and conducting mixed-method survey-based research using questionnaires. This will provide the foundation to integrate clinically relevant evidence into daily professional practice as well as skills to be able assist with quality assurance activities using survey methodology. A fieldwork block of 3 weeks full time will conclude the term (112 hours).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Take responsibility for own attitudes and behaviour, and maintain the legal, ethical and professional standards and emergency procedures set by the fieldwork facility, Monash University, and OT AUSTRALIA code of ethics;
  2. Appraise the complex and interacting factors that contribute to notions of culture and cultural relationships, health and illness and multicultural diversity to professional practice and citizenship;
  3. Identify further common medical, surgical, neurological, musculoskeletal, biopsychosocial and developmental conditions that can present in clients of occupational therapy, and their occupational sequela;
  4. Demonstrate understanding of the frameworks that underpin health promotion and the application of health promotion principles and demonstrate how health care and health promotion is operationalized and evaluated in clinical settings and how it is used in program planning;
  5. Formulate integrated reasoning involving purposeful and meaningful occupation; client-centred/family centred practice; occupational therapy theory and practice; identity as an occupational therapist; and thinking critically, reasoning and reflecting to the development and implementation of occupationally relevant intervention strategies;
  6. Identify gaps in intervention practice knowledge, develop a researchable clinical intervention question and search databases for best evidence to support practice gaps;
  7. Choose and critique best evidence available for occupational therapy individual and group intervention strategies, methods and modalities used with clients of occupational therapy presenting with physical, mental/psychosocial, cognitive, social, and other related occupational performance challenges;
  8. Select, appraise, design and implement quantitative and qualitative; questionnaires/scales/survey data used to gather data, and interpret and report results;
  9. Effectively communicate with other members of the team and refer appropriately including planning and producing a health promotion pamphlet or poster;
  10. Write relevant, concise and comprehensive reports and pamphlets and substantiate both written and oral reporting with information from a range of empirical and other data sources.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork - 3 week placement (112 hours). Fieldwork will require students to travel to fieldwork locations. These may be near or away from the campus.

Assessment

Oral presentation (20 minutes) (5%)
Case study report and group presentation (2,000 words/20 minutes) (15%)
Analysis essay and program plan (2,500 words) (15%)
Written examination (2 hours) (20%)
Written (1 hour) and oral examination (30 minutes) including discussant of two peers in oral examinations (20%)
Survey development OR focus group interview report (2,000 words) (15%)
MCQ & short answer exam (1 hour) (10%)
Attendance at 80% of tutorials, skills classes and fieldwork placement (Hurdle)
Successful completion of fieldwork including attendance at fieldwork briefing; submission of (i) a completed and signed student placement evaluation form - revised (SPEF-R) (ii) signed timesheet and (iii) student review of placement form; and (iv) reflective journal. (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

This unit will run for 9 weeks of academic/fieldwork followed by one week Swot Vac, one week of exams, 3 weeks of fieldwork and one week vacation. As this is an accelerated program, the workload demands are more than would be expected of an undergraduate 12 CP unit as it is run over 9 rather than 12 weeks.
PBL Tutorials - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Lectures - 4 hours per week (online)
Practicals - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Fieldwork - Placement 3 weeks full time (112 hours)
Private study - 12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

In this unit, students begin to shift their view beyond the occupational challenges facing individuals, to consider the ways in which the occupations, health and well-being of groups, communities, and populations' may be impacted on by social, political and organisational factors. Students apply advanced clinical reasoning and intervention skills in case based scenarios applied to groups of people and communities who are experiencing complex health and social problems rather than individuals. The cases chosen highlight the multiple approaches to occupational intervention, both individual/clinical and community/prevention.

Additionally, students, individually or in pairs, will work in collaboration with a sponsoring agency to address a specific need while completing their participatory practice fieldwork placement for 2 days per week (135 hours). Students will be allocated a project identified by the agency. Students will then be guided by academic staff through the process of making initial contact with their agency and the first phase of project management, which involves collaborating with agency members to "scope" an organisationally useful, and occupationally relevant project or program. Students will be required to liaise with a variety of stakeholders and to develop a project proposal that meets the needs and aims of the agency. Students will develop skills in project design and management and work within a community partnership model to address a community/population health based occupational issue for the collaborating agency.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate critical appraisal, critical reasoning and critical thinking skills through application of theory into primary care, health promotion and population health in scenario based learning and in a practice setting;
  2. Appraise the influence of government policy on the development of services and associated funding systems available to prevent ill health and promote health and wellbeing, the role of community, national and international agencies, and their functions in the prevention of ill health, the promotion of health and wellbeing, and rehabilitation and how this relates to occupational therapy practice;
  3. Apply intervention principles for promoting change among individuals to whole communities;
  4. Demonstrate the rights of consumers and carers and strategies to involve consumers and carers in service planning, delivery and evaluation through interacting with them in an ethical and socially responsible approach to practice and practice based enquiry;
  5. Describe and appraise principles and approaches to advocacy and lobbying;
  6. Analyse the principles of, skills associated with program development, program management, evaluation and resource management;
  7. Take responsibility for own attitudes and behaviour, by acknowledging prejudices, limitations, and lack of knowledge, and commitment to change and growth as a result of professional development, and reflective learning;
  8. Undertake a needs analysis by scoping an organizationally useful and occupationally relevant project or program and use findings of assessments/needs analyses to develop programs using best available evidence;
  9. Apply program management skills such as applying resource management and function as a project manager and liaise with an organization to define a project;
  10. Consult with service providers, community leaders, consumers and carers about their rights, service choices, and options and demonstrate power sharing with them in relationships the development of a partnership approach to service development and provision and setting priorities for change; and share resources in a mutual educational process to facilitate decision making and advocacy about service choices, and options.

Fieldwork

Fieldwork (Placement weeks 1-9) - up to 12 hours per week. Fieldwork will require students to travel to fieldwork locations. These may be near or away from the campus.

Assessment

Oral and written exam (2 hours) including peer assessment (30%)
Population health assignment (3,000 words) (15%)
Contemporary practice presentation (15 minutes) (5%)
Presentation (20 minutes) (5%)
Written preliminary project proposal (1,000 words) (5%)
Oral presentation of situation profile findings and preliminary action plan (30 minutes) (10%)
Project Action Plan Proposal (2,500 words minimum) (30%)

Hurdle:
Project progress update reports.
Successful completion of fieldwork including submission of (i) a completed and signed Student Placement Evaluation Form - Revised (SPEF-R) (ii) signed timesheet and (iii) Student Review of Placement form; and (iv) reflective journal and 2 summary reports.
Attendance at 100% of tutorials, supervisory meetings and fieldwork placement hours unless a medical certificate is provided.

Workload requirements

This unit will run for 9 weeks of academic/fieldwork followed by one week Swot Vac, one week of exams and one week vacation. As this is an accelerated program, the workload demands are more than would be expected of an undergraduate 12 CP unit as it is run over 9 rather than 12 weeks.
PBL Tutorials - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Lectures - 4 hours per week (online)
Practicals - 4 hours per week (on campus)
Fieldwork (Placement weeks 1-9) - up to 12 hours per week
Private study - 12 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Rebekah Beard

Synopsis

This unit will take a problem solving/ clinical reasoning approach to the management of upper limb injuries encompassing the acute and recovery phases as well as chronic conditions. It will build on existing knowledge of human structure and function and introduce concepts of tissue injury and repair to enable students to identify appropriate therapeutic strategies, depending on the person's stage in recovery from injury. Students should be able to identify the anatomical structures of the upper limb, and describe their specific functions. These will include bones, articular surfaces, joints, muscles, and nerves. Students will have the opportunity to develop skills in the fabrication of thermoplastic splints appropriate to complex clinical scenarios including tendon repair, arthritis, peripheral nerve trauma/repair, tenosynovitis, and fractures. Students will also attend an acute hand therapy clinic on 2 occasions to observe a client's recovery post surgery.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of human hand structure and function, and describe the pathology and healing process in common upper limb injuries/conditions;
  2. Develop and describe intervention strategies (which may include an orthotic device/splint) for clients with specific upper limb injuries, supported with sound clinical reasoning;
  3. Demonstrate skill at the standard required for an advanced practitioner in the manufacture, fit and evaluation of specific splints for a variety of conditions which affect the occupational performance of specific clients;
  4. Demonstrate competence in searching, describing, summarizing, and presenting (verbally and in writing) the evidence from scientific literature on a specific topic related to hand therapy.

Assessment

80% Attendance requirement
Attendance at an acute hand therapy clinic
Presentation at a seminar (20 minutes), submission and critique of all splints made, as well as one 1,000 word and one 2,000 word essay

Students must gain at least 50% of available summative assessment task marks and complete all formative assessment in order to pass the unit.

Workload requirements

On Campus: 40 hours lecture/practicums in block mode + 4 hours clinic
attendance + 16 hours attendance at seminar where students present their project outcomes. 60 hours of private study (including pre-reading for class times, research into and preparation of seminar presentation, preparation of assignments). Students will be required to attend two sessions at a private hand therapy clinic as well.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Completion of an undergraduate degree or equivalent in occupational therapy or physiotherapy.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Rachael McDonald

Synopsis

Assistive technology promotes greater independence for people with disabilities by enabling them to perform tasks that they otherwise would have great difficulty or not be able to accomplish. This unit will involve problem solving and clinical reasoning to help the students to develop into competent assistive technology professionals and providers. The course will consist of information relating to social and political aspects of people with disability and technology. The areas of Seating and Positioning, Mobility, Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC), Daily Living Technologies and Assistive Technology Access will be studied in detail. Students will choose one area for their first assignment, and will attend 2 separate clinics each of 4 hours duration to observe clinical practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of a range of clinical conditions for whom various assistive technologies are applicable;
  2. Demonstrate an advanced understanding of the barriers and enhancers created by using assistive and adaptive technologies for disabled people;
  3. Describe the social and political aspects of disability with reference to assistive and adaptive technologies;
  4. Develop and describe appropriate assistive technology provision for clients with specific conditions, supported with sound clinical reasoning;
  5. Demonstrate advanced skills in assessing, applying for funding and prescribing a range of Assistive Technology Devices for clients in everyday practice;
  6. Understand and implement the principles of adaptive and assistive technology in the areas of: Seating and Positioning, Mobility, Augmentative and Alternative Communication, Daily Living Technologies and Assistive Technology Access;
  7. Display specialist information in one of the areas of Seating and Positioning, Mobility, Augmentative and Alternative Communication, Daily Living Technologies and Assistive Technology Access;
  8. Demonstrate professional competence in searching and summarising (verbally and in writing) the scientific literature on a specific topic related to assistive technology.

Assessment

Seminar presentation (20%)
Essay (1,000 words) (20%)
Literature review (3,000 words) (30%)
Exam (30%)

Workload requirements

40 hours attendance in lectures/practicums (block mode), 4 hours clinic attendance (over 2 separate occasions), 16 hours seminar attendance (including a 20 minute presentation), 2 written assignments (1,000 and 2,000 words).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ted Brown

Synopsis

This unit will provide an in depth overview of the issues related to the assessment of children (ethical, legal, professional, educational, clinical). The unit will start by introducing the reasons, uses, and purposes of assessment. Specific methods (e.g.observation, objective performance, parent-report) related to the assessment of children will be reviewed. Particular attention will be paid to issues related to family-centred practice and assessing children in naturalistic environments. Different contexts (e.g., clinic, community, school, home) where assessment is completed, issues related to the assessment of children at different age levels / developmental levels and the evaluation of children with special needs will be discussed. Ethical, policy and legal issues related to the assessment of children will be presented and critiqued. Specific types of assessment tools, scales, and instruments appropriate for use with children will be presented and reviewed. This will provide a broad base of 7 knowledge and skills for occupational therapy and other health professional students wishing to work with children and families in clinical, educational, home, and community settings.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will:

  1. Describe the characteristics, types, and methods of assessment best suited for use with children and their families
  2. Develop and describe assessment approaches appropriate for children at different developmental levels and for children with special needs
  3. Describe the assessment approaches that best fit with naturalistic assessment and family centred practice
  4. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of ethical, policy, and legal issues related to the assessment of children
  5. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of assessment tools, scales, and instruments used to evaluate the skills, interests, roles, and abilities of children
  6. Demonstrate competence in searching, describing, summarising, and presenting (verbally and in writing) the evidence from research literature on a specific topic related to child assessment.

Assessment

Participation during class and tutorial group discussions (10%)
Critique and scoping review of an instrument, tool or scale used to assess children (2,500 words) (40%)
Mock assessment report of school-age child & professional reflection (3,000 words) (50%)
Achieving a minimum grade of 50% on the AT4, failure to achieve a grade of 50% or more on AT4 may result in failing the unit (Hurdle)
100% attendance requirements for all tutorials, seminars and practical skills sessions, unless a medical certificate is provided. (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

On Campus: 3 hours per week of lectures plus 1 hour per week of tutorial. 8 hours per week of private study (reading, literature review, practicing skills, preparation of assignments, and other self-directed learning activities). Averaged over the 12 week semester - a total of 156 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Suzanne Wakefield and Associate Professor Rachael McDonald

Synopsis

This course is about occupational therapy for children with neurodevelopmental disabilities and their families. Etiology and epidemiology of conditions will be reviewed. The impact of accommodating the significant needs of a child with a disability in a family will be described and the impact on family member's and occupational therapy service delivery will be explored in depth. Students will learn about occupational therapy methods using the International Classification of Functioning and Disability (ICF) and family centred practice. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment and students will examine several case studies in detail.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Compare the WHO ICF, Social model of disability, the premises of the United Nations Charter on the rights of the child and occupational therapy practice for students with neurodevelopmental disability.
  2. Evaluate the impact of culture and environmental influences on the capabilities and participation of children with neurodevelopmental disability.
  3. Accurately describe the most common causes and co-existing conditions that occur with a diagnosis that results in developmental and functional challenges.
  4. Design an occupational therapy program that is appropriate for a specific child, from the perspective of one of the major approaches that facilitates the participation of children with neurodevelopment disabilities in daily life.
  5. Evaluate impairments of body structure and function in children with developmental and functional challenges.
  6. Evaluate a child with a motor challenge who has limitations in self care, leisure and play skills and preschool or school related productive occupations.
  7. Select appropriate occupational therapy intervention to improve a child's capabilities in childhood occupations.
  8. Develop learner centred goals and explain the occupational therapy management options for improving the child's participation in home, school and community life.
  9. Demonstrate creation of family centred occupational therapy goals and home programs, including professional report writing skills appropriate to the needs of parents.
  10. Critique evidence based practice approaches to occupational therapy children with neurodevelopment disability.

Assessment

Presentation at a seminar (30 mins) (20%) and a submission of a summary (1,000 words) (10%)
Short quizzes (3,500 words total over 8 weeks) (70%)
Attendance requirements
Active participation in online discussion boards, research reviews and proposals

Workload requirements

60 hours interaction with online lectures and course material, and participation in online tutorials, communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only), 16 hours seminar attendance (including one day in the initial week and one in the last week with a 30 minute presentation), 1 written assignment (1,000 words), 8 discussion postings (3,500 words); 88 hours of private study.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Suzanne Wakefield and Associate Professor Rachael McDonald

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth and Dr Primrose Lentin

Synopsis

This unit offers students the opportunity to develop knowledge related to contemporary occupational therapy theory and practice that will provide advanced revision of material that may have been covered in an undergraduate curriculum, but also will introduce new developments as well as critique theoretical perspectives and practices in human occupation focused services often undertaken by occupational therapists. The unit will overview and critique literature related to historical and current conceptual understandings of human activity and occupation, and occupation-based, culturally sensitive practices including: definitions and classifications of occupation, time use, occupational balance, person-environment-occupation models of practice, occupational identity and occupational adaptation. It will take a lifespan approach and is relevant to all areas of occupational therapy practice in building healthy communities. Literature will be primarily sourced from occupational therapy and occupational science. In this unit students will also develop the skills required for evidence-based, reflective, client/person-centred practice, critical evaluation of literature and professional verbal and written forms of communication of occupation-based practice concepts.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe current theories on human activity and occupation from occupational science and occupational therapy literature.
  2. Explain perspectives on defining and classifying human activity/occupation.
  3. Demonstrate use of concepts related to time use, occupational balance, habit and routine, occupational adaptation and its relationship to a person's health and well-being in case study activities.
  4. Explain dimensions of meaning related to occupation, occupational potential, occupational identity and occupational justice.
  5. Describe person-environment-occupation interactions models of practice and their relationship to a person's health and well-being, and ethical and culturally sensitive practice.
  6. Demonstrate competence in searching, describing, critiquing, summarising, and presenting (verbally and in written communication) the evidence from research literature on a specific topic related to occupational-based practice.

Assessment

Participation at 80% of all classes
Self-directed learning
Presentation (15%)
Essay (4,000 words) (70%)
Critique (1,000 words) (15%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Matthew Shepherd and Mr Jon Wright

Synopsis

This unit will explore aeromedical retrieval in Australia and overseas, by describing the role and operational functions of Air Ambulance and other retrieval systems and the role of members of the flight team. Fixed wing and rotary wing aerodynamics are introduced and the unit will emphasise, in detail, specific safety requirements and Civil Aviation Safety Authority regulations. Preparation for flight will cover the on-ground care and pre-flight checks of patients and preparing self for flight. The response of the body to flight will be introduced and form the basis for considering the modifications to practice required for the in-flight management of patients. Processes related to the undertaking of safe and effective patient transfer will also be explored.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the functions and interrelationships of Aeromedical and ground retrieval services in Australia and overseas;
  2. identify the safety requirements for operating with fixed and rotary wing aircraft;
  3. describe relevant Civil Aviation Safety Authority regulations;
  4. describe the characteristics of airport terminals and the transfer environment in aeromedical retrievals;
  5. describe flight team responsibilities, the student's specific role and relevant clinical, administrative and communication requirements;
  6. describe how to undertake a safe and effective patient transfer that incorporates risk analysis and prevention strategies;
  7. explain the aviation concepts of fixed and rotary wing aircraft;
  8. describe some of the key physical and psychological effects of flight on the body;
  9. identify factors that may affect the student's fitness for flight;
  10. identify and describe the operation of medical equipment utilised in the care of patients during flight; and
  11. describe how patient care practice is modified in the aeromedical retrieval environment by taking into consideration the effects of flight on specific medical and surgical problems.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tim Gray

Synopsis

Aeromedicine and retrieval work is a multi-disciplinary process to ensure the best outcomes for patient care. This Unit will explore the essentials of professionalism, critical thinking, problem solving, planning, peer review and reflective practices that are essential to health professionals operating in a context of constrained resources, and who, after graduation, may practice on fixed and rotary wing aircraft.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Articulate and effectively demonstrate the principles of practice that constitute professional behaviour.
  2. Apply critical thinking and problem solving skills to any given situation.
  3. Demonstrate advanced communication skills in a range of operational circumstances.
  4. Apply effective and professional leadership skills in complex, stressed and/or time-critical environments both in the team environment or working independently.
  5. Engage effectively and cooperatively with a comprehensive range of co-professional agencies.
  6. Integrate effective reflective practice, peer review and other methods of evaluation for the purpose of continued personal and professional growth.
  7. Critically analyse research reports in order to evaluate the evidence and make decisions to implement critical care based on the best available evidence.
  8. Interact with contemporary forms of technology within the operational context.
  9. Demonstrate an awareness and understanding of the agencies and/or professional roles that support their practice.
  10. Recognise hazards, limitations, and/or barriers to effective practice within their operational environment and construct strategies for managing them.
  11. Undertake and/or participate in critical incident debrief.
  12. Work with people of different gender, age, ethnicity, culture, religion and political persuasion.

Assessment

Examination (40%)
Portfolio (60%)

Workload requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Toby St Clair and Mr Darren Hodge

Synopsis

This unit will explore the specific modifications to clinical practice required when adapting to the aeromedical environment. This exploration will be based on the affects of altitude on susceptible medical, surgical and traumatic conditions and will emphasise the importance of appropriate in-flight equipment commonly used for patient monitoring and ventilatory and circulatory support. Related clinical management strategies including prediction of potential aeromedical problems so as to ensure the safe and efficient transport of patients will be developed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the specific effects of altitude on susceptible medical, surgical and traumatic conditions;
  2. describe the use of pharmacological agents and techniques for administering drugs and fluids necessary to manage common conditions requiring aeromedical transport and treat potential complications that may arise;
  3. plan patient care appropriate to the professional practice level of the student, that incorporates clinical management strategies including prediction of potential aeromedical problems so as to ensure the safe and efficient transport of the patient;
  4. demonstrate a working knowledge of medical equipment utilised in the care of patients during flight; and
  5. discuss the pivotal role of teamwork in the aeromedical retrieval environment.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Shaun Whitmore

Synopsis

This unit will promote the development of a broad and critical conceptual and practical understanding of Critical Care mission coordination within retrieval systems. The unit will deliver a broad range of systems and process skills for the practitioner, ensuring their knowledge and understanding of the complexities and dependencies within critical care and retrieval systems. It also considers in depth the cognitive skills required in coordination, in order to fully understand and manage complex planning, risk mitigation, mission logistics and communication methods. The unit will also focus on specific standards and guidelines in the delivery of retrieval coordination.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the functions and relationships of the components of the aeromedical and retrieval system;
  2. Describe the functions and processes related to key coordination interfaces including: operation centres, logistics supervisors (DTM), dispatch systems (CAD & Netcom), 000 systems (ESTA), the ambulance clinician supervisor, state trauma systems, critical care bed access systems, interstate retrieval systems;
  3. Demonstrate capability for complex planning and logistics management tasks;
  4. Describe methods used for planning and execution of complex multi-platform retrieval missions;
  5. Demonstrate skills in prioritisation of resource use in retrieval scenarios particularly in settings of limited resource availability and competing priority for resource;
  6. Describe methods of crew mix selection and transport platform selection;
  7. Discuss the principles of aviation logistics, including flight and duty times, flight planning, weather impacts on flight planning, capabilities and limitations of various aircraft;
  8. Describe the principle features of management of hospital emergency response plans, multivictim incidents and search and rescue;
  9. Demonstrate capability in communication, in particular related to command and control, conflict resolution, crisis resource management, customer relations and team formation.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Workload requirements

Students are required to spend, on average, 12 hours per week on this unit across the semester (156 hours in total). This includes working through self-directed learning materials, case reviews and discussion forums through Moodle, preparation of unit assessment tasks and attendance at a 2 day (14 hours) on-campus intensive.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Darren Hodge

Synopsis

This unit covers the role of the aeromedical team and the use of fixed and rotary wing aircraft in search and rescue. The content related to air search techniques includes search patterns, homing techniques and observer procedures. Rescue techniques focus on the rotary wing aircraft aeromedical rescue team and the specific skill of stabilising and packaging the patient for winching to safety. The safety requirements of search and rescue are emphasised and post impact land survival techniques, water safety and sea survival are discussed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the role of fixed and rotary wing aircraft and the aeromedical team in search and rescue;
  2. describe and explain air search techniques including the role of the observer;
  3. describe and explain the requirements for packaging patients for rescue;
  4. discuss survival techniques on land and in sea;
  5. participate in helicopter winching techniques; and
  6. identify the required elements of aeromedical retrieval rescue pertaining to their professional role.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Toby St Clair and Mr Darren Hodge

Synopsis

This unit will specifically address the requirements of planning, leading and providing complex retrieval and repatriation of sick and injured patients in the specialized aeromedical and also in non-specialized (commercial aircraft) to definitive care.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the organisational and communication requirements of international retrieval and the roles of other personnel involved in the retrieval;
  2. describe the facilities and equipment available on non dedicated aeromedical airlines (including commercial airlines) to facilitate care of the patient during flight;
  3. discuss and explain the implications of common international travel conventions and legal requirements related to moving patients, equipment and drugs from port to port to the successful and safe retrieval of the patient;
  4. describe and explain the specific effects of altitude on susceptible medical, surgical and traumatic conditions;
  5. describe and explain the use of pharmacological agents and techniques for administering drugs and fluids necessary to manage common conditions requiring aeromedical transport and treat potential complications that may arise;
  6. demonstrate the ability to plan complex patient care appropriate to the professional practice level of the student, that incorporates clinical management strategies for complex conditions including prediction of potential aeromedical problems so as to ensure the safe and efficient transport of the patient;
  7. demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of medical equipment utilised in the care of patients during flight; and
  8. discuss and explain the pivotal role of teamwork in the aeromedical retrieval environment.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

The purpose of the unit is to allow students to explore a topic that is of personal and professional importance to them in the aeromedical context. This unit will use a negotiated learning contract based on the student's self assessment of learning needs which will be supervised by the unit convenor. An appropriately qualified and experienced industry leader and/or academic will be appointed as co-supervisor with the unit coordinator if required.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. relate the theory of aeromedical retrieval to practice through the development of a relevant project;
  2. critically appraise a topic in aeromedical retrieval practice;
  3. demonstrate independent scholarship through the development of a suitable project; and
  4. demonstrate effective communication skills with academic staff through negotiation of the project brief and learning contract and the presentation of the project portfolio.

Assessment

Portfolio (15%)
Verbal presentation (10 minutes plus 5 minutes discussion) (25%)
Written report (4,000 words) (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit will assist the student to promote the transfer of theoretical knowledge and skills developed the other core units of the Graduate Certificate in Aeromedical Retrieval to the actual aeromedical work environment. Work place experience will allow highly contextualised knowledge to be constructed through authentic learning experiences and will promote the development of the student as a practitioner. The student will be supervised by a Monash University appointed Clinical Teacher within a structured framework of learning activities.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills learnt in this course to the management of patients undergoing aeromedical retrieval.
  2. Demonstrate the ability to work as part of the aeromedical team, in accordance with their professional practice level.
  3. Reflect on his/her own clinical experience.
  4. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the operational and safety aspects of aeromedical retrieval systems.

Assessment

Examination (50%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students are required to spend 12 hours per week on this unit working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials on Blackboard and local clinical simulations and tutorials conducted by workplace mentors and in preparation of unit assessment tasks 156 hours total.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Karen Zaleski

Synopsis

This unit will introduce the student to the underpinning pedagogical framework and themes intensive care paramedicine. To aid familiarisation to a new practice environment, the role requirements and attributes of an intensive care paramedic as an interactive professional within an integrated system of Emergency Medical Services will be explored. Students are expected to use this opportunity to build on their understanding of the range of reactions that patients, family, and co-workers in the health system experience in response to sudden illness and injury. Essential underpinning theoretical knowledge bases will be developed and consolidated.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the theoretical models and themes that support the development of a MICA Paramedic as an interactive professional;
  2. Relate the desired personal and professional attributes of a graduate of Monash University and a MICA Paramedic to their own professional practice;
  3. Discuss the importance of MICA Paramedic practice being evidence based;
  4. Discuss the process by which the MICA Paramedic practice and Clinical Practice Guidelines are developed;
  5. Discuss the ethical and professional frameworks within which MICA Paramedics practice;
  6. Describe the required knowledge base and scope of practice of a MICA Paramedic;
  7. Identify the legislative and supportive frameworks that support the role of the MICA Paramedic;
  8. Describe the social significance of health and illness within society;
  9. Identify the reactions of patients and family to acute illness and injury within a range of cultural contexts;
  10. Discuss the historical evolution of the MICA Paramedic within the integrated Emergency Medical Services environment.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Nathan Stam

Synopsis

Paramedicine has a growing reliance on drug therapy as the primary intervention for most emergency situations. Patients receiving medication interventions are exposed to potential harm as well as benefits. This unit will challenge students to have a graduate understanding of the science of pharmacology to ensure that their patients are administered/prescribed the right medication, the correct dose and at the right time to achieve the desired therapeutic effect.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe fundamental principles of pharmacology;
  2. Describe and explain the processes involved in pharmacokinetics along with factors that influence these processes;
  3. Explain indications, actions, adverse reactions and contraindications for commonly prescribed medication;
  4. Demonstrate clinical decision making ability relating to pharmacology within a paramedic context;
  5. Provide appropriate education for patient based upon individual medication/drug regimes;
  6. Describe and explain medication regimes for specific clinical conditions in the paramedic's of practice;
  7. Describe legal, ethical and professional responsibilities associated with prescription and administration of drugs/medications in the paramedic's jurisdiction;
  8. Critically analyse social and political factors that influence use of medications/drugs in the paramedic's jurisdiction.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Andrew Burns and Mr Ben Meadley

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the management of patients with chest pain. Specific topics include cardiac anatomy and physiology, the natural history of ischaemic heart disease, cardiovascular pathology, interpretation of electrocardiographic rhythms and waveforms and pharmacology of drugs used in the treatment of acute myocardial infarction.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the structure and function of the heart through the application of their knowledge of normal cardiac anatomy and physiology;
  2. describe the natural history of ischaemic heart disease and cardiovascular pathology related to acute myocardial infarction;
  3. interpret common electrocardiographic (ECG) rhythms and waveforms;
  4. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of cardiac conditions;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of cardiac emergencies in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. describe the benefits of pre-hospital advanced cardiac life support and the related role of the MICA Paramedic;
  7. discuss the epidemiology of cardiac disease;
  8. describe the role of coronary care units in the management of patients with emergency cardiac conditions;
  9. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital coronary care units;
  10. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with cardiac emergencies; and
  11. implement evidence-based practice to the management of emergency cardiac conditions.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Lisa Powell

Synopsis

Respiratory emergencies are considerable burden within Paramedicine and the community generally, consuming large amounts of health resources. This unit teaches Intensive Care Paramedics about the paramedical diagnosis, approaches and care of patients suffering from respiratory illness. Upon completion of this unit students will have an appropriate understanding of the assessment and emergency management of patients with respiratory conditions.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe and explain the structure and function of the respiratory system through the application of their knowledge of normal respiratory system anatomy and physiology;
  2. describe the natural history of respiratory disease and pathology related to acute and chronic respiratory conditions;
  3. explore and apply the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of respiratory conditions;
  4. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of respiratory conditions in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  5. describe and explain the benefits of pre-hospital intensive care and the related role of the Intensive Care Paramedic;
  6. discuss the epidemiology of acute and chronic respiratory disease;
  7. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with acute and chronic respiratory disease;
  8. implement evidence-based practice to the management of respiratory conditions.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Toby St Clair

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the provision of trauma care. Trauma care is approached from the contextual perspective of trauma systems, time critical guidelines and trauma triage criteria. Specific traumatic injuries are discussed in depth and practice in the related trauma skills is provided.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the structure of trauma systems and define the related trauma triage criteria;
  2. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of trauma and environmental conditions;
  3. relate the pathophysiology of common traumatic and environmental injuries to their management;
  4. demonstrate advanced trauma life support clinical skills;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of trauma and environmental emergencies in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. describe the benefits of pre-hospital advanced trauma life support and the related role of community emergency health practitioners;
  7. discuss the epidemiology of trauma and environmental injury;
  8. describe the ongoing management of patients with trauma in hospital critical care units within the framework of a trauma system;
  9. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital critical care units;
  10. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with trauma emergencies;
  11. implement evidence-base practice to management of emergency trauma and environmental conditions.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Shaun Whitmore

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the provision of emergency care to the obstetric patient and the paediatric and neonatal population. The student's previous clinical experience is used as the basis for identifying key differences in the advanced life support measures appropriate to the management of obstetric complications or the pregnant patient who has experienced physical trauma or is suffering from a medical emergency.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage obstetric emergencies and care for the pregnant patient who has experienced physical trauma or is suffering from a medical emergency;
  2. relate the pathophysiology of common paediatric conditions to the identification of those with the potential to result in an emergency presentation;
  3. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of the paediatric and obstetric conditions;
  4. demonstrate the clinical skills required to manage paediatric emergencies;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of paediatric and neonatal trauma and medical emergencies in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. discuss the psychological and physiological responses of children to illness and injury;
  7. identify the common patterns of paediatric and obstetric injury and related emergency management;
  8. discuss the epidemiology of paediatric and obstetric conditions;
  9. describe the ongoing management of patients with emergency obstetric or paediatric conditions;
  10. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital paediatric critical care units and maternity departments;
  11. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with paediatric and obstetric emergencies; and
  12. implement evidence-base practice to the management of emergency paediatric and obstetric conditions.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Wayne Gardam

Notes

BLOCK-ON offering is not available to International students.

Synopsis

This units aims to prepare the student for clinical practice by using simulation-training methods to improve the understanding of human factors and their impact on the quality of team-based clinical care within the specific emergency paramedicial environment. The unit will allow the student to implement key clinical skills and practice clinical judgment, clinical decision making with implementation of management within a broad range of simulated emergencies and objective, structured clinical exams (OSCES).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Develop and implement a clinical simulation
  2. Rationalise the importance of critical clinical decision making and clinical judgment
  3. Describe and explain the human factors and their impacts on a paramedic team in a crisis situation
  4. Analyse an emergency situation, take charge of the situation and implement appropriate clinical care
  5. Perform high ranging life-saving clinical skills safely and efficiently in a simulated environment
  6. Competently perform a range of paramedic skills including advanced airway management, diagnostics and the administration of pharmaceuticals agents.
  7. Apply theoretic concepts of paramedicine to a simulated clinical setting
  8. Evaluate the outcome of the simulation on their patient care practices.

Assessment

Portfolio (50%)
OSCE (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week prior to engaging in the simulation exercises.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Campbell Asker and Mr Wayne Gardam

Synopsis

This unit involves the student operating demonstrating competency as a novice intensive care paramedic based in their local clinical environment and under the direct supervision or mentorship of a suitably qualified and experienced clinical teacher. The student will be supported to develop the skills and attributes of a safe and competent intensive care paramedic. It is expected that the knowledge and skills developed in the course will be applied in the clinical, digital or simulation environment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. review their own clinical experience and identify and arrange suitable learning experiences to maintain ongoing clinical development as a result of the clinical experience in the field;
  2. demonstrate the development of clinical, professional and leadership capabilities from novice to a safe and clinically competent Intensive Care Paramedic;
  3. respond to real life emergency problems from the initiation of emergency medical services; to assimilate information quickly and to communicate it clearly and unambiguously;
  4. apply theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the emergency management of a broad range of cardiac conditions, medical conditions, trauma and environmental conditions in the adult and paediatric patient using an appropriate intensive care paramedic clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  5. demonstrate a culturally sensitive approach to the recognition and management of the reactions of patients and family to acute illness or injury;
  6. describe and explain the operational and clinical aspects of intensive care paramedicine in the student's clinical context.

Assessment

Student exemplar videos (60%)
Evidence based practice forum (30%)
Reflective clinical practice (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Online)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Daniel Cudini

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the provision of care to the adult population in the circumstances of common and less common medical emergencies. The student's previous clinical experience is used as the basis for identifying key differences in the advanced life support measures appropriate to these conditions.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. discuss the anatomical and physiological basis of common emergency medical conditions;
  2. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of adult medical emergency conditions;
  3. relate the pathophysiology of common emergency medical conditions to their management;
  4. demonstrate the required clinical skills to be able to manage the adult medical emergencies and recognise, assess and manage patients with abnormal behaviour;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of the adult patient with an emergency medical condition in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. describe the benefits of pre-hospital adult medical emergency life support and the related role of community emergency health practitioners;
  7. discuss the epidemiology of emergency medical conditions;
  8. describe the ongoing management of patients with common emergency medical conditions in hospital emergency departments;
  9. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital emergency departments;
  10. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with emergency medical conditions; and
  11. implement evidence-base practice to management of emergency medical conditions.

Assessment

Online MCQ quiz (10%)
Final exam (40%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit will prepare appropriately qualified practitioners for extended and / or non acute clinical care within a pre-hospital practice. The unit will extend the practice of paramedic practitioners by further developing diagnostic skills, differential diagnosis, utilisation of physical examination, interpreting investigations, and implementing a management plan to keep patients in their home while working in collaboration with general practitioners and other health professionals.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate core knowledge of the normal structure, function and development of the human body at all stages of life.
  2. Demonstrate knowledge of the aetiology, pathology, symptoms and signs, natural history, and prognosis of common ailments in children, adolescents, adults and the aged.
  3. Recognise risk factors for disease or injury, while using appropriate screening tools to be able to triage patients to remain in their home, refer to general practice or other appropriate health services.
  4. Select and interpret appropriate, cost-effective diagnostic tools and use them as an adjunct to the history and physical examination findings to formulate an appropriate diagnosis, differential diagnosis and implement an appropriate management plan.
  5. Make informed decisions about diagnostic and therapeutic interventions and reflect critically on the justifications for decisions using an evidence-based approach.
  6. Identify emergent cases and complex conditions beyond the paramedic's range of medical knowledge and competence.
  7. Recognise the limitations of the student's medical knowledge, and how this relates to scope of practice, patient safety and their role within the broader health care team.

Assessment

Examination (50%)
Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in courses 3876, 3877 or 3878.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitPrimary Care Research
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

This unit reviews key concepts in primary health care in Australia and other countries using a comparative case based teaching method. Case examples of primary health care initiatives and systems are drawn from a wide range of countries including Australia, China, Japan, Saudi Arabia and other Gulf States, the United States and United Kingdom. Key documents including the Commonwealth's "Towards a National Primary Health Care Strategy: A Discussion Paper from the Australian Government and the WHO's "Primary Health Care: Now More Than Ever" statements will be reviewed and discussed. 9 hours of this course will be co-taught with Masters of Family Medicine candidates. The following topics will also be considered. The history and philosophy of primary care practice, the conceptual framework of primary care practice, the roles and tasks of the primary care practitioner, primary care practice in the community and community health, future directions of primary care practice and the academic in primary care practice. The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in the management, design and delivery of primary health care services.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the contemporary key international trends and policies and practices in Primary Health Care systems and practice;
  2. Critically analyse these policies and practices through exposure to a wide range of Australian and international case studies in primary health care;
  3. Critically analyse the roles of key professions in different Primary Health Care systems through benchmarking of the systems;
  4. Critically analyse the contribution of Primary Health Care to health service delivery in different health systems.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis) (60%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including contact time and private study over the second semester - a total of 156 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitPrimary Care Research
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Hui Yang and Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

This unit reviews quality improvement systems models and research in quality improvement for primary health care in Australia and other countries using a case based teaching method. The use of benchmarking concepts and practices to drive quality improvement is introduced and critically analysed. Different types of benchmarking considered in this unit include time-based benchmarking, intra-agency benchmarking, inter-agency benchmarking, and national and international benchmarking in primary health care services.

Current knowledge and practice in the use of clinical and technical standards and accreditation systems to drive primary health care quality improvement is reviewed and critically analysed. Standards relevant to primary health care practice and delivery are thoroughly reviewed. Particular focus is placed upon the use of patient experience feedback in primary health care quality improvement. The differences between patient experience and satisfaction are considered and how patient experience tools can be directly aligned to clinical and technical standards. Tools pertinent to primary health care quality improvement are thoroughly reviewed. The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in the management, design and delivery of primary health care services.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the contemporary key international trends and policies and practices in Service Development and Quality Improvement in Primary Health Care practice;
  2. Critically analyse these policies and practices in a wide range of Australian and international case studies in primary health care quality improvement;
  3. Critically analyse the role of benchmarking in primary health care quality care improvement and the differences and between and strengths and weaknesses of different types of benchmarking including:
    1. Time-based benchmarking,
    2. Intra-agency benchmarking,
    3. Inter-agency benchmarking; and
    4. National and international benchmarking
  4. Critically analyse the use of technical and clinical standards and accreditation systems in driving primary health care quality improvement;
  5. Critically analyse the key differences between patient satisfaction and experience tools and how they may be used to drive primary health care quality improvement.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis) (60%)

Workload requirements

24 hours per week including contact time and private study over the second semester - a total of 312 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitPrimary Care Research
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

Ageing is said to be one of the major forces of the new millennium. It is a universal force that can bring change to society and while there are many challenges there are also many opportunities for ageing to be a force for social progress and development. Understanding the health and wellbeing of the ageing population is critical for health improvement of individuals, communities and whole populations of older people. This Unit is designed to take a broad view of ageing from across a number of perspectives including the demographic transition and the impact on the population profile, health and welfare costs, and health care delivery; the need to refocus health priorities to address the changing needs of an ageing population; psychosocial and behavioural aspects of ageing and their impact on health and well being; and conditions of ageing and their prevention and management in primary health care settings. Students will examine ageing from a healthy ageing perspective and consider the value of health promotion approaches for older people in primary care settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the basic principles underlying demographic and epidemiological trends in an ageing population;
  2. Critically analyse the current age profile of the Australian population and population trends;
  3. Critically analyse the frequency of common health problems of older people and the associated risk factors for, and the preventability of some of the common health problems of older people;
  4. Critically analyse healthy ageing and discuss associated concepts including determinants of healthy ageing, healthy ageing policy, health promotion in older groups, social resources and healthy ageing;
  5. Critically analyse the challenge of applying healthy ageing concepts to a diverse older population;
  6. Critically analyse current structure and function of health services for older people and discuss current issues for older people in accessing appropriate health services;
  7. Compare and contrast different models of service delivery with an emphasis on primary health care services;
  8. Critically analyse a range of theories for promoting healthy ageing and how they are used in primary health care settings;
  9. Critically analyse the design and evaluation of health promotion programs for older people in primary health care settings;
  10. Critically analyse the participation of older people in primary health care decision-making.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis) (60%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including contact time and private study, over 2 semesters - a total of 312 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitPrimary Care Research
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

Chronic illness is by definition, long lasting and at times severe. Chronic illnesses are large contributors to mortality, morbidity, disability and increased hospital admissions. They also make up a significant proportion of individuals using primary health care services. In Australia, almost half of all deaths are caused by the 12 leading chronic illnesses which include a range of physical and mental illnesses. These include coronary heart disease, stroke, lung cancer, colorectal cancer, depression, diabetes, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic kidney disease, oral diseases, arthritis and osteoporosis. Individuals with some of these illnesses - high blood pressure, depression, arthritis, diabetes and asthma - rely heavily on primary health care services for day to day management and support. The causes of chronic illness are both broad and complex. They represent a range and combination of Downstream determinants, such as biological factors; Midstream determinants, such as psychosocial factors and health behaviours; and Upstream determinants, such as social-cultural, physical and environmental factors. These factors may also impact on the management of chronic illness, in particular how health care and information is accessed, received and interpreted by individuals.

This unit, designed for primary health care professionals, aims to provide participants with an understanding of the socio-cultural and behavioural determinants of chronic illness, and how these determinants impact on health promotion, prevention, management strategies and outcomes in the primary health care setting. The unit is based on a multi-disciplinary approach, drawing on theoretical and empirical case studies from the social sciences, public health, health promotion and primary health care. The unit will examine the different causation models of the determinants of chronic illness with particular emphasis on the socio-cultural determinants of health and behavioural risk and protective factors, including early life factors. It will make the link, with a number of case study examples, between the burden associated with disease and risk and protective factors. The unit will also examine models of chronic disease self-management and how these approaches apply in primary health care settings. It will show how individual and group socio-cultural factors may influence health care decision making, and interactions with the primary health care team.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the socio-cultural and behavioural determinants of chronic illness;
  2. Describe the different causation models of the determinants of chronic illness with particular emphasis on the socio-cultural determinants of health and behavioural risk and protective factors, including early life factors;
  3. Identify how these determinants impact on health promotion, prevention, management strategies and outcomes in the primary health care setting;
  4. Link, with a number of case study examples, the burden associated with disease and risk and protective factors;
  5. Identify how individual and group socio-cultural factors may influence health care decision making, and interactions with the primary health care team;
  6. Compare and contrast different models of chronic disease management with an emphasis on primary health care services;
  7. Critically appraise qualitative and quantitative research pertinent to the management of chronic illness in primary health care settings;
  8. Design empirical research studies to evaluate chronic disease management in primary health care settings.

Assessment

Workshop presentation (20%)
Structured learning task (20%)
Research essay (3,000 words) (60%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including contact time and private study, averaged over the 12 week semesters - a total of 156 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitPrimary Care Research
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

The international liberalisation of legalised access to gambling has lead to an increased incidence and prevalence of problem gambling in many jurisdictions. Workers in the health and human services are now much more likely to encounter clients with problem gambling and associated co-morbid problems.

This unit will define what is meant by "problem gambling" and how different Australian and overseas jurisdictions have tackled this problem in the context of overall gambling policy. The distribution of problem gambling within the Australian community and international communities will be reviewed. Risk and protective factors for problem gambling will also be reviewed. There is now significant evidence that problem gambling usually occurs in conjunction with other problems including drug and alcohol addiction and mental health disorders including depression. The evidence for these co-morbidities and their implications for policy and treatment will be reviewed.

The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in services dealing with problem gamblers and their families and for those with a general interest in gambling and problem gambling.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the epidemiology of problem gambling within the Australian and international communities and its demographic and health correlates;
  2. Critically analyse alternate definitions of problem gambling and their implications for policy in dealing with problem gambling within communities;
  3. Critically analyse how problem gambling is measured and assessed;
  4. Critically analyse the research evidence concerning risk and protective factors for problem gambling;
  5. Critically analyse the research evidence concerning drug and alcohol addiction and mental problems as co-morbidities for problem gambling and their implications for policy and programs;
  6. Critically analyse the different policy responses to gambling and problem gambling in terms of their impacts upon different groups in the community.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis) (60%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including contact time and private study over the first semester - a total of 156 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitPrimary Care Research
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

This unit will review the full range of responses available for the prevention and treatment of problem gambling. Primary, secondary and tertiary approaches will be considered in this unit.

This unit will consider the design, effectiveness and efficiency of public education approaches to diverting people at risk of developing problem gambling. It will also consider individual, family and group treatment methods and models for the treatment of problem gambling. Counselling methods including motivational and informational approaches, Peer-support programs, Self-help programs and Cognitive, Behavioural and Cognitive Behavioural therapies will be reviewed.

The implications of drug and alcohol addiction and/or mental health problems for the design and delivery of treatment programs for problem gambling will also be reviewed.

The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in services dealing with problem gamblers and their families.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the design, effectiveness and efficiency of public education approaches to diverting people at risk of developing problem gambling
  2. Critically analyse the key characteristics of individual family and group approaches to the treatment of problem gambling.
  3. Critically analyse the design effectiveness and efficiency of the following treatment approaches for problem gambling:
    1. Counselling methods including motivational and informational approaches;
    2. Peer-support programs;
    3. Self-help programs; and
    4. Cognitive, Behavioural and Cognitive Behavioural therapies
  4. Critically analyse the research evidence concerning the effectiveness of different therapies for problem gambling
  5. Critically analyse the implications of drug and alcohol addiction and/or mental health problems for the design and delivery of treatment programs for problem gambling.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis) (60%)

Workload requirements

12 hours per week including contact time and private study over the first semester - a total of 156 hours.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lyn Clearihan

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with a broad based understanding of complexity theory, the nonlinear dynamics underpinning the physiology of health and disease, and the place of complex systems in managing the health care system. Practitioners will be introduced to the concepts and methods of complexity sciences and encouraged to explore the application of these to areas of their own clinical practice or to issues of national relevance for a primary health care setting. The focus of the learning content and activities will challenge students to explore the currently accepted concepts, held by both health care practitioners and healthcare systems in general. Practitioners will be encouraged to generate solutions for these problems that explicitly describe the intended and unintended consequences of such solutions.

The unit will address the nature of complex adaptive systems, applying complex adaptive systems principles to learning, clinical and organisational problems and developing solutions to problems that are context sensitive.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain complexity theory and the principles underpinning the place of complex systems in modern health care.
  2. Critically evaluate the application of complexity theory to managing a range of specific clinical problems.
  3. Critically assess the challenges confronting international health service delivery using complexity theory modelling.
  4. Describe the application of a systems based approach to individual patient care.
  5. Compare and contrast the approach to a clinical problem using a reductionist, linear model with a complex systems approach.
  6. Operationalise the management of common clinical problems through the application of complexity theory.

Assessment

2 x Case studies (1,500 words each) (50%)
Essay (2,000 words) (20%)
Presentation (30%)
Participation in webinars and at least 80% of online discussions (Hurdle)
Online quizzes (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Participation in online activities and discussion boards is estimated to take approximately 3 hours per week. Assessment activities, prescribed reading, recommended reading, student interactions and private study is estimated to take approximately 9 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Concurrent clinical practice is desirable and beneficial to successfully complete this unit but not a requirement.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lyn Clearihan

Synopsis

This unit will examine the issues facing the management of patients in the community who require palliative care in the 21st century, including harm minimisation, how to manage acute illness in a 'dying' patient and the problems faced in accompanying the patient on their terminal life journey. The unit will address the challenges and complexities for community based practitioners in the diagnostic process when managing patients with a terminal condition that involves multisystem disease and multiple health issues. It also explores the journey faced by practitioners, their patients and their carers in the transition from a cure pathway to a care pathway. The Unit encourages practitioners to draw upon their own clinical experiences and is designed to foster the development of greater clinical insight into the care of both patient and practitioner, while fostering a deeper appreciation of the strengths of team-based care.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically evaluate the strengths and benefits of a palliative care approach in a community setting for a patient who is suffering with a life limiting illness.
  2. Critically appraise the evidence-based options of care for acute symptom management problems in a patient at end of life.
  3. Demonstrate appropriate communication skills to manage a range of clinical scenarios related to community based palliative care.
  4. Discriminate between strategies that address the medico-legal issues, which may arise before, during and after death.
  5. Describe the ethical dilemmas that may confront a healthcare practitioner when managing a dying patient and describe strategies for dealing with them.
  6. Use evidence based management tools to assist in effectively implementing team based care for patients.
  7. Create a strategy for implementing a self-care plan when managing palliative patients.

Assessment

6 x Activity linked assessment tasks (500-800 words / 5-10 minute discussion response each) (10% x 6 = 60%)
Collaborative case study (500 - 1,000 words) (15%)
PowerPoint presentation (15%)
Essay (2,500 words) or equivalent PowerPoint presentation (10%)
Participation in discussion forums (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Participation in online activities and discussion boards is estimated to take approximately 3 hours per week. Assessment activities, prescribed reading, recommended reading, student interactions, reflection on relevant clinical practice and private study is estimated to take approximately 9 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Concurrent clinical practice is desirable and beneficial to successfully complete this unit but not a requirement.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lyn Clearihan

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to assist clinicians, who are currently working as primary healthcare practitioners, to enhance and refine their consulting skills. It is particularly relevant for International medical practitioners who wish to improve their community based patient care. Cultural context will thus provide the background when discussing consultation styles, with students expected to gain knowledge in cultural literacy and competency. Strengthening and enhancing communication skills will also form a consistent theme throughout the unit. The unit will encourage students to draw on their own experience to critically appraise and evaluate clinical encounters using evidence based consultation modelling. They will be expected to analyse current theories underpinning the construct of a consultation, describing and exploring aspects of it that may result in suboptimal patient care or outcomes. This unit explores the unique dynamic that occurs in the exchange and interplay between clinician and patient, within a specific cultural context. In the process of doing so it guides students to a deeper layer of reflection of how the consultation process itself might impact on patient outcomes. The focus of the unit is on skills development to ensure health care practitioners retain and build on the knowledge they gain to both teach and practice more effective primary healthcare within a community.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Use consultation skills' theory to critically appraise the relationship between clinical decision-making, cultural literacy and the management of a clinical problem
  2. Discriminate between evidence based models of the consultation process and explain their application in a variety of clinical and culturally diverse situations
  3. Apply knowledge of the consultation process to specific clinical problem solving within the practitioner's practice
  4. Critically evaluate current consultation skills techniques and demonstrate how advanced consulting skills can influence patient outcomes in a culturally competent way.
  5. Use enhanced communication skills in managing a clinical problem in a culturally sensitive manner and demonstrate the impact on patient outcomes
  6. Evaluate the effectiveness of an application of consultation skills theory to a clinical problem.

Assessment

Essay (2,000 words) (25%)
Demonstration (45%)
Presentation (30%)
Participation in webinars and at least 80% of online discussions (Hurdle)
Complete online quizzes (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Participation in online activities and discussion boards is estimated to take approximately 3 hours per week. Assessment activities, prescribed reading, recommended reading, student interactions, reflection on relevant clinical practice and private study is estimated to take approximately 9 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Concurrent clinical practice is desirable and beneficial to successfully complete this unit but not a requirement.


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jamie Smart and Dr Enjarn Lin

Notes

Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) and credit for POM5001 for those who have completed the Monash University/ Alfred Short Course in Perioperative Medicine will no longer apply for those undertaking the short course from 2014. It will still apply to those who have completed the short course prior to this date.

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For more information please contact Department of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine (http://www.med.monash.edu.au/cecs/anaesthesia-board/contactus.html).

Synopsis

Cardiac disease is increasing in prevalence and creates a number of perioperative diagnostic and management dilemmas. This unit aims to consolidate and extend the student's knowledge of the pathophysiology of cardiac disease, and review the perioperative interventions that can be applied to improve patient outcome.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Correlate the pathogenesis of coronary artery disease, cardiac failure, hypertension, valvular lesions and pulmonary hypertension with patient history and clinical examination.
  2. Critically appraise the perioperative management plan for a patient with pre-existing cardiovascular disease who is undergoing non-cardiac surgery.
  3. Use the findings from perioperative cardiac investigations to stratify a patient's perioperative cardiovascular risk.
  4. Perform a thorough examination of the cardiac patient and formulate a suitable/appropriate/feasible management plan.
  5. Organize an appropriate perioperative plan to maximize the patient's perioperative outcome.
  6. Work collaboratively as part of a multidisciplinary perioperative medicine team.

Assessment

1 x Essay (2,000 words) (16%)
4 x Short answer questions (1,000 words each) (9% each) (27%)
2 x Group case discussions (1,500 words per group) (27%)
Block day (8 hours) (30%)

Results will be reported to students and faculty as a Pass / Non-Pass result.

Workload requirements

20-24 hours per week of time commitment (on average) and 8 hours per semester of direct contact time (weekend block day).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Joel Symons, Dr Arvinder Grover, Dr Enjarn Lin

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For more information please contact Department of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine (http://www.med.monash.edu.au/cecs/anaesthesia-board/contactus.html).

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is for the participant to obtain the necessary knowledge and skills in managing the trauma patient in the acute setting, as well as the chronic patient with an acute exacerbation of their disease. It will focus on strategies to improve the outcome for these patients. Participants will gain practical knowledge of airway management, ventilation strategies and circulatory support strategies.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Diagnose and treat patients with a range of chronic medical diseases, with a focus on the perioperative period.
  2. Identify the patient who may require acute airway management and apply basic airway management principles to maintain and secure the airway.
  3. Explain various ventilation strategies that assist in improving respiratory outcomes in the acute trauma patient, as well as the patient with chronic lung disease.
  4. List and justify the rationale for using various fluids (including blood products) to maintain circulatory and nutritional support.
  5. Explain the pathophysiological mechanisms that occur to a patient in the setting of acute trauma. This includes neurotrauma, chest and abdominal trauma, as well as burns trauma. Correlate these with the patient's clinical signs and symptoms.
  6. Competently examine the respiratory patient and formulate a perioperative management plan.
  7. Discuss issues relating to retrieval of the acutely ill patient.
  8. With appropriate collaboration formulate and effectively execute/deliver a defensible/appropriate management plan for an acutely unwell patient.

Assessment

1 x Essay (2,000 words) (16%)
4 x Short answer questions (1,000 words each) (9% each) (27%)
2 x Group case discussions (1,500 words per group) (27%)
Block day (8 hours) (30%)

Results will be reported to students and faculty as a Pass / Non-Pass result.

Workload requirements

20-24 hours per week of time commitment (on average) and 8 hours per semester of direct contact time (weekend block day).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Christine Ball and Dr Chris Bain

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For more information please contact Department of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine (http://www.med.monash.edu.au/cecs/anaesthesia-board/contactus.html).

Synopsis

Students will gain knowledge of the pathogenesis and perioperative management of patients with endocrine, renal, hepatic, gastrointestinal and coagulation dysfunction. In addition, students will learn to apply basic analgesic principles to the management of patients with perioperative pain problems.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the pathogenesis and pathophysiology of endocrine disorders including diabetes, obesity and sleep apnoea, and their impact on the perioperative patient.
  2. Explain the impact of renal, hepatic and gastrointestinal dysfunction on the patient during the perioperative period.
  3. Formulate an effective/appropriate/suitable/feasible perioperative management plan for patients with endocrine disorders and/or dysfunction.
  4. Recognise commonly used anticoagulant and antiplatelet agents, and justify their use in the perioperative period.
  5. Recognise the patient with acute, complex acute and chronic pain and correlate their condition to the underlying pathophysiology.
  6. Evaluate the use of commonly used analgesics and apply these to a management plan.

Assessment

2 x Essays (2,000 words each) (35%)
4 x Short answer questions (4 x 1,000 words) (35%)
1 x Weekend block day for 8 hours (Direct contact) consisting of collaborative group assignments, individual presentations and/or practical stations (30%)

Results will be reported to students and faculty as a Pass / Non-Pass result.

Workload requirements

20-24 hours per week of time commitment (on average) and 8 hours per semester of direct contact time (weekend block day).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stuart Marshall and Dr Maggie Wong

Quota applies

This unit is quota restricted. Selection is on a first-in, first enrolled basis. For more information please contact Department of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine (http://www.med.monash.edu.au/cecs/anaesthesia-board/contactus.html).

Synopsis

Students will gain knowledge of the pathogenesis and perioperative management of patients with infectious diseases, neurological and neuromuscular disorders, high risk obstetrics and psychiatric disorders. In addition, students will learn to identify the impact of ageing and geriatric care and optimize the management of these patients in the perioperative period.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the impact of infectious diseases on the perioperative management of patients and formulate a perioperative management plan for these patients.
  2. Recognise the causes of high risk pregnancies and evaluate the rationale for optimum patient outcome for mother and child in these conditions.
  3. Explain the pathophysiology of neurological and neuromuscular disorders and formulate a management plan for the perioperative care of these patients
  4. Describe the changes of ageing and geriatric care on physiology and apply this knowledge to formulate a perioperative management plan which addresses these changes.
  5. Formulate a perioperative management plan that is appropriate for a patient with psychiatric disorders.

Assessment

1 x Essay (2,000 words) (16%)
4 x Short answer questions (1,000 words each) (9% each) (27%)
2 x Group case discussions (1,500 words per group) (27%)
Block day (8 hours) (30%)

Results will be reported to students and faculty as a Pass / Non-Pass result.

Workload requirements

20-24 hours per week of time commitment (on average) and 8 hours per semester of direct contact time (weekend block day).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 3 2015 (Online)
Monash Online Teaching Period 6 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Mundy

Synopsis

This unit covers all important aspects of abnormal behaviour: historical influences, theory, assessment, specific psychopathologies, treatment methods, and legal issues. Both the scientific and professional aspects of abnormal psychology are presented. Students will be provided with a broad and comprehensive review of abnormal behaviour, by studying and contrasting different theoretical perspectives.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply detailed knowledge of personality, biological processes and human development to abnormal behaviour;
  2. Critically contrast historical and current major theoretical perspectives of abnormal behaviour;
  3. Distinguish between and analyse the psychological, genetic, environmental and biological determinants of human behaviour;
  4. Demonstrate applied knowledge in methods of assessing psychological disorders and the main systems of classifying disorders;
  5. Examine and critique the advantages and disadvantages of classifying abnormal behaviour;
  6. Identify and explain the major types of psychological disorders and link these with the major therapeutic approaches to abnormal behaviour;
  7. Demonstrate an advanced level of skill in critical evaluation of previous research and communication of findings to others.

Assessment

Secure online exams (40 mins per exam) (4 x 10% = 40%)
Reflective clinical commentary (500 words) (15%)
Case study reports (750 words) (20%)
Lab report (1,250 words) (25%)

Workload requirements

Students should expect to spend an average of 15-20 hours per week on this unit. This time will cover:

  1. video lecture materials (1 hour);
  2. synchronous & asynchronous discussion (1-2 hours);
  3. synchronous web-based 'class-time' for skills-based activities (2 hours);
  4. weekly readings (4-5 hours);
  5. weekly skills-based assessment tasks (4-6 hours); and
  6. content-based assessment (4-5 hours, including revision and formative assessment).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4525.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 3 2015 (Online)
Monash Online Teaching Period 6 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Mundy

Synopsis

Testing and assessment is a major component of psychological research and practice. This unit introduces the principles and processes of test development, test administration and test interpretation. Some widely used psychological tests will be described and critiqued on a number of criteria including test reliability and validity. The unit also covers theories of ability and how our thinking about human abilities is influenced by our cultural framework.

The unit will also provide students with a strong foundation in professional ethics for psychologists. Students will also gain an advanced knowledge of the ethical, legal and professional responsibilities of practising psychologists. These ethical principles will then be applied to specific ethical dilemmas and case studies.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate advanced understanding of the steps involved in psychological test development.
  2. Critically evaluate the psychometric properties of psychological tests including reliability and validity.
  3. Examine and contrast diverse applications of a range of psychological testing techniques.
  4. Compare and critically appraise the relevant theories of intelligence.
  5. Communicate the social implications of psychological testing and its application in society.
  6. Demonstrate in depth knowledge of the key ethical principles surrounding psychological practice and assessment.
  7. Apply ethical principles to generate possible solutions to ethical dilemmas.

Assessment

Psychological testing assignment (1,000 words) (25%)
Ethics assignment (1,500 words) (30%)
6 x Secure online examination (30 minutes each) (45%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4525.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 1 2015 (Online)
Monash Online Teaching Period 3 2015 (Online)
Monash Online Teaching Period 5 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Mundy

Synopsis

This unit covers at a more advanced level topics in research design and analysis presented in first-year psychology. Students will further develop their understanding of the research process and some of the most commonly used methods of statistical analysis. Students will also become familiar with the statistical software package, SPSS. Topics covered include: parametric and nonparametric procedures to compare two or more independent or matched samples; correlation and linear regression; planned and post hoc comparison techniques; power and sample size considerations; interpretation of output; experimental, quasi-experimental, and correlational research strategies; between- and within-subjects designs; and ethics.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically review methodological, ethical and statistical issues associated with designing and evaluating empirical research within the discipline of psychology.
  2. Communicate scientific ideas, procedures, results, and conclusions using appropriate language, formats, and digital technology.
  3. Analyse single-factor quantitative data by selecting the appropriate statistical test, evaluating its assumptions, and interpreting test results within the applicable boundaries.
  4. Apply IT skills to enter, organise, and analyse data (e.g., using statistical software, such as SPSS).
  5. Formulate research questions and apply problem-solving skills to develop a plan for systematically addressing these questions through empirical research.

Assessment

Weekly lab exercises (200 words per week) (6 x 5% = 30%)
Applied research design task (1,500 words) (35%)
Secure online examination (40 mins per exam) (10% + 10% + 15% = 35%)

Workload requirements

Students should expect to spend an average of 15-20 hours per week on this unit. This time will cover:

  1. video lecture materials (1 hour);
  2. synchronous & asynchronous discussion (1-2 hours);
  3. synchronous web-based 'class-time' for skills-based activities (2 hours);
  4. weekly readings (4-5 hours);
  5. weekly skills-based assessment tasks (4-6 hours); and
  6. content-based assessment (4-5 hours, including revision and formative assessment).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4525.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 2 2015 (Online)
Monash Online Teaching Period 4 2015 (Online)
Monash Online Teaching Period 6 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Mundy

Synopsis

This unit provides a continuation/elaboration of first-year psychology topics: developmental psychology and biological psychology. Developmental psychology encompasses physical, cognitive, and social-emotional changes across the life span and how these are shaped by macrosystems such as culture, and microsystems such as peers and the family. Biological psychology includes states of consciousness, mental disorders and addiction, mechanisms and disorders of learning and memory, and the regulation of emotional and motivated states. The laboratory program complements the lectures, and provides further training in research techniques, report writing, oral presentations and teamwork.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Examine and determine how the range of human thoughts, feelings, and behaviours are underpinned by physiological and neural processes;
  2. Explain the structural, chemical, and functional changes in the brain that accompany normal human development;
  3. Evaluate the interplay between familial and cultural factors in determining the course of development from birth through to old age;
  4. Synthesize current research and present a cohesive account of the etiology, neuropathology, and behavioural sequelae of a select developmental disorder;
  5. Undertake a literature search and critically analyse the research methodology and conclusions of empirical studies in select topic areas in biological and developmental psychology;
  6. Conduct and apply learned skills in common psychological tests to an assessment of human behaviour in a controlled and simulated environment.

Assessment

Secure online exams (40%)
Oral presentation (20%)
Research report (20%)
Developmental report/computer interaction (20%)

Workload requirements

Students should expect to spend an average of 20 hours per week on this unit. This time will cover:

  1. video lecture materials (1 hour);
  2. synchronous & asynchronous discussion (1-2 hours);
  3. synchronous web-based 'class-time' for skills-based activities (2 hours);
  4. weekly readings (4-5 hours);
  5. weekly skills-based assessment tasks (4-6 hours); and
  6. content-based assessment (4-5 hours, including revision and formative assessment).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4525.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 4 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Mundy

Synopsis

This unit covers all important introductory aspects of counselling. Themes to be covered include theories of counselling, evaluation of how personal beliefs and values influence the counselling process and legal and ethical issues in counselling psychology. Students will be provided with a broad overview of the field of counselling psychology and will be expected to be able to compare and contrast different theoretical perspectives and reflect on how these perspectives would influence their (potential) counselling style and practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain and contrast a variety of theoretical approaches to counselling including individual, group and systems approaches.
  2. Critically analyse specific concepts and techniques used by various theoretical approaches to counselling.
  3. Recognise and reflect upon the influence of personal values and beliefs on the counselling process.
  4. Identify and provide solutions to ethical and legal issues, and develop skills in ethical decision making in counselling.
  5. Explain which theoretical perspectives within counselling (including concepts and techniques) best fits with the students' own values, beliefs and experiences and therefore would be more likely to be adopted by the student to use within their own potential counselling practice in the future.
  6. Communicate the importance of the guidelines available to psychologists, and explain where to access the appropriate and relevant guidelines.

Assessment

6 x Secure online exams (30 minutes each) (5% each) (30%)
Reflective clinical commentary x 2 (500 words each) (10% each) (20%)
Short essay (1,000 words) (20%)
Simulated counselling session with written summary (10 minutes) (750 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Students should expect to spend an average of 15-20 hours per week on this unit. This time will cover:

  1. video lecture materials (1 hour);
  2. synchronous & asynchronous discussion (1-2 hours);
  3. synchronous web-based 'class-time' for skills-based activities (2 hours);
  4. weekly readings (4-5 hours);
  5. weekly skills-based assessment tasks (4-6 hours); and
  6. content-based assessment (4-5 hours, including revision and formative assessment).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4525.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 5 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mike Larson

Synopsis

This unit covers the key themes of social psychology and personality. The history and the philosophy of the different schools of social psychology and personality are examined to highlight changes in our understanding of social identity, meaning and relationships. In the first half of the unit, several different personality theories will be compared and contrasted including psychoanalytic, phenomenological, trait, and social learning approaches to personality. The second half of the unit will demonstrate how social psychology theories, such as behaviour in groups, aggression, attraction, dehumanisation and attitude change, are applied and critiqued in light of contemporary behaviour and new knowledge.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically summarise, analyse and evaluate the major theoretical and research approaches within the filed of social psychology;
  2. Compare and contrast historical and current theory on social processes and relate these to both individual factors and interpersonal relationships;
  3. Apply social psychology theories to a range of contemporary social questions, including belonging, identity, attraction, aggression, conflict and negotiation;
  4. Critically evaluate, and explain the origins and underlying assumptions of the personality theories of Freud, Jung, Eysenck, Costa and McCrae, Bandura, Kelly and Rogers;
  5. Critically assess social psychology and personality theories and approaches in relation to gender, ethnicity and cultural diversity;
  6. Review and evaluate the practical applications, experimental procedures and research directions and goals associated with the above social psychology and personality theories.

Assessment

6 x Secure online quiz (20 mins each) (5% each) (30%)
Lab report assignment (1,500 words) (35%)
Critical essay (1,500 words) (35%)

Workload requirements

Students should expect to spend an average of 15-20 hours per week on this unit. This time will cover:

  1. video lecture materials (1 hour);
  2. synchronous & asynchronous discussion (1-2 hours);
  3. synchronous web-based 'class-time' for skills-based activities (2 hours);
  4. weekly readings (4-5 hours);
  5. weekly skills-based assessment tasks (4-6 hours); and
  6. content-based assessment (4-5 hours, including revision and formative assessment).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 4 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Mundy

Synopsis

The Neuroscience of Cognition and Behaviour focuses on the neurobiological mechanisms responsible for human cognition and behaviour, with a particular focus on understanding leading methodology and technologies employed in brain-behaviour relationships. By exploring brain-behaviour interactions through an in-depth examination of a selection of cognitive abilities and behaviours, this unit will guide students to establish an understanding of the mechanisms behind memory processes, sleep, perception and other fundamental human behaviours. Technologies utilized by neuroscientists, such as functional magnetic resonance imaging, electroencephalography, and eye tracking will be considered during the course of this unit.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Evaluate issues underpinning the relationship between brain processes and cognition and behaviour
  2. Synthesise contemporary research and theoretical issues in key areas of neuroscience
  3. Critically analyse the range of research tools and paradigms used within different domains of neuroscientific research, including the characterisation of neurological disease
  4. Demonstrate skills relating to research design and analysis of neuroscientific technologies that are incorporated across the graduate psychology program.

Assessment

6 x Secure online quizzes (30 minutes each) (5% each) (30%)
Video presentation (10 minutes) (20%)
Poster (1,000 words) (20%)
Experiment design (1,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Students should expect to spend an average of 15-20 hours per week on this unit. This time will cover:

  1. video lecture materials (1 hour);
  2. synchronous & asynchronous discussion (1-2 hours);
  3. synchronous web-based 'class-time' for skills-based activities (2 hours);
  4. weekly readings (4-5 hours);
  5. weekly skills-based assessment tasks (4-6 hours); and
  6. content-based assessment (4-5 hours, including revision and formative assessment).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 4525.


36 points, SCA Band 1, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


18 points, SCA Band 1, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychological Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Physiotherapy
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Prue Morgan

Synopsis

This unit will cover an introduction to physiotherapy assessment and management options for children with a range of conditions who present to physiotherapists. Aetiology and epidemiology of examples of neurological, cardiorespiratory, musculoskeletal and complex conditions and the physiotherapy role in evaluation are described. The skills required for communication with children, families, carers and other health professionals are also considered. An emphasis on establishing competence and confidence to work autonomously whilst identifying limits to own practice is stressed. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment with a single face to face day at the conclusion of the unit. A selection of case studies selected from acute, subacute and community settings will be used to explore learning outcomes.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply knowledge of normal development across the spectrum of childhood, within the context of normal variations.
  2. Identify paediatric conditions which are appropriate for physiotherapy intervention and recognise the scope of a comprehensive paediatric physiotherapy assessment.
  3. Synthesise the elements of a comprehensive paediatric physiotherapy assessment for children presenting with cardiothoracic, musculoskeletal or neurological conditions.
  4. Conduct prioritised systematic assessments using appropriate assessment tools for different paediatric conditions across the spectrum of childhood and adolescence.
  5. Analyse and communicate the important findings of their paediatric physiotherapy assessments that warrant further assessment and / or intervention and / or referral to other practitioners.
  6. Identify and apply appropriate evidenced based or best practise interventions to specific paediatric conditions.

Assessment

Online quizzes x 4 (Summative) (35%)
Online exam (MCQ and short answers) (1 hour) (Summative) (20%)
Clinical Guideline activity (1,000 words) (Summative) (15%)
Guided paediatric case study (2,000 words) (30%)
Attendance requirement (face to face day, available also via video footage) (Hurdle)
Contribution to 4 x discussion boards (one per module, as per unit guide) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Approximately 12 hours per week of interaction with online lectures and course material, completion of online assessment tasks and participation in online communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only, block mode), plus self-directed study time. An additional 8 hours of face to face day attendance or video footage viewing required.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Physiotherapy
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Prue Morgan

Synopsis

This unit will cover components of physiotherapy assessment and management options for children with cerebral palsy who present to physiotherapists. Aetiology and epidemiology of cerebral palsy, and the physiotherapy role in evaluation and management of children with this condition are described. An emphasis on establishing competence and confidence to work autonomously whilst identifying limits to own practice is stressed. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment with a single face to face day at the conclusion of the unit. A selection of case studies drawn from the acute, subacute and community settings will be used to explore learning outcomes.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe relevant embryology in regards to the timing of cerebral insults that result in a diagnosis of cerebral palsy and an understanding of common risk factors leading to the diagnosis
  2. Identify and select appropriate outcome measures for children with cerebral palsy across the age span using the ICF model
  3. Identify and describe the principles of physiotherapy management in cerebral palsy
  4. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of burst versus ongoing therapy prescription across childhood in cerebral palsy within a multidisciplinary framework
  5. Summarise the complexity in equipment prescription in cerebral palsy across the life span
  6. Synthesise the complexities around transition from paediatric to adult services in adolescents with cerebral palsy using a multidisciplinary framework
  7. Demonstrate sensitive and appropriate communication at all times when working with children, their parents/carers
  8. Demonstrate appropriate and professional communication with other health care professionals, both internal and external to their own health care setting.

Assessment

Online quizzes x 4 (Summative) (35%)
Online exam (MCQ and short answers) (1 hour) (Summative) (20%)
Clinical Guideline activity (1,000 words) (Summative) (15%)
Guided paediatric case study (2,000 words) (Summative) (30%)
Attendance requirement (Face to face day, available also via video footage) (Hurdle)
Contribution to 4 x discussion boards (One per module, as per unit guide) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Approximately 12 hours per week of interaction with online lectures and course material, completion of online assessment tasks and participation in online communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only, block mode), plus self-directed study time. An additional 8 hours of face to face day attendance or video footage viewing required.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Physiotherapy
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Prue Morgan

Synopsis

This unit will cover components of physiotherapy assessment and management options for neonates and infants with a range of conditions who present to physiotherapists. Aetiology and epidemiology of examples of conditions experienced by neonates and infants, and the physiotherapy role in evaluation of neonates and infants are described. An emphasis on establishing competence and confidence to work autonomously whilst identifying limits to own practice is stressed. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment with a single face to face day at the conclusion of the unit. A selection of case studies drawn from the special care nursery, subacute and community settings will be used to explore learning outcomes.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the phases of neonatal neurological and respiratory development and the features of each developmental phase.
  2. Apply knowledge of typical neonatal and infant development to the clinical physiotherapy management of neonates and infants.
  3. Define the principles of developmental care and apply these to clinical practice with the neonatal population.
  4. Identify and analyse standardised outcome measures appropriate for assessment of the neonatal and infant population.
  5. Synthesise the multiple physiotherapy strategies available to address deviations from typical development in the neonatal and infant populations.
  6. Describe a comprehensive musculo-skeletal physiotherapy assessment of the newborn and the infant.
  7. Describe the management of common musculo-skeletal disorders of infancy
  8. Demonstrate sensitive and appropriate communication at all times when working with children, their parents/carers and other health care professionals.

Assessment

Online weekly quizzes (Summative) (35%)
Online exam (MCQ and short answers) (Summative) (20%)
Clinical guideline activity (1,000 words) (Summative) (15%)
Guided paediatric case study (2,000 words) (Summative) (30%)
Attendance requirement (face to face day, available also via video footage) (Hurdle)
Contribution to 4 x discussion boards (one per module as per unit guide instructions) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Approximately 12 hours per week of interaction with online lectures and course material, completion of online assessment tasks and participation in online communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only, block mode), plus self-directed study time. An additional 8 hours of face to face day attendance or video footage viewing required.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Physiotherapy
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Prue Morgan

Synopsis

This unit will introduce principles underpinning physiotherapy assessment and treatment for paediatric conditions. It will cover common assessment tools, principles of family-centred practice, and introduce age-appropriate interventions for infants and children. Case-based examples will illustrate key components of paediatric physiotherapy practice and facilitate the achievement of learning objectives. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify key milestones of motor development across infancy and childhood.
  2. Describe key elements of motor development during infancy.
    • Postural control
    • Transitions between postures
    • Acquisition of upper limb dexterity
  3. Identify and describe key elements of the acquisition of locomotion skill.
  4. Identify common causes of developmental motor delay.
  5. Critique some commonly applied tests of infant and child motor development.
  6. Analyse the key elements of family-centred practice.
  7. Describe key members of a multidisciplinary paediatric team and their roles.
  8. Formulate a treatment approach to facilitate motor skill acquisition in a child with developmental delay.

Assessment

Online quizzes x 3 (30%)
Online exam (MCQ and short answers) (1 hour) (20%)
Paediatric assessment tool activity (1,500 words) (20%)
Guided paediatric case study (2,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

40 hours interaction with online lectures and course material, completion of online assessment tasks and participation in online communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only), additional self-directed study time.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Physiotherapy
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Prue Morgan

Synopsis

This unit will cover components of physiotherapy assessment and management options for children of all ages with a range of complex and chronic conditions. Aetiology and epidemiology of chronic and complex conditions experienced by paediatric clients, and the physiotherapy role in evaluation are described. An emphasis on establishing competence and confidence to work autonomously whilst identifying limits to own practice is stressed. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment with a single face to face day at the conclusion of the unit. A selection of case studies drawn from acute, subacute and community settings will be used to explore learning outcomes.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the aetiology and pathophysiology of chronic fatigue syndrome, progressive neuromuscular disorders, burns and plastics and traumatic brain injury in the paediatric client.
  2. Critically analyse the key elements of physiotherapy assessment for chronic and complex conditions in the paediatric population.
  3. Identify and analyse standardised outcome measures appropriate for use in chronic and complex conditions in the paediatric population.
  4. Critically analyse the key elements of physiotherapy treatment for chronic and complex conditions in the paediatric population.
  5. Synthesise the evidence underpinning physiotherapy treatment selection for chronic and complex conditions in the paediatric population.

Assessment

4 x Online quizzes (45 minutes each) (50%)
Online exam (MCQ and short answers) (1 hour) (20%)
Guided paediatric case study (2,000 words) (30%)
Attendance at 100% of face to face day, available also via video footage, unless a medical certificate is provided (Hurdle)
Contribution to 4 x discussion boards (One per module) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Approximately 12 hours per week of interaction with online lectures and course material, completion of online assessment tasks and participation in online communications with other students and tutor and self-directed study time (online delivery only, block mode). An additional 8 hours of face to face day attendance or video footage viewing required.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Physiotherapy
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Prue Morgan

Synopsis

This final unit of the paediatric physiotherapy suite of units will allow consolidation of advanced clinical practice. Skills in critical decision-making and clinical reasoning ability for the management of paediatric conditions will be emphasised. Problem solving and advanced clinical skills within the context of family-centred practice will be explored. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment with individually tailored clinical experiences.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify key performance characteristics of an advanced paediatric physiotherapist
  2. Demonstrate advanced knowledge of theory supporting the physiotherapy management of paediatric conditions
  3. Critically evaluate the evidence underpinning paediatric physiotherapy practice, including identification of levels of evidence, systematic and narrative reviews
  4. Demonstrate knowledge of multidisciplinary management in the context of family-centred practice
  5. Formulate and answer a clinical question exploring an issue in paediatric physiotherapy
  6. Develop and evaluate an intervention to address an issue in paediatric physiotherapy
  7. Demonstrate through oral and written discussion of individualised patient issues, an advanced level of clinical reasoning
  8. Demonstrate advanced oral and written communication skills with the multidisciplinary team, patient and family.

Assessment

Professional portfolio (1,000 words) (10%)
Clinical practice journal (2,000 words) (25%)
Clinical evidence review activity (2,000 words) (25%)
Clinical paediatric project report (2,000 words) plus poster (800 - 1,000 words) (40%)
Contribution to 4 x discussion boards (Hurdle)
Attendance requirement (individualised clinical experience; >80%) (Hurdle)

Workload requirements

Approximately 12 hours per week of interaction with online lectures and course material, completion of assessment tasks and participation in online communications with other students and tutor, plus an equal amount of self-directed study time. An additional up to 5 days of individualised clinical experience will be scheduled.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

MAP5003, PTY5100, and any two of PTY5101, PTY5102, PTY5104.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Professor Marilyn Baird

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of CT Radiography Practice and the Master of Radiography Practice. It extends knowledge of the basic physical principles of multislice computed tomography (CT) and the protocols and processing methods used to image the whole body. The physical principles underpinning 3-D volumetric imaging will be contextualised within the axial, SSH and MSH scanning modes/systems. The techniques for processing and visualising 3-D images will be critically analysed. The unit will describe the physical and mathematical principles related to multi-planar reformats, maximum intensity projection, slab maximum intensity projection, surface rendering or shaded surface display and volume rendering. Protocols, patient preparation and monitoring, positioning, post-processing techniques and dose optimisation related to CT biopsies, interventional CT, virtual endoscopy, and CT angiography will be described and evaluated from within an evidence-based framework. The unit will conclude with an introduction to image interpretation of the brain and CTPA and the application of quality assurance and quality control principles to multislice CT imaging.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the physical and mathematical principles of multi-planar reformats, maximum intensity projection, slab maximum intensity projection, surface rendering and volume rendering and their significance to multislice CT imaging.
  2. Differentiate between axial, SSH and MSH scanning modes/systems and describe how oversampling techniques are used in the collection, processing and visualisation of 3-D images.
  3. Select the appropriate CT protocol and post processing techniques including dose optimisation for core and fine needle biopsies; CT angiographic studies and virtual colonoscopies from within an evidence-based framework.
  4. Describe the concept of dose modulation in cardiac CT.
  5. Distinguish between normal and abnormal appearances CT brain and CTPA in the acute setting.
  6. Accurately implement the principles of quality assurance and quality control to multislice CT imaging.

Assessment

Online examination (90 minutes) (30%)
2 x Advanced CT clinical case studies (1,500 words each) (50%)
Technical quality assurance and quality control report (1,000 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6001.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Professor Marilyn Baird

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of CT Radiography Practice and the Master of Radiography Practice for students who are required to complete a 72 credit point Master's program. It extends knowledge of the basic physical principles of MRI and addresses safety and the protocols and processing methods used to image the brain, spine, upper abdomen, pelvis and the knee and shoulder. The unit will introduce the student to the concept of evidence - based health care practice and how the principles apply to MRI radiography practice. The unit will examine the role played by the radiographer in the operationalization of safety principles within the MRI suite. Clinical indications and the preparation of the patient including the correct positioning methods for the brain, spine, upper abdomen, pelvis, knee and shoulder will be addressed. The purpose of the common sequences used to image the specific organs and structures will be covered and students will learn how to select the most appropriate imaging protocol for the common sequences from within an evidence - based framework. The unit will enable students to recognise the characteristics of the MRI representation of the common pathologies affecting the brain, spine, upper abdomen, pelvis, knee and shoulder. The unit will conclude with an examination of the application of quality assurance and quality control principles to MRI imaging.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Apply the principles of evidence-based health care practice to the delivery of MRI imaging in the clinical context.
  2. Explain the role played by the radiographer in the application of safety principles within the MRI suite.
  3. Describe a range of clinical indications, patient presentations, patient preparation and positioning methods for MRI studies of the brain, spine, upper abdomen, pelvis, the knee and shoulder.
  4. Select the appropriate MRI protocol and post processing techniques for MRI studies of the brain, spine, upper abdomen, pelvis, the knee and shoulder from within an evidence-based framework.
  5. Recognise the characteristics of the MRI representation of common pathologies affecting the brain, spine, upper abdomen, pelvis, the knee and shoulder.
  6. Accurately apply the principles of quality assurance and quality control to MRI imaging in the clinical context.

Assessment

1 x Secure online MCQ examination covering the principles of MRI safety, sequence selection and imaging parameters (60 minutes) (20%)
1 x Secure online image recognition and analysis examination (60 minutes) 20%)
2 x Advanced MRI clinical case studies (1,500 words each) (40%)
1 x technical quality assurance and quality control report (1,000 words) (20%)

Each element of assessment is a hurdle requirement for the unit.

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6001.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Imelda Williams

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of CT Radiography Practice and the Master of Radiography Practice for students who are required to complete a 72 credit point Master's program. It extends the knowledge students have in relation to imaging pathology into the field of image interpretation. The unit will provide students with a detailed consideration of the psychophysics underpinning visual perception and the phenomenon of pattern recognition. The unit will address the radiographic interpretation of skeletal disease and skeletal trauma and the chest and abdomen including issues around the complexity of interpreting the radiographic patterns associated with injuries to the spine. The unit will provide the opportunity for students to reinforce their existing knowledge related to normal anatomy and normal variants and the growing bone and the mature skeleton on general radiographic images. Finally, the unit will require students to reflect upon their current clinical decision making processes and extend these processes into the area of general radiography commenting and the concept of the radiographer health assessment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Distinguish between sensitivity, specificity and accuracy in relation to the interpretation of general radiographic images.
  2. Differentiate between search error, detection error and interpretation error in relation to the interpretation of radiographic images.
  3. Critically apply the knowledge of the psychophysics of vision to patterns seen in radiographic images of the skeleton, chest and abdomen.
  4. Apply a logical method to the radiographic evaluation of bones, soft tissues and joints of the skeletal system, chest and abdomen.
  5. Recognise the characteristics of the radiographic representation of common pathologies affecting the skeletal system, chest and abdomen.
  6. Create a series of evidence based radiographic comments related to the interpretation of general radiographic images.
  7. Apply a radiographic health assessment perspective to the delivery of general radiographic services.

Assessment

3 x Online image recognition and analysis examinations (45 minutes each) (20% each) (60%)
2 x Advanced general radiography clinical case studies (1,000 words each) (12.5% each) (25%)
Completion of a psychophysics essay (1,500 words) (15%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6001.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Macleod

Synopsis

This unit extends a radiographer's existing knowledge of gross pathology in relation to common and uncommon diseases and conditions affecting the adult and paediatric patient. The unit will address the current understanding of disease and mechanisms of trauma affecting the respiratory, cardiovascular, neurological, abdominal and muscular skeletal systems. Consideration will also be given to the way in which pathology affects normal physiology and the consequences this understanding has for the accurate interpretation of radiographic images including CT images. Additionally the unit will provide an opportunity for radiographers to explore health problems observed in practice using a case-based approach and determine the appropriateness of radiographic investigations to aid diagnosis and treatment.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse the complexity of symptoms and signs of thoracic pathology, to help determine appropriate investigations to aid diagnosis and treatment.
  2. Apply knowledge of a range of cardiac and vascular pathologies to enable critical analysis of radiographic and CT images.
  3. Relate the functions of the organs comprising the hepatobilary and digestive systems with their associated pathologies to help determine appropriate investigations, to aid diagnosis and treatment.
  4. Describe the major anatomical and pathological features used in the diagnosis of significant musculoskeletal disorders to help determine appropriate investigations, to aid diagnosis and treatment.
  5. Distinguish the specific characteristics of CNS pathology such as neoplasia and infection, to help determine appropriate investigations, to aid diagnosis and treatment.
  6. Recognise the patterns of acute brain trauma and distinguish between the different causes of stroke to help determine appropriate investigations, to aid diagnosis and treatment.

Assessment

5 x Image-based assignments (600 words each) (10% each) (50%)
2 x Work-based case studies (1,500 words each) (20% each) (40%)
4 x Short Moodle-based MCQ tests (15-20 questions, 20-30 minutes duration, 2-3 marks each) (10%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 6 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 6 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Hamidreza Pousti

Synopsis

This unit will examine ICT and the hardware infrastructure that underpins secure delivery of the software applications and the robustness required to deliver modern health services. Picture Archive and Communication Systems (PACS) and Radiology Information Systems (RIS) are two health applications to be covered more in depth, together with an overview of other health related software applications such as the Electronic Patient Record (EPR). Students will also explore project and change management principles and learn how they can be applied more specifically to advanced medical radiation practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe their obligations in relation to Patient Health Record Privacy and Security.
  2. Explain how knowledge of ICT terminology and practices facilitates more effective outcomes for users of health services.
  3. Distinguish between the various components of the IT infrastructure including Network, Virtual Server environment and ICT support mechanisms.
  4. Critically evaluate the roles and interdependencies of the software applications of PACS and RIS, and their relationship with other health IT applications.
  5. Apply the principles of Project Management and Change Management methodologies in their work.
  6. Demonstrate how health informatics functions across the wider health domain and how integration is applied.
  7. Create Business Continuity Plans and Disaster Recovery Plans for their Health IT applications.

Assessment

3 x Medical imaging data management case based assignments (30% each). The deliverables incorporates 1,500 words report for each and a Wiki-based terminology building exercise (5% of the assessment).
2 x Online quizzes (10%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 6 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 6 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Matthew Dimmock

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of CT Radiography Practice and the Master of Radiography Practice. It extends knowledge of the basic physical principles of molecular imaging and introduces the methodologies that underpin the advancements in hybrid imaging. The unit will introduce the student to the current state-of-the-art in multi-modal 3-D volumetric imaging. This imaging paradigm will be contextualised with respect to the different combinations of the individual imaging protocols which are combined to form hybrid images. The protocols of particular relevance include CT, MRI, Ultrasound, SPECT and PET. The hardware requirements of each of these modalities will be discussed in detail, with particular attention paid to the technological advancements that have facilitated the development of fully-hybrid scanning geometries. The techniques for processing and visualising 3-D images will be critically analysed. The unit will describe the physical and mathematical principles related to image registration, segmentation and partitioning. Protocols with respect to patient preparation, monitoring and positioning will also be discussed. The unit will conclude with an examination of the application of quality assurance and quality control principles to the various modality combinations that constitute hybrid imaging.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically evaluate how the different combinations of the individual imaging protocols within hybrid imaging can be utilised to enhance disease diagnosis. The protocols of particular relevance include CT, MRI, Ultrasound, SPECT and PET.
  2. Differentiate between hybrid and multi-modal imaging and explain the challenges that arise in trying to align images both temporally and spatially.
  3. Explain the physical and mathematical principles of image registration, segmentation and partitioning.
  4. Identify and implement the appropriate multi-modal protocols to combine anatomical and functional imaging modalities for cardiovascular and oncological conditions within an evidence based framework.
  5. Accurately apply the principles of quality assurance and quality control to hybrid imaging.

Assessment

2 x Secure online scenario based examinations (15% each) (30%)
2 x Hybrid imaging case studies (1,500 words each) (25% each) (50%)
Report (1,500 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 6 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 6 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

MAP5003, RAD5105 and RAD5106, as well as one of RAD5108 or RAD5110.

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mrs Imelda Williams

Synopsis

This unit builds upon existing knowledge about the features of normal and abnormal radiographic images radiographers have acquired through previous study and clinical practice. The unit will require students to use verified methodologies to interpret radiographic images involving trauma, sport injuries, arthritic diseases and neoplasm affecting the appendicular and axial skeleton of adults and paediatric patients. Advanced knowledge of the biomedical management of trauma and disease together with a detailed understanding of the associated radiographic representation of these pathologies will enable students to provide informed and evidence based comments about their images. The unit will acknowledge the importance of clinical judgement and decision making within the context of image interpretation and provide the tools to better understand and address the issues prevalent in today's health care environment. The unit will contextualise the practice of radiographic image interpretation within the broader context of the health care system and analyse the inter-professional and collaborative mechanisms that lead to a broadening of practice boundaries.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the major features of the medical management of conditions affecting the appendicular and axial skeleton in the adult and paediatric patient.
  2. Critically apply knowledge of sensitivity, specificity, accuracy, search error, detection error and interpretation error in the interpretation of radiographic images of the appendicular and axial skeleton in the adult and paediatric patient.
  3. Use knowledge of common and acute pathologies affecting the appendicular and axial skeleton in the adult and paediatric patient in the creation of a radiographic comment about the images produced to demonstrate these pathologies.
  4. Consistently apply a rigorous and defensible clinical decision making framework to the creation of radiographic commenting in relation to the interpretation of radiographic images of the appendicular and axial skeleton in the adult and paediatric patient.
  5. Contextualise radiographic decision-making within the broader framework of health services and inter-professional collaboration.

Assessment

3 x Secure online tests (15% each) (45%)
3 x Advanced radiography case studies (1,500 words) (25%)
Clinical portfolio (5,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 12 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mrs Imelda Williams

Synopsis

This unit builds upon existing knowledge about the features of normal and abnormal radiographic images radiographers have acquired through previous study and clinical practice. The unit will require students to use verified methodologies to interpret radiographic images of general and more complex conditions including trauma affecting the chest and abdomen in adults and paediatric patients. Advanced knowledge of the biomedical management of trauma and disease together with a detailed understanding of the associated radiographic representation of these pathologies will enable students to provide informed and evidence based comments about their images. The unit will acknowledge the importance of clinical judgement and decision making within the context of image interpretation and provide the tools to better understand and address the issues prevalent in today's health care environment. The unit will contextualise the practice of radiographic image interpretation within the broader context of the health care system and analyse the inter-professional and collaborative mechanisms that lead to a broadening of practice boundaries.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the major features of the emergency medical management of conditions affecting the chest and abdomen in the adult and paediatric patient.
  2. Critically apply knowledge of sensitivity, specificity, accuracy, search error, detection error and interpretation error in the interpretation of radiographic images of the chest and abdomen in the adult and paediatric patient.
  3. Use knowledge of common and acute pathologies affecting the chest and abdomen in the adult and paediatric patient in the creation of a radiographic comment about the images produced to demonstrate these pathologies.
  4. Consistently apply a rigorous and defensible clinical decision making framework to the creation of radiographic commenting in relation to the interpretation of radiographic images of the chest and abdomen in the adult and paediatric patient.
  5. Contextualise radiographic decision-making within the broader framework of health services and inter-professional collaboration.

Assessment

2 x Secure online examinations (60 minutes each) (20% each) (40%)
2 x Advanced radiography case studies (1,500 words each) (10% each) (20%)
Clinical portfolio (2,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 6 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 6 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Marilyn Baird

Synopsis

This unit builds upon existing knowledge radiographers have about modern multislice CT practice including dose reduction strategies and the need to tailor the CT protocol to the clinical indications. The unit will require students to use verified methodologies to implement a range of advanced CT protocols and post-processing approaches when dealing with patients who present for cerebral and neurological CT examinations. Students will critically examine the evidence informed body of knowledge about CT radiation dose, including CTDI, DLP and effective dose and implement dose minimisation techniques/strategies in adult and paediatric cerebral and neurological CT examinations. The unit will address the issue of the widespread use of iodinated radiographic contrast media through an in-depth analysis of risks and benefits for the adult and paediatric patient presenting for CT. The unit will teach students best practice in relation to the production of high quality diagnostic multi-planar and 3D images from images from brain and body perfusion, cerebral CTA studies through the competent use of advanced workstations. The unit will acknowledge the importance of clinical judgement and decision making within the context of image interpretation. Students will learn how to develop a series of CT radiographer comments in relation to emergency cerebral and neurological CT examinations and compare their comments against the gold standard.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Communicate an informed understanding of the principles of CT radiation dose, including CTDI, DLP and effective dose and implement dose minimisation techniques/strategies in clinical CT practice in relation to brain CT examinations of the adult and paediatric patient.
  2. Critically apply knowledge of pharmacological principles of iodinated contrast media, including risk factors, contraindications to the use of iodinated radiographic intravenous contrast media in advanced CT practice and the ongoing refinement of CT pre-examination patient questionnaires.
  3. Implement evidence based CT imaging protocols for acute neurological conditions, brain and body perfusion studies that take into account clinical indications and the provision of high quality patient care within the broader framework of health services and inter-professional collaboration.
  4. Produce and evaluate high quality diagnostic multi-planar and 3D images from cerebral CTA studies through the competent use of advanced workstations.
  5. Communicate the CT appearances of a range of common acute cerebral and neurological disorders.

Assessment

2 x Secure online tests (60 minutes each) (15% each) (30%)
3 x Advanced CT radiography case studies (1,500 words each) (10% each) (30%)
Clinical portfolio (5,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 12 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Marilyn Baird

Synopsis

This unit builds upon the first in a series of two advanced CT radiography practice units that incorporate clinical experience with evidence informed research into modern multislice CT practice. The unit will require students to use verified methodologies to implement a range of advanced CT protocols and post-processing approaches when dealing with adult patients who present for lung analysis and cardiac CT studies and musculo-skeletal conditions for which CT is the primary imaging modality. Students will critically examine the evidence informed body of knowledge about CT radiation dose, including CTDI, DLP, effective dose and implement dose minimisation techniques/strategies in lung analysis CT, cardiac studies and musculo-skeletal CT examinations. The unit will acknowledge the importance of clinical judgement and decision making within the context of the delivery of contrast media in the examinations addressed in the unit and the creation of high quality diagnostic multi-planar and 3D images through the competent use of advanced workstations. The development of a CT radiographer commenting system in relation to musculo-skeletal and lung CT examinations for communication to the multi-disciplinary team will also be covered.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Communicate an informed understanding of the principles of CT radiation dose, including CTDI, DLP and effective dose and implement potential dose minimisation techniques/strategies in clinical CT practice in relation to lung analysis CT, cardiac studies and musculo-skeletal CT examinations.
  2. Inform the inter-professional health care team about risks and benefits of the use of radiographic contrast media in cardiac and musculo-skeletal CT examinations.
  3. Implement evidence based CT imaging protocols for lung analysis, cardiac studies and musculo-skeletal examinations that take into account clinical indications and the provision of high quality patient care within the broader framework of health services and inter-professional collaboration.
  4. Produce and evaluate high quality diagnostic multi-planar and 3D images from cardiac, lung and musculo-skeletal studies through the competent use of advanced workstations.
  5. Communicate the CT appearances of common lung and musculo-skeletal disorders.

Assessment

2 x Secure online tests (30 minutes each) (10% each) (20%)
2 x Advanced CT radiography case studies (20% each) (40%)
Clinical portfolio (2,500 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 6 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 6 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of Advanced Radiation Therapy practice. The unit is designed to build on the undergraduate knowledge of medico-legal, ethical issues, communication and cultural competence as related to the practice of radiation therapy. Students will gain in-depth knowledge of health care regulation. Medico-legal principles relating to assault and negligence, and how these are applied to radiation therapy, will be studied and students will reflect on the impact of these in their own practice. In addition students will also examine current ethical theories and evaluate their applicability to the practice of radiation therapy. Whilst studying these topics, practitioners will be encouraged to critically reflect, analyse and synthesise relevant information from the literature, reflecting on their experiences from clinical practice to further develop and build their critical analysis skills.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Appraise medico-legal principles and reflect on their application to clinical practice, describing how the system of health care is regulated in Australia;
  2. Explain in detail the laws relating to assault and negligence and relate these to radiation therapy practice;
  3. Analyse current ethical theories and how they relate to the practice of radiation therapy;
  4. Evaluate the role of principles-based ethics in radiation therapy;
  5. Appraise communication theories and describe how these apply to professional practice;
  6. Evaluate the perspectives related to cultural competence and describe their relevance to professional practice.

Assessment

2 x Online examinations (30 minutes each) (20%)
Problem-based learning clinical action plan (2,000 words) (30%)
Reflective comparative report (2,000 words) (30%)
3 x Reflective portfolio entries (500 words each) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6001.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of Advanced Radiation Therapy practice. The unit is designed to build on the undergraduate knowledge of psychology and reflective practice. This unit will consist of two key themes, psychological responses to cancer diagnosis and treatment and reflective practice. In Theme 1 students will gain in-depth knowledge on the psychological theories relating to responses to cancer diagnosis, the effects of treatment, grief and death and dying. Students will be able to analyse and describe the cause, nature, presentation and course of psychological responses in people with cancer. Coping mechanisms will be evaluated for cancer patients along the life continuum. In Theme 2, the principles of reflective practice and how these are applied to radiation therapy practice will be studied. In addition, students will also evaluate the role of professional portfolios in documenting reflections and their value to evidencing continuing professional development.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe in detail the cause and nature of psychological/psychiatric problems in cancer patients.
  2. Analyse the presentation and course of psychological/psychiatric problems in people with cancer, reflecting on clinical practice.
  3. Evaluate coping mechanisms and adjustment disorders in radiation oncology patients.
  4. Critically analyse the theories of reflection and apply these in reflecting on practice.
  5. Appraise the role of reflective practice in enhancing patient care in radiation therapy.
  6. Demonstrate the role of reflective practice in a professional portfolio.

Assessment

2 x Online examinations (30 minutes each) (20%)
Problem-based learning clinical action plan (2,000 words) (30%)
Reflective comparative report (2,000 words) (30%)
3 x Reflective portfolio entries (500 words each) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6001.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is a foundation unit of the Master of Advanced Radiation Therapy practice. It will demonstrate how the principles of evidence based health care practice apply to the specialised radiation therapy techniques of Tomotherapy, Proton Therapy, Volumetric Modulated Arc Therapy (VMAT), and stereotactic radiosurgery/radiation therapy equipment such as Cyberknife and Gammaknife. Students will gain in-depth knowledge of the quality assurance and physical principles underpinning each of these specialized radiation therapy techniques. Analytical skills will also be developed in relation to the planning, treatment and verification processes for each technique. In addition, students will analyse novel dose and fractionation regimes with respect to radiobiological models.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Operationalize the principles of evidence based health care practice to the delivery of specialised radiation therapy techniques in the clinical context.
  2. Describe in detail the physical principles and equipment required to deliver a range of specialised radiation therapy techniques.
  3. Critically analyse the role that quality assurance and quality management systems play in the implementation and day-to-day use of specialised radiation therapy techniques.
  4. Appraise the planning and dosimetry principles for a range of specialised radiation therapy techniques.
  5. Evaluate and reflect on approaches to treatment delivery using a range of specialised radiation therapy techniques.
  6. Analyse the approaches to treatment verification for a range of specialised radiation therapy techniques.

Assessment

Scientific essay (4,000 words) (50%)
2 x Reflective Moodle discussion submissions (500 words each) (20%)
Individual structured oral presentation (20 minutes) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course M6001.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This is the second core unit of the Master of Advanced Radiation Therapy Practice. It is designed to meet the needs of Radiation Therapists seeking to extend their knowledge and skills in patient care, assessment and toxicity management. The unit will allow students to develop the skills to formulate strategies to assist in managing patient care and treatment compliance through communication and cultural competence. Students will critically evaluate the tools used to assess and monitor the condition of patients during their treatment course. Students will also analyse information management in relation to their current roles in supporting patients. The assessment and monitoring tools used in evaluating the effects of a cancer diagnosis and treatment will be investigated and their application to radiation therapy practice appraised.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Appraise the issues associated with information literacy and provision of information to cancer patients prior to, during and after radiation therapy
  2. Evaluate and reflect on communication theory relating to patient care, assessment and compliance with treatment
  3. Analyse the concept of cultural competence reflecting on how this may impact on patient care and management
  4. Explain the concept of emotional intelligence and describe how this can be used in patient care strategies
  5. Analyse the impact of cancer diagnosis and the effects of radiation therapy on quality of life
  6. Evaluate the tools which are used for the assessment of patient health, performance status, well-being and satisfaction
  7. Distinguish between the range of toxicity assessment tools used in radiation therapy and apply this to your current practice.

Assessment

Reflective analysis (3,000 words) (30%)
Report (1,500 words) (20%)
Evidence-based critical case analysis (2,500 words) (20%)
Comparative analysis (3,000 words) (30%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 12 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This foundation unit of the Master of Advanced Radiation Therapy Practice is designed to meet the needs of Radiation Therapists seeking to advance their understanding and extend their knowledge of current issues which impact on radiation therapy and oncology service delivery. Workforce issues related to radiation therapy and oncology service delivery will be studied and students will evaluate the factors that impact on resource management. Students will study government policy, quality assurance systems, standards, and novel initiatives in relation to radiation therapy and oncology. Issues associated with rural and regional radiation oncology service delivery and cultural and demographic factors that affect utilisation of radiation oncology services will also be discussed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse and synthesise the impact of a range of factors on radiation oncology service delivery with respect to your local context
  2. Critically evaluate current and future workforce issues with respect to your local context, reflecting on your professional experience
  3. Appraise the impact of cultural and other demographic factors on cancer control and radiation therapy utilisation
  4. Discuss government initiatives and policies in relation radiation oncology service delivery
  5. Evaluate national and international radiation therapy and oncology standards and reflect on your experience of implementation of standards in your clinical centre
  6. Explain quality assurance requirements in radiation therapy, reflecting on the impact of implementation of these on radiation therapy service delivery
  7. Appraise the barriers and enables to regional and rural radiation oncology service delivery
  8. Evaluate current and future factors impacting on resource management in radiation therapy service delivery with respect to your local context.

Assessment

Evidence-based business case (3,000 words) (25%)
Structured oral presentation (Individual) (20 minutes) (20%)
Critical reflection on the presentation (1,000 words) (10%)
Journal article (3,000 words) (25%)
Moodle discussion board posting (1,000 words) (10%)
2 x Reflective evidence-based responses (500 words each) (10%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 12 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This is an elective unit in the Radiation Therapy stream of the Master of Advanced Health Care Practice. It is designed to build on the practitioners' knowledge and experience in radiation therapy of the breast. Students will extend their understanding of radiation therapy dose and fractionation schedules, localisation, planning, treatment and verification techniques for breast cancer. The unit will present the current issues facing radiation therapy planning and treatment of breast cancer, including the radiobiological rationale for contemporary and novel dose and fractionation schedules. Current and future approaches to irradiation of the breast will be appraised, with reference to the evidence base and reflections from clinical practice. Students will explore the use of multi-modality imaging in the planning and verification of breast cancer treatments.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the relationship between radiobiology and dose/fractionation regimes for breast cancer with respect to novel schedules, reflecting on issues associated with their implementation.
  2. Justify the selection of imaging modalities utilised in the diagnosis, planning and treatment verification of breast cancer.
  3. Analyse and reflect on current and novel radiation therapy planning techniques for breast cancer.
  4. Evaluate the emerging approaches to radiation therapy for breast cancer and reflect on the issues associated with implementation of these.
  5. Appraise side effects and their management in relation to radiation therapy of the breast and discuss the role of toxicity scoring tools in assessing these.
  6. Analyse patient care and management strategies for patients with breast cancer in relation to optimizing health and well-being during the course of radiation therapy.

Assessment

Literature review (3,000 words) (30%)
Clinical action plan (1,500 words) (20%)
2 x Evidence-based reports (1,000 words each) (10%)
Responses to peer's planning report (500 words) (5%)
2 x Evidence-based reports (1,000 words each) (10%)
Responses to peer's planning report (500 words) (5%)
Evidence-based critique (2,000 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 12 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This elective unit is designed to meet the needs of Radiation Therapists seeking to extend their understanding of the principles and application of imaging techniques in clinical practice. Techniques such as such as image fusion and registration, image guidance and adaptive radiation therapy will be studied with a requirement for the student to reflect on clinical practice. Students will gain an in-depth knowledge of the imaging equipment used in pre-treatment and treatment imaging processes and critically reflect on its application in clinical practice. Students will be able to critically evaluate a range of issues associated with on-treatment imaging, quality assurance and accuracy and reproducibility.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse image fusion and registration techniques and equipment reflecting on their application to clinical practice.
  2. Evaluate contemporary approaches and convention related to volume delineation.
  3. Describe in detail the techniques and equipment used for pre-treatment imaging and on-treatment imaging and matching.
  4. Appraise and reflect on issues associated with the implementation multi-modality imaging in planning and treatment in your clinical centre.
  5. Analyse the rationale for employing image matching and adaptive radiation therapy protocols.
  6. Evaluate the role of quality assurance in relation pre-treatment and on-treatment imaging.

Assessment

Clinical action plan (1,500 words) and comparative reflective analysis (1,000 words) (20%)
Evidence-based imaging protocol (2,000 words) (20%)
Oral case presentation (Individual) (20 minutes) (30%)
Reflective peer review (1,000 words) (10%)
4 x Treatment analyses (500 words each) (20%)

Workload requirements

Off-campus: 12 hours per week of direct engagement in the learning materials and 12 hours of self-directed study for 12 weeks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

This unit addresses scientific and technical principles of diagnostic ultrasound and the scanning modes. The fundamentals of ultrasound transducers, continuous-wave and pulse-wave high frequency sound, A-mode, M-mode and B-mode diagnostic ultrasound scanning, the Doppler effect, spectral Doppler, colour and power Doppler and associated instrumentation are introduced. Recent developments in harmonic imaging and the use of contrast agents are presented. Safety issues are also covered including an understanding of bio-effects and bio-hazards. Students will develop skills in the recognition of image artefacts, the implementation of a quality assurance program and in optimising image quality.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to demonstrate and communicate a broad and critical conceptual understanding of:

  1. ultrasound production, propagation and tissue interactions and the focusing and steering of ultrasound beams;
  2. the instrumentation, performance and use of A-mode, real-time B-mode and M-mode scanning in ultrasound practice;
  3. the Doppler effect and Doppler modes used in diagnostic ultrasound to image vascular flow including spectral, colour and power modes;
  4. image quality, relevant image processing, the recognition of artefacts and instrument calibration;
  5. safety issues in medical ultrasound, bio-effects and potential bio-hazards;
  6. advances in harmonic imaging the use of contrast agents and future trends on transducer technologies.

Assessment

1 x Written examination (3 hours) (70%)
2 x Clinically oriented case report comprising a clinical action plan (1,000 words each) and a comparative learning report (500 words) (15% each)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in the written examination.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 3433.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy MacLeod

Synopsis

This unit initially explores the main stages of embryonic development and then addresses specific systems such as the central nervous system, gastrointestinal tract and the genitourinary system in more detail. The second major component addresses the gross, regional and sectional anatomy of the thyroid, abdomen and pelvis, the vascular, musculoskeletal, hepatobiliary and genitourinary systems along with examples of pathophysiology relevant to medical ultrasound. A key component throughout this unit is the development of image evaluation skills in relation to the cross-sectional, coronal and sagittal display of these structures and their surrounding regional anatomy.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe and explain the major stages of embryology, and the specific embryonic development of the digestive, genitourinary, and central nervous system;
  2. Describe and identify the normal structure and function of the vascular system, and explain common vascular pathologies such as atherosclerosis and deep vein thrombosis and their risk factors and symptoms;
  3. Describe the musculoskeletal system in general, explain the anatomy and relevant pathophysiology of the shoulder and knee in detail, and identify normal anatomy;
  4. Identify regional abdominal anatomy, including cross-sectional anatomy, and explain the pathophysiology of the hepatobiliary system and pancreas;
  5. Describe the normal anatomy, physiology and common pathologies of the thyroid and breast, and identify normal anatomy;
  6. Identify regional pelvic anatomy, including cross-sectional anatomy, and explain the pathophysiology of the urinary and reproductive systems.

Assessment

1 x Written examination (3 hours) (70%)
2 x Assignments (1,500 words each) (15% each)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in the written examination.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Must be enrolled in course 3433.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

The initial component introduces key principles of medicolegal practice, medical ethics and professional communication. In the second part of the unit, the breast and thyroid are used as exemplars to relate these principles to the practice of medical ultrasound. Sonographic scanning methods and techniques for examinations of the breast and thyroid will be introduced, information gathering techniques and the elements of a clinical history will be discussed, interpretational skills in respect to the recognition of the sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants and disease processes affecting the breast and the thyroid will be developed.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key principles of medical law and medical ethics;
  2. identify potential medico-legal and ethical situations arising from sonographic practice and the communication of sonographic findings to patients, radiologists or sonologists and referring medical practitioners;
  3. apply information gathering techniques and take a clinical history;
  4. perform routine sonographic examinations of the breast and thyroid safely and to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  5. recognise and describe normal and abnormal sonographic appearances of the breast and thyroid and related artefacts;
  6. appreciate when modifications to routine scanning approaches are required as well as the limitations of ultrasound in respect to imaging the breast and thyroid.

Fieldwork

Students must be actively engaged in supervised ultrasound clinical practice in the workplace for at least three days a week (or equivalent). It is the student's responsibility to secure a supervised ultrasound clinical placement in the workplace.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (Hurdle)
Clinical skills assessment (Hurdle)
2 x Assignments (1,500 words each) (20%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Reflective journal (20%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in each of the written examination, and image recognition examination and reflective journal. Hurdle requirements must be met.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods and standard protocols related to examinations of adult liver, gallbladder, biliary system, pancreas, gastrointestinal tract, urinary system, spleen, retroperitoneum, abdominal wall and related vascular structures. The scientific principles underpinning tissue harmonic imaging and use of contrast agents in abdominal sonography. Interpretational skills in respect to recognition of sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants, disease processes and ability to modify standard sonographic approaches with regards to the clinical question and patient presentation.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe and justify the selection of protocols, imaging parameters, equipment and transducers for sonographic examinations of the organs and structures comprising the digestive and urinary systems;
  2. perform routine sonographic examinations of the abdomen safely and to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer:
  3. recognise and describe normal and abnormal sonographic appearances of the organs and structures comprising the digestive and urinary systems and related artefacts;
  4. appreciate the need to adapt and modify standard imaging protocols when dictated by the clinical condition of the patient together with the limitations of this imaging method;
  5. use Spectral, Colour and Power Doppler techniques where appropriate;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the application of contrast agents and tissue harmonic imaging in abdominal sonography, describe and apply quality assurance principles to sonographic abdominal imaging.

Fieldwork

Students must be actively engaged in supervised ultrasound clinical practice in the workplace for at least three days a week (or equivalent). It is the student's responsibility to secure a supervised ultrasound clinical placement in the workplace.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (Hurdle)
2 x Assignments (1,500 words each) (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in each of the written examination, and image recognition examination and clinical skills assessment. Hurdle requirements must be met.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods, standard protocols and interpretational skills for recognition of sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants and disease processes associated with the female pelvis, the scrotum and its contents. Appreciation of when to modify standard approaches to the clinical question and patient presentation and recognise limitations of ultrasound in relation to other medical imaging and laparoscopic examinations of the reproductive system.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe and justify the selection of imaging parameters, equipment and transducers, infection control measures and consent protocols for sonographic examinations of the female pelvis and the scrotum;
  2. perform routine transabdominal and transvaginal scanning of the female pelvis and routine sonographic examinations of the scrotum to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  3. describe and recognise the normal and abnormal sonographic appearances of the male and female reproductive systems and related artefacts;
  4. appreciate the need to adapt and modify standard imaging protocols when dictated by the clinical condition of the patient;
  5. use Spectral, Colour and Power Doppler techniques where appropriate;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the limitations of ultrasound in relation to the diagnosis of pathology in the male and female pelvis;
  7. describe and apply quality assurance principles to sonographic imaging of the reproductive system.

Fieldwork

Students must be actively engaged in supervised ultrasound clinical practice in the workplace for at least three days a week (or equivalent). It is the student's responsibility to secure a supervised ultrasound clinical placement in the workplace.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (Hurdle)
2 x 1,500 words assignments (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in each of the written examination, and image recognition examination and clinical skills assessment. Hurdle requirements must be met.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Review of human genetics, pregnancy and human development. Scanning methods/techniques including transabdominal, transvaginal, transperineal related to sonography of the 3 trimesters of pregnancy, evaluation of ectopic pregnancy and assisted fertilisation techniques. Ethical principals re-examined in light of this medical speciality. Ultrasound of multiple pregnancies, obstetric ultrasound interventional techniques, sonographic assessment of gestational age and growth and use of ultrasound in prenatal diagnosis of congenital anomalies and diagnosis of foetal death in utero. Physical principles of visualising surfaces in 3D and their applications for obstetric ultrasound.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the events of foetal development and circulation;
  2. Describe foetal and placental anomalies;
  3. Demonstrate appropriate knowledge and understanding of genetics, indications and the application of ethics in obstetric ultrasound examinations and the use of ultrasound in the prenatal diagnosis of congenital anomalies;
  4. Describe appropriate sonographic imaging techniques and methods to demonstrate normal embryonic processes and pathology visible in the first trimester, including ectopic pregnancy, normal and abnormal fetoplacental anatomy;
  5. Assess gestational age and growth in the second and third trimesters and growth disorders in the third trimester;
  6. Assess gestational age and growth in the second trimester and growth disorders in the third trimester;
  7. perform routine transabdominal, transvaginal and transperineal sonographic examinations involving the 1st, 2nd and 3rd trimesters of both single and multiple pregnancies safely and to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer*;
  8. Use the theory and interpretive skills obtained in this unit in the performance of transabdominal, transvaginal and transperineal ultrasound examinations involving the 1st, 2nd and 3rd trimesters*;
  9. Recognise and describe placental abnormalities and foetal death, normal embryonic processes and pathology visible in the first, second and third trimesters.

  • The level of the competency obtained will be dependent on access to obstetric ultrasound clinical experience. There is provision to perform to a lower standard (advanced beginner) as many students now have limited or restricted access to ultrasound practice.

Fieldwork

Students must be actively engaged in supervised ultrasound clinical practice in the workplace for at least three days a week (or equivalent). It is the student's responsibility to secure a supervised ultrasound clinical placement in the workplace.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (Hurdle)
2 x Assignments (1,500 words each) (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in each of the written examination, and image recognition examination and clinical skills assessment. Hurdle requirements must be met.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods and standard protocols related to examinations of the musculoskeletal system and paediatric brain, hips and abdomen. Interpretational skills in respect to recognition of sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants, disease processes and the ability to modify standard sonographic approaches with regards to the clinical question and patient presentation. Particular attention will be paid to the principles of neonatal and paediatric patient care.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the anatomy, pathophysiology and sonographic appearances of common disorders affecting the musculoskeletal system;
  2. describe the anatomy, pathophysiology and sonographic appearances of common disorders affecting the neonatal brain, hips and abdomen;
  3. describe sonographic imaging techniques and protocols to facilitate the production of diagnostic images demonstrating the shoulder and knee joints, neonatal brain, hips and paediatric abdomen;
  4. perform sonographic examinations of the shoulder and/or the paediatric kidneys to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  5. appreciate the need to adapt and modify the standard imaging protocols when dictated by the clinical presentation or clinical question;
  6. describe the application of patient care principles to neonatal and paediatric sonography.

Fieldwork

Students must be actively engaged in supervised ultrasound clinical practice in the workplace for at least three days a week (or equivalent). It is the student's responsibility to secure a supervised ultrasound clinical placement in the workplace.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of the requisite number of ultrasound examinations (Hurdle)
2 x Assignments (1,500 words each) (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in each of the written examination, and image recognition examination and clinical skills assessment. Hurdle requirements must be met.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods, techniques and protocols related to selected examinations of the cardiovascular system. Gross anatomical structure and function and relevant pathophysiological disorders associated with the cardiovascular and immune systems. Interpretational skills in respect to artefacts and the sonographic appearances of the examinations addressed will be gained. The process of organ rejection and the role of ultrasound in the postoperative evaluation of liver and renal transplants. Quality assurance, sonographic measurement techniques, the utilisation of specific duplex modalities and the use of stents and grafts in vascular surgery.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe the gross structure and pathophysiological processes including organ rejection associated with the cardiovascular and immune systems;
  2. recognise artefacts with the cross-sectional representation of the upper and lower limb venous and arterial systems and carotid and vertebral arteries on sonographic images;
  3. demonstrate knowledge and understanding of imaging modes, sonographic techniques and methods suitable for vascular imaging and the assessment of blood flow and organ perfusion;
  4. perform basic vascular sonographic examinations, including functional measurements of selected vessels of the cardiovascular system to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  5. describe and apply quality assurance principles to sonographic vascular and transplant imaging.

Fieldwork

Students must be actively engaged in supervised ultrasound clinical practice in the workplace for at least three days a week (or equivalent). It is the student's responsibility to secure a supervised ultrasound clinical placement in the workplace.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of the requisite number of ultrasound examinations (Hurdle)
2 x Assignments (1,500 words each) (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in each of the written examination, and image recognition examination and clinical skills assessment. Hurdle requirements must be met.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Online)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

The unit aims to facilitate the process of research in medical ultrasound. Firstly, the unit will extend the knowledge and understanding of research methodology gained in the research methods unit and additionally focus attention upon a range of practical, technical and management issues associated with the conduct of scientific research. The unit will facilitate student access to academics or clinicians offering projects and who will support the student during all stages of the inquiry process.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students will have gained knowledge and understanding of the research process; an increased capacity to critically appraise the literature; a capacity to apply research findings to their clinical practice; a capacity to communicate research findings to the wider community; and an enhanced capacity to extend the critical, ethical and creative research stance to their everyday clinical practice.

They will:

  1. Gain greater insight into the worthiness of the ultrasound and medical literature and the veracity of new knowledge as it applies to clinical practice;
  2. Gain experience in identifying research problems in medical ultrasound and developing a research plan that will assist in the resolution of the research question;
  3. Develop knowledge and understanding of the practical, technical and management issues associated with the design and conduct of a research project;
  4. Gain experience in identifying ethical aspects of a research project and the subsequent process of gaining Ethics Approval;
  5. Develop skills in applying a particular research method to the resolution of a research question;
  6. Develop skills in logical and critical thought and analysis;
  7. Develop skills in the process whereby the development of new knowledge and understanding can be communicated in a coherent manner to a wider professional audience;
  8. Gain skills in self organisation in terms of the completion of a project within a set time frame; and
  9. Develop the capacity to extend the critical, ethical and creative stance to the clinical setting.

Assessment

Literature and research plan (5,000 words) (25%)
Reflective research diary (2,000 words) (5%)
Oral presentation (15 minutes) (10%)
Research report (4,000 words) (60%)

Requirement to obtain a pass: Students must submit all assessment tasks and obtain at least 50% of available marks overall and at least 50% of available marks in the research report.

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Graduate Diploma units (SON4000, SON4010, SON4020, SON4021, SON4022, SON4023, SON4024, SON4025) and CRH5003.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Concepts and principles of health practice in different communities and the impact on the people in those communities are explored. Differences in communities across Australia are also examined, and their influence on health outcomes and access to health services. The nature of metropolitan and rural communities are also examined and the health/illness patterns explored from a social and epidemiological framework. Structure and function of health care services and their role in maintaining the health status of individuals and communities are covered as well as health care practice in different communities from the point of view of the rural health professional, including consideration of personal and professional issues and on-going issues of recruiting and retaining health professionals in rural areas.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically analyse definitions of metropolitan, regional, rural and remote as they pertain to health;
  2. Communicate and understand the impact social structures, roles and relationships have on the health and well-being of people living in differing communities;
  3. Use evidence to identify the factors which affect the health status of Australians living in communities of different sizes and locations;
  4. Engage in critical appraisal of the structures and processes involved in health services delivery across varying communities;
  5. Differentiate between the aspects of rural and remote practice that distinguish it from practice in the metropolitan setting;
  6. Critically analyse the factors that affect the recruitment and retention of health practitioners in differing communities.

Assessment

Case study of a rural/remote community (3,000-3,500 words) (50%)
Interview with a rural practitioner (2,500 words) (35%)
Discussion forum (15%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedMoe First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anske Robinson

Synopsis

This unit aims to orientate the student to research through an exploration of the nature of health professional research. The unit will assist students to interpret published research and enhance their appreciation of the ethical issues that health researchers face. The delivery of the unit is via WebCT.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Recognise and appreciate the importance of research to health care practice;
  2. Critically appraise research reports;
  3. Discuss the application of various research methods to their own practice;
  4. Identify a range of health care problems that could be investigated by research;
  5. Develop skills related to the design, implementation and evaluation of research proposals;
  6. Apply selected findings to health and health-related research to improve practice.

Assessment

Written assignment: Qualitative research design and data analysis (30%)
Written assignment: Quantitative research design and data analysis (30%)
Written assignment: Critiquing research literature and designing research (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe First semester 2015 (Online)
Moe Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Angelo D'Amore

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to research methods used in health research. It aims to equip students with the theoretical knowledge of research design and methods used in undertaking research, and the practical skills to conduct their own research. Students will develop skills in formulating research questions, searching the literature for evidence, identifying and understanding the components of rigorous research design, appropriate data collection strategies and data analysis techniques, and ensuring research is conducted in an ethically and culturally sensitive manner. By the end of the unit, student will have the necessary knowledge and skills to initiate their own research project as the basis for a minor thesis, or to conduct a research project within their workplace.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Differentiate between the different theoretical approaches and methods used in conducting health research.
  2. Critically appraise research literature.
  3. Evaluatethe novelty and significance of a research study.
  4. Design a research project which is rigorous and ethical.
  5. Identify feasibility issues implementing a research study.

Assessment

Web based quizzes (1.5 hours) (15%)
Literature review (2,000 words) (20%)
Presentation (25%)
Methods and ethics protocol (3,000 words) (30%)
Discussion forum (1,000 words) (10%)

Workload requirements

For this distance education unit, students are expected to undertake their work during private study time. Students will be expected to log onto Moodie on a regular basis for announcements and updates.

Students will need to undertake readings (available via Moodie) and view online materials (e.g. PowerPoint/audio/visual material).
Students will also be required to undertake regular formative activities. Students will be required to undertake all assessment activities as these are all hurdle requirements to ensure that all learning objectives are covered. The assessments will require preparation ranging from readings, writing and undertaking online activities (quizzes and forum discussions).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Rural health, Health services management, International health

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit explores the context in which drug use and drug management occur in rural areas of Australia. The unit introduces students to current, and at times contentious, debates in the alcohol and other drug field and examines responses to these issues in the community and in services in rural areas. Students are encouraged to critically appraise drug issues and apply these understandings to particular rural communities. Core topics explore: historical context of drug issues; theories of addiction; current drug policies in Australia; the cultural context of drugs and alcohol; drug use in rural Australia; drug services in rural areas; co-morbidity and dual diagnosis.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. understand current issues facing AoD users AoD service providers in rural areas;
  2. gain a basic knowledge of national, community-based, and specialist interventions to reduce AoD related harm in rural Australia
  3. reflect on the ways that social factors (e.g. historical, cultural, policy factors) influence AoD use and service provision in rural areas;
  4. be aware of theories and understandings of drug use and addiction in rural areas; and
  5. apply these understandings on AoD issues to drug use and drug services in particular local areas.

Assessment

Discussion group forum (30%)
Short critique (30%)
Essay (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe First semester 2015 (Online)
Moe Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Waller

Synopsis

This unit is concerned with developing the knowledge and skills necessary for successful rural interprofessional practice. The material will assist health professionals to organise and interconnect activities and roles with other professionals and occupational groups for the benefit of rural patients. The delivery of the unit is a combination of self-directed learning and interactive workshops focusing on theoretical knowledge and practical skills. This unit is relevant to all health professionals and, the skills gained by students are applicable for current and future work in the health sector and, will benefit any subsequent community in which they work.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Critically examine the principles of interprofessional practice as related to their own practice;
  2. Identify the characteristics of effective interprofessional teams and their influence on patient centred care;
  3. Explore the diversity, effectiveness and impact of interprofessional practice in rural health practice;
  4. Develop a model of interprofessional practice which can be used to evaluate an existing or theoretical practice environment.

Assessment

Workshop 1 (1,500 words equivalence) (25% comprising 10% online discussion and 15% participation in work)
Workshop 2 (2,100 words equivalence) (35% comprising written assignment 15% and 20% participation in work)
Project proposal (2,400 words equivalence) (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe First semester 2015 (Online)
Moe Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Waller

Synopsis

In this unit students will be implementing the proposal developed in SRH5016. Goals and objectives will be negotiated through individual student learning contracts.

Outcomes

Negotiated clinical project

Assessment

Project (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe Second semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)Dr Eleanor Mitchell

Synopsis

Designed to support in the preparation for the independent research project (minor thesis). It contains a theoretical component, but is aimed at teaching practical research skills. Students are taught how to translate their thoughts and interests into a sound research project by undertaking a critical review of the literature, developing a research proposal and preparing an ethics application.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Communicate an understanding of the use of research as a basis for decision making in the health care policy and clinical arena particularly in its application to health care practice;
  2. Undertake a critical analysis of the research literature in response to the proposed research question;
  3. Develop a research proposal which explains the selection of appropriate research questions, designs and implementation plans within a health or community setting;
  4. Prepare an ethics application which examines the ethical considerations, legislation and guidelines in promoting ethical conduct in research.

Assessment

Literature review (2,500 words) (40%) (Hurdle)
Research proposal (2,500 words) (40%) (Hurdle)
Ethics application (1,000 words) (20%) (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedMoe First semester 2015 (Online)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Environmental change can have both direct and indirect effects on human health. Exploring issues such as global climate change and loss of biodiversity, this unit will examine relationships between human health and anthropogenic environmental change (environmental change accelerated by human activity). Questions underpinning students' exploration will be: What is the relationship between the health of the environment and the health of human communities? Do ecological changes affect human health and well being? What are possible solutions? How do we act in the face of lack of evidence, gaps in knowledge, uncertainty and conflicting evidence. The emphasis of the unit will be on global and regional environmental change and how this manifests at a local level in both individuals and populations. The role of health professionals and policy makers will be explored and students will reflect on their own personal viewpoints and practice as professionals and as global citizens. Students will examine local and regional issues relevant to their professional practice and place these in the larger global context. Multidisciplinary approaches to an ecological perspective of health - the concept of a web of interconnected, interacting and dynamic relationships which embeds humans in their physical environment - will be applied to examine issues such as: health effects of global warming; health effects of loss of biodiversity; vector-borne and zoonotic diseases and agricultural pollutants.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Discuss specific examples of direct and indirect effects of anthropogenic environmental change on human health;
  2. Critically analyse processes of interaction between anthropogenic environmental change and human health at a local, regional and global level using ecological perspectives on health and the physical environment;
  3. Examine the socioeconomic context of environmental change and health in differing vulnerabilities and rural and urban populations;
  4. Critically analyse strategies for dealing with lack of evidence, conflicting evidence and uncertainty;
  5. Reflect on the impact of studying this unit on your own professional practice and personal perspectives; and
  6. Undertake an ecological analysis of a selected issue and develop recommendations that will help to improve practice.

Assessment

Case study analysis (1,500 words) (20%)
Reflective essay (3,000 words) (40%)
Group discussion activities (2,000 words) (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marija Dragic

Synopsis

This unit offers an overview of the history and contemporary context of social work practice within a framework of understanding the connection between social issues, policy development and strategies for sustainable change at both local and global levels. The unit is underpinned by notions of social justice and human rights and offers a preview of topics that will be studied in greater depth in subsequent units within the course.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the nature of social work in a range of contexts and settings as well as describe contemporary debates about the nature of social work.
  2. Critically analyse the ethical value base of social work with particular reference to human rights and the promotion of social justice.
  3. Critically analyse key global social policy issues including, but not limited to, mass movement of people, climate change, reconstruction and poverty.
  4. Critically review and analyse contemporary trends in the delivery of social work services.
  5. Articulate the nature of social change and the strategies to achieve this.

Assessment

Major essay (2,500 words) (60%)
Written assessment (2,000 words) (40%)

Workload requirements

The unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Bernadette Saunders

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the history and evolution of the international human rights regime, current debates about human rights locally, nationally and internationally, as well as ethical codes and decision-making processes as they apply to social work practice. The unit provides opportunities for students to explore the foundations of the Australian legal system in a human rights framework and the legal contexts within which social workers practice. The unit addresses concepts of moral philosophy underpinning the AASW Code of Ethics and explores the foundations of ethical decision-making. In line with Monash University's commitment to human rights and social justice, the unit has an overarching human rights approach, within which legal and ethical practice occurs.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Utilise a human rights framework in a social work practice situation;
  2. Describe the history and current context of the international human rights regime;
  3. Demonstrate a beginning knowledge of local, national and international legal; systems and how they interface with social work practice;
  4. Read and consider the impact of legislation relevant to social work practice;
  5. Implement a process of ethical decision-making, making use of the AASW Code of Ethics and other relevant tools;
  6. Analyse ethical and legal issues relevant to social work practice;
  7. Reflect critically on their approach to human rights and ethical issues;
  8. Write required commentary on human rights, ethics and legal issues.

Assessment

On-campus students - attendance/participation in seminars/tutorials (10%)
Off-campus students - participation in on-line discussion/commentary (10%)
Court/tribunal related short answer questions and/or report (1,500 words) (40%)
A structured written commentary on a human rights, legal and ethical issue or case study (2,000 words) (50%)

Workload requirements

On-campus students attend a 3 hour seminar/tutorial.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students are required to observe at least one court or tribunal hearing.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi Bay

Synopsis

This unit covers child, adolescent and adult development with an emphasis on the development of resilience across the life course. A particular focus is on risk and protective factors at individual, family, community and societal levels that impede or enhance development. The unit has three parts:

  • a human development component that covers child, adolescent and adult development with an emphasis on the development of resilience across the life course. A particular focus is on the risk and protective factors at individual, family, community and societal levels that impede or enhance child, adolescent and adult development.
  • a social work practice theory section provides an orientation to the theory of direct social work practice with individuals and families focusing on one to one work with individuals and on working with family groups.
  • a skills component that provides the opportunity for students to learn, and apply the direct social work practice skills that include assessment, engagement and the development of intervention strategies through the use of role plays, case studies and problem based learning.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the specific developmental needs that arise in childhood, adolescence and adulthood;
  2. Describe how risk and protective factors enhance or impede the development of resilience in childhood, adolescence and adulthood;
  3. Assess the biopsychosocial development of a child, adolescent and adult and identify the structural factors that have impacted on development;
  4. Critically evaluate the values and assumptions underpinning various theoretical approaches to human development;
  5. Summarize the key evidence in relation to the effectiveness of different approaches to direct social work practice;
  6. Identify the basic elements of the social work process including assessment, the relationship, and the problem solving process;
  7. Demonstrate the key principles in relation to working with children and families and different cultural groups;
  8. Demonstrate competence in engaging with; assessment of and intervention with clients;
  9. Demonstrate appropriate use of 'self' in the professional helping relationship, based on an awareness of self in a familial, social and cultural context.

Assessment

Critical reflection on the life-span (1,000 words)
Case study analysis that asks student to apply the theoretical knowledge learned to a typical social work client situation (2,000 words)
A biopyschosocial assessment of a child, adolescent or adult (2,000 words)
Completion of a role play assessment activity (1,000 words)

Workload requirements

This subject runs for 12 weeks. A twelve point unit requires twenty four hours per week or 312 hours per semester. On campus students will attend for five hours face to face contact per week that will include three hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials. Off-campus students participate in 20 hours residential workshops, four hours per week on online activities and 18 hours per week on private study. Week 12 will not introduce any new material but provide an opportunity for revision and completion of assignments.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are required to attend a compulsory on-campus workshop for successful completion of this unit, where social work practice skills will be taught.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Grace Brown

Synopsis

Supervised Professional Practice 1 enables students to operationalise the professional social work role. The unit comprises 70 days (480 hours) of supervised professional practice in the field and 20 hours of skills development and integration of theory and practice in the classroom and in the field. On campus students will attend placement briefings and integration sessions where their placement experiences will be critically reviewed in order to connect with social work knowledge and theory, while off-campus students will work attend skills and integration sessions at compulsory residential workshops. Liaison visits from University staff to the student and supervisor while on placement will also be opportunities to review skills and to facilitate the integration of theory and practice. The successful completion of a total of 1000 hours (clinical placements and skills) in the MSW (Qualifying) will enable graduates to seek social work positions overseas where the completion of 1,000 hours of clinical practice placement is often an eligibility requirement.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of how theory and practice can be integrated for effective direct service delivery
  2. Demonstrate an ability to practice in accordance with professional social work ethics and familiarity with the AASW Code of Ethics
  3. Demonstrate an ability to articulate and adhere to professional social work values, skills and attributes including an understanding of the nature of professional roles and responsibilities
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of a range of social work intervention strategies applicable to work with individuals, families and communities
  5. Demonstrate an ability to assess and plan appropriate intervention, including evaluation of outcomes, for a range of individual, family and community problems
  6. Demonstrate an ability to appropriately and effectively utilise professional supervision to explore professional practice and to enhance competence and professional identity
  7. Demonstrate an ability to reflectively and critically evaluate client situations and policy approaches.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 70 days.

Assessment

Successful completion of skills component
Learning agreement completed by the student within 15 days of commencement of the placement
Mid-placement review completed by the student and field educator
Final evaluation report completed by the student and field educator
Written case study
Written critical incident report

Workload requirements

70 days placement and 20 hours integration.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Melissa Petrakis

Synopsis

This unit provides an ecological approach to the understanding of contemporary health and mental health concerns that impact on the individuals and families who come to the attention of social work. The subject incorporates weekly direct practice skills seminars to develop key skills for effective social work practice in the health and mental health fields. Social Work interfaces with a range of clients and practice contexts in community health and mental health, in disability, in drug and alcohol settings, in rural and regional settings.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify appropriate competencies for the practice domains that intersect with mental health, including legal and statutory responsibilities;
  2. demonstrate key communication and assessment skills necessary for effective practice with a range of clients in diverse health settings;
  3. reflect critically on their practice- specifically the integration of theory and practice in challenging client situations;
  4. describe specific health problems, recognise the social and psychological components, causes and consequences of ill-health, and have a critical awareness of the socio-economic dimension of health problems;
  5. demonstrate knowledge of the practice and policy frameworks that animate health and mental health and consumer services in Australia;
  6. articulate the factors that influence health and mental health needs of clients and propose distinct and distinctive responses to these;
  7. assess the nature of health and mental health issues and the contributions made by the wide range of professional groups who work with individuals experiencing mental illness;
  8. identify key issues and demonstrate skills in working effectively with clients in health and mental health settings;
  9. structure and present a report on a substantive health issue.

Assessment

Literature review (1,500 words) (25%)
Case study (1,500 words) (25%)
Essay (3,000 words) (50%)
Reflective journal (3,000 words)

Students must pass all assessment tasks to successfully complete the unit.

Workload requirements

The unit runs for 8 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 312 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Melissa Petrakis and Associate Professor Rosemary Sheehan

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are required to attend a compulsory on-campus workshop for successful completion of this unit, where social work practice skills will be taught.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Catherine Flynn

Synopsis

In all fields of contemporary social work, practitioners need the skills to effectively consume, produce and apply research knowledge, to ensure that actions are based on appropriate and critiqued evidence. Research is a powerful intervention tool through which change can be achieved with individuals, groups and communities.

This unit is offered as part of the core requirements of the professional association, the AASW. Social work research is seen to be informed by a clear value base and driven to deliver socially constructive outcomes. The unit will explore research processes, presenting a structured approach to the implementation of a research proposal.

There will be particular emphasis on research in practice: program evaluation, needs analyses and program development; as well as the ethical underpinnings of all research. The overall aim of this unit is to encourage students to become critically reflective, research minded practitioners, who contribute in an ongoing way to the knowledge base of the profession.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Discuss the contributions of research to the wider social work skill and knowledge base and to socially constructive outcomes.
  2. Articulate the most common research methods evident in social work research and discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the different research methods that can be applied to social work.
  3. Critically analyse key approaches to social work practice research.
  4. Demonstrate the knowledge required to evaluate and choose relevant research methods for a range of social work research projects.
  5. Critically evaluate existing research literature, especially in terms of research design.
  6. Design a social work practice research project that meets rigorous and evidence-based design principles.
  7. Identify the ethical issues that need to be considered with respect to the conduct of human research projects.

Assessment

Review of the available research in a specific field of social work practice (40%)
Research proposal in the chosen field, including research significance, aims, methodology, sampling procedures, data collection and analysis and ethical issues (2,500 words) (60%)

Workload requirements

The unit runs for 12 weeks. On-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline, including readings and to complete two assignment tasks.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to complete weekly reading and other online tasks such contribution to an online discussion group; and to complete two assignment tasks.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deborah Western

Synopsis

Group work is a major social work intervention method. In professional practice in the field, social workers are required to practise effective group work interventions in diverse settings, with families, service users, stakeholders, community groups, inter-agency networks, colleagues in the workplace and in policy environments. Students will develop a relationship with a community group or organisation. The unit requires students to work effectively in groups to compare and analyse community groups in which they have been a member.

The unit has a focus on the theory and practice of group work, including the historical development of this social work method, planning and implementing a group work intervention, communication in groups, group leadership and facilitation styles, and managing group dynamics. Students will also learn how to negotiate and navigate a community engagement process with a community group or organisation in the field and successfully complete a 'real-world' group project.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the stages in group development
  2. Apply the stages of group development to their analysis of the student group project
  3. Analyse the impact of different group leadership styles and processes
  4. Demonstrate group problem-solving strategies relevant to a range of social work contexts
  5. Critically analyse all aspects of their own group experience through engaging in critical reflection
  6. Engage effectively with professionals in a community group or organisation through the use of evidence-based community engagement processes
  7. Articulate the features of an effective community engagement process
  8. Negotiate, manage and document the planning and completion of a group project
  9. Evaluate the group and project processes and outcomes through application of evaluation methods appropriate to a range of group work interventions
  10. Integrate relevant organisational, policy and social work practice theory with the group work and project learning experience.

Assessment

Group project report (1,500 words) (30%)
Group presentation (15%)
Critical reflection and analysis essay (2,500 words) (55%)

Students must pass critical reflection and analysis essay in order to pass the unit.

Workload requirements

The unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 156 hours of study per semester. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide (off campus students), which include set readings.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Mandatory attendance is required by off-campus students for a 2 day workshop which is held at the Caulfield campus of the semester break during Semester 1. Dates to be advised at the beginning of Semester 1.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Term 2 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Grace Brown

Synopsis

Supervised Professional Practice 2 enables students to operationalise the professional social work role. In doing so, students are expected to be able to conceptualise, articulate and explain the progress they are making in relation to their development of a professional social work identity. Students will learn to assess and analyse social work situations and plan appropriate intervention strategies across a diverse range of social work methods and settings, from direct practice with individuals and groups, community development, program development, agency administration, policy or research.

Theorizing about social problems, critically analysing interventions and reflecting on how one's 'use of self' impacts on social work relationships are essential components of learning in clinical practice placements. In addition, students are expected to complete a piece of practice research and to develop competencies in line with the AASW's practice standards, while adhering to the AASW Code of Ethics.

The unit comprises 70 days (480 hours) of supervised professional practice in the field and 20 hours of skills development in the classroom and in the field. The successful completion of a total of 1,000 hours (clinical placements and skills) in the MSW (Qualifying) will enable graduates to seek social work positions overseas where the completion of 1,000 hours of clinical practice placement is often an eligibility requirement.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of how theory and practice can be integrated in one or more social work settings
  2. Demonstrate an ability to practise in accordance with professional social work ethics and familiarity with the AASW Code of Ethics
  3. Demonstrate professional social work values, skills and attributes including an understanding of the nature of professional roles and responsibilities
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of a range of social work intervention strategies applicable to work with individuals, families and communities
  5. Demonstrate an ability to assess and plan appropriate intervention, including evaluation of outcomes, for a range of individual, family and community problems
  6. Complete a piece of practice research under supervision
  7. Demonstrate an ability to appropriately and effectively utilise professional supervision to explore professional practice and to enhance competence and professional identity
  8. Demonstrate a commitment to critical and reflective social work practice
  9. Demonstrate an understanding of the complexities of working in an organisational context
  10. Demonstrate competence in meeting the AASW practice standards.

Fieldwork

Clinical placement: 70 days.

Assessment

A learning agreement completed by the student within 15 days of commencement of the placement
A mid-placement review completed by the student and field educator
A final evaluation report completed by the student and field educator
A written case study
A written critical incident report
A written research report

Grading in this unit is on a Pass / Fail basis only.

Workload requirements

For this unit, 70 days (480 hours) will be spent on placement in agencies and organizations. A further 20 hours will be spent at placement briefings or integration sessions, or in private study. Students are required to complete 6 assessment tasks including two joint reports with field educators.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Philip Mendes

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to the specific role of social work in social policy analysis and community practice and advocacy. Areas covered will include the meaning and nature of social policy, the key trends and philosophies underlying the positions of the major political parties, the key theories and ideological perspectives in social policy, the link between social policy and the goals and actions of social work, the impact of social structure and social policy on welfare service consumers, the implementation of social policy interventions in everyday social work practice, ideological critiques of the welfare state, the role, strategies and effectiveness of lobby groups in social policy debates, the link between local and global welfare trends, the concepts of community and community work, and the role of community work skills and strategies in social work practice.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Analyse the nature of contemporary social policy and social policy debates in Australia and internationally
  2. Cite examples, both in the classroom and online, of the way political parties deal with policy issues, and describe the key trends and philosophies underlying the positions of major political parties
  3. Describe and apply key theories and ideological perspectives in social policy, social change and community practice
  4. Identify the impact of social structure and social policy on welfare service users
  5. Implement social policy interventions in their everyday social work practice
  6. Articulate the concepts of community and community work
  7. Make informed choices about using community work practice methods based on contemporary community work research and practice wisdom
  8. Demonstrate competence in a range of community work skills and strategies applicable to social work practice with communities.

Assessment

A critical analysis of a current newspaper or popular journal opinion piece on a social policy topic by a prominent politician, journalist, or public commentator (1,000 words) (20%)
An analysis of public policy debates in an area of Australian social policy related to their placement field using the social policy literature (3,500 words) (80%)

Students must pass all assessment tasks to successfully complete the unit.

Workload requirements

The unit runs for 8 weeks for on-campus students and 12 weeks for off-campus students.
On-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake weekly readings as set out in the Unit Outline, and to complete three assignment tasks. This unit will be taught in a total of 36 hours contact time over 8 weeks following the completion of the second fieldwork placement (SWM5108) for full-time students.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester in private study, completing readings and other tasks as outlined on the Blackboard site in the off-campus Unit Guide, and to complete three assignment tasks. Off-campus students are required to attend a compulsory on-campus workshop for successful completion of this unit, where social work practice skills will be taught.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Chris Trotter

Synopsis

Theories and knowledge regarding direct work with clients in a variety of social work settings. The context of casework practice and some alternative methods of working with individuals and groups.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should:

  1. understand the role and purpose of casework, the sources of knowledge in casework and the relevance of outcome evaluation;
  2. be able to critically analyse their own practice and at least one casework theory.

Assessment

Essay (6,000 words) (70%)
Topic synopsis (1,000 words) (10%)
Essay (2,000 words) (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Fletcher

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to an understanding of leadership in the human services in Australia as a requirement for social work practice, one that is not always understood or accepted professionally. The human services sector is expanding in the numbers of its component organisations, both governmental and non-governmental, and in the size and complexity of the component parts. Leadership of social change and social justice in the human services is now at a premium, having been given little attention in the past or currently. Little is known of leadership requirements in this sector particularly as contrasted with other service sectors. Students undertaking this unit will be introduced to theories of leadership of humanservice organisations, their programs and policies, and leadership of the new organisational phenomena in this sector, large community service departments, non-governmental consortia, and advocacy organisations. They will also be introduced to other notions of leadership in social work - leadership through research, advocacy and community action.

Subsequently, theories of leadership will be placed against the experiences and views of current social work leaders in this sector, who will be active participants in this unit, so that students gain some understanding of what leadership comprises, what priority actual leaders place on the various aspects of leadership, and what research and theory underpins actual leadership in the policy development, planning and delivery of social services today.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe leadership within a professional social work framework through analysis of historical and current leadership examples from the human services sector.
  2. Critically analyse theories of leadership for the human services in Australia.
  3. Contrast leadership theories with selected leaders' experiences and identify and analyse the differences.
  4. Articulate where leadership opportunities and responsibilities exist within the human services sector.
  5. Identify the components of leadership in the humanservices sector and the distinguishing features of leadership in the human services field.

Assessment

A critical analysis of contemporary leadership theories in the light of presentations in the classroom and conveyed online, from social work leaders during the unit (2,000 words) (40%)
An assessment of their own actual and potential contribution to social work leadership, based on critical reflection on practice experience,current data on leadership in a specific field of practice and analysis of relevant literature (2,500 words) (60%)

Students must pass both assessment tasks in order to complete the unit successfully.

Workload requirements

3 hours per week.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 hours per week.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Chris Trotter

Synopsis

The major focus of this unit is on effective methods of working with offenders in the community after they have been placed on court orders. It discusses the objectives of correctional programs and what works best for whom in terms of reducing re-offending.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. have an understanding of the field of corrections, its purpose and its relationship with social work;
  2. have knowledge and understanding of the place of rehabilitation in work with offenders and how this fits with other goals of corrective programs;
  3. be able to articulate the key principles of effective interventions in terms of rehabilitation work with offenders;
  4. have an understanding of the nature of risk assessment and of the advantages criticisms of risk assessment;
  5. be able to identify a number of correctional theories and understand how these relate to the direct practice work done by social workers in this field;
  6. have an understanding of at least one of the specialist programs directed towards offenders.

Assessment

Essay (3,000 words) (25%)
Essay (6,000 words) (75%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi Bay

Synopsis

Theories and models of policy making, program planning and evaluation for human service programs. Organisation contexts and political implications. Key steps in planning and evaluation. Students participate in a planning or evaluation project for a community agency and negotiate the plan with that agency. Students will also take SWM5150 in Semester 2 and finalise the project.

Outcomes

This unit prepares students to plan for the implementation of a planning or evaluation project via learning:

  1. relevant social theories and organisational theories and models of planning and evaluations;
  2. integrating this knowledge into the preparation of a plan for a human service organisation.

Assessment

Major report for the community agency (6,000 words) (67%)
Planning and evaluation exercises (3,000 words) (33%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi Bay

Synopsis

Practical application of theories and concepts learned in SWM5140. Conduct of the previously negotiated planning or evaluation exercise; design of methodology, data collection and analysis; report for community agency.

Outcomes

This unit builds on SWM5140. It aims to enable students to learn how to carry out a planning or evaluation project and report on it, integrating the material learned in SWM5140.

Assessment

Major report for the community agency (6,000 words) (67%)
Planning and evaluation exercises (3,000 words) (33%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Bernadette Saunders

Synopsis

This unit explores a number of issues related to social work practice that involves children; particularly children whose well-being may be at risk or who have suffered child abuse or neglect. Attention will be drawn to the relationship between the child, the family, the community and the state, with a particular focus on children's perspectives, children's status, and children's rights.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Reflect upon the complex relationships between the child, the family, the community and the State;
  2. Develop an understanding of the complexities of child protection practice, and develop an understanding of the links between policy and practice in the fields of child welfare, child protection and child abuse and neglect.

Assessment

Online participation - commentary/discussion (10%)
An annotated bibliography of an issue related to childhood or children in society (3,000 words) (40%)
Detailed plan/selected reference list for an essay on a topic that the student derives from the annotated bibliography (1,000 words) (10%)
Major essay based on assessed topic and detailed plan (4,000 words) (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Trotter

Synopsis

Unit content will be developed between the student and an appointed staff supervisor. One piece of assessment will be developed and completed by the student for this unit. The nature and content of the assessment itself may vary from student to student depending upon their area of interest, the skill area they wish to develop and, in some cases, the requirements of their work organisation. Topics could include small research projects such as evaluations of particular health and welfare programs, pilot studies, literature reviews, or the learning and implementation of particular social work approaches or theories. The research study or project generally takes the form of an academic project or an advanced practicum project. The focus may be on any field in which social workers are employed, dependant on staff availability to supervise.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Further develop their professional role as social work practitioner-researchers.
  2. Integrate research knowledge with past and present work experience.
  3. Deepen specialised practice knowledge and skills from a greater focus on selected areas, including the acquisition of new research-based clinical and program interventions.
  4. Acquire advanced specialised research knowledge and skills that will allow students to develop research-based practice at the clinical, program and policy levels for newly emerging service areas.
  5. Develop and complete a research-based and/or research-informed activity that will contribute to their professional development and to continuous quality improvement activities within their workplace.

Assessment

Research report, evaluation report or assignment (9,000 words) (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deborah Western

Synopsis

At the conclusion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of contemporary theory and practice in human resources management, including:
    • the nature and characteristics of the social and community services (health and welfare) workforce industrial relations in this workforce
    • the different types of organisations in this industrial sector and consequent differences in workforce patterns
    • theories of human resources management as they relate to the health and welfare workforce, and especially to social work staff
    • administrative control of staff
    • professional development of staff
    • support of staff
    • mediation within and between organisations
    • professional staff recruitment; and
    • supervising professional staff in general and through organisational transition.
  2. Consider, analyse, discuss and apply these concepts and theories in your practice as a manager.

Outcomes

The unit will cover the nature and characteristics of the social and community services (health and welfare) workforce, industrial relations in this workforce, the different types of organisations in this industrial sector and consequent differences in workforce patterns, theories of human resources management as they relate to the health and welfare workforce and especially to social work staff, administrative control of staff, professional development of staff, support of staff, mediation within and between organisations, professional staff recruitment, supervising professional staff in general and through organisational transitions.

Assessment

Hurdle requirement of reflective exercises (equivalent to 1,000 words)
Essay (2,000 words) (30%)
Essay or presentation (6,000 words or equivalent) (70%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Chris Trotter

Synopsis

Topics include the purpose of research and its place in social work; research ethics including intellectual property issues; research designs including qualitative, quantitative, exploratory and experimental methods; developing research questions and hypotheses; sampling and data analysis including statistical analysis and writing research reports.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should have developed an understanding of:

  1. ethical issues relating to research with humans;
  2. issues relating to the place and role of different types of research in Social Work;
  3. the principles underlying qualitative and quantitative research;
  4. research design, research questions and data collection methods;
  5. a range of statistical techniques and when it is appropriate to use them.

Students are also required to demonstrate their ability to develop a research proposal.

Assessment

One or two assignments totalling 9,000 words including a research proposal (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Fiona McDermott

Synopsis

Current community health concerns and the preoccupations of health policy and services. Frameworks for conceptualising and assessing the health concerns that impact on individuals, families and communities, are analysed and applied to specific health concerns.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. explore contemporary frameworks used to understand health concerns and inform policy;
  2. consider the application of these frameworks to their own practice and to other settings where health issues predominate.

Assessment

Essay (6,000 words) (67%)
Assignment (3,000 words) (33%)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit presents aspects of contemporary social work policy and practice in ageing through a lens of longevity and ongoing change. Aging is conceptualised in dynamic and innovative ways that reflect and encourage changing perceptions, theoretical understandings and possibilities of this transition phase. The impact of dimensions such as gender, class, location, diversity and spirituality on the transition phases of ageing will be explored. The notion of risk will be examined as an underlying tension in social work practice in this field.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Review contemporary debates about life transitions with a focus on ageing.
  2. Evaluate concepts of ageing and longevity using dimensions such as gender, class, time, space and place.
  3. Assess current and emerging theories of ageing and their relevance to social work.
  4. Critically analyse the notion of risk and its implications for social work practice in this area.
  5. Examine relevant social work policy and practice issues in longevity and ageing.
  6. Apply a multi-dimensional approach in a specific area of ageing.

Assessment

Written assessment (3,000 words) (40%)
Major essay (6,000 words) (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Rosemary Sheehan

Synopsis

This unit introduces postgraduate students to the epistemologies of practice in mental health and a critical analysis of contemporary mental health issues. It provides advanced knowledge about the context and consequences of mental illness for individuals, families and the broader community. Social Work interfaces with a range of clients and practice contexts, in community and mental health, in disability, child protection, drug and alcohol and criminal justice systems. The unit provides an ecological approach to understanding and intervention in the mental health field.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Give students a good understanding of mental health practice and policy frameworks in Australia;
  2. Identify competencies for practice in mental health including legal and statutory responsibilities;
  3. Examine the factors that influence client mental health needs and the service system constructed to met these;
  4. Understand the nature of mental illness and the roles are contributions made by the professional groups who work in mental health;
  5. Evaluate research and service programmes in mental health;
  6. Give students confidence to critically analyse contemporary mental health issues.

Assessment

Literature review (35%)
Major assignment (65%)

Workload requirements

Students in OCDL mode have the unit presented as a unit book which contains weekly seminar readings and exercises and may include an online teaching component. This unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake twelve hours per week study in addition to completing weekly unit tasks set readings.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi Bay

Synopsis

This unit has been designed for front line supervisors of human service delivery and allied health staff. Although the unit draws on frameworks for social work supervision, from line supervisors with qualification from many disciplines will also benefit from this unit and find it contains material that is directly relevant to their workplace and their discipline. The unit will be attractive to supervisors (or potential supervisors) who wish to develop their skills in a creative and dynamic way.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the role of supervisor as that of professional developer.
  2. Identify and articulate key components of clinical supervision.
  3. Develop a supervisory contract/agreement.
  4. Consider the benefits and limitations of individual, group and peer supervision.
  5. Critically evaluate their own supervisory style.
  6. Identify and articulate strategies to create a culture of professional earning within their workplace.
  7. Identify and articulate an understanding of common blocks in supervision and how to overcome these.
  8. Develop a portfolio of their own supervisory style.

Assessment

Hurdle requirement (equivalent 2,000 words)
Assessment in any medium (equivalent 3,000 words)
Assessment (5,000 words)

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Margaret Alston

Synopsis

In recent decades significant global changes have impacted on the way people and communities live their lives. This unit provides an international and national focus on emerging threats such as climate change, water and food security and on factors such as globalisation and social movements, and their gendered impacts on people and communities. Research from across the world reveals that impacts vary significantly between women and men and that these impacts will affect the abilities of families and communities to sustain themselves into the future. Our ability to live sustainably will be one of the challenges of the twenty-first century. Because of the significant social impacts of these changes, this unit provides a social work perspective to this new field of practice. Social workers will be critical workers providing the link between people, communities and the policy environment.

This unit examines these major factors and the potential social work response. It draws on frameworks for practice including a human rights and anti-oppressive perspective and examines policy responses and how these are potentially shaped by key stakeholders and leaders to the exclusion of others. Critical concepts are gender, social inclusion, resilience and sustainability. The unit draws out ways for social workers to become critical change agents.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Articulate a critical understanding of the gendered impacts of climate change across the globe.
  2. Identify relevant social work responses to current and emerging social impacts of climate change, in local, national and international contexts.
  3. Critically analyse the nature of social sustainability in the context of food and water security.
  4. Demonstrate knowledge of social work's role in policies and practices relating to climate change and social sustainability.

Assessment

Annotated bibliography of an aspect of climate change and social sustainability (3,000 words) (40%)
Essay on social work policy and practice responses to a selected aspect of gender, climate change and social sustainability (6,000 words) (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

The unit runs for 13 weeks. For a 12 point unit, off-campus students are expected to spend 24 hours per week completing set tasks outlined in the Unit Guide, undertaking set readings and private research. Online contact such as discussion groups will be initiated by staff.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Monash Medical Centre Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Steven Petratos

Synopsis

Successful clinical research is conducted under the guise of a well-constructed study question that is feasible, interesting, novel, ethical and relevant. A study design must be conceived with appropriate measures of clinical observation and intervention. This unit will establish a fundamental knowledge in drug development, conducting Clinical Trial studies, designing a good protocol, international conference on harmonisation good clinical practice (ICH-GCP) and delegation of responsibility and co-ordination. The unit provides instruction in the development of a clinical research question and creating a concise protocol that includes literature review, study design, subject sampling and recruitment, instruments and other measurement approaches, sample size, consent form, budget and timetable. The aim of the unit is to introduce students to the processes and regulations involved in developing a therapeutic through to clinical trials. Students completing this unit should be able to construct a testable clinical research question and design a protocol that is ethical, well controlled and statistically powerful. Students should also be able to identify the roles of the sponsor, the investigator, the institutional review board/ independent ethics committee and the local regulators.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Design a clinically relevant question and set of experiments.
  2. Outline Good Clinical Practice as followed by the international Conference on Harmonisation.
  3. Identify and describe the key steps in conducting a Clinical Trial including different types of human research and protocols that can be implemented.
  4. Identify and describe the key steps in the drug discovery process including identification of drug targets, Australian regulatory requirements, manufacture, development of a safety profile, clinical development and marketing.
  5. Outline how to manage regulatory documents.
  6. Outline the role of the Sponsor, the investigator, the institutional review board/ independent ethics committee and the local regulators.

Assessment

Essay 1 (1,500 words) (20%)
Essay 2 (1,500 words) (20%)
4 x Online self-directed learning tasks (5% each) (20%)
Online test (20%)
Media release about research (500 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

On-campus: This unit will be delivered as an intensive 1 week program with a total of 24 hours of face-to-face teaching, including lecture and tutorial workshop time. The remaining 10 hours per week (Over 12 week period) is made up of private study time completing on-line exercises, modules and 2 assignments to be submitted at the end of semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Monash Medical Centre Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Steven Petratos

Synopsis

Translational research is a growing and exciting new discipline in medicine that deals with the development of fundamental scientific findings into tangible clinical outcomes. Translational researchers are involved in identifying a worthwhile scientific finding that can be applied to a clinical setting. Along this research and development pipeline are a series of critical check-points that provide the investigator vital tools to generate a valuable result that has merit for translation. This unit will establish a fundamental knowledge in the processes involved in developing a basic science finding through to clinical studies. The unit provides workshop-based learning in the development of discipline-specific laboratory research questions and how they are applied to broader clinical applications. The main focus of this unit is to identify how fundamental scientific questions may have multidisciplinary clinical answers. Other core learning outcomes are through understanding how scientific concepts can be marketed and communicated effectively through research pipeline procedures and the responsibilities of the researcher that may be derived from this.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Outline commercialisation procedures through Licensing, Intellectual Property and patents.
  2. Define the rules of engagement in contract research projects with companies, organisations or government agencies.
  3. Describe the current trends in protein production for pharmaceutical research and clinical applications.
  4. Outline the engineering principle for scale-up, production and purification (upstream and downstream) steps and list the preferred industrial practices including monitoring of processes, product purity and quality.
  5. Recall the utility and accessibility of key technologies that may be incorporated into a Translational Research Project.
  6. Define the principles of mouse colony management and genetic modification.
  7. Outline the current legal and regulatory basis of biobanking, its importance in translational research, how to access banked material and how to manage the data generated.
  8. Recognizing how to talk about your research to the media.

Assessment

Essay 1: Intellectual property & commercialisation (1,500 words) (25%)
Essay 2: Bioprocessing/bioinformatics/biobanking/bioimaging/phenomics (1,500 words) (25%)
Media release - executive summary (500 words) (10%)
Online self-directed learning tasks (6 x 5% = 30%)
Online test (1 hour) (10%)

Workload requirements

On-campus: This unit will be delivered as an intensive 1 week program with a total of 24 hours of face-to-face teaching, including lecture and tutorial workshop time. The remaining 10 hours per week (Over 12 week period) is made up of private study time completing on-line exercises, modules and 1 major assignment to be submitted at the end of semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students need to have completed and passed a minimum of 96 credit points in an undergraduate Science Discipline programme prior to enrolling in this unit.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Monash Medical Centre Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Steven Petratos

Synopsis

Successful clinical research is conducted under the guise of a well-constructed study question that is feasible, interesting, novel, ethical and relevant. A study design must be conceived with appropriate measures of clinical observation and intervention. This unit will establish a fundamental knowledge in drug development, conducting Clinical Trial studies, designing a good protocol, international conference on harmonisation good clinical practice (ICH-GCP) and delegation of responsibility and co-ordination. The unit provides instruction in the development of a clinical research question and creating a concise protocol that includes literature review, study design, subject sampling and recruitment, instruments and other measurement approaches, sample size, consent form, budget and timetable. The aim of the unit is to introduce students to the processes and regulations involved in developing a therapeutic through to clinical trials. Students completing this unit should be able to construct a testable clinical research question and design a protocol that is ethical, well controlled and statistically powerful. Students should also be able to identify the roles of the sponsor, the investigator, the institutional review board/ independent ethics committee and the local regulators.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Design a clinically relevant question and set of experiments.
  2. Outline Good Clinical Practice as followed by the international Conference on Harmonisation.
  3. Identify and describe the key steps in conducting a Clinical Trial including different types of human research and protocols that can be implemented.
  4. Identify and describe the key steps in the drug discovery process including identification of drug targets, Australian regulatory requirements, manufacture, development of a safety profile, clinical development and marketing.
  5. Outline how to manage regulatory documents.
  6. Outline the role of the Sponsor, the investigator, the institutional review board/ independent ethics committee and the local regulators.

Assessment

Essay 1 (1,500 words) (20%)
Essay 2 (1,500 words) (20%)
4 x Online self-directed learning tasks (5% each) (20%)
Online test (20%)
Media release about research (500 words) (20%)

Workload requirements

On-campus: This unit will be delivered as an intensive 1 week program with a total of 24 hours of face-to-face teaching, including lecture and tutorial workshop time. The remaining 10 hours per week (Over 12 week period) is made up of private study time completing on-line exercises, modules and 2 assignments to be submitted at the end of semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Monash Medical Centre Second semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Steven Petratos

Synopsis

Translational research is a growing and exciting new discipline in medicine that deals with the development of fundamental scientific findings into tangible clinical outcomes. Translational researchers are involved in identifying a worthwhile scientific finding that can be applied to a clinical setting. Along this research and development pipeline are a series of critical check-points that provide the investigator vital tools to generate a valuable result that has merit for translation. This unit will establish a fundamental knowledge in the processes involved in developing a basic science finding through to clinical studies. The unit provides workshop-based learning in the development of discipline-specific laboratory research questions and how they are applied to broader clinical applications. The main focus of this unit is to identify how fundamental scientific questions may have multidisciplinary clinical answers. Other core learning outcomes are through understanding how scientific concepts can be marketed and communicated effectively through research pipeline procedures and the responsibilities of the researcher that may be derived from this.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Outline commercialisation procedures through Licensing, Intellectual Property and patents
  2. Define the rules of engagement in contract research projects with companies, organisations or government agencies
  3. Describe the current trends in protein production for pharmaceutical research and clinical applications
  4. Outline the engineering principle for scale-up, production and purification (upstream and downstream) steps and list the preferred industrial practices including monitoring of processes, product purity and quality
  5. Recall the utility and accessibility of key technologies that may be incorporated into a Translational Research Project
  6. Define the principles of mouse colony management and genetic modification
  7. Outline the current legal and regulatory basis of biobanking, its importance in translational research, how to access banked material and how to manage the data generated.
  8. Recognizing how to talk about your research to the media.

Assessment

Essay 1: intellectual property & commercialisation (1,500 words) (25%)
Essay 2: bioprocessing/bioinformatics/biobanking/bioimaging/phenomics (1,500 words) (25%)
Media release - executive summary (500 words) (10%)
Online self-directed learning tasks (6 x 5% = 30%)
Online test (1 hour) (10%)

Workload requirements

On-campus: This unit will be delivered as an intensive 1 week program with a total of 24 hours of face-to-face teaching, including lecture and tutorial workshop time. The remaining 10 hours per week (Over 12 week period) is made up of private study time completing on-line exercises, modules and 1 major assignment to be submitted at the end of semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students need to have completed and passed a minimum of 96 credit points in an undergraduate Science Discipline programme prior to enrolling in this unit.